Estación Manual A Prueba de Explosión B-9

Company Profile
For
Fire Protection Systems

Fire Alarm Systems
Submitted by:
FIREFREEZE Fire Protection & Safety Solutions
P.O. Box 14148, Dammam 31424
Tel. 03-846 2047 / 2079, Fax. 03-846 5254
E-Mail : fire@firefreeze.com.sa
Website : www.firefreeze.com.sa
Status
Status ::
Date
::
Date
For
For Records
Approval
Oct.
2012
May 2010
Company Profile for Fire

Protection & Safety System
Table of Contents
1. Covering Letter
2. List of Projects
3. Commercial Registration
4. List of Vendor Approval
5. List of Manufacturer / Supplier
6. Organization Chart
7. Certificates
8. Data Sheets & Bochures
1. Covering Letter
FIREFREEZE
Fire Protection System Solutions
Subject : Company Profile for Fire Protection & Safety System
We at "FIREFREEZE" are involved in installation and maintenance of all type
of fire alarm systems and fire protection systems. We have full expertise on
engineering ,design, supply, installation and testing commissioning of fire
protection systems on turnkey basis. We represent all major manufacturer
and suppliers of industries having UL listed and FM approved products.
We are approved and registered vendor and contractor for Saudi Aramco,
Sabic Groups, Saudi Electric Company (SEC), Saudi Telecom company
(STC), Ministry of Health (MOH), Ministry of Interior ( MOI), Saline Water
Conversion Corporation (SWCC) , EPCC and local civil defence authorities.
Our professional Engineers are in this field since last fourteen years. We have
designed and executed various type of fire protection system right from base
design to commissioning. The numerous projects executed by our team in
Government, Semi-Government, Power Plants, Sub Stations, Commercial
and Residential Buildings throughout Kingdom Of Saudi Arabia. We can
provide our full details profile which contains total list of projects executed by
our team.
We are specialized in designing, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning of various fire protection and fire alarm systems like
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
and
Clean Agent (FM-200) Fire Protection System

NOVEC 1230 Clean Agent Fire Protection System
CO2 Fire Protection System
Water Sprinkler System
Deluge Water Spray System
Foam Spray System
Dry Chemical System
Fire Hose Reel Cabinet / Fire Hydrant System
Fire Fighting pump system / Pressure Tank System
Conventional Fire Alarm System / Addressable Fire Alarm System
Room Integrity Test
Gas Monitoring Systems
General Mechanical / Electrical works.
Concentration measurement, leak detection test
Refilling of FM-200 gas, NOVEC 1230 gas, dry chemical, wet chemical,
co2 gas.
SPARE PARTS FOR PUMPS / ALL TYPE VALVES / SPARE FOR

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
We represent M/s Kidde Fire System USA, M/s Viking USA, M/s Chemguard
USA, M/s Sierra Monitors USA, M/s Amerex USA, M/s Potter Roemer USA,
M/s Potter Electric USA, M/s Kennedy USA, M/s Hochiki USA, M/s Mircom
USA.
Our team is also capable of taking maintenance of fire protection system and
fire alarm system. We can offer the services of our Engineers and technician
for emergency requirements. Further we can also take annual and half yearly
maintenance contracts to ensure smooth functioning of various fire fighting
system and fire alarm system throughout the year.
We are member of National Fire Protection Association, USA which gives us
access to be in touch with latest standards, technologies, and new rules and
regulation.
Briefly we have presented our capabilities and we would like to work with you
on your on going and next upcoming projects. We provide our best &
professional services on small work as well as on big works in Any region of
Saudi arabia.
Please give us a call to work with you on your projects to provide best
professional services on very competetive pricing.
Sincerely Yours,
FIREFREEZE
Sameer Masood
Technical Department
Our Address is As Follows:

FIREFREEZE
P. O. Box - 14148
Dammam 31424
Saudi Arabia
Tel : 03 846 2047/ 846 2079
Fax : 03 846 5254
Mobile : 050-3888 918
E mail : khaldi@khaldifire.com
E mail: fire@firefreeze.com.sa
www.firefreeze.com.sa
2. List of Projects
LIST OF PROJECTS
Completed By M/s FIREFREEZE Formerly Khaldi World
Communication & Protection is as follows :
Sr.
No.
1
Project
Addressable Fire Alarm
System in Water
Desalination Plant
Door Holders in Trenches

for Fire Protection System
FM-200 fire Protection

System & Addressable Fire
Alarm System in Ibn Zahr
Sub Station
FTH Computer Room
Emergency Warning Siren

System
Client
Description Of Project
Work
SWCC Al
Installation , Testing ,
Khobar
Commissioning
of
Addressable fire Alarm
panel
along
with
detectors, bells etc.
SWCC Al
Installation of Automatic
Khobar
magnetic door holders in
cable trenches for fire
protection system.
Installation , Testing ,
Saudi
Commissioning of FMEuropean
Petrochemical 200 Fire Protection
Co. (Ibn Zahr ) System and Addressable
Fire Alarm System along
Main
Contractor : with all equipment .
ABB
SWCC Jubail Re-installation of Halon
Control Panel & BGT
boxes in FTH Computer
Room at Saline Water
Conversion CorporationJubail Plant
SWCC Al
Supply,
Engineering,
Khobar
Installation, Testing and
Commissioning of New
Emergency
Warning
System in Turbine Halls
of SWCC Plant and
Integration of same with
Fire Alarm System
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
6
Project
Refixing Of Fire Alarm
System
FM-200 Fire Protection

System
Fire Alarm System / Fire

Fighting System
10
Hazardous Chemical
Warehouse
11
Deluge Foam Spray System

Helipad
Client
Work
SWCC-Jubail Refixing of conduits and
Renewal of Existing
System.
SHOW TIME Supply,
Engineering,
Installation, Testing &
Commissioning of FM200
fire
protection
system at their facility in
Al Khobar
National Gases Installation , Testing and
Company
Commissioning of Water
Sprinkler System in
Administration Building
of
National
Gases
Company
Fire Fighting Installation of fire Alarm
Main
and
fire
protection
Contractor
system
on
various
projects for other main
contractors.
SWCC Al
Installation of fire Alarm
Khobar
and
Gas
Detection
system in Hazardous
Chemical Warehouse.
Al Mansouryah Installation of Deluge
Est.
Foam Spray System on
Helipad in King Fahd
Specialist Hospital.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
12
Project
Client
Fire Alarm System & Gas

Detection System
SWCC
Al Khobar
13
Fire Alarm System
ARAMCO /
AFI
14
Fire Alarm System
AFI
15
Gas Detection System
Petrokemya /
Binzagr
16
Gas Detection System
Petrokemya /
Binzagr
17
Fire Alarm System & Fire

Protection Systems
Hi-Tech
Systems Dammam
Work
Installation of fire Alarm
and
Gas
Detection
system in New Hydrogen
Plant.
Supply , Testing &
Commissioning of fire
Alarm
System
in
Bachelors
Building
Tanajib.
Supply , Testing &
Alarm System in Rubber
Factory Dammam.
Supply , Testing &
Commissioning of Gas
Detection System in
Olefins-I of Petrokemya.
Supply , Testing &
Commissioning of Gas
Detection System in PVC
of Petrokemya.
Supply , Installation,
Testing& Commissioning
of Fire Alarm System
and
fire
protection
system in Hi-tech factory
Dammam
2nd Industrial Estate.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Completed By M/s FIREFREEZE is as follows :
Sr.
No.
18
Project
Fire Protection System
19
Fire Alarm System
20
Fire Alarm System- Govt

Hospital Hafr Al Batin
21

Press , Dammam , KSA
22
Fire Extinguishing System
23

Transformers , Bisha
Shudaig Power Plant
Client
Work
Fowzan
Supply,
Engineering
Riyadh
,Installation, Testing of
fire Protection system at
GSM Warehouse.
ARAMCO
Supply of Fire Alarm
Systems Spares, Fire
Fighting Systems Spares
on Various ARAMCO
requirements.
Installation,
Govt Hospital Supply,
testing, commissioning of
/ Main
of Fire Alarm Systems at
contractor
Nasir Khaliwy Govt hospital in Hafr Al
Batin.
ALUPCO
Supply,
Installation,
of CO2 Fire Protection
system on Underneath of
Press at Aluminium
Product
Company
Limited.
Naval Base - Testing Commissioning
Jubail
& Trouble Shooting of
Halon
1301
Fire
Extinguishing at three
sub stations. Supply of
Water sprinklers for
different locations.
ABB
Supply,
Installation,
of Water Deluge Spary
System at Shudaig Power
Plant.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
24
25
26
27
28
Project
Client
Fire Alarm SystemFire Protection System

Saudi Electric Company
Western Region
( Four Locations )
SEC / Segia
Fire Fighting Pump Set UL

listed in Hospital Project
Govt Hospital
/ Main
contractor
Nasir Khaliwy
Work
Supply,
Installation,
of Fire Alarm Systems at
Administration buildings
& in polyclnic.
Supply,
Installation,
of
Fire
Protection
System at Administration
buildings & in polyclnic
Supply,
Installation,
of Fire Fighting Pump
Set at Govt hospital in
Hafr Al Batin.
Installation,
Civil Affairs , Supply,
System in Civil Affairs
M.O.I. / Main testing, commissioning of
of
FM-200
Fire
contractor
building Al Hasa
Protection System at
SRACO
Civil Affairs Building Al
Hasa M.O.I.
Deluge Foam Spray System Al Mansouryah Installation of Deluge
Helipad
Est.
Foam Spray System on
Helipad in Al Rass
General Hospital at Al
Rass.
ALUPCO
Supply,
Installation,
Press , Dammam , KSA
of CO2 Fire Protection
system on Press -4 at all
sensitive location of
Press
at
Alupco
Dammam.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
29
Project
Client
Water Sprinkler System,

Fire Hose Cabinets, Fire
Extinguisher
UDI Factory /
Project Build
30
Conduiting work for Royal

Commission facility
Royal
Commission
Jubail / Delta
31
Fire Hose Cabinets & Fire

Fighting Pump Set at
Fatima Bin Abu Bakr Siddik
School
F.B.A.B.S /
Sffeco
32

System & Addressable Fire
Alarm System
KFUPM
Dahran
33
Fire Alarm System

Academic Building # 2
KFUPM
Dahran
33
Fire Alarm System

KFUPM
Dahran
Work
Supply,
Installation,
of
Water
Sprinkler
System,
Fire
Hose
Cabinets,
Fire
Extinguisher at UDI
factory at industrical city
II.
Installation of RGS
conduiting work at Royal
commission Jubail &
Cable Pulling.
Installation,
testing,
commissioning of
of
Fire Hose Cabinets, Fire
Fighting Pump Set at
F.B.A.B.S. School At H.
Al Doha
Installation,
testing,
commissioning
of
System & Addressable
Fire Alarm System at
Telephone
Exchange
Building.
Installation,
testing,
commissioning
of
Installation,
testing,
commissioning
of
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
34
Project
Fire Alarm System
Camp # 9, # 10, # 11
35
Fire Alarm System & Siren

System
36

System Class Room
Project
37
Fire Alarm System Black

Start Diesel Generator ,
Bisha
Shudaig Power Plant
38

System Server Room
Client
Work
Supply, engineering ,
Royal
testing,
Commission/ Installation,
commissioningof
Zamil
Operation & Fire Alarm System at All
Maintenance Camps.
(Awarded to us, to be
started in May 2005 )
SWCC Al
Supply, engineering ,
Khobar
Installation,
testing,
commissioningof
Fire Alarm System at All
MMD
office
&
Inaugration Building.
Al Ohadeih / Installation,
testing,
KFUPM
commissioning
of
System at Electrical
Rooms of Class Room
Project.
Al Sharief
Supply,
Installation,
of Fire Alarm System at
Black
Start
Diesel
Generator at Shudaig
Power Plant.
United Arab Installation,
testing,
CAN
commissioning
of
Manufacturing FM-200 Fire Protection
Co.
System at Server Room.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
39
Project
Client

LPG Tanks , NABISCO
Dammam Saudi Arabia
NABISCO
40

Al Jouf Power Plant
KANOO
41
Zamil Steel Dammam KSA
Zamil Steel
42

Chemical Warehouse
SWCC-Al
Khobar
43
Utility Control Room

Saudi Aramco Abqaiq
Saudi Aramco
Work
Supply,
Installation,
of Water Deluge Spary
System at LPG Tank ,
NABISCO.
Supply,
Installation,
of Deluge Foam Water
Spary System at Fuel
Treatment Room and
FM-200
System
in
Control Room at Al Jouf
Power Plant.
Supply, Installation of
Fire Alarm System for
Monitoring All Fire
Alarm Panel in Guard
House and New System
in Paint Storage Area.
Design
,
Supply,
Installation of Water
Sprinkler System at
Chemical Warehouse in
SWCC Al Khobar
Design
,
Supply,
Installation of FM-200
at Control Building in
UCR - Abqaiq
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
44
45
46
Project
Client
Fire Alarm Building # 23

KFUPM Dahran
KFUPM
Modification of Fire Alarm

System And fire Protection
system Building # 1770 /
8730 , Saudi Aramco
Dahran
Show Room & Offices
JAMJOOM
Al Nassar
JAMJOOM
47
North Control Room

Saudi Aramco Abqaiq
Saudi Aramco
48
South Control Room

Saudi Aramco Abqaiq
Saudi Aramco
Work
Design,
Supply,
Installation
of
Fire
Alarm
System
in
KFUPM Dahran.
Supply
&
Testing
Alarm
and
Fire
Protection System in
Saudi Aramco Dahran
Design
,
Supply,
Sprinkler System & Fire
Protection System at
Showroom & Offices for
JAMJOOM Al Khobar
Design
,
Supply,
UCR Abqaiq
Design
,
Supply,
UCR Abqaiq
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
49
Project
Sub Station , Pump Stn # 6
50
Wet Chemical Kitchen Fire

Protection System
51
Wet Chemical Kitchen Fire

Protection System
52
Server Room
53
Server Room
Client
Work
Saudi Aramco / Design
,
Supply,
Nesma
at Pump Stn # 6.
Saudi Aramco Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of Wet
Chemical
Fire
Saudi Aramco Dahran5 areas
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Chemical
Fire
Saudi Aramco Abqaiq
2 areas
EniRepSa Gas Design
,
Supply,
Ltd / MTTS
at Server Room
Zamil
Design
,
Supply,
operations & Installation of FM-200
Maintenance Fire Protection System
at Server Room
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
54
Project
Hazardous Chemical
Warehouse
55
Eastern Water Tower Al

Khobar
56
Al Hugayat Tower Al
Khobar
57
Saudi Aramco Khafji
58
KFUPM Bldg # 14
59
Warehouse Tabuk
Client
Work
SWCC Al
Design
,
Supply,
Khobar
Sprinkler System , Hose
Cabinets , & Hydrant
System for Chemical
Warehouse.
Saudi
Supply,
Engineering,
Technical
Installation,
Testing
Sprinkler System , FM200 System, CO2 System
in Water Tower
( on going )
ATCO
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Sprinkler System Tower
( on going )
Angus Fire UK Supply,
Engineering,
System
KFUPM
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of FM200 System for Bldg #
14.
( on going )
Tabuk Pharm. Deluge Foam Spray
Company
System in warehose
complete with design,
supply and installation.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
60
Project
Shifting of 5000 GPM fire
fighting pump set.
Client
SWCC Al
Khobar
61
Communication Room Sea

Island
Saudi Aramco
62
Generator Room & Boiler

Room
Movenpick
Hotel / Saudi
Pan Gulf
63
Faras Power Plant
SEC / Al
Toukhi
64
ABHA East Sub Stn
SEC / ABB
Work
Complete shifting of fire
fighting pump set at
SWCC Al khobar.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of CO2
System
in
Communication Room
on Sea Island
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of Dry
Chemical System in
Generator Room &
Boiler
Room
in
MovenPick Hotel.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning
of
Complete Fire Alarm ,
Fire Protection & Gas
Detection System for
Extension
of
Faras
Power Plant ( Recently
awarded )
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning
of
Complete Fire Alarm
System for ABHA East
Sub Station.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
65
Project
Crystal Plant Yanbu , sub
Station
66
Ministry Of Petroleum
Server Room
67
CATV & RADIO Room R.C.

Jubail
68
Amal field Libya
69
Saudi Aramco Hawtah
Client
Work
ABB
Design,
supply
,
Engineering of Deluge
spray
system
and
complete fire alarm
system.
InfoSys Global Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of FM200 System in Server
Room.
Seder Telcom Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of FM200 Fire Protection
System in CATV and
Radio Room.
ABB
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
System in Prtable Sub
Stations.
Al Nassar
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning
of
Complete Fire Alarm
System , Water sprinkler
system,
fire
extinguishers,
wet
chemical system.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
70
Project
Client
Work
Supply of equipments for
water sprinkler system
and fire extinguishers.
Saudi Kayan Jubail
KAMCO
71
Video Library Saudi

Aramco Dhahran
Saudi Aramco
72
Muhayel Sub Stn
Siemens
73
Namerah Sub Stn
Siemens
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire protection system
74
Majardah Sub Stn
Siemens
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
75
Server Room
Arab Medical Supply
Al hussaini
76
Fire Alarm System

Saudi Aramco Rabigh
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system
Supply,Testing
&
Commissioning of Fire
Alarm system
Isam Kabbani
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of FM200 System in Video
Library.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
77
Project
Guard Dryer United
78
Server Room
Enirepsa 135 / 136
79
Server Room
South Ruba Khali co.
80
Control Room
Abqaiq
81
Piping Work
SWCC
82
Wet chemical system

Saudi Aramco
83
Wet chemical system

Saudi Aramco
Client
Work
SABIC
Design and Supply &
HK SadiqSons Installation of Deluge
System for Guard Dryer .
EniRepSa
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
systemTwo
server
Rooms
South Ruba
Supply,
Engineering,
Khali
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
systemOne
server
Rooms
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning
of
Reserve FM-200 fire
protection system
SWCC
Installation of piping
work in SWCC Al
Khobar
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Chemical
Fire
Saudi Aramco Abqaiq
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Chemical
Fire
Saudi Aramco Riyadh
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
84
Project
Fire Alarm System
85
Heat Detector Replacement
86
87
PQA LAB sharq
88
Control Room - SABIC
89
Weapon Test Facility
Client
ABB
Petrokemya
NABISCO
Sharq
Isam Kabbani
MAC
Work
Supply
and
testing
commissioning of fire
alarm system for ABB
Tihama Project.
Replacement
of
all
exisitng heat detector by
new technology DetectA-Fire heat detectors.
Complete design and
installation of water
sprinkler
system
in
finished good warehouse
and
raw
material
warehouse.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning
of
NOVEC
1230
fire
protection system
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
90
Project
Data Centre & Security
Room Weather Ford
Facility
Client
ARCON
91
Industrial Training Saudi

Aramco
Wet chemical system
OSAIS
92
SEC Sub stations 6 nos.
Siemens
93
SHARQ SABIC
Detection for NOVEC-1230
SHARQ
94
Dry chemical system

Olaya Tower
SFFECO
95
Saudi Aramco Shedgum

Plant
NOVEC-1230
Saudi Aramco
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system for two rooms
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of wet
chemical system for
kitchen.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of co2
and fire extinguishers on
SEC sub stations
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
extinguishing panel and
devices addressable to
control 3 NOVEC 1230
systems.
Supply,
Engineering,
Testing Commissioning
of Dry chemical fire
protection system.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of Novec
1230 fire extinguishing
system in raised floor of
control room.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
96
Project
Client
WeatherFord Facility
Wet chemical system
ARCON
97
Nesma Camp
Jubail Refinery
Wet chemical system
Nesma
98
Die Sub Station

Fire Alarm System
Saudik
99
Tihama Sub Station

co2 fire protection system
ABB
100
Petrokemya
heat detector replacement
Petrokemya
101
Sharq
Deluge Fog System
Sharq
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
chemical system for
kitchen.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
chemical system for
kitchen.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
alarm
system
for
complete sub station.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of co2
fire protection system in
two portable sub stn.
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of new
heat detector in place of
existing smoke detectors
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of water
fog system , fire alarm
and
complete
fire
protection on unloading
bays.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
102
Project
Nesma Camp2
Jubail Refinery
Wet chemical system
Client
Nesma
103
Al Rashed TowerRiyadh
FM-200 system
Al Rashed
104
Fire Alarm System P1

Saudi Aramco - Tanajib
Saudi Aramco
105
Fire Alarm System P2

Saudi Aramco - Tanajib
Saudi Aramco
106
Fire Alarm System

Saudi Aramco - Uthmaniya
Saudi Aramco
107
Saudi Aramco Bakery

Udhailiya
Wet chemical system
Rezayat
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
chemical system for
kitchen.project 2
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Commissioning of FM200 fire extinguishing
system in 3 nos. server
rooms. On going
Supply, installation and
testing commissioning of
fire alarm system for
control room Tanajib
Project 1 on going
control room Tanajib
Project 2 on going
control
room
Uthmaniya on going
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
chemical system for
kitchen.project 2
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
108
Project
Client
FM-200 System
Package # 1
Jubail Export Refinery
Project
Tecnicas
Reunidas
109
FM-200 System
Package # 4
Project
Nesma
110
FM-200 System
Package # 2A
Project
SFFECO
111
Weatherford Base Facility

System
ARCON
112
Weatherford Base Facility

Wet Chemical Fire
Suppression System
ARCON
113
Tecnimount Arabia Co. Ltd.

System
114
Aramco Riyadh Bldg. 370

Wet Chemical Fire
Suppression System
Tecnimount
Arabia.
Saudi Aramco
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system. On going
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system. On going
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system. On going
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Chemical
fire
suppression system
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
fire
protection
system
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Chemical
fire
suppression system
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
115
Project
Client
Fire Alarm System

Ras-Tanura, Saudi Aramco
Saudi Aramco
116

System
King Abdullah Financial
District Riyadh
ETA Star
117

System
Project Package 5C
MR AlKhathlan
118

System
P-3 Technology Center
Baker Huges
ARCON
119
Wet Chemical Fire

Protection System
Project Package 2A
120

System
King Abdullah Financial
Disctric, Riyadh
Sterling &
Wilson
121
Fire Alarm & Detection

System,
MARAFIQ, JUBAIL
MARAFIQ
Ali Bin
Ghashash Al
Omairi
Trading
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
Installation,
Testing
Alarm System. On going
Supply,
Enigneering,
Testing
&
Commissioning
of
FM200 Fire Protection
System
Supply,
Engineering,
System
Supply,
Engineering,
System
Supply,
Engineering,
Testing
&
Chemical
Fire
Protection System
Supply,
Engineering
Testing
&
System
Supply,
Engineering,
Alarm
&
Detection
System
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
122
123
124
125
Project
Fire Protection System,
Construction of Safaniyah
380/230 kV BSP
Client
Siemens
Installation of Flame
Detectors,
Saudi Aramco Riyadh
Refinery, Riyadh
Fire Fighting System,
MARAFIQ, Yanbu
Saudi Aramco
Fire Alarm System,
Gulf Connect
Hanbu
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
System, Fire Alarm
System & Fire Hydrants.
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of Flame
Detectors.
Supply,
Engineering,
Testing
&
Fighting System
Supply,
Engineering,
Alarm System
LIST OF PROJECTS
Completed By Engineers who are now part of M/s
FIREFREEZE is as follows :
Sr.
No.
1
Project
Holiday Inn Hotel-Mukalla
(Yemen)
SABIC R & D Lab-2 ,

Riyadh
National Gases Company Jubail
Power Plant 9 , Riyadh
Faysaliyah Sub Station Jeddah
Client
Work
Holiday Inn / Supply,
Engineering,
Main
Contractor
SBD-Public
sprinkler system and
Building
hose cabinet system for
complete hotel.
SABIC / Main Supply,
Engineering,
Contractor M/s Installation, Testing &
S. A. Kent
sprinkler system and
hose cabinet system for
complete lab building.
GAS-Jubail
Supply,
Engineering,
Main
Contractor
AZMEEL
sprinkler system for their
building.
SEC-Riyadh / Supply, Engineering ,
Main
Testing& Commissioning
Contractor
of
FM-200
fire
SBG-IPP
protection system in
electrical rooms, control
rooms, switchgear rooms
and various other places.
Total of 220 separate
FM-200
system
in
complete plant.
SEC-Jeddah / Supply,
Engineering
Main
,Installation, Testing &
Commissioning of
Contractor
FM-200 fire protection
HITACHI
system in Complete S/S.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
6
Project
Client
Engine Test Bench Building

Military Base
MODA/
Main
Contractor
SBG-IPP
Prince Abdullah Palace
Royal Family /
Main
Contractor
SBG-IPP
Makkah Hotel
Royal Family /
Main
Contractor
SBG-IPP
Thowal Palace
Royal Family /
Main
Contractor
SBG-IPP
10
Prince Salmanl Palace
Royal Family /
Main
Contractor
SBG-IPP
11
Hilton Hotel - Madinah
Hilton Group /
Haif Trading
& Contracting
Work
Supply,
Engineering,
fire Protection system
( Local Application ).
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
system in Specific Area.
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
12
Project
Client
Rabigh Power Plant
SEC-Jeddah /
SAMGE
13
Al Baya Sub Station
SEC-Madinah
/ Al Toukhi
14
Ibn Zahr Sub Station
SEC-Jubail /
ABB
15
Huraymela Sub Station
SEC-Riyadh /
ABB
16
Wadi Ad Dawasir- Sub

Station
SEC-Riyadh /
ABB
Work
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Water deluge system
with pressure tank for
transformers.
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning
of
Deluge Water Spray
System with fire fighting
pump set for transformer
fire protection system.
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning
of
Deluge Water Spray
System with pressure
tank transformer FPS.
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
17
Project
Telephone Exchange
Jeddah
18
King Fahd Satellite City

Jeddah
19
Wadi Jaleel Sub Station
20
Khamis Mushayat Project

Military Base
21
Al Tameer Centre Riyadh
Client
Work
STC-Jeddah Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
STC Jeddah Supply,
Engineering
/ SBG-IPP
Commissioning of
SEC-Makkah / Supply,
Engineering
AlFanar
Commissioning of
Deluge Water Spray
System and Pressure
Tank
System
for
transformer
fire
protection.
MODA /
Supply,
Engineering
M/s Nesma
Emcor
Commissioning of Foam
fire protection system in
Specific Area.
Al Tameer
Supply,
Engineering
Group / M/s ,Installation, Testing &
Madarion
Commissioning of
LIST OF PROJECTS
Sr.
No.
22
Project
Client
Peace Sun IX Project

Khamis Mushayat
MODA / M/s
El Seif
23
Al Hamra Sub Station

Jeddah
SEC Jeddah
/ SSEM
24
Madinah Sub Station
SEC-Madinah
/ MEEPPCO
25
So many Small
Projects
Different
Contractors
Work
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Deluge Water Spray
System with pressure
tank for transformer
protection.
Supply,
Engineering
Commissioning of
Fire Alarm System
General Supply for fire
fighting Equipments.
3. Commercial Registration
4. List of Vendor Approval
5. List of Supplier/Manufacturer
6. Organizational Chart
Habib Ur Rehmand
Mechanical Foreman
Muhammad Nasib
Project Engineer
Naeem-Ud-Din
Project Engineer
Naseem Akhtar
Project Engineer
Rafi Ahammad
Design Engineer
Kamran Younas
Design Engineer
Muhammad Umair
Fire Alarm Technician
Yesh Pal
Fabricator
Affan Yaseen
Estimation Engineer
Siraj Mohammad
Fire Alarm Engineer
Muhammad Ilyas
Project Engineer
Azzam Bin Mohd.
Site Supervisor
Mudassar Mustafa
Fire Alarm Engineer
Ragib Kumar
Fabricator
Younas Masih
Pipe Fitter
Muhammad Asif
Fire Fighting Tech.
Shahid Ul Islam
Mechanical Foreman
Naeem Ahmed
Fire Alarm Supervisor
Kamran Aslam
Mechanical Foreman
Purchaser
Muhammad Azam
Ahmed Zubair
Joel Flores
Project Engineer
Shafi Ahmed
Fabricator
Muhammad Ashfaq
Fire Alarm Tecnician
Azhhar Hussain
Pipe Fitter
Pipe Fitter
Electrician
Dipak Danuwar
Fabricator
Prem Prasad
Muhammad Usman
Fabricator
Fire Fighting Technician
Zakir Hussain
Welder
Naeemullah Khan
Rodrigo Breds
Asrar Shahid Mulla
Accountant
Abbas Sharief
Accountant
Fawzi Massoud
Accounts Manager
Abdullah Bin Mutlaq
Ahtesham
Pipe Fitter
Tara Kumar
Pipe Fitter
Hemlal Limbu
Adnan Rafiq
Welder
M. Javaid Rasul
Abdul Rauf
Purchaser
Farhan Shahzad
Sales Representative
Maqbool Ahmed
Sales & Purchasing Manager
Nazrul Islam
Fire Alarm Foreman
Waheed Ahmed
Mechanical Supervisor
Khalid Bin Mohd.
Sales Representative
Fahid Bin Azzam
Project Engineer
Project Coordinator
M. Sameer Shaikh
Muhammad Irfan
Asrar Ahmed Riyaz
Admin./Logistic Support
Nasir Bin M. Jahran
Fire Protect. & Est. Engineer
M. Parvez Nagra
Contract & Oper. Manager
Sameer Masood
Contract & Tech. Manager
Mutlaq Azzam Al-Khaldi

General Manager
FIREFREEZE Organization
7. Certificates
8. Data Sheets & Brochures
Table Of Contents
FM-200 Fire Protection System (ADS System)
FM-200 Fire Protection System (ECS System)
NOVEC-1230 Fire Protection System
Wet Chemical Fire Protection System
Dry Chemical Fire Protection System
Addressable Fire Alarm/Detection System
Conventional Fire Alarm/Detection System
Water Sprinkler Fire Protection System
Deluge Water Spray Fire Protection System
Deluge Foam/Water Spray Fire Protection
System
Fire Fighting Equipment
Brochures

System (ADS System)
FM-200
A UTC Fire & Security Company
Fire Suppression Agent
Effective: April 2007

K-90-1900
FEATURES
Non-Ozone Depleting
Safe for Total Flooding of Occupied Spaces
Clean No Residue to Clean Up
Non-Damaging to Hazard Contents
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
FM-200 (1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane) is a compound of carbon, fluorine and hydrogen (CF3CHFCF3). It
is colorless, odorless and electrically non-conductive. It
suppresses fire by a combination of chemical and physical mechanisms without affecting the available oxygen.
This allows personnel to see and breathe, permitting
them to leave the fire area safely. FM-200 has acceptable
toxicity for use in occupied spaces when used as specified in the United States Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP)
program rules. Although FM-200 is considered non-toxic
to humans in concentrations necessary to extinguish
most fires, certain safety considerations should be
observed when applying and handling the agent. The discharge of FM-200 may create a hazard to personnel from
the undecomposed agent itself and from the decomposition products which result when the agent is exposed to
fire and other hot surfaces. Exposure to the agent is generally of less concern than is exposure to the decomposition products. Unnecessary exposure to the agent or the
decomposition products should be avoided.
Fast Acting
Active Fire Suppression Agent
UL Component Recognized
FM Approved
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual

Research Corporation (FMRC).
USE
FM-200 is used in total flooding fire suppression systems.
It is stored in steel containers, and is super-pressurized
with nitrogen to aid in expelling the agent. The discharge
time is 10 seconds or less. The maximum fill density of
the agent storage is 70 lb./ft. .
3
Table 1. FM-200 Physical Properties

Chemical Formula
170.03
Freezing Point
-204F (-131C)
Boiling Point at 1 Atm.
2.6F (-16.4C)
Critical Temperature
215.1F (101.7C)
38.76 lb./ft.3 (621 kg/m3)
Critical Density
Critical Pressure
422 PSIA (29.0 bar absolute)
Critical Volume
0.0258 cu.ft./lb. (1.61 L/kg)
Ozone Depletion Potential
TOXICITY
In tests, the acute toxicity of FM-200 was shown to be
equivalent to that of Halon 1301. FM-200 has been evaluated for cardiac sensitization through test protocols
approved by the US EPA. The EPAs SNAP Program
classifies FM-200 as acceptable for use as a total flooding agent in occupied spaces. Refer to the SNAP program rules for more information.
CF3CHFCF3
Molecular Weight
Table 2. FM-200 Fire Protection Properties

Cup Burner Concentration (n-Heptane)
6.70% v/v
Use Concentration for n-Heptane
8.00% v/v
Use Concentration for Acetone
8.30% v/v
Use Concentration for Isopropanol
9.00% v/v
Use Concentration for Toluene
7.00% v/v
CLEANLINESS
Use Concentration for Class A (Surface Fires)*
6.25% v/v
FM-200 is clean, leaves no residue, thereby eliminating

costly after-fire clean-up, and keeping expensive downtime to a minimum. Most materials such as steel, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and other metals as well as
plastics,rubber and electronic components are unaffected
by exposure to FM-200.
*Note: Automatic only per NFPA 2001.
APPROVALS
FM-200 agent complies with the NFPA Standard 2001:
Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems,
EPA SNAP Program (Significant New Alternate Policy),
Table 3. FM-200 Toxicity Properties

NOAEL
(No Observable Adverse Effect Level)
LOAEL
(Lowest Observable Adverse Effect Level)
Rev AB
2007 Kidde-Fenwal Inc.
Printed in USA
10.50%
FM-200 is a registered trademark of the Great Lakes Chemical Corporation.
This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. assumes
no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application. The product must be
properly applied to work correctly.
If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or question,
contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000.
K-90-1900
9.00%
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
www.kiddefiresystems.com
Kidde ADS
1010-lb. Cylinder and Valve Assembly with
Nitrogen Driver Assemblies

K-90-111
P/N: 90-1010X-001
FEATURES
Designed for Drop-In Replacement for Halon

Retrofit Applications
Well Suited for Complicated Pipe Networks and
Large Area Coverage with Minimal Room for
Cylinder Storage
3-inch Valve Outlet
520 lb. to 1010 lb. Fill Capacity

Optional Liquid Level Indicator
UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
Kidde Fire Systems FM-200 ADS Series Engineered
Fire Suppression Systems are Listed by the Underwriters
Laboratory, Inc. (UL) and tested by Factory Mutual (FM).
These systems are designed for total flooding in accordance with NFPA 2001, Standard on Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems. These systems have been tested to
UL 2166, Standard for Safety; Standard for Halocarbon
Clean Agent Extinguishing System Units, and other
parameters established jointly by UL and FM.
The ADS uses a unique method for propelling the FM200 agent from the storage cylinder, through the piping
system and out of the discharge nozzles. Nitrogen gas
pressure from two separate storage cylinders is introduced into the vapor space of the FM-200 cylinder at a
controlled rate. This nitrogen pressure acts to propel the
liquid FM-200 agent through the pipe at a higher flow
rate. It can also propel the FM-200 agent farther through
the pipe network allowing for the placement of storage
cylinders remotely from the protected hazard.
The FM-200 ADS Series is extremely well-suited to applications involving remote agent storage and situations
which limit the maximum pipe size to be used. The ADS
is capable of using smaller pipe sizes to discharge large
quantities of FM-200.
This system can be successfully applied to many existing
Halon 1301 system pipe networks, providing easy retrofit
of these systems to a new agent with long-term availability.
OPERATION
When a control head actuates the two nitrogen cylinder
discharge valves, the nitrogen pressure actuates the
agent cylinder discharge valve and pressurizes the cylinder. FM-200 liquid agent is then propelled by its own
vapor pressure and the nitrogen pressure through the
discharge valve and into the system pipe network. The
FM-200 liquid agent travels through the system pipe network at a high flow rate.
OPERATING RANGE LIMITATIONS:

The operating temperature range for all components
used in the FM-200 ADS Series is 32F to 130F
(0C to 54C).
The agent cylinder operating temperature must be
between 60F to 80F (16C to 27C) when protecting two or more separate hazards.
20.0
SIDE VIEW
34.0
FRONT VIEW
4890
cu. in.
1010 lb.
1. ASSY - CYL. AND VALVE ADS ASSY

2. ASSY - CYL. AND VALVE NITROGEN DRIVER
3. HOSE - FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE
4. STRAP - FM 200 CYLINDER
5. ASSY - DISCHARGE HEAD
6. ASSY - ACTUATION
7. FITTING - ORIFICE
8. HOSE - HIGH PRESSURE
9. STRAP NITROGEN DRIVER CYLINDERS
C
2
1.0
Figure 1. Nitrogen and Agent Cylinders

Table 1. Nitrogen and Agent Cylinder Dimensions, Imperial
Cylinder
Part Number
90-10101X-001
70.00
58.60
44.60
22.00
24.00
22.62
11.25
64.00
69.22
71.25
11.25
Note: The "X" within the part numbers denotes whether a liquid level indicator is ordered with the cylinder. A one (1) is used if a LLI is
needed, a zero (0) is used if one is not.
Table 2. Nitrogen and Agent Cylinder Dimensions, Metric

Cylinder
Part Number
90-10101X-001
1778
1488
1133
559
610
575
286
1626
1758
1810
286
Note: The "X" within the part numbers denotes whether a liquid level indicator is ordered with the cylinder. A one (1) is used if a LLI is
needed, a zero (0) is used if one is not.
-2-
INSTALLATION
MAINTENANCE
The FM-200 ADS Series installation is based on the

requirements of NFPA 2001, Standard on Clean Agent
Extinguishing Systems, Current Edition.
According to NFPA standards, the following inspection

and/or maintenance procedure must be scheduled as
listed below and performed upon the occurrence of any
event, which might affect the reliability of the system.
ASSEMBLY:
Both the nitrogen drivers and agent storage cylinders are
to be installed in the vertical position only. The nitrogen
driver is located to the immediate right apart from the
agent cylinder (see Figure 1). The nitrogen driver cylinder
is connected to the agent cylinder by using the nitrogen
transfer components (two 1-in. nitrogen transfer hoses
[P/N 06-118207-003] and a 3/4-in. NPT transfer fitting,
see Figure 2). The 3/4-in. transfer fitting connects into the
orifice fitting. The orifice fitting is a custom fitting that is
designed to regulate the nitrogen pressure flow required
for the specific system. The orifice fitting then connects
into the nitrogen injector assembly to diffuse the nitrogen
in a horizontal pattern.
ACTUATION:
The control head is attached to the master nitrogen driver
by means of electric, cable, lever, or pneumatic devices.
The actuating of the second nitrogen driver and agent
cylinder is done upon transfer of nitrogen from the master
driver cylinder using the actuation assembly kit (P/N 06129985-001).
Assembly includes:
QUARTERLY:
1. Check the weight of each agent storage container
and the pressure of the nitrogen drivers.
Nitrogen driver if the pressure is less than 1800
PSI (124 bar) at 70F (21C)
Note:
The containers should be removed and carefully

inspected by certified personnel.
The containers should then be reconditioned,
recharged or replaced.
2. Check all components supporting hardware and
tighten, repair or replace as required.
3. Visually check all components for evidence of physical wear and tear and take whatever action is
required. Replace any component that looks like it
may be damaged or worn.
SEMI-ANNUAL:
The following checks/tests should be conducted by qualified personnel:
1.
Nitrogen Transfer Fitting

1/8-in. Flex Loop
1/8-in. Flare Fitting
1/8-in. Branch Tee
1/8-in. Schrader Fitting and Cap
Pressure Operated Control Head
3/4-in. Nipple (Hex)
Pressure changes with temperature.
Determine the weight of FM-200 in each agent cylinder by the procedure indicated in the Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance (DIOM) Manual
(P/N 90-FM200M-030).
Functional tests of required system devices (reference the DIOM manual).
All outlet piping must be cleaned and free of dirt,
chips and other foreign material that may become
hazardous projectiles or cause the system to
become inoperative or ineffective at the time of discharge.
2.
3.
Table 3. Nitrogen Transfer Components Descriptions

3
2
4
Figure 2. Nitrogen Transfer Components
-3-
Item
No.
Qty.
Part Number
Description
06-236260-001
Nitrogen Transfer "Y" Fitting
878737
06-118191-001
Fitting Flared 1/8" x 1/4"
06-118193-001
3/16" Flexible Actuation Hose
06-118192-001
1/8" Branch Tee
263303
1/8" Schrader Valve
263304
1/8" Schrader Valve Cap
06-118330-001
3/4" Nipple
SPECIFICATIONS
Element
Agent Storage Container

93-10101X-001
Nitrogen Driver
93-104890-001
Imperial
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Fill Range (w/o LLI)
520 to 1010 lb.
236 to 466 kg
Factory Filled to 1800 PSIG
Factory Filled to127 bar
Fill Range (w/ LLI)
520 to 1010 lb.
236 to 458 kg
Height
70.0 in.
178.0 cm
65.25 in.
165.70 cm
Diameter
24.0 in.
61.0 cm
10.50 in.
26.70 cm
Internal Volume
13.0 cu. ft.
0.37 cu. m
4880 cu. in.
0.0667 cu. m
Empty Weight
505.0 lb.
229.0 kg
184.0 lb.
83.5 kg
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
Temperature Range
RECONDITIONING
After a system has been discharged, it is recommended that the local authorized Kidde Distributor be
contacted to recondition the system. Please reference the DIOM manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030) for
the appropriate reconditioning kit.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
Description
90-10101X-001*
Agent Storage Cylinder
90-104890-001**
Nitrogen Driver
*Note: X denotes liquid level indicator. Use a 1 in place of the X to

order cylinder with LLI or a to order a cylinder without an LLI.
Example: 90-101010-001 (no LLI).
**Note: Two are required for each 1010 lb. agent cylinder.
This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

assumes no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application. The
product must be properly applied to work correctly.
If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or question, contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000.
K-90-111 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Nitrogen Driver Assemblies

K-90-112
P/N: 06-10067X-001
FEATURES

Cylinder Storage
3-inch Valve Outlet

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
pressure from two separate storage cylinders is introduced into the vapor space of the FM-200 cylinder at a
controlled rate. This nitrogen pressure acts to propel the
liquid FM-200 agent through the pipe at a higher flow
rate. It can also propel the FM-200 agent farther through
the pipe network allowing for the placement of storage
cylinders remotely from the protected hazard.
OPERATION
When a control head actuates the two nitrogen cylinder
discharge valves, the nitrogen pressure actuates the
agent cylinder discharge valve and pressurizes the cylinder. FM-200 liquid agent is then propelled by its own
vapor pressure and the nitrogen pressure through the
discharge valve and into the system pipe network. The
FM-200 liquid agent travels through the system pipe network at a high flow rate.

(0C to 54C).
20.0
SIDE VIEW
8
6
34.0
4070
cu. in.
675 lb.
FRONT VIEW
1. ASSY - CYL. AND VALVE ADS ASSY

2. ASSY - CYL. AND VALVE NITROGEN DRIVER
4. STRAP - FM 200 CYLINDER
6. ASSY - ACTUATION
9. STRAP NITROGEN DRIVER CYLINDERS
C
1.0

Table 1. Nitrogen and Agent Cylinder Dimensions, Imperial
Cylinder
Part Number
90-10067X-001
61.00
47.40
37.00
18.00
22.00
22.00
10.55
58.00
63.22
65.25
10.55
Note: The "X" within the part numbers denotes whether a liquid level indicator is ordered with the cylinder.
A one (1) is used if a LLI is needed, a five (5) is used if one is not.
Table 2. Nitrogen and Agent Cylinder Dimensions, Metric

Cylinder
Part Number
90-10067X-001
1549
1204
940
457
559
559
268
1473
1606
1657
268
Note: The "X" within the part numbers denotes whether a liquid level indicator is ordered with the cylinder.
A one (1) is used if a LLI is needed, a five (5) is used if one is not.
-2-
INSTALLATION
MAINTENANCE


ASSEMBLY:
Both the nitrogen drivers and agent storage cylinders are
transfer components (two 1-in. nitrogen transfer hoses
[P/N 06-118207-003] and a 3/4-in. NPT transfer fitting,
see Figure 2). The 3/4-in. transfer fitting connects into the
orifice fitting. The orifice fitting is a custom fitting that is
designed to regulate the nitrogen pressure flow required
for the specific system. The orifice fitting then connects
into the nitrogen injector assembly to diffuse the nitrogen
in a horizontal pattern.
ACTUATION:
The control head is attached to the master nitrogen driver
by means of electric, cable, lever, or pneumatic devices.
The actuating of the second nitrogen driver and agent
cylinder is done upon transfer of nitrogen from the master
driver cylinder using the actuation assembly kit (P/N 06129985-001).
Assembly includes:
QUARTERLY:
1. Check the weight of each agent storage container
and the pressure of the nitrogen drivers.
PSI (124 bar) at 70F (21C)
Note:

SEMI-ANNUAL:
1.

1/8-in. Flex Loop
1/8-in. Flare Fitting
1/8-in. Branch Tee
1/8-in. Schrader Fitting and Cap
3/4-in. Nipple (Hex)
(P/N 90-FM200M-030).
2.
3.
Table 3. Nitrogen Transfer Components Descriptions

3
2
4
-3-
Item
No.
Qty.
Part Number
Description
06-236260-001
878737
06-118191-001
06-118193-001
06-118192-001
1/8" Branch Tee
263303
1/8" Schrader Valve
263304
06-118330-001
3/4" Nipple
SPECIFICATIONS
Element

90-10067X-001
Nitrogen Driver
90-104070-001
Imperial
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Fill Range (w/o LLI)
347 to 675 lb.
158 to 306 kg
Factory Filled to 1800 PSIG
Factory Filled to127 bar
Fill Range (w/ LLI)
347 to 675 lb.
158 to 306 kg
Height
58.5 in.
149.0 cm
62.00 in.
157.0 cm
Diameter
22.0 in.
56.0 cm
10.50 in.
26.70 cm
Internal Volume
8.68 cu. ft.
0.25 cu. m
4070 cu. in.
0.0667 cu. m
Empty Weight
362.0 lb.
164.0 kg
184.0 lb.
83.5 kg
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
Temperature Range
RECONDITIONING
After a system has been discharged, it is recommended that the local authorized Kidde Distributor be
contacted to recondition the system. Please reference the DIOM manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030) for
the appropriate reconditioning kit.
Part Number
Description
90-10067X-001*
Agent Storage Cylinder
90-104070-001**
Nitrogen Driver
*Note: X denotes liquid level indicator. Use a 1 in place of the X to

order cylinder with LLI or a 5 to order a cylinder without an LLI.
Example: 90-100675-001 (no LLI).
**Note: Two are required for each 675 lb. agent cylinder.

K-90-112 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
3-Inch 487 Series

Discharge Valve

K-90-9046
P/N 90-170000-000
FEATURES
Large Capacity Agent Flow

Grooved Fitting Connection
FM Approved
UL Listed
DESCRIPTION
The 3-inch 487 series valve is designed to discharge
FM-200 clean agent. The 3-inch valve is installed on the 600
lb. and 900 lb. FM-200 cylinders, to facilitate high capacity
discharge flow from these cylinders. The pressure relief device for the 3-inch valve is located on the cylinder head.
OPERATION
The 3-inch 487 series valve can be operated by all existing
Kidde control heads, except the 48650001 electric control
head. The 48650001 control head does not have the capability of operating the 3-inch valve and must not be used on this
component.
Actuation of the control head displaces the valve piston and
agent (in the form of compressed liquid) is allowed to flow
through the discharge port of the valve.
INSTALLATION
The valve must be installed in the cylinder neck ring prior to
cylinder filling. Upon assembly of the valve and siphon tube
arrangement the valve should be torqued to 50-55 Ft-lb. (6874.5N-m).
RECHARGE/REPLACEMENT PARTS
The 3-inch valve can be purchased as a separate component to replace existing valves on new style 600 lb. cylinders
(sold after 8/01) and 900 lb. cylinders. The part number for
the valve is 90-170000-000. Refer to the parts table of this
sheet for replacement parts when overhauling the cylinder
valve.
The following components are required to be replaced after

the cylinder valve has discharged or if existing components
show signs of damage or wear and tear. Refer to the Design
Installation Operation and Maintenance manual for full instructions on valve overhaul and maintenance.
SPECIFICATION
Valve body:
Piston:
Finish:
Valve seat:
Nominal operating pressure:
Operating temperature range:
Weight:
Outlet:
Brass
Brass
Natural
Rubber
360 psig at 70F
(2.48 Mpa at 21C)
32 to 130F (0 to 54C)
46 lb. (21 kg)
3-inch groove fitting
Description
Part Number
O-ring, Cap
566102410
O-ring, Piston
566103370
O-ring, Seat
566103400
O-ring, Neck
566103470
Pilot Check Assembly
923066
Back-up Ring
554003400
DIMENSIONS
This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL,INC. assumes no responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to
work correctly.
If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or question, contact
KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000
K-90-9046
04/02
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Printed in USA
Kidde ADS
Grooved Nut Discharge Head and
Plain Nut Discharge Head

K-90-114
P/Ns: 872442 and 872450

FEATURES
Grooved Nut Discharge Head Can Only be Actuated

with a Control Head
Grooved Nut Discharge Head is for Use with Single
Nitrogen Driver Systems Only (225-lb. and
395-lb. Systems)
Plain Nut Discharge Head Can be Actuated by
Control Head or Back Pressure from Manifold
Plain Nut Discharge Head is Used with Multiple Nitrogen

Driver Systems (i.e., 675-lb. and 1010-lb. Systems)
UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
At installation, each nitrogen driver cylinder and valve
assembly must be equipped with a discharge head to
actuate the cylinder valve. The discharge head is assembled to the top of the nitrogen driver cylinder valve and
contains a spring-loaded piston which, when actuated by
nitrogen pressure, is designed to depress the main check
in the valve and transfer the contents of the nitrogen tank
into the agent cylinder. The transfer outlet is designed to
mate with the swivel adapter on the 1-in. flexible transfer
hose (P/N 06-118207-00X). The discharge head also
contains an integral stop check which, in the event that a
cylinder is removed from the Kidde ADS assembly, automatically prevents the loss of nitrogen during the system
transfer. The grooved-nut discharge head only allows the
cylinder to be actuated when a control head releases
pilot pressure. Pressure entering the outlet from the manifold will not actuate the cylinder. The plain nut discharge
head allows the nitrogen driver to be actuated by the control head (electric or pneumatic) or by back pressure discharge in the manifold. The plain nut discharge head is
convenient for applications using multiple drivers for one
agent cylinder.
Note:
For additional detail regarding ADS and FM-200

systems and nitrogen manifolding, refer to the
Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030).
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wipe off cylinder valve sealing surface.

Verify that the O-rings are installed in the mating
surface grooves at the bottom of the swivel nut cavity. O-rings must be free of dirt or other contaminants. The O-rings have been lightly greased at the
factory and should not require further greasing.
Make sure the pilot orifice located between the inner
and outer O-ring is unobstructed.
Make sure the discharge port is clean and unobstructed.
Install the discharge head on the cylinder valve.
Tighten securely.
WARNING
The agent storage cylinder must be

permanently connected to the system
piping. Never attach the discharge
head to the cylinder valves until the
cylinders are secured in brackets or
racking and the hose is attached to the
agent cylinder. Under no circumstances should the discharge head
remain attached to the cylinder valve
after removal from service or during
shipment, handling, storage or filling.
In the event of inadvertent discharge,
failure to follow these instructions
could result in death, serious bodily
injury and/or property damage.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect nitrogen driver discharge head for cracks, corrosion, grime, etc. Ensure that the discharge head is tightly
secured to the nitrogen cylinder valve and connected to
the agent cylinder with the 1-in. nitrogen transfer hose. If
any defects are found during the monthly inspection,
immediately contact a Kidde Distributor to service the
systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS
Body:
O-rings:
Spring:
Stop Check:
Weight:
Brass
Rubber
Stainless Steel
Brass
4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)
3.81"
(97 mm)
Part Number
Description
872442
Grooved Nut Discharge Head
872450
Plain Nut Discharge Head
3.81"
(97 mm)
PISTON
PISTON
SPRING
3/4" NPS
3.94"
(100 mm)
STOP
CHECK
BALL
CHECK
SPRING
TRANSFER OUTLET
3.94"
(100 mm)
SET
POSITION
IDENTIFYING
GROOVES IN
SWIVEL NUT
OPERATED
POSITION
2 1/2" - 14N3
SWIVEL NUT
(FOR CONNECTION
TO CYLINDER VALVE)
BALL
RETAINER
DISCHARGE
OUTLET
3/4" NPS
SET
POSITION
2 1/2 - 14N-3
OPERATED
POSITION
OUTER O-RING
P/N 242466
OUTER O-RING
P/N 242466
SWIVEL NUT
(FOR CONNECTION
TO CYLINDER VALVE)
INNER O-RING
P/N 242467
INNER 0-RING
P/N 242467
STEM
STEM
Figure 1. Discharge Head, Grooved Nut:

For Use with Single Nitrogen Driver
225-lb. ad 395-lb. Systems

K-90-114 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Figure 2. Discharge Head, Plain Nut:

For Use with Multiple Nitrogen Driver
675-lb. and 1010-lb. Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Combined Cylinder Strap for 4070-cu. in.
and 4890-cu. in. Nitrogen Drivers

K-90-115
P/N: 06-23617X-001
FEATURES
Available in Two Sizes, for 4070- and 4890-cu. in.

Nitrogen Drivers
Convenience of One Strap for Two Cylinders
Easily Installed
SAE 1020 Steel

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
Kidde Combined Cylinder Straps for Nitrogen Drivers
offer the convenience of one strap installation for a two
driver system. Custom made for use with the Kidde nitrogen drivers, the strap is available in two sizes: one custom fit for a 4070 cu. in. nitrogen driver cylinder and one
for the 4890 cu. in. nitrogen driver cylinder. The strap is
used in conjunction with the 675 and 1010 lb. cylinders
and nitrogen manifold systems. Made of high quality
steel, the strap is durable enough to withstand typical
installation environments and is designed for easy,
secure installation.
INSTALLATION
The agent cylinder and nitrogen driver cylinders are
secured in place using the combined cylinder strap. The
strap is to be bolted to a solid wall or a strut assembly in
two locations. Use 1/2-inch threaded rod and/or 1/2-inch
diameter nuts, bolts and washers to secure the mounting
strap to a vertical surface. After the containers are
securely mounted, they can then be connected to the discharge piping per the system drawings.
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS
Body:
Finish:
Approximate Weight:
4070-cu. in. Strap:
4880-cu. in. Strap:
SAE 1020 Steel

Black
4.4 lb. (2.0 kg)
5.6 lb. (2.5 kg)
Part Number
Description
06-236173-001
4070-cu. in. Nitrogen Driver

Combined Cylinder Strap
(for use with the 675-lb. ADS system)
06-236174-001
4890-cu. in. Nitrogen Driver

Combined Cylinder Strap
(for use with the 1010-lb. ADS system)
DIMENSIONS
C
F (hole size)
E
A
Figure 2. 4890-cu. in. Combined Cylinder Strap

(P/N 06-236173-001)
Figure 1. 4070-cu. in. Combined Cylinder Strap

(P/N 06-236173-001)
Table 1. 4070- and 4890-cu. in. Combined Cylinder Strap Dimensions
Part Number
Cylinder
Size
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
06-236173-001
4070
21.4
544
10.9
277
13.6
345
1.75
44.4
15.75
399
0.625
15.9
06-236174-001
4890
22.4
569
11.4
290
14.1
258
1.75
44.4
16.50
419
0.625
15.9

K-90-115 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
1-inch Nitrogen Transfer, High Pressure Hose

P/N: 06-118207-00X

K-90-102
FEATURES
Flexible Hose with 3/4-inch Swivel Bell Fitting for

Easy Installation
Three Sizes: 14.75-in. Used for 225 lb. ADS; 18.00-in.
Used for 395 lb. ADS; and 23.65-in. Used for 675 lb.
and 1010 lb. ADS
Part Number Stamped on Hose for Easy Identification

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde ADS 1-in. Nitrogen Transfer, High Pressure
Hoses are used to provide the interconnection between
the grooved nut discharge head on the nitrogen driver
and the FM-200 storage container. Made to be flexible, a
3/4-in. swivel bell fitting with a hex nut for attachment to
the nitrogen discharge Head allows for easy installation.
Three sizes are available (P/N 06-118207-00X, see Figure 1), for use with the ADS agent cylinders.
INSTALLATION
WARNING
The nitrogen transfer hose must

always be connected to the agent cylinder and to the discharge head before
attaching discharge head to the cylinder valve, in order to prevent injury in
the event of inadvertent nitrogen discharge. Failure to follow these instructions could result in death, serious
personal injury and/or property damage.
Apply thread tape or pipe dope to the 3/4-in. male NPT

thread of the hose. Connect the transfer hose to the 3/4in. transfer fitting of the actuation kit. Take the other end
of the hose and attach the 3/4-in. bell fittting to the
grooved-nut discharge head (see Table 1). Make certain
that the hose is not kinked. The same installation concept
is followed when installing hose P/N 06-118207-003,
however, two hoses are required for the 675 lb. and 1010
lb. cylinder systems.
Table 1: Actuation Kit Reference
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect nitrogen transfer hose for loose fittings, damaged
threads, cracks, distortions, cuts and frayed wire braiding. Tighten loose fittings. Replace hoses that have any
stripped threads or other damage. Inspect couplings and
tees for tightness.
5 YEAR:
Flexible hoses must be hydrostatic pressure tested every
five years in accordance with requirements in NFPA 12.
SPECIFICATIONS
Outer Diameter:
Inner Diameter:
Inner Hose Material:
Core of Hose:
Outer Hose Material:
ADS Cylinder
Actuation Kit
Temperature Range:
225 lb.
06-129882-001
395 lb.
06-129882-001
675 lb.
06-129985-001
1010 lb.
06-129985-001
Minimum Burst Pressure:

Couplings Plated:
Approximate Weight:
14.75-in. Hose
18.00-in. Hose
23.65-in. Hose
1.625 inches
1 inch minimum
Buna-N Synthetic
Double Wire Braided
Neoprene Synthetic
Rubber
-40F to 212F
(-40C to 100C)
6,000 PSI (413 bar)
Electrolus Nickel
1.9 lb. (0.84 kg)
2.3 lb. (1.04 kg)
2.8 lb. (1.27 kg)
3/4-14NPT
1.375 HEX (REF)
1.375 HEX (REF)
1.000
DIA
1.500
DIA
MIN.
1.625 DIA.
3/4-14NPSM
1.250 HEX (REF)
Figure 1. Nitrogen Transfer Hose
Part Number
Description
Dimension A
Inches
Dimension A
Millimeters
06-118207-002
For use with 225 lb. Cylinder Assembly
14.75
375
06-118207-001
For use with 395 lb. Cylinder Assembly
18.00
457
06-118207-003
For use with 675 lb. and 1010 lb. Cylinder Assembly
23.65
600

K-90-102 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Actuation Assembly Kit for 225-lb and 395-lb.
Cylinders and Nitrogen Driver Manifolds

K-90-103
P/N: 06-129882-001
FEATURES
Reduces the Number of Control Heads

Allows Cylinders to Actuate Simultaneously
Safe and Easy to Install
Pressure Relief Device Included for Safe Disassembly

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
Each Kidde ADS must be equipped with the actuation
assembly in order for the nitrogen driver to pneumatically
actuate the agent cylinder. The nitrogen driver is set up to
act as the master cylinder. Actuation of the nitrogen
driver is initiated by use of a control head; it initiates the
nitrogen system discharge by opening the pilot check on
the cylinder valves. This allows the nitrogen to pressurize
the discharge head piston, which opens the main check
in the valve and discharges the contents of nitrogen
through the transfer hose. From the transfer hose, the
nitrogen splits in two directions. The first path the nitrogen takes is through the orifice fitting were the nitrogen
pressure is regulated into the agent cylinder. At the same
time, the nitrogen travels through the actuation assembly
to the pressure operated control head. The pressure
operated control head actuates the FM-200 cylinder
valve by releasing the pressure off the top of the piston,
thereby allowing the FM-200 to be driven out by the nitrogen.
The actuation assembly kit for the 225-lb. and 395-lb.
ADS (P/N 06-129882-001) consists of seven parts (see
Table 1). The nitrogen fitting threads into the orifice fitting.
The 1/8-in. flare allows for the connection of the actuation
hose, which is then fitted into the 1/8-in. branch tee for
operation of the pressure operated control head. A
Schrader valve and cap is then added to the 1/8-in. tee
as a safety for venting off residual pressure after discharge and before decommissioning of the system.
INSTALLATION
Once the nitrogen driver cylinder and the agent storage
cylinder are safely secured and attached to system piping, the actuation assembly can be connected using the
following procedure. Inspect and assemble the kit components separately, prior to attaching to the agent storage cylinder.
WARNING

permanently connected into the system piping. Never attach the control
head to the cylinder valve until the cylinders are secured in brackets or racking and the hose is attached to the
agent cylinder. Under no circumstances should the control head
remain attached to the cylinder valve
after removal from service or during
shipment, handling, storage or filling.
In the event of inadvertent discharge,
failure to follow these instructions
could result in death, serious bodily
injury and/or property damage.
ASSEMBLY:
Assembly of Kit Components
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply thread tape to male thread of nitrogen transfer

fitting.
Apply thread tape to the NPT male thread of the first
1/8-in. x 1/4-in. flared fitting, thread NPT male into
the nitrogen transfer fitting and tighten.
Take the two assembled components and thread
into orifice fitting already attached to the nitrogen diffuser assembly, then tighten.
Apply thread tape to the male end of 1/8-in. branch
tee and thread into the pressure operated control
head (P/N 878737). Tighten the branch tee.
5.
Apply thread tape to the NPT male thread of the

second 1/8-in. x 1/4-in. flared fitting and thread into
one side of the 1/8-in. branch tee. Tighten the flared
fitting.
6. Apply thread tape to the male end of the Schrader
valve. Securely threading the male end into the
open end of the 1/8-in. branch tee. Apply Schrader
cap to Schrader fitting.
7. Connect 1/4-in. actuation hose to flare fitting that
was applied to the 1/8-in. branch tee.
8. Connect the other end of the 1/4-in. actuation hose
into the flare fitting that was connected in the busing
in Step 3.
9. Remove the protection cap from the cylinder valve.
10. Using a suitable wrench, assemble control head to
cylinder valve and tighten swivel nut securely.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect components for cracks, corrosion, grime, etc.
Ensure that the assembled fittings are tightly secured at
each of their respective connections and to the agent cylinder. If any defects are found during the monthly inspection, immediately contact a Kidde Distributor to service
the systems. Please refer to the Design, Installation,
Operation and Maintenance Manual for more details (P/N
90-FM200M-030).
Table 1: Actuation Assembly Kit Part Numbers
Item
No.
Qty.
06-236124-001
NitrogenTransfer Fitting
878737
Pressure Operated Control

Head
06-118191-001
Fitting flared 1/8-in. x 1/4-in.
06-118193-001
3/16-in. Flexible Actuation

Hose, 16-in. length
06-118192-001
1/8-in. Branch Tee
WK-263303-000
1/8-in. Schrader Valve
WK-263304-000
1/8-in. Schrader Valve Cap
Part Number
2
4
Description
1. FITTINGNITROGEN TRANSFER
2. VALVEPNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
3. FITTINGFLARED 1/8" x 1/4
4. HOSEFLEXIBLE 3/16
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2: Materials Specifications
5. TEE1/8" BRANCH
6. VALVESCHRADER
7. CAPSCHRADER VALVE
Part Number
Description
Material
Figure 1. Actuation Kit Assembly

CONNECT TO NITROGEN DRIVER
USING P/N 06-118207-00X
FOR NITROGEN MANIFOLD SYSTEMS,
USE HOSE P/N 06-118324-001*
*NOTE: TO CONNECT INTO
PIPING MANIFOLD, REFER TO THE DESIGN,
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL, P/N 90-FM200M-030.
06-236124-001
Brass
06-118191-001
1/8-in. x 1/4-in.
Flared Fittings
Brass
06-118193-001
3/16-in. Flexible
Actuation Hose
Stainless Steel
Braiding, Brass
Fittings
06-118192-001
1/8-in. Branch Tee
Brass
WK-263303-000
Brass
WK-263304-000

Cap
Brass
878737
Pressure Operated
Control Head
Brass
Figure 2. Cylinder and Valve Assembly

with Assembled Actuation Components

K-90-103 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Nitrogen Driver Assembly

K-90-104
P/N: 90-10039X-001
FEATURES

Cylinder Storage

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
pressure from a separate storage cylinder is introduced
into the vapor space of the FM-200 cylinder at a controlled rate. This nitrogen pressure acts to propel the liquid FM-200 agent through the pipe at a higher flow rate. It
can also propel the FM-200 agent farther through the
pipe network allowing for the placement of storage cylinders remotely from the protected hazard.
OPERATION
When a control head actuates the nitrogen cylinder discharge valve, the nitrogen pressure actuates the agent
cylinder discharge valve and pressurizes the cylinder.
FM-200 liquid agent is then propelled by its own vapor
pressure and the nitrogen pressure through the discharge valve and into the system pipe network. The FM200 liquid agent travels through the system pipe network
at a high flow rate.

(0C to 54C).
45
15
TOP VIEW
3
21.75 in.
(552 mm)
8
19.00 in
(483 mm)
600
300
PSI
900
1200
0
KIDDE-FENWAL
263144
1500
BACK VIEW
65.25 in.
(1659 mm)
63.22 in.
(1605 mm)
61.25 in.
(1575 mm)
58.00 in.
(1473 mm)
51.03 in.
(1270 mm)
395 LB.
4070 CU. IN.
37.00 in.
(940 mm)
FRONT VIEW
15.258 in.
(382 mm)
16.00 in. Dia.
(406 mm)
10.50 in. Dia.

(267 mm)
1. ASSY - CYL. & VALVE ADS ASSY

2. ASSY - CYL. & VALVE NITROGEN DRIVER
4. STRAP - TWO CYLINDER
6. ASSY - ACTUATION
-2-
Item
No.
Qty.
06-236124-001
nitrogen transfer fitting
878737
pressure operated control head
06-118191-001
fitting flared 1/8-in. x 1/4-in.
06-118193-001
3/16-in. flexible actuation hose
06-118192-001
1/8-in. branch tee
WK-263303-000
1/8-in. Schrader valve
WK-263304-000
1/8-in. Schrader valve cap
1. FITTING - N2 TRANSFER
2. VALVE - PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
3. FITTING - FLARED 1/8" X 1/4
4. HOSE - FLEXIBLE 3/16
5. TEE - 1/8" BRANCH
6. VALVE - SCHRADER
7. CAP - SCHRADER VALVE
P/N
Description
INSTALLATION
ASSEMBLY:
Both the nitrogen driver and agent storage cylinders are
transfer components (1-in. nitrogen transfer hose, 3/4-in.
NPT transfer fitting, see Figure 2). The 3/4-in. transfer fitting connects into the orifice fitting. The orifice fitting is a
custom fitting that is designed to regulate the nitrogen
pressure flow required for the specific system. The orifice
fitting then connects into the 3/4-in. check diffuser
assembly to diffuse the nitrogen in a horizontal pattern.
ACTUATION:
The control head is attached to the nitrogen driver by
means of electric, cable, lever, or pneumatic devices.
The actuating of the agent cylinder is done upon transfer
of nitrogen from the driver cylinder using the actuation
assembly kit (P/N 06-129882-001).
QUARTERLY
1. Check the pressure gauge of the nitrogen driver and
the weight of the agent storage container.
PSI (124 bar) at 70F (21C)
Note:

SEMI-ANNUAL:
1.
Assembly includes:
2.
Nitrogen transfer fitting

1/8-in. flex loop
1/8-in. flare fitting
1/8-in. branch tee
1/8-in. Schrader fitting and cap
Pressure operated control head
3.
MAINTENANCE
(P/N 90-FM200M-030).
RECONDITIONING
After a system has been discharged, it is recommended
that the local authorized Kidde Distributor be contacted to
recondition the system. Please reference the DIOM manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030) for the appropriate reconditioning kit.
-3-
SPECIFICATIONS
90-10039X-001
Element
Nitrogen Driver
90-104070-001
Imperial
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Fill Range (lb. w/o LLI)
200 to 395 lb.
91 to 180 kg
Factory Filled 1800 PSI
Factory Filled 124 bar
Fill Range (lb. w/ LLI)
200 to 395 lb.
91 to 180 kg
61.25 in.
155.60 cm
65.25 in.
165.70 cm
16.0 in.
41.0 cm
10.5 in.
26.7 cm
Internal Volume
5.000 ft.3
0.142 m3
4070 cu. in.
0.0667 m3
Empty Weight
201 lb.
91.4 kg
184 lb.
83.5 kg
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
Height
Diameter
Temperature Range
Agent Storage Cylinder:
90-10039X-001
1: w/Liquid Level Indicator

5: w/o Liquid Level Indicator
Nitrogen Driver:
90-104070-001

K-90-104 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Nitrogen Driver Assembly

K-90-105
P/N: 90-10022X-001
FEATURES

Cylinder Storage

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
pressure from a separate storage cylinder is introduced
into the vapor space of the FM-200 cylinder at a controlled rate. This nitrogen pressure acts to propel the liquid FM-200 agent through the pipe at a higher flow rate. It
can also propel the FM-200 agent farther through the
pipe network allowing for the placement of storage cylinders remotely from the protected hazard.
OPERATION
When a control head actuates the nitrogen cylinder discharge valve, the nitrogen pressure actuates the agent
cylinder discharge valve and pressurizes the cylinder.
FM-200 liquid agent is then propelled by its own vapor
pressure and the nitrogen pressure through the discharge valve and into the system pipe network. The FM200 liquid agent travels through the system pipe network
at a high flow rate.

(0C to 54C).
45
15
TOP VIEW
21.75 in.
(552 mm)
8
3
19.00 in
(483 mm)
600
300
PSI
900
1200
0
KIDDE-FENWAL
263144
BACK VIEW
1500
58.75 in.
(1494 mm)
56.72 in.
(1440 mm)
7
55.50 in
(1410 mm)
51.50 in.
(1308 mm)
225 LB.
45.25 in.
(1150 mm)
2300 CU. IN.
1
30.00 in.
(762.mm)
FRONT VIEW
12.584 in.
(320 mm)
12.75 in. Dia.
(324 mm)
8.50 in. Dia.

(216 mm)
1. ASSY - CYL. & VALVE ADS ASSY

2. ASSY - CYL. & VALVE NITROGEN DRIVER
4. STRAP - TWO CYLINDER
6. ASSY - ACTUATION
-2-
Item
No.
Qty.
06-236124-001
nitrogen transfer fitting
878737
pressure operated control head
06-118191-001
fitting flared 1/8-in. x 1/4-in.
06-118193-001
3/16-in. flexible actuation hose
06-118192-001
1/8-in. branch tee
WK-263303-000
1/8-in. Schrader valve
WK-263304-000
1/8-in. Schrader valve cap
1. FITTING - N2 TRANSFER
2. VALVE - PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
3. FITTING - FLARED 1/8" X 1/4
4. HOSE - FLEXIBLE 3/16
5. TEE - 1/8" BRANCH
6. VALVE - SCHRADER
7. CAP - SCHRADER VALVE
P/N
Description
INSTALLATION
ASSEMBLY:
Both the nitrogen driver and agent storage cylinders are
transfer components (1-in. nitrogen transfer hose, 3/4-in.
NPT transfer fitting, see Figure 2). The 3/4-in. transfer fitting connects into the orifice fitting. The orifice fitting is a
custom fitting that is designed to regulate the nitrogen
pressure flow required for the specific system. The orifice
fitting then connects into the 3/4-in. check diffuser
assembly to diffuse the nitrogen in a horizontal pattern.
ACTUATION:
The control head is attached to the nitrogen driver by
means of electric, cable, lever, or pneumatic devices.
The actuating of the agent cylinder is done upon transfer
of nitrogen from the driver cylinder using the actuation
assembly kit (P/N 06-129882-001).
QUARTERLY:
1. Check the pressure gauge of the nitrogen driver and
the weight of the agent storage container.
PSI (124 bar) at 70F (21C)
Note:

SEMI-ANNUAL:
1.
Assembly includes:
2.
Nitrogen transfer fitting

1/8-in. flex loop
1/8-in. flare fitting
1/8-in. branch tee
1/8-in. Schrader fitting and cap
Pressure operated control head
3.
MAINTENANCE
(P/N 90-FM200M-030).
RECONDITIONING
After a system has been discharged, it is recommended
that the local authorized Kidde Distributor be contacted to
recondition the system. Please reference the DIOM manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030) for the appropriate reconditioning kit.
-3-
SPECIFICATIONS
90-10022X-001
Element
Nitrogen Driver
90-102300-001
Imperial
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Fill Range (lb. w/o LLI)
114 to 225 lb.
52 to 102 kg
Factory Filled 1800 PSI
Factory Filled 124 bar
Fill Range (lb. w/ LLI)
114 to 225 lb.
52 to 102 kg
Height
55.50 in.
141.00 cm
58.75 in.
130.80 cm
Diameter
12.75 in.
32.00 cm
8.50 in.
21.60 cm
Internal Volume
2.859 ft.3
0.0810 m3
2300 cu. in.
0.0377 m3
Empty Weight
133.0 lb.
60.0 kg
98 lb.
44.5 kg
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
32F to 130F
0C to 54C
Temperature Range
Agent Storage Cylinder:
90-10022X-001
1: w/Liquid Level Indicator

5: w/o Liquid Level Indicator
Nitrogen Driver:
90-102300-001

K-90-105 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Nitrogen Orifice Fitting
P/N: 90-194129-XXX
K-90-106
FEATURES
Custom Engineered
Factory Drilled
Multiple Orifice Sizes Available to
Fit Specific Applications
DESCRIPTION
The nitrogen orifice fitting is a custom-engineered and
factory drilled orifice that regulates the flow of the nitrogen into the agent cylinder. The orifice fitting ensures that
the proper design pressure is regulated so that the
appropriate amount of FM-200 is discharged into each
hazard. The size of the regulating orifice is chosen by the
Kidde ADS series computer calculation software. The
software determines the size based on the input parameters of the specific system, along with the engineered discharge nozzles (see Table 1).
INSTALLATION
Prior to installation, visually inspect fitting to ensure that
the orifice hole is not clogged or obstructed in any way. In
addition, it is recommended to check the part number
located on the fitting and ensure that it corresponds to
the part number that is referenced in the calculations.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect the fitting for cracks, corrosion, grime, etc.
Ensure that the orifice fitting is tightly secured to the diffuser and connected to the agent cylinder. If any defects
are found during the monthly inspection, immediately
contact a Kidde Distributor to service the system.
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS
Body:
Approx. Weight:
Brass
1 lb. (0.45 kg)
UL Listed
FM Approved
Table 1. Nitrogen Orifice Fitting Part Numbers
90-194129-XXX
The drill code is provided

by ADS Flow Calculation
Software. See Table 1.
Part Number
Diameter
Area
90-194129-107
0.107
0.0089
90-194129-111
0.111
0.0097
90-194129-116
0.116
0.0106
90-194129-120
0.120
0.0113
90-194129-129
0.129
0.0130
90-194129-136
0.136
0.0145
90-194129-144
0.144
0.0163
90-194129-156
0.156
0.0192
90-194129-170
0.170
0.0226
90-194129-182
0.182
0.0260
90-194129-199
0.199
0.0311
90-194129-213
0.213
0.0356
90-194129-234
0.234
0.0432
90-194129-261
0.261
0.0535
90-194129-281
0.281
0.0621
90-194129-316
0.316
0.0784
90-194129-348
0.348
0.0951
90-194129-391
0.391
0.1198
90-194129-438
0.438
0.1503
90-194129-484
0.484
0.1843
DIMENSIONS
1.500 in.
38 mm
HEX.
.750-14 NPT
2.212 in.
(56 mm)
1.000-16 UN-2A
3.050 in.
(77.5 mm)
Figure 1. Nitrogen Orifice Fitting

K-90-106 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Fan Nozzles 180 and 360
Assembly 1/2 in., 3/4 in., 1 in., 1-1/4 in.,

1-1/2 in., 2 in.

K-90-107
P/N: 90-1944XX-XXX
FEATURES
Fan Pattern Allows for a Faster Rate of Vaporization

Unique Nozzle Interior Design Allows for Superior Flow
Control
180 is mounted 1-1/2 inch from Side Wall
Brass or Stainless Steel
Minimum Nozzle Pressure of 72 PSI (5 bar)

Recess Option (Minimum of 1/2 inch from Ceiling)
Custom Drilled to Fit Specific Applications
UL Listed for Use with the ADS Only
FM Approved for Use with the ADS Only
Kidde Patented Technology
DESCRIPTION
Kidde ADS 180 and 360 Fan Nozzles are built with a
flat discharge pattern, or a fan pattern, which allows for
a faster rate of vaporization. The large area of coverage
that is created by the nozzles fan action, allows the
agent to discharge closer to the nozzle and vaporize
quickly to create the proper mixture between the agent
and the nitrogen.
The nozzles are designed with unique interior profile to
provide a smooth transitional direction change for the
agent upon discharge. This type of design allows the
agent to keep much of its momentum as it leaves the
nozzlemomentum is necessary to provide agent distribution at greater distance. The nozzles are custom drilled
for each application, allowing the nozzles to be effective
in large or small spaces.
Another design feature that the ADS nozzles offer is a
downward discharge angle from the nozzle which controls the interaction of the vaporizing discharged liquid
with ceiling surfaces, which is to be avoided.
When mounted, the nozzles offer a recess option with a
minimum placement of 1/2 inch from the ceiling. The
180 nozzle can also be located 1 inch from the side
wall. The nozzles have a sleek, discrete profle, for an
aesthetically pleasing look.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY
1. Ensure that there are no obstructions to hinder distribution of FM-200 agent.
2. Visually inspect nozzles for physical damage or
clogging. Replace or clean if required. If nozzles are
replaced, new nozzles used must be the same part
number in the same location.
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS
Body:
Approx. Weight 360 Nozzle:
1/2 in. and 3/4 in.:
1 in. through 2 in.:
Approx. Weight 180 Nozzle:
1/2 in. and 3/4 in.:
1 in. through 2 in.:
Note:
Brass or Stainless Steel

1.3 lb. (0.59 kg)
4.5 lb. (2.00 kg)
1.3 lb. (0.59 kg)
5.0 lb. (2.30 kg)
Please refer to the Design, Installaton, Operation

and Maintenance Manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030)
for associated nozzle part numbers and orifice
areas.
DIMENSIONS
180 Nozzle
Nominal Size
360 Nozzle
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
1/2"
1.47
37.00
3.00
76.00
1.50
38.00
1.44
36.50
3.00
76.00
1.50
38.00
3/4"
1.52
39.00
3.00
76.00
1.50
38.00
1.47
37.00
3.00
76.00
1.50
38.00
1"
1.98
50.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
1.92
49.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
1"
2.06
52.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
1.96
50.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
1"
2.13
54.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
2.00
51.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
2"
2.29
58.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
2.08
53.00
5.00
127.00
3.00
76.00
Refer to Kidde ADS Manual (P/N 90-FM200M-030) for part
number information.

K-90-107 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Combined Cylinder Strap for 225-lb.
and 395-lb. Systems

K-90-108
P/N: 90-23612X-001
FEATURES
Available in Two Sizes for 225-lb. and 395-lb. Systems

Convenience of One Strap for Two Cylinders
Easily Installed
Custom fit for the ADS
SAE 1020 Steel

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
Kidde ADS Combined Cylinder Strap offers the convenience of one strap installation for a two cylinder system.
Custom made for use with the Kidde ADS, the strap is
available in two sizes: one is custom fit for a 225-lb. tank
and nitrogen driver cylinder, and one for the 395-lb. tank
and nitrogen driver cylinder. Made of high quality steel,
the strap is durable enough to withstand typical installation environments and is designed for easy, secure installation.
INSTALLATION
The agent cylinder and nitrogen driver cylinders are
secured in place using the combined cylinder strap. The
strap is bolted to a solid wall or a strut assembly in three
locations: left, right and center. Use 1/2-inch threaded rod
and/or 1/2-inch diameter nuts, bolts and washers to
secure the mounting strap to a vertical surface. After the
containers are securely mounted, they can then be connected to the discharge piping per the system drawings.
Part Number
06-236126-001
Cylinder Strap for use with the 395-lb. ADS

Cylinder and 4070 cu. in. Nitrogen Driver Set
06-236127-001
Cylinder Strap for use with the 225-lb. ADS

Cylinder and 2300 cu. in. Nitrogen Driver Set
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS
Body:
Finish:
Approx. Weight:
225-lb. Strap:
395-lb. Strap:
SAE 1020 Steel

Black
4.4 lb. (2.0 kg)
5.6 lb. (2.5 kg)
Description
DIMENSIONS
B
F
D
E
G
H (hole diameter)
8.625 DIA.
12.905 DIA.
Figure 1. Dimensions for 225-lb. System (P/N 06-236127-001, See Table 1)

B
F
E
H (hole diameter)
10.875 DIA.
C
16.156 DIA.
A
Figure 2. Dimensions for 395-lb. System (P/N 06-236126-001, See Table 1)

Table 1. Bracket Dimensions
Part Number
Cylinder
Size
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
06-236127-001
225 lb.
11.91
303
27.00
686
7.88
200
8.20
208
6.06
154
11.10
282
1.75
44
0.562
14
06-236126-001
395 lb.
14.00
356
32.28
820
8.72
221
9.83
250
7.19
183
13.12
333
1.75
44
0.562
14

K-90-108 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Actuation Assembly Kit for 675-lb.
and 1010-lb. Cylinder Arrangements

K-90-110
P/N: 06-129985-001
FEATURES
Reduces the Number of Control Heads

Allows Cylinders to Actuate Simultaneously
Safe and Easy to Install
Pressure Relief Device Included for Safe Disassembly

UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
Each Kidde ADS must be equipped with the actuation
assembly in order for the nitrogen driver to pneumatically
actuate the agent cylinder. The nitrogen driver is set up to
act as the master cylinder. Actuation of the nitrogen
driver is initiated by use of a control head. The control
head initiates the nitrogen system discharge by opening
the pilot check on the cylinder valves. This allows the
nitrogen to pressurize the discharge head piston, which,
in turn, opens the main check in the valve and discharges
the contents of nitrogen through the transfer hose. From
the transfer hose, the nitrogen splits in two directions.
The first path the nitrogen takes is through the orifice fitting were the nitrogen pressure is regulated into the
agent cylinder. At the same time, the nitrogen travels
through the actuation assembly to the pressure operated
control head. The pressure operated control head actuates the FM-200 cylinder valve by releasing the pressure
off the top of the piston, thereby allowing the FM-200 to
be driven out by the nitrogen.
The actuation assembly kit for the 675 lb. and 1010 lb.
ADS (P/N 06-129985-001) consists of eight parts (see
Table 1): the 3/4-in. HEX Nipple (P/N 06-118330-001)
threads into the Y transfer fitting (P/N 06-236260-001);
the nitrogen fitting threads into the orifice fitting; and the
1/8-in. flare allows for the connection of the actuation
hose, which is then fitted into the 1/8-in. branch tee for
operation of the pressure operated control head. A
Schrader valve and cap is then added to the 1/8-in. tee
as a safety for venting off residual pressure after discharge and before decommissioning of the system.
INSTALLATION
Once the nitrogen driver cylinder and the agent storage
cylinder are safely secured and attached to system piping, the actuation assembly can be connected using the
following procedure. Inspect and assemble the kit components separately, prior to attaching to the agent storage cylinder.
ASSEMBLY:
Assembly of Kit Components
1.
Apply thread tape to the 3/4-in. HEX nipple and

thread into the Y transfer fitting.
2.
Apply thread tape to the NPT male thread of the first

1/8-in. x 1/4-in. flared fitting, thread NPT male into
the nitrogen transfer fitting and tighten.
3. Take the two assembled components and thread
into orifice fitting already attached to the nitrogen diffuser assembly, then tighten.
4. Apply thread tape to the male end of 1/8-in. branch
tee and thread into the pressure operated control
head (P/N 878737). Tighten the branch tee.
5. Apply thread tape to the NPT male thread of the
second 1/8-in. x 1/4-in. flared fitting and thread into
one side of the 1/8-in. branch tee. Tighten the flared
fitting.
6. Apply thread tape to the male end of the Schrader
valve. Securely threading the male end into the
open end of the 1/8-in. branch tee. Apply Schrader
cap to Schrader fitting.
7. Connect 1/4-in. actuation hose to flare fitting that
was applied to the 1/8-in. branch tee.
8. Connect the other end of the 1/4-in. actuation hose
into the flare fitting that was connected in the busing
in Step 3.
9. Remove the protection cap from the cylinder valve.
10. Using a suitable wrench, assemble control head to
cylinder valve and tighten swivel nut securely.
WARNING

permanently connected into the system piping. Never attach the control
head to the cylinder valve until the cylinders are secured in brackets or racking and the hose is attached to the
agent cylinder. Under no circumstances is the control head to remain
attached to the cylinder valve after
removal from service or during shipment, handling, storage or filling. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in death, serious bodily injury
and/or property damage.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect components for cracks, corrosion, grime, etc.
Ensure that the assembled fittings are tightly secured at
each of their respective connections and to the agent cylinder. If any defects are found during the monthly inspection, immediately contact a Kidde Distributor to service
the systems. Please refer to the Design, Installation,
Operation and Maintenance Manual for more details (P/N
90-FM200M-030).
Table 1. Actuation Assembly Kit Part Numbers
2
4
Item
No.
Qty.
Part Number
Description
06-236260-001
878737
06-118191-001
06-118193-001
06-118192-001
1/8" Branch Tee
263303
1/8" Schrader Valve
263304
06-118330-001
3/4" Nipple
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2. Materials Specifications
Figure 1. Actuation Kit Assembly
Part Number
Description
Material
06-236260-001
Nitrogen "Y"
Transfer Fitting
Brass
06-118191-001
1/8 x 1/4"
Flared Fittings
Brass
06-118193-001
3/16" Flexible
Actuation Hose
Stainless Steel
Braiding, Brass Fittings
06-118192-001
1/8" Branch Tee
Brass
WK-263303-000
1/8" Schrader Valve
Brass
WK-263304-000
Brass
878737
Pressure Operated
Control Head
Brass
06-118330-001
3/4" HEX Nipple
Brass
TO PLAIN NUT
DISCHARGE HEAD.
CONNECTED TO
NITROGEN DRIVER (TYP.)
Figure 2. Cylinder and Valve Assembly

with Assembled Actuation Components

K-90-110 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Switch-In Gauge,
Supervisory Pressure Switch for Nitrogen

K-90-116
P/N: 06-118328-001
FEATURES
Factory Installed
Integrated Pressure Switch and Gauge
Compact Design
Steel Braided Tether with Connector Included

UL Listed for Use with Kidde Fire Systems Nitrogen Pilot
Cylinders, Siren Driver Cylinders, and ADS Nitrogen
Driver Cylinders
DESCRIPTION
The Switch-in-Gauge unit is a cylinder contents gauge
and supervisory pressure switch integrated into a single
package. The unit is factory installed and is supplied
complete with a removable 4-conductor tether, which
connects to a flexible junction on the back of the gauge
body. The tether is protected by a stainless steel overbraid. Heat shrink sleeve is pre-installed on the finished
end of the tether. A unformed sleeve is also included for
the connection to the system wiring.
Connected to an appropriate control panel the unit initiates an alarm or fault condition when the pressure
within the nitrogen cylinder is outside of the standard
operating range.
OPERATION
The unit is designed to provide a NC (Normally Closed)
switched contact that is NO (Normally Open) under normal operating pressure. When connected to a monitored
circuit of a suppression control panel, with a correctly
rated EOL (end of line) resistor, a deviation from normal
operating pressure results in fault or alarm condition.
The Switch-in-Gauge unit is designed to trip when the
pressure in the container drops to the level equivalent to
the pressure at the lowest permissible operating temperature. The unit also provides a switch response when the
container pressure exceeds the level equivalent to the
pressure at the highest permissible operating temperature. In addition the unit will trip if power is lost (regardless of the container pressure).
Note:
An indication of a fault is not necessarily an indication of a loss of pressureall cylinder pressure readings must be corrected for temperature.
INSTALLATION
WARNING
Switch-in-Gauge units (as with standard contents gauges) must not be

removed or installed while a container
is pressurized. Switch-in-Gauge units
are factory installed only. Attempting
to remove any container gauge from a
pressurized container could result in
the rapid release of contents which
may cause death, serious injury or
property damage.
The Switch-in-Gauge unit is factory installed on the cylinder valve, however the unit must be wired to a supervisory circuit and auxiliary power circuit of a Kidde Fire
Systems control panel in order to obtain full functionality.
Without an electrical connection the unit provides visual
indication of the pressure within the container.
For the switch to function, allowing supervision of the
container, the unit must be supplied power from the auxiliary power circuit via the red and black wires in the supplied tether. The non-polarity sensitive switched
connection is made via the blue and brown wires to the
supervised circuit of a control panel.
Connection into the control system wiring should be
made in a suitable junction box using appropriate gauge
wiring per NFPA 72: 1999.
SPECIFICATIONS
MAINTENANCE (MECHANICAL)
The unit and wiring tether should be checked visually
during regular maintenance intervals for damage, corrosion or dial obscuration. No field calibration is possible or
necessary.
Factory Set Point:

Low:
High:
16xx psi (xxx bar)

20 xxpsi (xxxbar)
Contact Rating:
30 Vdc MAX
100mA MAX
65 ohms (closed) MAX
Part Number
Description
06-118328-001
Gauge Unit and Tether
Wire Color Coding:

Red:
Black:
Brown/Blue:
Positive (24 Vdc nominal)

Negative
Switch contacts
Switch Operation:
NC, NO under pressure
Power Requirements:
18 Vdc to 30 Vdc
Container Connection:
0.125-27 PT (male)
Wetted Materials:
Brass body, stainless

steel working tube
Lead Length:
36 in. (914 mm) nominal
RE
5/16" MYLAR DOT APPLIED

TO SMOOTH SURFACE
GE 1800
AR
CH
3000
PSI
R SA5396
IT
H
N I T R OG
EN
0.365 REF
1.605 REF
1.415 REF
UL
M
_
US
1.445
REF
90 TETHER
36 INCH WIRE BRAIDED LEADS

4 WIRES
(RED, BLACK, BLUE AND BROWN)
Figure 1. Switch-in-Gauge Dimensions

K-90-116 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Pressure Regulator
P/N: 06-118334-001
K-90-117
FEATURES
Factory Set Outlet Pressure of 116 PSIG (8 bar)

For Use with Pneumatic 3-Way Directional
Valve Operation
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
This small, unique pressure regulator is used to reduce
the pressure coming from the nitrogen pilot cylinder. The
service pressure of the nitrogen pilot cylinder starts at
1800 PSIG at 70F (124 bar at 21C). Once the nitrogen
pilot is discharged, the nitrogen pressure must be
reduced between 100 to 150 PSIG (7 to 10 bar) in order
to operate the pneumatic solenoid (P/N 06-118329-001).
The pneumatic solenoid is mounted to the actuator of the
3-way ball valve. The pressure regulator is preset to
release the nitrogen pressure thru the line to approximately 116 PSIG (8 bar).
INSTALLATION
The pressure regulator is labeled with an inlet and an
outlet; take note to the appropriate orientation prior to
installing the regulator in the nitrogen line, down stream
of the nitrogen pilot cylinder. Use the following procedure
to install the pressure regulator:
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
A pressure regulator must be installed

in line from the nitrogen pilot in order
for the pneumatic solenoid to operate
properly. The pneumatic solenoid
could be damaged if the manufacturers maximum pressure recommendation of 150 PSIG (10.34 bar) is
exceeded.
Apply tape dope to the 1/4-inch NPT male threads of

the inlet and outlet connections.
Secure pressure regulator to nitrogen pilot line,
being sure the outlet is in line, upstream of the pneumatic solenoid.
It is recommended that the pressure regulator be
mounted to a fixed structure to minimize vibration
and to avoid damage to unit during discharge.
MAINTENANCE:
Monthly: Inspect fittings and assembly for cracks, corrosion, grime, etc. Ensure that the fittings are tight and that
the pressure regulator is tightly secured to the nitrogen
line. If any defects are found during the monthly inspection, immediately contact a Kidde Distributor to service
the systems.
Part Number
Description
06-118334-001
Pressure Regulator
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials:
Body:
Nickel Plated Brass
Inlet Pressure Max:
5150 PSIG at 130F

(355 BAR AT 54C)
Outlet Pressure:
116 PSIG (8 bar)
Safety Relief:
145 PSIG (10 bar)
Temperature Range:
-20F to 130F
(-29C to 54C)
Weight:
1.5 lb. (0.68 kg)
6.66 in.
(169 mm)
ASSEMBLY OUTLET,
1/4 NPT
ASSEMBLY INLET,
1/4 NPT
Figure 1. Pressure Relief Dimensions

assumes no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application.
The product must be properly applied to work correctly.
If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or
question, contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508)
881-2000.
K-90-117 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
Manifold Actuation Arrangement Kit
for 225-lb. and 395-lb. Cylinder Systems

K-90-119
P/N: 06-129944-XOX
FEATURES
Four Kits Offered for 2-, 3-, 4- and 5-ADS

Cylinder System Manifolds
Plus 1 Kit for Additional Cylinders for Up to 14
Slave Sets
Easy to Install; Kit Uses Flexible Actuation Hoses
with Swivel Fittings
One Kit that Fits Both the 225-lb. and the 395-lb. ADS
Conveniently Packaged to Avoid Confusion

When Ordering
Not Necessary to Order the Single System
Actuation Assembly Separately
UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde ADS Manifold Actuation Arrangement Kit is
convenient for both ordering and stocking. The kit is
designed to fit both the 225-lb. and 395-lb. ADS cylinders
and is available for two-, three-, four- and five-system
manifolds sets (see Specifications.) The kit comes standard with the single system assembly (P/N 06-129882001) and is comprised of all the parts necessary for
installation, thereby eliminating the possibility of confusion when ordering parts. For handy, easy installation,
the kit utilizes flexible actuation hoses and swivel fittings.
Figure 1 illustrates the individual pieces of the kit.
INSTALLATION
Once the ADS cylinders have been secured and are
attached to the distribution piping, the setup for actuation
to the manifolded cylinders is simple. Using the single
cylinder actuation assembly(s), assemble as shown in
Figure 1. Attach each of the pneumatic actuator(s) to an
agent cylinder valve. Attach the 16-in. flex hose to the
3/16-in. flared tee (shown threaded into the nitrogen
transfer fitting; see Figure 2.) Then, attach each pneumatic actuator (P/N 878737) to the slave nitrogen drivers.
Once the final pneumatic actuator is attached to the last
nitrogen driver in the manifold, apply pipe tape and
thread the flared elbow into the top of the pneumatic
actuator. The remaining flared tees should be threaded
into the tops of the pneumatic actuators located on the
slave nitrogen drivers. Once the flared fittings and actuators are installed on all agent cylinders and nitrogen drivers, the flex hoses can then be attached as shown in
Figure 2. The 46-in. flex hose is used to connect the actuation circuit between the nitrogen drivers; the 22-in. flex
hose is used to connect the actuation line from the transfer fitting of the master cylinder set to the first slave nitrogen driver.
Note:
For cylinder sets larger then five sets, order the

Plus 1 actuator set for each additional cylinder
set.
SPECIFICATIONS
Flex Hose Material:
Stainless Steel and

Brass Fittings
Fittings Material:
Brass
Pnematic Actuator:
Various Brass Fittings
Approximate Weights:
P/N 06-129944-002
Two ADS Cylinder Set
6.0 lb. (2.2 kg)
P/N 06-129944-003
Three ADS Cylinder Set
9.0 lb. (3.4 kg)
P/N 06-129944-004
Four ADS Cylinder Set
11.0 lb. (4.1 kg)
P/N 06-129944-005
Five ADS Cylinder Set
14.0 lb. (5.2 kg)
P/N 06-129944-100
Plus 1 Cylinder Set
3.0 lb. (1.1 kg)
Number of Pieces Included
Number of
Cylinders
Kit P/N
Actuation Assy
P/N 06-129882-001
22" Flex Hose

P/N 06-118193-003
36" Flex Hose

P/N 06-118193-002
Pneumatic
Actuator
P/N 878737
3/16" Flare Tee x

1/8" NPT
P/N 06-118285-001
3/16" Flare Elbow x

1/8" NPT
P/N 06-118284-001
2 Cylinder Set
System Manifold
06-129944-002
3 Cylinder Set
System Manifold
06-129944-003
4 Cylinder Set
System Manifold
06-129944-004
5 Cylinder Set
System Manifold
06-129944-005
Plus 1 Cylinder
Set Manifold
06-129944-101
"X" 0.187
06-118193-00X
06-118285-001
06-118284-001
878737
KIT
P/N 06-129882-001
Figure 1. Actuation Kit Parts
Actuation Assembly Kit

P/N 06-129882-001
Nitrogen
Transfer Hose
Slave Nitrogen Driver (Typ.)

with Pneumatic Control Head
(P/N 878737)
3/16" Flare Elbow

P/N 06-118284-001
22" Flex Hose

P/N 06-118193-003
3/16" Flare Tee

P/N 06-118285-001
46" Flex Hose

P/N 06-118284-001
Nitrogen Driver
With Master Control
Head
Agent Cylinder
3/16" Flare Tee (Typ.)

14 Slave sets of Agent and
Nitrogen Driver Cylinders
Master
Cylinder Set
Note: Each Agent Cylinder will be connected to the distribution piping

either through a valve outlet adapter or a flexible discharge hose.
Each agent cylinder is capable of activating 1 pressure trip and/or 1 pressure switch.
Figure 2. Pressure Actuation Using Pressure from One Master Nitrogen Driver Cylinder
to Actuate a Maximum of 14 Slaves (15 Sets Total), Close Coupled
K-90-119 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde ADS
3-Way Directional Valve
P/N: 90-2200XX-00X

K-90-121
FEATURES
For Use with Kidde ADS Systems

Cost-Effective Option for Protecting
Multiple Hazards
Pneumatic Operation Using Nitrogen
Pilot Cylinder
3-Way Valve Comes Pre-Assembled with Pneumatic

Actuator; Optional Solenoid Available
Nickel-Plated Carbon Steel
Low Loss Three Port Design
UL Listed
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde ADS Series System offers the use of directional valves for protection of multiple hazards from one
central storage bank of agent and nitrogen driver cylinders. When the same set of cylinders are used to protect
different hazards, 3-Way Directional Valves may be
included in the system. Since only one system (i.e., distribution piping and nozzles) can be entered and calculated
at one time, it is necessary to create separate projects
(.flc files) for each configuration. With respect to the
directional valves, separate objects are used for a given
valve size depending on the orientation of the valve. An
open valve is used to allow agent to flow through the
side (branch) outlet of the valve, and a closed valve
would be used to allow agent to flow through the run outlet of the valve. When working with multiple files, the user
should ensure that the type, diameter and length of any
pipes common to more than one project file are identical.
The pipe locking feature is useful here. In addition, the
agent quantity per cylinder and area of the nitrogen
restrictor orifice should be identical.
Note:
Per NFPA 2001In sections where a valve

arrangement introduces sections of closed piping, such sections shall be equipped with pressure relief devices, or the valves shall be
designed to prevent entrapment of liquid. For
pressure relief of manifold arrangements using
directional valves, use a safety outlet (P/N
844346).
PIPING TO HAZARD
Note:
Position switch in photo is not supplied.
PIPING TO HAZARD
AGENT
SOURCE
TOP VIEW
Figure 1. T Flow Position

Valve Position Closed to Hazard
AGENT
SOURCE
TOP VIEW
Figure 2. L Flow Position

Valve Position Open to Hazard
FM-200 Component Description

Pressure Operated Switch

K-90-5180
FEATURES
For Use with UL Listed, ULC Listed and

FM Approved Systems
P/N:
See Kidde Manual 90-FM200M-021 for

USCG Approval
486536
OPERATED
OPERATED
SET
SET
STEM SHOWN IN SET POSITIONPULL UP ON STEM TO MANUALLY

OPERATE SWITCH
0.375"
Kidde
WIRING
SCREW
TERMINALS
4.00"
PRESSURE OPERATED SWITCH

3P.D.T.
8 COVER SCREWS
UL
FM
TO RESET
PUSH STEM TO SET POSITION
15 AMP 125 VAC
10 AMP 250 VAC
3/4 HP 1-2-3 PH 125-480 VAC
4.00"
FRONT VIEW
COVER REMOVED
1/2 SUPPLY PIPE WITH UNION

FRONT VIEW
BOX 3 EACH SIDE

1/2 CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
SWITCH 3PDT
COVER
GASKET
1/2 NPT FEMALE, CONNECT TO SYSTEM PIPING

SIDE SECTION
NOTES
The switch may be mounted in any position; however, the
preferred installation is upright, as shown.
Any load connection to the switch must not exceed the
switch rating, and shall utilize a suitable protection device
(i.e., circuit breaker, fuse).
Contact Ratings (3 PDT):
15 Amp @125 Vac
10 Amp @ 250 Vac
3/4 HP @ 250 Vac
1, 2 or 3 Phase
K-90-5180 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Electric Control Head
K-90-8010
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:
8901XX
This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL,INC. assumes no

responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to work correctly.
contact KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000
K-90-8010
04/02
Printed in USA

Electric Main-to-Reserve Transfer Switch
Effective: July 2002
K-90-8070
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:
802398
MATERIALS
Conduit Box: Steel with Red Enamel Finish

Toggle Switch Lever: Bakelite

K-90-8070
07/02
Printed in USA

Main and Reserve Nameplates
K-90-9010
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:
3103X
MATERIALS
Aluminum with Red Paint Letters

K-90-9010
04/02
Printed in USA

USCG Approval

System (ECS System)
FM-200
Fire Suppression Agent

K-90-1900
FEATURES
Non-Ozone Depleting
Safe for Total Flooding of Occupied Spaces
Clean No Residue to Clean Up
Non-Damaging to Hazard Contents
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
FM-200 (1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane) is a compound of carbon, fluorine and hydrogen (CF3CHFCF3). It
is colorless, odorless and electrically non-conductive. It
suppresses fire by a combination of chemical and physical mechanisms without affecting the available oxygen.
This allows personnel to see and breathe, permitting
them to leave the fire area safely. FM-200 has acceptable
toxicity for use in occupied spaces when used as specified in the United States Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP)
program rules. Although FM-200 is considered non-toxic
to humans in concentrations necessary to extinguish
most fires, certain safety considerations should be
observed when applying and handling the agent. The discharge of FM-200 may create a hazard to personnel from
the undecomposed agent itself and from the decomposition products which result when the agent is exposed to
fire and other hot surfaces. Exposure to the agent is generally of less concern than is exposure to the decomposition products. Unnecessary exposure to the agent or the
decomposition products should be avoided.
Fast Acting
Active Fire Suppression Agent
UL Component Recognized
FM Approved
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual

Research Corporation (FMRC).
USE
FM-200 is used in total flooding fire suppression systems.
It is stored in steel containers, and is super-pressurized
with nitrogen to aid in expelling the agent. The discharge
time is 10 seconds or less. The maximum fill density of
the agent storage is 70 lb./ft. .
3
Table 1. FM-200 Physical Properties

Chemical Formula
170.03
Freezing Point
-204F (-131C)
2.6F (-16.4C)
215.1F (101.7C)
38.76 lb./ft.3 (621 kg/m3)
Critical Density
Critical Pressure
422 PSIA (29.0 bar absolute)
Critical Volume
0.0258 cu.ft./lb. (1.61 L/kg)
TOXICITY
In tests, the acute toxicity of FM-200 was shown to be
equivalent to that of Halon 1301. FM-200 has been evaluated for cardiac sensitization through test protocols
approved by the US EPA. The EPAs SNAP Program
classifies FM-200 as acceptable for use as a total flooding agent in occupied spaces. Refer to the SNAP program rules for more information.
CF3CHFCF3
Molecular Weight
Table 2. FM-200 Fire Protection Properties

Cup Burner Concentration (n-Heptane)
6.70% v/v
Use Concentration for n-Heptane
8.00% v/v
Use Concentration for Acetone
8.30% v/v
Use Concentration for Isopropanol
9.00% v/v
Use Concentration for Toluene
7.00% v/v
CLEANLINESS
Use Concentration for Class A (Surface Fires)*
6.25% v/v
FM-200 is clean, leaves no residue, thereby eliminating

costly after-fire clean-up, and keeping expensive downtime to a minimum. Most materials such as steel, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and other metals as well as
plastics,rubber and electronic components are unaffected
by exposure to FM-200.
*Note: Automatic only per NFPA 2001.
APPROVALS
FM-200 agent complies with the NFPA Standard 2001:
EPA SNAP Program (Significant New Alternate Policy),
Table 3. FM-200 Toxicity Properties

NOAEL
LOAEL
Rev AB
Printed in USA
10.50%
K-90-1900
9.00%
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
900 lb. FM-200 Cylinder

P/Ns 90-100900-001 and 90-100901-001

K-90-9044
FEATURES
Large Capacity FM-200 Cylinder

3-Inch Discharge Valve
Optional Low-Level Switch (P/N 06-118263-001)
DESCRIPTION
Kidde FM-200 900 lb. cylinders store FM-200 superpressurized with dry nitrogen to 360 PSIG at 70F (2.48
Mpa at 21C). The cylinders are painted red and are
equipped with a 3-inch pressure differential valve, pressure gauge, optional liquid level indicator and optional
low-pressure switch assembly. The safety burst disc is
also located on the cylinder head.
OPERATION
The agent storage container discharges when the actuation assembly operates, causing the pressure differential
valve to open. All of the Kidde actuators may be used to
actuate the 900 lb. cylinder. The only exception is the
48650001, which is not compatible with this cylinder
valve.
INSTALLATION
The container is installed in a vertical position with the
valve assembly pointing up. Interconnection to discharge
piping is 3-inch NPT. Interconnection can be via a 3-inch
flex hose (P/N 06-118225-001) or via a suitably pressure
rated groove style fitting.
The container is secured in place by a mounting bracket
(P/N 236125), which must be fixed to a solid wall or strut
assembly. After the container is securely mounted, it is
connected to discharge piping per the directions in the
Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
(P/N 90-FM200M-000).
An optional cylinder supervisory pressure switch (P/N 06118263-001) can be installed on the cylinder valve in the
field if required. This cylinder supervisory pressure switch
has a 1/8-inch NPT connection, which is used on the 3inch valve only.
The part number for ordering the 900 lb. FM-200 cylinder
without the liquid level indicator is 90-100900-001. The
part number for ordering the 900 lb. FM-200 cylinder with
liquid level indicator is 90-100901-001.
FM Approved
UL Listed
TC Approved
MAINTENANCE
DIMENSIONS

event which might affect the reliability of the system.
QUARTERLY INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check the pressure gauges of each agent storage

container. If the pressure gauge indicates a loss in
pressure of 10% or more, then it shall be recharged
or replaced. Pressure varies with temperature, and
this must be taken into account when checking the
pressure gauge. In the range of 55F to 85F (13C
to 29C) the change is approximately 3 PSI per
degree F (0.2 bar per degree C).
Check all components, including supporting hardware, and tighten, repair or replace as required.
Replace any component if at all in doubt of its ability
to perform properly.
VALVE ORIENTATION
PLAN VIEW
70
(1789 mm)
62
(1566 mm)
SAFETY BURST
DISC ASSEMBLY
SEMI-ANNUAL INSPECTION
Qualified personnel should determine the amount of
agent in all containers. The optional liquid level indicator
may be used to measure agent supply and compare it to
the original net weight which is marked on the container
label. If the measured net weight is less than 95% of the
original charged weight the container should be
Inspect all piping, fittings and nozzles for looseness, dirt
or other damage. All outlet piping must be clean and free
of dirt, chips, fillings and other foreign material that may
cause the system to become inoperative or ineffective at
the time of discharge.
SPECIFICATIONS
90-100900-001
90-100901-001
Part Number
imperial
metric
390-900 lb.
178-408 kg
Height
70 in.
1789 mm
Diameter
24 in.
610 mm
13.0 cu. ft.
0.368 cu. m
Fill range
Internal Volume
Empty Weight
505 lb.
ACCESSORIES
Part Number
0 C to 54oC
Safety Relief
Burst Range
800 to 975 PSIG
5.5 to 6.7 Mpa
Construction
Specification
DOT 4BW-500
DOT 4BW-500
06-118225-001
3-inch stainless steel flexible hose
06-118058-001
3-inch swing check valve
236125
Cylinder bracket
06-118263-001
Cylinder supervisory pressure switch

K-90-9044 Rev AB
Description
229 kg
32 F to 130 F
Temperature Range
24
(610 mm)
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
600 lb. FM-200 Cylinder

P/Ns 90-100600-100 and 90-100601-100

K-90-9043
FEATURES
3-Inch Discharge Valve

Optional Low-Pressure Switch (P/N 06-118263-001)
FM Approved
UL Listed
TC Approved
DESCRIPTION
Kidde FM-200 600 lb. cylinders store FM-200 superpressurized with dry nitrogen to 360 psig at 70F (2.48
Mpa at 21C). The cylinders are painted red and are
equipped with a 3-inch pressure differential valve, pressure gauge, optional liquid level indicator and optional
low-pressure switch assembly. The safety burst disc is
also located on the cylinder head.
OPERATION
valve.
INSTALLATION
assembly. After the container is securely mounted it is
design manual.
1.
The part number for ordering the 600 lb. FM-200 cylinder
without liquid level indicator is 90-100600-100. The part
number for ordering the 600 lb. FM-200 cylinder with liquid level indicator is 90-100601-100.
MAINTENANCE
According to NFPA standards the following inspection
2.
Check the pressure gauges of each agent storage

pressure gauge. In the range of 55F to 85F (13C
to 29C) the change is approximately 3 psi per
degree F.
Check all components, including supporting hardware, and tighten, repair or replace as required.
3.
Replace any component if at all in doubt of its ability

DIMENSIONS
Qualified personnel are to determine the amount of agent
in all containers. The optional liquid level indicator may
be used to measure agent supply and compare it to the
original net weight which is marked on the container
VALVE ORIENTATION
PLAN VIEW

SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number
Fill range (lb.)
50.5
58
(1478 mm) (1282 mm)
90-100600-100
90-100601-100
258-600
90-100600-100
90-100601-100
Fill range (kg)
SAFETY BURST
DISC ASSEMBLY
117-272
Height (in.)
58
Height (mm)
1478
Diameter (in.)
22
Diameter (mm)
559
Internal volume
(cu. ft.)
8.68
Internal volume
(cu m)
0.246
Empty weight
(lb.)
362
Empty weight
(kg)
164
Temperature
range
32F to 130F
Temperature
range
0C to 54C
Safety relief
burst range
800 to 975 psig
Safety relief
burst range
5.5 to 6.7 Mpa
Construction
specification
DOT 4BW-500
Construction
specification
OT 4BW-500
22
(559 mm)
ACCESSORIES
Description
Part Number
3-inch Stainless steel flexible

hose
06-118225-001
3-inch Swing check valve
06-118058-001
Cylinder bracket
294651
Cylinder supervisory pressure

switch

K-90-9043 Rev AB
Printed in USA
06-118263-001

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

3-Inch Swing Check Valve

K-90-9040
P/N:
06-118058-001
8.058
3" NPT
FEMALE
53 MAX.
SWING ANGLE
3" NPT
FEMALE
9.360
Note:
The valve must be installed with the arrow

pointing in the direction of flow.
MATERIALS
Valve Body and Cover:
Hex Bolts, Hinge and Hinge Pin:
Brass
Stainless Steel

K-90-9040 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

2-Inch Swing Check Valve

K-90-9042
FEATURES
Low Equivalent Length

For Use with Multiple Cylinder Manifolds
and Main/Reserve Systems
UL Listed
DESCRIPTION
The 2-inch Swing Check Valve is installed at each container (10 through 350 lb. container size) in a multiple cylinder container system to permit removal of containers
while maintaining a closed system. The check valve may
also be installed in main and reserve system configurations. Inlet and outlet connections are 2-inch female NPT.
The check valve can be mounted in an upright horizontal
orientation or a vertical orientation with the outlet at the
top.
OPERATION
In the case of multiple cylinder installations, the check
valve prevents back flow from the manifold in the event
that the system is discharged when one or more cylinders are disconnected, such as when weighing or during
general servicing. In the case of the check valve being
used in a main and reserve configuration, it prevents the
actuation of the reserve system from manifold pressure.
INSTALLATION
The check valve can be installed between zero and
ninety degrees from the horizontal. The check valve must
be installed so that the arrow is pointing in the required
direction of flow.
DIMENSIONS
The part number for ordering the 2-inch swing check
valve is 06-118213-001.
SPECIFICATIONS
4.560
6.310
Valve body and cover: Bronze

Service pressure:
600 psi
2 NPT
2 NPT

K-90-9042
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
3-Inch Flexible Discharge Hose

P/N 06-118225-001

K-90-9045
FEATURES
Stainless Steel Braided

Victaulic Fittings
FM Approved
UL Listed
DESCRIPTION
Stainless Steel flexible hose is used to connect the 3-inch
valve cylinders (both the 600 lb. and 900 lb. cylinders) to
discharge piping. The hose has a victualic fitting at the
cylinder end and a 3-inch male groove fitting to connect
to the piping.
INSTALLATION
The stainless steel flexible braid hose may be installed
horizontally or with a 90 degree bend radius as shown in
the diagram below.
The part number for ordering the 3-inch flexible discharge hose is 06-118225-001.
SPECIFICATION
Material:
FACE OF
PIPE FITTING
Working pressure:
Proof pressure:
Burst pressure:
Convoluted hose with stainless

steel braid overlay
500 psi (3.4 Mpa)
1000 psi (7.0 Mpa)
2000 psi (13.8 Mpa)
DIMENSIONS
54 in.
(1372 mm)
3" MALE SCHEDULE 40

GROOVED FITTING TYP.
Dimensions
A
Note:
in.
mm
in.
mm
33
838
36
914
Dimensions A and B must be maintained in order

to obtain a smooth radius in flexible loop. Hose
may require adapter to connect to system piping.

K-90-9045
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
3-Inch 487 Series

Discharge Valve

K-90-9046
P/N 90-170000-000
FEATURES
Large Capacity Agent Cylinder

FM Approved
UL Listed
DESCRIPTION
The 3-inch 487 series valve is designed to discharge FM200 clean agent. The 3-inch valve is installed on the 600
lb. and 900 lb. FM-200 cylinders, to facilitate high capacity discharge flow from these cylinders. The pressure
relief device for the 3-inch valve is located on the cylinder
head.
OPERATION
The 3-inch 487 series valve can be operated by all existing Kidde control heads, except the 48650001 electric
control head. The 48650001 control head does not have
the capability of operating the 3-inch valve and must not
be used on this component.
Actuation of the control head displaces the valve piston
and agent (in the form of compressed liquid) is allowed to
flow through the discharge port of the valve.
INSTALLATION
The valve must be installed in the cylinder neck ring prior
to cylinder filling. Upon assembly of the valve and siphon
tube arrangement the valve should be torqued to 50-55
Ft-lb. (68-74.5N-m).
The 3-inch valve can be purchased as a separate component to replace existing valves on new style 600 lb. cylinders (sold after 8/01) and 900 lb. cylinders. The part
number for the valve is 90-170000-000. Refer to the parts
table of this sheet for replacement parts when overhauling the cylinder valve.
SPECIFICATION
Valve body:
Brass
Piston:
Brass
Finish:
Natural
Valve seat:
Rubber
360 psig at 70F

(2.48 Mpa at 21C)
Operating temperature range: 32 to 130F (0 to 54C)

Weight:
46 lb. (21 kg)
Outlet:
The following components are required to be replaced
after the cylinder valve has discharged or if existing components show signs of damage or wear and tear. Refer to
the Design Installation Operation and Maintenance manual for full instructions on valve overhaul and maintenance.
Description
Part Number
O-ring, Cap
566102410
O-ring, Piston
566103370
O-ring, Seat
566103400
O-ring, Neck
566103470
923066
Back-up Ring
554003400
DIMENSIONS

K-90-9046 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Supervisory Pressure Switch

(1.5-Inch to 2.5-Inch Valve)

K-90-9047
P/N 06-118262-001
FEATURES
Both Normally Open and Normally Closed

Configuration with One Unit
Suitable for 10 lb. Through 350 lb.
ECS FM-200 Systems
UL Listed
FM Approved
CRUUS Recognized Component (US and Canada)
DESCRIPTION
The cylinder supervisory pressure switch is intended to
detect a fall in pressure in the FM-200 cylinder. The cylinder supervisory pressure switch can be wired for either
normally open or normally closed operation, depending
on installation requirements. This cylinder supervisory
pressure switch can be installed on ECS FM-200 cylinders, 10 lb. through 350 lb. size.
OPERATION
When the pressure in the FM-200 container drops from
the standard charge pressure of 360 psi (25 bar) to below
305 psi (21 bar) the switch operates. If wired in the NC
(open-under-pressure) configuration the resulting pressure drop will cause the contacts to close. When connected to a monitored circuit of a suppression control
panel the switching will result in an alarm or trouble condition.
Note:
If the temperature of the cylinder contents drop

close to a temperature of 32F (0C) or less the
pressure in the cylinder will be equal to or less
than 305 psi (21 bar) and the switch will operate.
However the minimum operating temperature of
the system is 32F (0C).
INSTALLATION
The supervisory pressure switch can be installed on a
fully charged cylinder, without loss of pressure, provided
the unit is handled with care and only by trained service
personnel. Remove the protective cap from the pressure
connection. Do not apply thread compound to the
threads. Install the switch with an 1-1/16 open-ended
wrench while holding the pressure connection with a 7/
16 open-end wrench. Tighten hand-tight, plus one-quarter turn. Leak check using a leak detector or bubbling
solution. Secure switch body with wrench when connecting electrical conduit. Isolate the assembly from shock,
vibration and areas subject to wide-ranging or rapid temperature fluctuations. Disconnect all supply circuits
before wiring the supervisory switch.
The cylinder supervisory pressure switch offers combined normally opened and normally closed functionally.
The part number for ordering the cylinder supervisory
pressure switch is 06-118262-001.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting:
305 psi (21 bar) on

falling pressure
Electrical rating:
5 Amps, 250 Vac
Wire color coding:
Blue = Normally Open
Black = Normally Closed
Violet = Common
Pressure connection:
0.25 SAE 45 flare female
with valve core deflector
Wetted materials:
EPR, Brass Copper
Lead length:
36 in. +/- 2 in.
(914 mm +/- 50 mm)

K-90-9047 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Supervisory Pressure Switch,

3-Inch Valve

K-90-9048
P/N 06-118263-001
FEATURES
Both Normally Open and Normally Closed

Configuration with One Unit
For Use on 3-Inch Valve Cylinders Only
UL Listed
FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
on installation requirements. This switch can be installed
on 3-inch valve cylinders only, i.e., new style 600 lb. cylinders (sold after 8/01) and 900 lb. cylinders.
OPERATION
the standard charge pressure of 360 PSI (25 bar) to
below 305 PSI (21 bar) the switch operates. If wired in
the NC (open-under-pressure) configuration the resulting
pressure drop will cause the contacts to close. When
connected to a monitored circuit of a suppression control
Note:
If the temperature of the container contents drop

to a temperature of 32F (0C) or below, the
pressure in the container will be equal to or less
than 305 PSI (21 bar) and the switch will operate.
However, the minimum operating temperature of
INSTALLATION
fully charged container, without loss of pressure, provided the unit is handled with care and only by trained
service personnel. Remove the protective plug in the
pressure port fitting by holding the fitting with an 5/8
open-end wrench and removing the plug with another
wrench. Apply Permacel #412D Teflon tape to the male
switch threads and while maintaining the wrench on the
fitting install the switch. Tighten using a 1-1/16 open-end
wrench. Leak check using a leak detector or bubbling
solution. Secure switch body with wrench when connecting electrical conduit. Isolate the assembly from shock,
vibration and areas subject to wide-ranging or rapid temperature fluctuations. Disconnect all supply circuits
before wiring the supervisory switch.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting:
305 PSI (21 bar) on

falling pressure
Electrical rating:
5 Amps, 250 Vac
Wire color coding:
Violet = Common
0.125-27 NPT male
connector
Wetted materials:
EPR, Brass Copper
Lead length:
36 in. +/- 2 in.
(914 mm +/- 50 mm)

All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
K-90-9048 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Supervisory Pressure Switch, Explosion Proof
(European Approval)

K-90-9051
P/N 06-118398-001
FEATURES
ATEX Approved. Ref Directive 94/9EC
DESCRIPTION
on 3-inch valve cylinders only, i.e., new style 600 lb. cylinders (sold after 8/01) and 900 lb. cylinders.
FACTORY SEALED
LEADWIRES
72" LONG (1829 mm)
1/2 NPT MALE
OPERATION
Note:

INSTALLATION
5.50 in.
(140 mm)
1.25 in. (32 mm)

DIA.
1/8 NPT MALE
TECHNICAL DATA

pressure port fitting by holding the fitting with an 5/8-inch
wrench. Apply Permacel #412D Teflon tape to the male
switch threads and while maintaining the wrench on the
fitting install the switch. Tighten using a 1-1/16-inch openend wrench. Leak check using a leak detector or bubbling solution. Secure switch body with wrench when
connecting electrical conduit. Isolate the assembly from
shock, vibration and areas subject to wide-ranging or
rapid temperature fluctuations. Disconnect all supply circuits before wiring the supervisory switch.
Approvals:
Cenlec Flame Proof Construction
per EExd d IIC T6
DEMKO A/S Certified to ATEX Directive
Flameproof Equipment
Enclosure:
NEMA 4X, 7 and 9
Switch Output:
One SPDT, Factory Sealed
Leadwires
Set Point:
305 PSIG on fall
Temperature Rating: -130F to 650F (-90C to
340C)
Electrical Rating:
5A @ 250 Vac, Resistive and
3A Inductive @ 28A
FM-200 is a registered trademark of the Great Lakes Chemical Corporation..

K-90-9051 Rev AD
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Supervisory Pressure Switch, Explosion Proof
1-1/2 Inch Thru 2-1/2 Inch Valves (European Approval)

K-90-9052
P/N 06-118537-001
FEATURES
ATEX Approved. Ref Directive 94/9EC
DESCRIPTION
onto 10 lb. through 350 lb. cylinders only.
FACTORY SEALED
LEADWIRES
72" LG. (18.29 mm)
E/C: ST/ST
1/2 NPT MALE (Dn15)
OPERATION
Note:

INSTALLATION
5.50 in.
(140 mm)
1.250 DIA. (32.0 mm)
0.25 SAE 45o FLARE
TECHNICAL DATA
The supervisory pressure switch can be installed, by

trained service personnel only, onto a normally pressurized container, without loss of pressure. The pressure
switch port connection is located opposite the valve outlet. Remove the protective cap from the pressure switch
port. Secure the pressure port with a wrench, to prevent
turning the fitting within the valve body, and attach the
supervisory switch. Tighten the switch connection a
turn past hand tight. Leak test the connection with a leak
detector or a bubble solution. Secure the switch body
with a wrench when connecting electrical conduit. Disconnect all power circuits before wiring the supervisory
switch.
Approvals:
Cenlec Flame Proof Construction
per EExd d IIC T6
DEMKO A/S Certified to ATEX Directive
Flameproof Equipment
Classification:
NEMA 4X, 7 and 9; IP66
Switch Output:
One SPDT, Factory Sealed
Leadwires
Set Point:
305 PSIG on fall
Temperature Rating: -130F to 650F (-90C to
340C)
Electrical Rating:
5A @ 250 Vac, Resistive and
3A Inductive @ 28A
Enclosure:
316 Stainless Steel
Wire Color:
Red = Normally Closed
Brown = Common
Green = Ground
FM-200 is a registered trademark of the Great Lakes Chemical Corporation..

K-90-9052 Rev AC
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Cylinder and Valve Assemblies 10 lb. (4.5 kg) to
70 lb. (31.7 kg) Capacity, Vertical Mount Only

K-90-2010
FEATURES
For Use with UL Listed, ULC Listed

and FM Approved Systems
See Kidde Manual 90-FM200M-021

for USCG Approval
P/N: 90-10000X0-001
Dimensions
Part Number
CYLINDER VALVE
SAFETY CAP
Cyl. Size
A*
B*
C*
90-100010-001
10 lbs.
7.07
13.34
17.30
90-100020-001
20 lbs.
7.07
21.01
24.97
90-100040-001
40 lbs.
9.00
22.80
26.76
90-100070-001
70 lbs.
9.00
34.87
38.83
*Dimensions are iin inches.
SYPHON TUBE
MATERIALS
C
CYLINDER
Valve Body:
Cylinder:
Brass
Steel, Painted Red
B
A
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
The safety cap must be installed on the valve outlet at all times, except when the cylinders are connected to the
system piping, or being filled. The safety cap must not be removed from its chain.
See K-90-2070 for additional information.
Cylinders are vertical mount only.

K-90-2010
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Cylinder and Valve Assembly,

125 lb. (56.7 kg) Capacity

K-90-2030
FEATURES

P/N: 90-10012X-001
VALVE OUTLET
30
PLAN VIEW
SAFETY CAP
Part Number
Description
90-100121-001
w/LLI
90-100125-001
STD
MATERIALS
CYLINDER VALVE
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR
Valve Body:
Cylinder:
Brass
Steel, Painted Red
LIFTING LUGS
CYLINDER
35.93
31.97
CYLINDER
NAMEPLATE
12,75 DIA
Notes:
1.
2.
The safety cap must be installed on the valve outlet

at all times, except when the cylinders are connected to the system piping, or being filled. The
safety cap must not be removed from its chain.

K-90-2030
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920



K-90-2040
FEATURES


for USCG Approval
Part Number
Description
90-100200-101
STD
90-100201-101
w/LLI
MATERIALS
Valve Body:
Cylinder:
Brass
Steel, Painted Red
Notes:
1.
2.


K-90-2040
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920



K-90-2050
FEATURES


for USCG Approval
VALVE OUTLET
30
Part Number
Description
90-100350-001
STD
90-100351-001
w/LLI
PLAN VIEW
MATERIALS
SAFETY CAP
CYLINDER VALVE
LIQUID LEVE
LIFTING LUGS
Valve Body:
Cylinder:
Brass
Steel, Painted Red
CYLINDER
58.36"
53.14"
CYLINDER
NAMEPLATE
16.00" DIA
Notes:
1.
2.


K-90-2050 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Flexible Discharge Hoses

K-90-2120
FEATURES


for USCG Approval
HOSE
FM-200 CYLINDER VALVE
CONNECTION, SWIVEL NUT
SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTION,

MALE NPT THREAD
TECHNICAL DATA
Minimum Bursting Pressure:

Working Pressure:
Proof Pressure:
MATERIALS
Hose:
Fitting:
2000 PSI
500 PSI
1000 PSI
Reinforced Rubber Hose

Brass
Part Number
Male NPT
Min. Bend
Radius
283898
24
10.5
283899
31
13.5
283900
48
22.5
Note: Dimensions are in inches.

K-90-2120 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Manifold El-Check

K-90-2130
FEATURES


for USCG Approval
MATERIALS
Valve Body:
Check:
Seat:
Zinc Plated Steel

Stainless Steel
Nitrile Rubber
VALVE BODY
C
FOR CONNECTION TO
SYSTEM MANIFOLD
ARROW INDICATES
FLOW DIRECTION
Part
Number
SIze
A*
B*
C*
877690
3.93
4.88
211 NPT
878743
4.69
5.76
28 NPT
CHECK
Note: Dimensions are in inches.
Note:
El-Checks are to be installed at system manifold

in vertical direction, as shown.
Do not use as a main/reserve check valve
with more than one main/reserve cylinder.

K-90-2130 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Cylinder Valve

K-90-2080
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems

for USCG Approval
TECHNICAL DATA
P/N: 90-1X0000-000
CAP
BODY
360 to 609 PSIG

1000 PSIG
2000 PSIG
1F to 130F
Equivalent Length in Schedule 40 Pipe
SLAVE CYLINDER
ACTUATION PORT
Working Pressure:
Proof Pressure:
Burst Pressure:
Temperature Range:
1/8" NPT
1"
16.7' of 1"
SAFETY
DISC
2"
28.0' of 2"
2"
3.5' of 2"
PRESSURE
GAGE
B
SAFETY CHAIN
ACTUATION PORT
MATERIALS
CONTROL HEAD
CONNECTION
VENT HOLE
DISCHARGE
OUTLET PORT
PISTON
Valve Body:
Piston:
Finish:
Seat:
Brass
Brass
Natural
Rubber
SUPERVISORY
PRESSURE
SWITCH
CONNECTION
SAFETY
CAP
SEAT
Part Number
Valve
Size
90-140000-000
1"
7.63"
4.83"
5.22"
754-900 PSI
242461
9.9 lb.
90-150000-000
2"
8.80"
5.32"
6.28"
798-972 PSI
264925
15 lb.
90-160000-000
2"
10.04"
6.30"
6.61"
798-972 PSI
264929
24 lb.

K-90-2080 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Valve Outlet Adapters

K-90-2100
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems

for USCG Approval
P/N: 28390X
B (VALVE OUTLET CONNECTION)
A (SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTION)
Note:
For direct connection of cylinder valve to distribution piping.
MATERIAL
Brass
Part
Number
Size
A*
B*
C*
D*
283904
1
11 NPT
1.874
12 UNJ
2.69
2.50 HEX
283905
2
11 NPT
2.500
12 UNJ
3.12
3.00 HEX
283906
2
8 NPT
3.00
12 UNJ
3.00
3.75 HEX
*Note: Dimensions are in inches.

K-90-2100 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Liquid Level Indicator

K-90-2110
FEATURES


for USCG Approval
CAP
GRADUATED TAPE
P/N: SEE TABLE
READING TAKEN AT TOP
EDGE OF FITTING
IN MAGNETIC INTERLOCK
POSITION READY TO TAKE
READING.
O-RING
P/N: WK-566109-160
Cylinder
LLI Tape Part Number
125
235681
200
283894
350
283894
600
283894
BRASS TUBE
TAPE INSIDE
BRASS TUBE
FM-200
CYLINDER
FM-200
LIQUID LEVEL
MAGNETIC END OF
TAPE ENGAGES
IN MAGNETIC FIELD
OF FLOAT WHEN
TAPE IS PULLED
UP TO TAKE READING.
MAGNET EMBEDDED
IN FLOAT
FLOAT - FLOATS ON SURFACE
OF LIQUID FM-200.
FREE TO MOVE UP OR DOWN
OUTSIDE OF BRASS TUBE.
RETAINER - FLOAT RESTS

HERE WHEN CYLINDER
IS EMPTY.

K-90-2110 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Typical Installation of El-Check

K-90-2131
FEATURES

for USCG Approval
Note:
Install El-Checks so that the arrow is in the direction, as indicated.

The El-Check may be adjusted, as shown, to obtain a smooth radius for a Flexible Discharge Hose.

K-90-2131 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

360 Degree Pendant Nozzle

K-90-2140
FEATURES
For Use with UL, ULC


for USCG Approval
P/N: 90-19402X-XXX
IN .093 .031 HIGH

CHARACTERS ON ANY FLAT
A
KI
360 DEGREE NOZZLE

Pipe Size
1/2" (12.20mm)
3/4" (19.05mm)
1"
(25.40mm)
1-1/4" (31.75mm)
1-1/2" (38.10mm)
2"
(50.80mm)
Note:
A
1.250"
1.500"
1.750"
2.250"
2.250"
3.000"
(31.75mm)
(38.10mm)
(44.45mm)
(57.15mm)
(63.50mm)
(76.20mm)
B
1.468"
1.578"
1.718"
1.950"
2.000"
2.062"
(37.28mm)
(40.08mm)
(43.63mm)
(49.53mm)
(50.80mm)
(52.37mm)
1.937"
2.125"
2.375"
2.750"
2.937"
3.125"
(49.19mm)
(53.97mm)
(60.32mm)
(69.85mm)
(74.59mm)
(79.37mm)
D
1.250"
1.500"
1.750"
2.250"
2.500"
3.000"
(31.75mm)
(38.10mm)
(44.45mm)
(57.15mm)
(63.50mm)
(76.20mm)
A selection of orifices are available for each

nozzle size. Consult your Kidde design and
installation manual for details.

K-90-2140 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

180 Degree Pendant Nozzle

K-90-2150
FEATURES
For Use with UL, ULC


for USCG Approval
P/N: 90-19401X-XXX
METAL STAMP X-XXX (DASH NO.)

IN .093 .031 HIGH CHARACTERS
ON ANY FLAT
D
C
A
B
KIDDE
60
30
180 DEGREE NOZZLE

Pipe Size
1/2" (12.20mm)
3/4" (19.05mm)
1"
(25.40mm)
1-1/4" (31.75mm)
1-1/2" (38.10mm)
2"
(50.80mm)
Note:
A
1.250"
1.500"
1.750"
2.250"
2.250"
3.000"
(31.75mm)
(38.10mm)
(44.45mm)
(57.15mm)
(63.50mm)
(76.20mm)
B
1.250"
1.375"
1.562"
1.750"
1.950"
1.968"
(31.75mm)
(34.92mm)
(39.67mm)
(44.45mm)
(48.89mm)
(49.98mm)
C
1.687"
1.950"
2.218"
2.656"
2.950"
2.875"
(42.84mm)
(48.89mm)
(56.33mm)
(67.46mm)
(74.93mm)
(73.02mm)
D
2.000"
2.296"
2.671"
3.250"
3.625"
3.656"
(50.80mm)
(58.31mm)
(67.84mm)
(82.55mm)
(92.07mm)
(92.86mm)
A selection of orifices are available for each

nozzle size. Consult your Kidde design and
installation manual for details.

K-90-2150 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Pilot Actuation Fittings

K-90-5040
FEATURES
For Use with UL, ULC and FM Approved Systems

USCG Approval
MATERIAL
Brass

K-90-5040 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Nitrogen Pilot Cylinder, Bracket and Adapter

K-90-5050
FEATURES
P/N:

USCG Approval
877940
MATERIAL
Cylinder:
Valve:
Bracket:
Adapter:
Steel, Painted Black

Brass
Brass

K-90-5050 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

1/4-Inch Flexible Actuation Hoses

K-90-5070
FEATURES
P/N:

USCG Approval
26498X
TECHNICAL DATA

Operating Pressure:
Test Pressure:
Minimum Bend Radius:
MATERIALS
Hose:
Couplings:
12000 PSIG
3000 PSIG
4500 PSIG
2.5 Inches
Wire Braided, Teflon Lining (CRES T304)

Brass

K-90-5070 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Master Cylinder Adapter Kit

K-90-5080
FEATURES
P/N:

USCG Approval
844895
MATERIALS
Adapter and Cap:
Chain:
Label:
Brass
Stainless Steel
Mylar

K-90-5080 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Discharge Indicators

K-90-5160
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems

USCG Approval
3.25"
(83mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
BODY
CAP
P/N 967082
3"
NPT MALE
4
1.12"(29mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
STEM
2.62"
(67mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
BODY
P/N 875553
1"
2 NPT MALE
CAP
STEM-RED
0.93"(24mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
MATERIALS
Body (P/N 967082): Brass
Body (P/N 875553): Aluminum
Caps:
Clear Cellulose Acetate
Size
Description
Part Number
3/4"
Brass
967082
1/2"
Aluminum
875553

K-90-5160 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Safety Outlets

K-90-5170
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems

USCG Approval
RETAINING NUT
SAFETY DISC
SEAL WIRE
BODY
1.78"
(45mm)
3"
4
PART
NUMBER
803242
844346
MATERIALS
Body and Retaining Nut:
Seal Wire:
AGENT
N 2/CO 2
FM-200
NPT MALE
PRESSURE RELIEF
OPERATES AT
PSI
BAR
2400-2800
166-193
750-900
52-62
Brass
Copper and Lead

K-90-5170 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920


K-90-5180
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:

USCG Approval
486536
OPERATED
OPERATED
SET
SET

OPERATE SWITCH
0.375"
Kidde
WIRING
SCREW
TERMINALS
4.00"

3P.D.T.
8 COVER SCREWS
UL
FM
TO RESET
15 AMP 125 VAC
10 AMP 250 VAC
3/4 HP 1-2-3 PH 125-480 VAC
4.00"
FRONT VIEW
COVER REMOVED
1/2 SUPPLY PIPE WITH UNION

FRONT VIEW
BOX 3 EACH SIDE

1/2 CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
SWITCH 3PDT
COVER
GASKET
1/2 NPT FEMALE, CONNECT TO SYSTEM PIPING

SIDE SECTION
NOTES
The switch may be mounted in any position; however, the
preferred installation is upright, as shown.
Any load connection to the switch must not exceed the
switch rating, and shall utilize a suitable protection device
(i.e., circuit breaker, fuse).
Contact Ratings (3 PDT):
15 Amp @125 Vac
10 Amp @ 250 Vac
3/4 HP @ 250 Vac
1, 2 or 3 Phase
K-90-5180 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Pressure Operated Switch, Explosion Proof

K-90-5190
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:

USCG Approval
981332
NOTES
The toggle switch may be mounted in the base for

either N.O. to N.C. or N.C. to N.O. contact transfer
upon operation. The illustration above shows the
position of the toggle when the switch is in the set
position.
Any load connected to the switch must not exceed

the switch rating and shall utilize a suitable protection
device (i.e., circuit breaker, fuse).
Remove the operating head to make electrical connections to the toggle switch. When replacing the
operating head, ensure that the toggle engages the
clutch. Tighten the cover screws securely.
Class I, Group D Caution: To prevent ignition of hazardous atmospheres, disconnect the device from the
supply circuit before opening. Keep the assembly
tightly close when in operation.

K-90-5190 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920


K-90-6011
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N: 8901XX
.750 NPT TO FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT ADAPTER
FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
PLUS OR HOT
CONNECTION
(TERMINAL #3)
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
FOR MICROSWITCH
(TERMINAL #2)
MINUS, NEUTRAL,
OR GROUND CONNECTION
(TERMINAL #1)
TERMINAL STRIP
MICROSWITCH
SWIVEL NUT
MICROSWITCH LEVER
CAM
INDICATOR AND
RESET STEM
PART
NUMBER
890181
890149
890165
CONTROL HEAD
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
24 VDC
125 VDC
115 VAC
2.0A
0.3A
1.0A

K-90-6011 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920


K-90-8010
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N: 8901XX

K-90-8010 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Electric and Cable Operated Control Head
with Explosion Proof Solenoid

K-90-8040
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems

K-90-8040 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920


K-90-8070
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N: 802398
MATERIALS
Conduit Box:
Toggle Switch Lever:
Steel with Red Enamel Finish

Bakelite

K-90-8070 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Cylinder Mounting Straps

K-90-8130
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
CYL. O.D.
PART
NO.
CYL.
SIZE
283945
10, 20
7.07
1.80
6.48
165
9.62
244
8.62
219
1.00
25
2.78
71
.437
11.1
283934
40, 70
9.00
229
8.16
207
11.69
297
10.69
272
1.00
25
3.50
89
.437
11.1
292971
200
pre-3/98
13.60
345
13.09
332
17.06
433
15.44
392
1.75
44
6.06
154
.625
15.9
235317
125, 200
12.75
324
12.93
329
16.18
411
14.56
370
1.75
44
5.59
142
.625
15.9
281866
350
16.00
406
15.5
394
19.5
495
17.88
454
1.75
44
6.06
154
.625
15.9
294651
600
22.00
559
21.56
548
25.75
654
24.12
613
1.75
44
10.25
260
.625
15.9
236125
900
24.00
610
23.75
603
27.75
705
26.00
660
1.75
44
12.13
308
.625
15.9
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
MATERIALS
Steel, Painted Black SAE 1020
K-90-8130 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920


K-90-9010
FEATURES

FM Approved Systems
P/N:

USCG Approval
3103X
MATERIALS

K-90-9010 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Novec-1230 Fire Protection

System
Kidde Engineered
Fire Suppression System
Designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid
Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid Data Sheet
Effective: March 2007

K-45-1900
FEATURES
People Safe at Concentration Levels Required to

Extinguish Fire
Zero Ozone Depletion Potential
Atmospheric Lifetime of Five Days
Colorless, with Low Odor and No Particulate or Oily
Residue Allowing for Minimal Business Disruption
After a Discharge
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid is a fluorinated
ketone (FK-5-1-12) Dodecafluoro-2-methylpentan-3-one)
compound
of
carbon,
fluorine
and
oxygen
(CF3CF2C(O)CF(CF3)2). It is colorless, electrically nonconductive and has a low odor. It suppresses fire primarily by physical mechanisms due to its relatively high heat
capacitywith minimal effect on the available oxygen. This
allows people to see and breathe, permitting them to
leave the fire area safely.
Novec 1230 fluid is acceptable for use in occupied
spaces when used in accordance with the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Significant New
Alternatives Policy (SNAP) program rules.
Although Novec 1230 fluid is considered non-toxic to
humans in concentrations necessary to extinguish most
fires, certain safety considerations should be observed
when applying and handling the agent. The discharge of
Novec 1230 fluid may create a hazard to people from the
decomposition products which result when the agent is
exposed to fire or other hot surfaces. Exposure to the
agent is generally of less concern than is exposure to the
decomposition products. Unnecessary exposure to the
agent or the decomposition products should be avoided.
TOXICITY
Unnecessary exposure to clean agents is to be avoided
in accordance with the requirements of NFPA-2001. As
such, upon operation of a system pre-discharge alarm,
all personnel should immediately exit the protected
space. In no case shall personnel remain in a room in
which there is a fire. In the very unlikely instance where a
clean agent system should discharge unexpectedly into
an occupied room, all personnel should proceed in a
calm and orderly manner to an exit and leave the room.
Novec 1230 fluid has been evaluated for cardiac sensitization in accordance with test protocols approved by the
United States Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.
EPA). The EPAs SNAP Program classifies Novec 1230
Electrically Non-Conductive
Space Saving; Quantity of Agent Needed to Extinguish Fires Typically Required Minimal Cylinders,
thus Minimal Space Required
fluid as acceptable for use as a total flooding agent in

occupied spaces with specific limitations. Refer to the
SNAP program rules or NFPA 2001 for more information.
Novec 1230 fluid has been judged acceptable by the U.S.
EPA for use in occupied spaces when used in accordance with the guidance of NFPA 2001. In accordance
with NFPA 2001, Novec 1230 fluid designed for use with
agent vapor concentrations up to ten volume percent in
air are permitted. See NFPA 2001, Sect. 1-6, Safety.
Although Novec 1230 fluid has negligible toxicity in concentrations needed to suppress most fires, certain safety
considerations must be observed when applying and
handling the agent. For example, Novec 1230 fluid is a
liquid at room temperature and has been superpressurized with dry nitrogen. Upon release to atmospheric pressure (e.g., from nozzles) the liquid flash evaporates at a
low temperature. Thus, nozzles must be located to avoid
direct impingement on personnel.
DECOMPOSITION
When Novec 1230 fluid is exposed to high temperatures,
such as what may be expected in a flame front, hazardous products of thermal decomposition (halogen acids)
are produced. If the Novec 1230 fluid is discharged in 10
seconds or less, flames will be extinguished rapidly and
the amount of by-products produced will be minimal.
CLEANLINESS
Novec 1230 fluid is clean and leaves no residue, thereby
eliminating costly after-fire clean-up and keeping expensive downtime to a minimum. Most materials such as
steel, stainless steel, aluminum, brass and other metals
as well as plastics, rubber and electronic components are
unaffected by exposure to Novec 1230 fluid.
APPROVALS
Novec 1230 fluid complies with the NFPA Standard 2001,
EPA SNAP Program, (Significant New Alternate Policy),
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) FM Approvals (FM).
USE
Kidde Engineered Fire Suppression Systems Designed

for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid are
designed to extinguish fires in specific hazards or equipment located where an electrically non-conductive agent
is required, where agent cleanup creates a problem,
where extinguishing capability with low weight is a factor
and where the hazard is normally occupied by personnel.
Novec 1230 fluid is an acceptable alternative to Halon
and is approved by the EPA and NFPA for use in fire suppression systems.
Table 1: Novec 1230 Fluid Physical Properties
Table 3: Novec 1230 Fluid Design

Concentrations
Fuel
Design Concentration, % v/v
1-Butane
6.37
1-Propanol
7.02
2,2,4-trimethylpentane
6.11
2-butoxyethanol
6.76
Acetone
5.59
Acetonitrile
4.20
Chemical Formula
CF3CF2C(O)CF(CF3)2
Molecular Weight
316.04
Commercial Heptane
5.72
Freezing Point
-162.4F (-108C)
Commercial Hexanes
5.59
120.6F (49.2C)
Cyclohexane
5.85
335.6F (168.7C)
Cyclopentanone
5.98
Denatured Alcohol
(92.2% EtOH, 4.6% IPA,
and 3.1% MeOH)
6.89
0.0251 ft.3/lbm (494.5 cc/mole)
Diesel Fuel
4.42
Diethl Ether
6.37
Global Warming Potential
Ethanol
7.15
Ethyl Acetate
6.11
Gasoline-87 oct.
unleaded
5.85
Hexene
5.98
Isooctane
6.11
Isopropanol Alcohol
6.37
Methane
7.28
Methanol
8.45
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
5.85
Methyl Isobutyl Ketone
5.72
Methyl Tert Butyl Ether
5.95
n-Heptane
5.85
n-Pentane
6.11
Octane
5.72
Propane
7.54
Pyrrolidine
6.11
Critical Density
Critical Pressure
Critical Volume
39.91 lb./ft.3 (639.1 kg/m3)

270.44 PSIA (1865 kPA)
Table 2: Novec 1230 Fluid Toxicity Properties

Novec 1230 Fluid Toxicity Properties
NOAEL
LOAEL
10.0%
10.0% >
-2-
Table 3: Novec 1230 Fluid Design

Concentrations (Continued)
Fuel
Design Concentration, % v/v
Technical Heptane
5.59
Tetrahydrofuran
6.50
Toluene
4.55
Transformer Oil
5.85
Minimum Design Concentration for Class A and deenergized Class C Fires = 4.2%
Design concentrations for Class B Fire are shown in
the above table and include a 30% safety factor from
the minimum extinguishing concentration.
-3-
Kidde is a registered trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

3M and Novec are trademarks of 3M.
K-45-1900 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9044
900 lb. Cylinder Data Sheet

FEATURES
Large Capacity Cylinder

3-inch Discharge Valve
Optional Low-level Switch (P/N 06-118263-001)
P/Ns: 90-100900-001 AND 905-100901-001

DESCRIPTION
Kidde Engineered Fire Suppression System 900 lb. cylinders store 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid
super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to 360 PSIG at 70F
(2.48 Mpa at 21C). The cylinders are painted red and
are equipped with a 3-inch pressure differential valve,
pressure gauge, optional liquid level indicator and
optional low-pressure switch assembly. The safety burst
disc is also located on the cylinder head.
OPERATION
P/N 48650001, which is not compatible with this cylinder
valve.
INSTALLATION
assembly. After the container is securely mounted, it is
Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
(P/N 45-N1230M-001).
field, if required. This cylinder supervisory pressure
switch has a 1/8-inch NPT connection, which is used on
the 3-inch valve only.
The part number for ordering the Kidde Engineered System 600 lb. cylinder without liquid level indicator is
45-100600-001. The part number for ordering the Kidde
Engineered System 600 lb.cylinder with liquid level indicator is 45-100601-001.
FM Approved
UL Listed
TC Approved
DIMENSIONS
MAINTENANCE
1. Check the pressure gauges of each agent storage
pressure gauge.
2. Check all components, including supporting hardware, and tighten, repair or replace as required.
3. Replace any component if at all in doubt of its ability
VALVE ORIENTATION
PLAN VIEW
70 in.
(1789 mm)
62 in.
(1566 mm)

SAFETY BURST
DISC ASSEMBLY

ACCESSORIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Fill Range
300-900 lb.
(178-408 kg)
Height
708 in.
(1789 mm)
Diameter
242 in.
(610
Internal Volume
Description
Part Number
06-118225-001
06-118058-001
Cylinder bracket
236125
06-118263-001
13 ft.3
(0.368 m3)
Empty Weight
505 lb.
(229 kg)
Temperature Range
0F to 130F
(-18C to 54C)
Safety Relief Burst Range
800 to 975 PSIG

(5.5 to 6.7 Mpa)
Construction Specification
DOT 4BW-500

K-45-9044 Rev AB
24 in.
(610 mm)
Printed in USA


400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9043
600 lb. Cylinder Data Sheet

FEATURES
3-inch Discharge Valve

Optional Low-Pressure Switch (P/N 06-118263-001)
P/Ns: 45-100600-100 AND 45-100601-100

DESCRIPTION
Kidde Engineered Fire Suppression System 600 lb. cylinders store 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid
super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to 360 PSIG at 70F
(2.48 Mpa at 21C). The cylinders are painted red and
are equipped with a 3-inch pressure differential valve,
pressure gauge, optional liquid level indicator and
optional low-pressure switch assembly. The safety burst
disc is also located on the cylinder head.
OPERATION
valve.
INSTALLATION
assembly. After the container is securely mounted it is
design manual.
The part number for ordering the Kidde Engineered System 600 lb. cylinder without liquid level indicator is 45100600-001. The part number for ordering the Kidde
Engineered System 600 lb.cylinder with liquid level indicator is 45-100601-001.
FM Approved
UL Listed
TC Approved
DIMENSIONS
MAINTENANCE
1. Check the pressure gauges of each agent storage
pressure gauge.
2. Check all components, including supporting hardware, and tighten, repair or replace as required.
3. Replace any component if at all in doubt of its ability
VALVE ORIENTATION
PLAN VIEW
50.5 in.
(1283 mm)
58 in.
(1473 mm)
SAFETY BURST
DISC ASSEMBLY
SPECIFICATIONS
22 in.
(559 mm)
ACCESSORIES
Description
06-118225-001
06-118058-001
Cylinder bracket
Fill Range
258-600 lb.
(117-272 kg)
Height
58 in.
(1478 mm)
Diameter
22 in.
(559 mm)
Internal Volume
8.68 ft.3
(0.246 m3)
Empty Weight
294651
06-118263-001
362 lb.
(164 kg)
Temperature Range
0F to 130F
(-18C to 54C)
Safety Relief Burst Range
800 to 975 PSIG

(5.5 to 6.7 Mpa)
Construction Specification
DOT 4BW-500

K-45-9043 Rev AB
Part Number
Printed in USA


400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9040
3-inch Swing Check Valve Data Sheet

P/N: 06-118058-001
8.06 in.
(205 mm)
3" NPT
FEMALE
53MAX.
SWING ANGLE
3" NPT
FEMALE
9.30 in.
(236 mm)
Note:
The valve must be installed with the arrow pointing in the direction of flow.
MATERIALS
Valve Body and Cover: Brass
Hex Bolts, Hinge, and Hinge Pin: Stainless Steel

K-45-9040
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9042
2-inch Swing Check Valve Data Sheet

FEATURES
Low Equivalent Length

For Use with Multiple Cylinder Manifolds and Main/
Reserve Systems
UL Listed
P/N: 06-118213-001
DESCRIPTION
The 2-inch Swing Check Valve is installed at each container (10 through 350 lb. container size) in a multiple cylinder container system to permit removal of containers
while maintaining a closed system. The check valve may
also be installed in main and reserve system configurations. Inlet and outlet connections are 2-inch female NPT.
The check valve can be mounted in an upright horizontal
orientation or a vertical orientation with the outlet at the
top.
OPERATION
In the case of multiple cylinder installations, the check
valve prevents back flow from the manifold in the event
that the system is discharged when one or more cylinders are disconnected, such as when weighing or during
general servicing. In the case of the check valve being
used in a main and reserve configuration, it prevents the
actuation of the reserve system from manifold pressure.
INSTALLATION
The check valve can be installed between zero and
ninety degrees from the horizontal. The check valve must
be installed so that the arrow is pointing in the required
direction of flow.
The part number for ordering the 2-inch swing check
valve is 06-118213-001.
DIMENSIONS
4.56 in.
(116 mm)
6.31 in.
(160 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Valve body and cover: Bronze
Service pressure: 600 PSI
2 NPT
2 NPT

K-45-9042
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9045
3-inch Flexible DIscharge Hose Data Sheet

FEATURES
Stainless Steel Braided

Victaulic Fittings
FM Approved
UL Listed
P/N: 06-118225-001
DESCRIPTION
Stainless Steel flexible hose is used to connect the 3-inch
valve cylinders (both the 600 lb. and 900 lb. cylinders) to
discharge piping. The hose has a vittaulic fitting at the
cylinder end and a 3-inch male groove fitting to connect
to the piping.
INSTALLATION
The stainless steel flexible braided hose may be installed

horizontally or with a 90 degree bend radius as shown in
the diagram below.
The part number for ordering the 3-inch flexible discharge hose is 06-118225-001.
SPECIFICATION
B
FACE OF
PIPE FITTING
Material:
Convoluted hose with stainless

steel braid overlay
Working pressure:
500 PSI (3.4 Mpa)
Proof pressure:
1000 PSI (7.0 Mpa)
Burst pressure:
2000 PSI (13.8 Mpa)
DIMENSIONS
54 in.
(1372 mm)
3" MALE SCHEDULE 40

GROOVED FITTING TYP.
Dimensions
A
33 in. (838 mm)
36 in. (914 mm)
Note:
Dimensions A and B must be maintained in order

to obtain a smooth radius in flexible loop. Hose
may require adapter to connect to system piping.
K-45-9045
Rev AB
Printed in USA

Kidde Fire Systems
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9046
3-inch Discharge Valve Data Sheet

FEATURES
Large Capacity Agent Flow

P/N: 45-170000-000
FM Approved
UL Listed
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
The 3-inch 487 series valve is designed to discharge
3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid. The 3-inch
valve is installed on the 600 lb. and 900 lb. Kidde Engineered cylinders, to facilitate high capacity discharge
flow from these cylinders. The pressure relief device for
the 3-inch valve is located on the cylinder head.
Valve body:
Brass
Piston:
Brass
Finish:
Natural
Valve Seat:
Rubber
OPERATION
360 PSIG at 70F

(2.48 Mpa at 21C)
Operating temperature
range:
32 to 130F (0 to 54C)
Weight:
46 lb. (21 kg)
Outlet:
The 3-inch 487 series valve can be operated by all existing Kidde control heads, except the 48650001 electric
control head. The 48650001 control head does not have
the capability of operating the 3-inch valve and must not
be used on this component.
Actuation of the control head displaces the valve piston
and agent (in the form of compressed liquid) is allowed to
flow through the discharge port of the valve.
INSTALLATION
The valve must be installed in the cylinder neck ring prior
to cylinder filling. Upon assembly of the valve and siphon
tube arrangement the valve should be torqued to 50-55
ft.-lb. (68-74.5N-m).
The 3-inch valve can be purchased as a separate component to replace existing valves on 600 lb. cylinders and
900 lb. cylinders. The part number for the valve is
45-170000-000. Refer to the parts table of this sheet for
replacement parts when overhauling the cylinder valve.
The following components are required to be replaced
after the cylinder valve has discharged or if existing components show signs of damage or wear and tear. Refer to
the Design Installation Operation and Maintenance manual for full instructions on valve overhaul and maintenance.
Description
Part Number
O-ring, Cap
566102410
O-ring, Piston
566103370
O-ring, Seat
566103400
O-ring, Neck
566103470
923066
Back-up Ring
554003400
DETAILED DRAWING
Pilot Check
923066-000
Valve Cap
Pilot Check Spring

230640-000
Valve Cap O-Ring
566102-410
Spring
Piston O-Ring
566103-370
Back-Up Teflon Ring
554003-400
Piston
Retainer O-Ring
566103-400
Safety Cap
Supervisory Pressure
Switch Connection
Refill Part
(1/2-inch NPT Thread)
Neck O-Ring
566103-470
Retainer
06-235924-001
Inner Piston O-Ring

566101-170

K-45-9046 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9047
Supervisory Pressure Switch, 1-1/2-inch to 2-inch

Valve Data Sheet
FEATURES
Both Normally Open and Normally Closed Configuration with One Unit
Suitable for 10 lb. through 350 lb. Kidde Engineered
Systems
P/N: 06-118262-001
DESCRIPTION
detect a fall in pressure in the Kidde Engineered System
cylinder. The cylinder supervisory pressure switch can be
wired for either normally open or normally closed operation, depending on installation requirements. This cylinder supervisory pressure switch can be installed on
Kidde Engineered System cylinders, 10 lb. through 350
lb. size.
UL Listed
FM Approved
Leak check using a leak detector or bubbling solution.

Secure switch body with wrench when connecting electrical conduit. Isolate the assembly from shock, vibration
and areas subject to wide-ranging or rapid temperature
fluctuations. Disconnect all supply circuits before wiring
the supervisory switch.
OPERATION
When the pressure in the Kidde Engineered System container drops from the standard charge pressure of 360
PSI (25 bar) to below 305 PSI (21 bar) the switch operates. If wired in the NC (open-under-pressure) configuration the resulting pressure drop will cause the contacts to
close. When connected to a monitored circuit of a suppression control panel the switching will result in an alarm
or trouble condition.
Note:

the system is 0F (-18C).
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting:
305 PSI (21 bar) on falling pressure
Electrical rating:
5 Amps, 250 Vac
Wire color coding:

Violet = Common
32 to 130F (0 to 54C)
0.25 in. SAE 45 flare female with

valve core deflector
Wetted materials:
EPR, Brass Copper
Lead length:
36 in. 2 in. (914 mm 50 mm)
INSTALLATION
fully charged cylinder, without loss of pressure, provided
the unit is handled with care and only by trained service
personnel. Remove the protective cap from the pressure
connection. Do not apply thread compound to the
threads. Install the switch with an 1-1/16 inch openended wrench while holding the pressure connection with
a 7/16 inch open-end wrench. Tighten hand-tight, plus
one-quarter turn.
K-45-9047
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-9048
Supervisory Pressure Switch, 3-inch Valve

Data Sheet
FEATURES
Both Normally Open and Normally Closed Configuration with One Unit
For Use on 3-inch Valve Cylinders Only
P/N: 06-118263-001
DESCRIPTION
detect a fall in pressure in the Kidde Engineered System
cylinder. The cylinder supervisory pressure switch can be
wired for either normally open or normally closed operation, depending on installation requirements. This cylinder supervisory pressure switch can be installed on 3inch valve cylinders only, i.e., 600 lb. and 900 lb. cylinders.
UL Listed
FM Approved
Leak check using a leak detector or bubbling solution.

Secure switch body with wrench when connecting electrical conduit. Isolate the assembly from shock, vibration
and areas subject to wide-ranging or rapid temperature
fluctuations. Disconnect all supply circuits before wiring
the supervisory switch.
OPERATION
When the pressure in the Kidde Engineered System container drops from the standard charge pressure of 360
PSI (25 bar) to below 305 PSI (21 bar) the switch operates. If wired in the NC (open-under-pressure) configuration the resulting pressure drop will cause the contacts to
close. When connected to a monitored circuit of a suppression control panel the switching will result in an alarm
or trouble condition.
Note:

the system is 0F (-18C).
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting:
305 PSI (21 bar) on falling pressure

pressure port fitting by holding the fitting with an 5/8 inch
wrench. Apply Permacel #412D Teflon tape to the
male switch threads and while maintaining the wrench on
the fitting install the switch. Tighten using a 1-1/16 inch
open-end wrench.
Electrical rating:
5 Amps, 250 Vac
Wire color coding:

Violet = Common
32 to 130F (0 to 54C)
0.25-27 in. NPT male connector
Wetted materials:
EPR, Brass Copper

Lead length:
36 in. 2 in. (914 mm 50 mm)
INSTALLATION
K-45-9048
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2010
Cylinder and Valve Assemblies, 10 lb. to 70 lb.

Capacity, Vertical Mount Only Data Sheet
FEATURES
For Use with UL Listed, ULC Listed and FM Approved

Systems
P/N: 45-10000X0-001
Part Number
CYLINDER VALVE
SAFETY CAP
Cylinder
Size
Dimensions
A
45-100010-001
10 lb.
7.07 in.
13.34 in.
17.30 in.
45-100020-001
20 lb.
7.07 in.
21.01 in.
24.97 in.
45-100040-001
40 lb.
9 in.
22.80 in.
26.76 in.
45-100070-001
70 lb.
9 in.
34.87 in.
38.83 in.
MATERIALS
SYPHON TUBE
C
CYLINDER
Valve Body:
Brass
Cylinder:
Steel, Painted Red
Note:
1. The safety cap must be installed on the valve outlet
at all times, except when the cylinders are connected
to the system piping, or being filled. The safety cap
must not be removed from its chain.
2. See K-45-2070 for additional information.
3. Cylinders are vertical mount only.
K-45-2010
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2030
Cylinder and Valve Assemblies, 125 lb. Capacity

Cylinder Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 45-10012X0-001
CYLINDER VALVE
SAFETY CAP
LIQUID LEVEL
INDICATOR
LIFTING LUGS
Part Number
Description
45-100121-001
with LLI
45-100125-001
STD
MATERIALS
35.93 in.
(913 mm)
CYLINDER
31.97 in.
(812 mm)
Valve Body:
Cylinder:
Brass
Steel, Painted Red
CYLINDER
NAMEPLATE
12.75 in. DIA
(324 mm)
Note:

K-45-2030
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2040

Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 45-10020X-001
VALVE OUTLET
Part Number
Description
45-100200-001
STD
45-100201-001
with LLI
30
MATERIALS
PLAN VIEW
SAFETY CAP
CYLINDER VALVE
Valve Body:
Brass
Cylinder:
Steel, Painted Red
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR

LIFTING LUGS
CYLINDER
50.35 in.
(1279 mm)
CYLINDER
NAMEPLATE
45.13 in.
(1146 mm)
12.75 in. DIA.

(324 mm)
Note:
K-45-2040
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2050

Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 45-10035X-001
VALVE OUTLET
30
Part Number
Description
45-100350-001
STD
45-100351-001
with LLI
MATERIALS
PLAN VIEW
SAFETY CAP
CYLINDER VALVE
Valve Body:
Brass
Cylinder:
Steel, Painted Red
LIQUID LEVEL
INDICATOR
LIFTING LUGS
CYLINDER
58.36 in.
(1482 mm)
CYLINDER
NAMEPLATE
53.14 in.
(1350 mm)
16.00 in. DIA.

(406 mm)
Note:

K-45-2050
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2080
Cylinder Valve Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 45-1X0000-000
TECHNICAL DATA
CAP
BODY
SLAVE CYLINDER
ACTUATION PORT
1/8" NPT
A
Working Pressure:
360 to 609 PSIG
Proof Pressure:
1000 PSIG
Burst Pressure:
2000 PSIG
Temperature Range:
0F to 130F (-18C to 54C)
SAFETY
DISC
PRESSURE
GAUGE
MATERIALS
B
SAFETY CHAIN
ACTUATION PORT
VENT HOLE
CONTROL HEAD
CONNECTION
DISCHARGE
OUTLET PORT
Valve Body:
Brass
Piston:
Brass
Finish:
Natural
Seat:
Rubber
PISTON
SUPERVISORY
PRESSURE
SWITCH
CONNECTION
SAFETY CAP
SEAT
P/N
Valve Size
45-140000-000
1-1/2 in.
7.63 in.
(194 mm)
4.83 in.
(123 mm)
5.22 in.
(133 mm)
754-900 PSI
(52-62 bar)
242461
9.9 lb.
(4.5 kg)
45-150000-000
2 in.
8.80 in.
(224 mm)
5.32 in.
(135 mm)
6.28 in.
(159 mm)
798-972 PSI
(55-67 bar)
264925
15 lb.
(6.8 kg)

K-45-2080
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2100
Valve Outlet Adapters Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 28390X
B
(VALVE OUTLET CONNECTION)
(SYSTEM PIPE CONNECTION)
Note: For direct connection of cylinder valve to distribution piping.
Part Number
Size
283904
1-1/2 in.
(38 mm)
1-1/2 in. (38 mm)

11-1/2 in. NPT
1-7/8 in.
12 UNJ
2-11/16 in.
(68 mm)
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm) Hex
238905
2 in.
(51 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)

11-1/2 NPT
2-1/2 in. (64 mm)

12 UNJ
3-1/8 in.
(79 mm)
3 in.
(76 mm) Hex
MATERIALS
Brass

K-45-2100
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2110
Liquid Level Indicator Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
CAP
GRADUATED TAPE
READING TAKEN AT TOP
EDGE OF FITTING
Liquid Level Indicator (LLI)

Tape Part Number
Cylinder
235681
125 lb.
283894
200 lb.
283894
350 lb.
283894
600 lb.
(TAPE IN MAGNETIC
INTERLOCK POSITION
READY TO TAKE READING)
O-RING
P/N: WK-566109-160
BRASS TUBE
TAPE INSIDE
BRASS TUBE
CYLINDER
MAGNETIC END OF
TAPE ENGAGES
IN MAGNETIC FIELD
OF FLOAT WHEN
TAPE IS PULLED
UP TO TAKE READING
AGENT
LIQUID LEVEL
MAGNET EMBEDDED
IN FLOAT
FLOAT - FLOATS ON SURFACE
OF LIQUID AGENT.
FREE TO MOVE UP OR DOWN
OUTSIDE OF BRASS TUBE
RETAINER - FLOAT RESTS

HERE WHEN CYLINDER
IS EMPTY

K-45-2110
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2130
Manifold El-Check Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
MATERIALS
P/N: 877690 and 878743

A
Valve Body:
Zinc Plated Steel
Check:
Stainless Steel
Seat:
Nitrile Rubber
VALVE BODY
C
FOR CONNECTION TO
SYSTEM MANIFOLD
Part
Number
Size
877690
2 in.
(51 mm)
3-15/16 in.
(100 mm)
4-7/8 in.
(124 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
11-1/2 in. NPT
878743
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm)
4-11/16 in.
(119 mm)
5-3/4 in.
(146 mm)
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm)
8 in. NPT
ARROW INDICATES
FLOW DIRECTION
Note:
CHECK
El-Checks are to be installed at system manifold

in vertical direction as shown.
Do not use as a main/reserve check valve
with more than one main/reserve cylinder.

K-45-2130
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2131
Typical Installation of El-Check Installation

Detail Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
15 MAX
Horizontal C
MANIFOLD
EL-CHECK
VERTICAL CL
MANIFOLD
PIPE
15 MAX
ARROW INDICATES
FLOW DIRECTION
Note:
15 MAX
FLEX HOSE
Install El-Checks so that the arrow is in the direction as indicated.

The El-Check may be adjusted, as shown, to obtain a smooth radius for a Flexible Discharge Hose.

K-45-2131
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2140
360 Degree Pendant Nozzle Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N 45-1946XX-XXX
-XXX
Note:
A selection of orifices are available for each nozzle size and make. Cinsult the Kidde Engineered Fire Suppression System Design, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual for details.
Dimension
Pipe Size
A
1/4 in. (6 mm)
1.91 in. (49 mm)
1.03 in. (26 mm)
0.88 in. (22 mm)
3/8 in. (10 mm)
2.03 in. (52 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
1.19 in. (30 mm)
1/2 in. (13 mm)
2.25 in. (57 mm)
1.13 in. (29 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm)
3/4 in. (19 mm)
2.69 in. (68 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm)
1.63 in. (41 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
2.88 in. (73 mm)
1.63 in. (41 mm)
1.94 in. (49 mm)
1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
3.29 in. (83 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)
2.38 in. (60 mm)
1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
3.63 in. (92 mm)
2.25 in. (57 mm)
2.69 in. (68 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)
4.50 in. (114 mm)
3 in. (76 mm)
3.50 in. (89 mm)
Note:
Nozzles are offered in either Stainless Steel or Brass.

K-45-2140
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-2150
360 Degree Pendant Nozzle Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N 45-1946XX-XXX
-XXX
Note:
A selection of orifices are available for each nozzle size and make. Cinsult the Kidde Engineered Fire
Suppression System Design, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual for details.
Dimension
Pipe Size
A
1/4 in. (6 mm)
1.91 in. (49 mm)
1.03 in. (26 mm)
0.88 in. (22 mm)
3/8 in. (10 mm)
2.03 in. (52 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
1.19 in. (30 mm)
1/2 in. (13 mm)
2.25 in. (57 mm)
1.13 in. (29 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm)
3/4 in. (19 mm)
2.69 in. (68 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm)
1.63 in. (41 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
2.88 in. (73 mm)
1.63 in. (41 mm)
1.94 in. (49 mm)
1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
3.29 in. (83 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)
2.38 in. (60 mm)
1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
3.63 in. (92 mm)
2.25 in. (57 mm)
2.69 in. (68 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)
4.50 in. (114 mm)
3 in. (76 mm)
3.50 in. (89 mm)
Note:
Nozzles are offered in either Stainless Steel or Brass.

K-45-2150
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5010
Pressure Operated Control Head Data Sheet

FEATURES
P/N: 878737
1.00" HEX
1/8"-27 NPT
PRESSURE INLET
PISTON
2.19 in.
(56 mm)
SWIVEL NUT
SET
OPERATED
1.250-18
UNEF-3B
1.50 in.
(38 mm)
HEX
MATERIALS
Body (Retaining Nut and Piston):
Brass

K-45-5010
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5040
Pilot Actuation Fittings Data Sheet

FEATURES
P/Ns: 6992-0503, 6992-0501, and 6992-0505
MALE ELBOW
MALE BRANCH TEE
1/8" NPT X 5/16" TUBING

P/N 6992-0503

P/N 6992-0505
MALE CONNECTOR
P/N 6992-0501
MATERIAL
Brass

K-45-5040
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5050
Nitrogen Pilot Cylinder, Bracket, and Adapter

Data Sheet
FEATURES
P/N: 877940
MATERIAL
GAUGE
Cylinder:
Valve:
Brass
Bracket:
Adapter:
Brass
PLUG
OUTLET PORT1/8" NPT
FEMALE
SAFETY
OUTLET
ATTACH ADAPTER HERE
1/8" NPT
MALE
5/16"-TUBING MALE
ADAPTER
P/N WK-699205-010
1-18 NF-3
FOR CONTROL HEAD CONNECTION
CYLINDER P/N WK-877940-000
SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder Capacity:
108 in.3 (1770 cm3)
Safety Outlet Burst Range:
2650 to 3000 PSI (183 to 207 bars) at 70F (21C)
Nitrogen:
NITROGEN-BB-n-411b, Grade A, Type 1
1800 PSI (124 bars) at 70F (21C)
BRACKET P/N WK-877845-000
16.00 in.
(406 mm)
3.56 in.
(90 mm)

K-45-5050
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5070
1/4 in. Flexible Actuation Hoses Data Sheet

FEATURES
P/N: 26498X
A
0.625" HEX SWIVEL

NUT (BRASS)
1.38 in.
(35 mm)
HOSE - 1/4" I.D.
5/16" TUBING COUPLING

(BOTH ENDS)
Part Number
Dimension A
264986
30 in. (762 mm)
264987
22 in. (559 mm)
TECHNICAL DATA
MATERIALS
12000 PSIG
Hose:
Wire Braided, Teflon Lining (CRES T304)
Operating Pressure:
3000 PSIG
Couplings:
Brass
Test Pressure:
4500 PSIG
Minimum Bend Radius:
2-1/2 in.

K-45-5070
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5080
Master Cylinder Adapter Kit Data Sheet

FEATURES
P/N: 844895
1/4" MALE NPT x
5/16" TUBING
PROTECTION CAP
CAUTION
INSTALL CAP
WHEN
NOT IN
USE
LABEL
1.42 in.
(36 mm)
MATERIALS
Adapter and Cap:
Brass
Chain:
Stainless Steel
Label:
Mylar

K-45-5080
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5160
Discharge Indicators Data Sheet

FEATURES
For Use with UL Listed, ULC Listed, and FM Approved

Systems
P/N: 967082 AND 875553

3.25 in.
(83 mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
CAP
BODY
STEM
3/4 NPT MALE

1.12 in. (29 mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
P/N 967082
2.62 in.
(67 mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
BODY
CAP
1/2 NPT MALE

0.93 in. (24 mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
MATERIALS
Valve Body: Brass
Gasket: Iron
Flanges, Bolts, and Nuts: Steel
STEM-RED
P/N 875553
Part Number
Size
Description
967082
3/4 in.
Brass
875553
1/2 in.
Aluminum

K-45-5160
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5170
Safety Outlets Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 803242 AND 844346
RETAINING NUT
SAFETY DISC
SEAL WIRE
BODY
1.78 in.
(45 mm)
3/4 NPT MALE
Part Number
Agent
Pressure Relief Operates At:
803242
Nitrogen/CO2
2400 to 2800 PSI (166 to 193 bar)
844346
Novec 1230 Fluid
750 to 900 PSI (52 to 62 bar)
MATERIALS
Body and Retaining Nut: Brass
Seal Wire: Copper and Lead

K-45-5170
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5180
Pressure Operated Switch Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 486536
FRONT VIEW
STEM SHOWN IN SET POSITION.
PULL UP ON STEM TO OPERATE
SWITCH. TO RESET, PUSH STEM
DOWN TO SET POSITION.
FRONT VIEW
COVER REMOVED
4 - 0.25 IN.
MOUNTING HOLES
OPERATED
SET
SET

3P.D.T.
WIRING
SCREW
TERMINALS
4.00 in.
(102 mm)
OPERATED
UL
FM
4.00 in.
(102 mm)
NOTES:
15 AMP 125 VAC
10 AMP 250 VAC
3/4 HP 1-2-3 PH 125-480 VAC
1/2 SUPPLY PIPE

WITH UNION
SWITCH 3PDT
BOX; 3 CONDUIT
KNOCKOUTS EACH
SIDE
COVER
GASKET
1/2 NPT FEMALE;

CONNECT TO SYSTEM
SIDE SECTION PIPING
Notes:
The switch may be mounted in any position, however, the preferred installation is upright, as shown.
Any load connection to the switch must not exceed
the switch rating, and shall utilize a suitable protection device (i.e., circuit breaker, fuse)
Contact Ratings (3 PDT)

15 Amp @ 125 Vac
10 Amp @ 250 Vac
3/4 HP @ 250 Vac
1, 2, or 3 Phase

K-45-5180
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-5190

Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 981332
STEM IN OPERATED POSITION
1" NPT FEMALE BOTH ENDS
FOR ELECTRIC CONNECTION.
SWITCH SUPPLIED WITH
2 - 1" NPT PIPE PLUGS
4.37 in.
(111 mm)
STEM IN SET POSITIONPULL UP ON STEM TO

MANUALLY OPERATE SWITCH
TO RESET PUSH
STEM TO SET
POSITION
SET
CLUTCH
6.31 in.
(160 mm)
3 POLE
SINGLE
THROW
TOGGLE
SWITCH
POSITION
3 POLE
PRESSURE
OPERATED
EXPLOSION
PROOF
SWITCH
9.00 in.
(229 mm)
UL
LISTED 472M
SIGNAL SWITCH
FOR USE IN
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
6 COVER SCREWS
KIDDE-FENWAL INC.
400 MAIN STREET
ASHLAND, MA 01721
EXPLOSION PROOF
MACHINED JOINT.
DO NOT USE GASKET
OR MAR SURFACES.
2 - 13/32" MOUNTING HOLES
3.50 in.
(89 mm)
GAS
INLET
OPERATING HEAD
30 AMP 250 VAC

20 AMP 600 VAC
2 HP 110-600 V
3 PHASE AC
UNION CONNECTION
PRESSURE INLET - 1/2" NPT FEMALE
4.18 in.
(106 mm)
Notes:
The toggle switch may be mounted in the base for

either N.O. to N.C. or N.C. to N.O. contact transfer
upon operation. The illlustration above shows the
position of the toggle when the switch is in the set
position.
Any load connected to the switch must not exceed
the switch rating, and shall utilize a suitable protection device (i.e., circuit breaker, fuse)
Remove the operating head to make electrical connections to the toggle switch. When replacing the
operating head, ensure that the toggle engages the
clutch. Tighten the cover screws securley.
Class I, Group D Caution: To prevent ignition of hazardous atmospheres, disconnect the device from the
supply circuit before opening. Keep the assembly
tightly close when in operation.

K-45-5190
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-6011
Electric Control Head Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 8901XX
0.750 NPT TO
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ADAPTER
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
PLUS OR HOT
CONNECTION
(TERMINAL #3)
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
FOR MICROSWITCH
(TERMINAL #2)
MINUS, NEUTRAL,
(TERMINAL #1)
TERMINAL STRIP
MICROSWITCH
SWIVEL NUT
MICROSWITCH LEVER
CAM
INDICATOR AND RESET STEM

K-45-6011
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-8010
Electric Control Head Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 8901XX
CONNECTION FOR FLEXIBLE
ELECTRIC CONDUIT3/4" NPT FEMALE
LOCKING PIN
SEAL WIRE
PU
6.18 in.
(157 mm)
ELECTRIC
CONTROL HEAD
VOLTS
AMPS
PART NO.
INDICATOR AND
RESET STEM
TO RESET
USE SCREWDRIVER
SET
LOCAL MANUAL
RELEASE LEVER
SWIVEL NUT
1.50 in. (38 mm) HEX
1"-18 NF-3 THREAD
RELEASED
MADE IN U. S. A.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN STREET
ASHLAND, MA 01721
4.00 in.
(102 mm)
Part Number
Voltage
890181
24 Vdc
2.0 Amps
890149
125 Vdc
0.3 Amps
890165
115 Vac
1.0 Amps

K-45-8010
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-8040
Electric and Cable Operated Control Head with

Explosion Proof Solenoid Data Sheet
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 897494 AND 897560

ELECTRIC CONDUIT 1/2" NPT
FEMALE
OPERATING SOLENOID
UL LISTED FOR USE IN
THE FOLLOWING HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS:
CLASS GROUP OP. TEMP.
I
C
-13F TO 150F
(-25C TO 65C)
I
D
-40F TO 150F
(-40C TO 65C)
II E,F,G -40F TO 150F
(-40C TO 65C)
CONNECTING WIRES
36.00 in. (914 mm) LONG
7.38 in.
(187 mm)
PU
FOR
MAINTENANCE
SEE
INSTRUCTIONS
PART NO.
SEAL WIRE
AMPS
VOLTS
CABLE
PULL
HZ
TO RESET
ELECTRIC
CONTROL HEAD
RELEASED
USE SCREWDRIVER
MADE IN U.S.A.
SET
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN STREET
ASHLAND, MA 01721
INDICATOR AND
RESET STEM
LOCKING PIN
CONNECTION FOR
REMOTE PULL BOX
PIPE OR CONDUIT
3/8" NPS MALE
LOCAL MANUAL
RELEASE LEVER
CONNECTION FOR CABLE

HOUSING TO SECOND
CONTROL HEAD IF USED
3/8" NPS FEMALE USE
PNEUMATIC CONTROL
HEAD CABLE HOUSINGS.
4.94 in.
(125 mm)
SWIVEL NUT
1.50 in.(38 mm) HEX
1.25 in.-18 NF-3 THREAD
Part Number
Voltage
Power Consumption
897494
24 Vdc
33.0 Watts
897560
120 Vac
15.4 Watts

K-45-8040
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-8070
Electric Main-to-Reserve Transfer Switch Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 802398
3/4 NPT FEMALE
FOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
NAMEPLATE
WITH LOGO
MAIN
5.37 in.
(136 mm)
TOGGLE
SWITCH
LEVER
SWITCH-DOUBLE
POLE DOUBLE THROW
2-COVER SCREWS
4.62 in.
(117 mm)
6-CONNECTION
TERMINALS
TOGGLE
GUARDS
RESERVE
CONDULET BOX
2.75 in.
(70 mm)
2.12 in.
(54 mm)
2.50 in.
(64 mm)
WIRING DIAGRAM
MATERIALS
Conduit Box: Steel with Red Enamel Finish
Toggle Switch Lever: Bakelite
30 Amps @ 120 Vac

K-45-8070
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered

K-45-8130
Cylinder Mounting Straps Data Sheet

FEATURES

Systems
P/Ns: 235317, 236125, 281866, 283934, 283945, and 294651

B
E
A
F (hole size)
C
D
Part
Number
Cylinder
Size
Cylinder
O.D.
Dimension
A
Dimension
B
Dimension
C
Dimension
D
Dimension
E
Dimension
F
283945
10 lb. to
20 lb.
7.07 in.
(180 mm)
6.48 in.
(165 mm)
9.62 in.
(224 mm)
8.62 in.
(219 mm)
1 in.
(25 mm)
2.78 in.
(71 mm)
0.437 in.
(11 mm)
283934
40 lb.,
70 lb.
9 in.
(229 mm)
8.16 in.
(207 mm)
11.69 in.
(297 mm)
10.69 in.
(272 mm)
1 in.
(25 mm)
3.50 in.
(89 mm)
0.437 in.
(11 mm)
235317
125 lb.,
200 lb.
12.75 in.
(324 mm)
12.93 in.
(329 mm)
16.18 in.
(411 mm)
14.56 in.
(370 mm)
1.75 in.
(44 mm)
5.59 in.
(142 mm)
0.625 in.
(16 mm)
281866
350 lb.
16 in.
(406 mm)
15.50 in.
(394 mm)
19.50 in.
(495 mm)
17.88 in.
(454 mm)
1.75 in.
(44 mm)
6.06 in.
(154 mm)
0.625 in.
(16 mm)
294651
600 lb.
22 in.
(559 mm)
21.56 in.
(548 mm)
25.75 in.
(654 mm)
24.12 in.
(613 mm)
1.75 in.
(44 mm)
10.25 in.
(260 mm)
0.625 in.
(16 mm)
236125
900 lb.
24 in.
(610 mm)
23.75 in.
(603 mm)
27.75 in.
(705 mm)
26 in.
(660 mm)
1.75 in.
(44 mm)
12.13 in.
(308 mm)
0.625 in.
(16 mm)
MATERIALS
Steel, Painted Black SAE 1020
K-45-8130
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde Engineered
Main and Reserve Nameplates Data Sheet

K-45-9010
FEATURES

Systems
P/N: 3103X
5.00 in.
(127 mm)
MAIN
1.62 in.
(41 mm)
2, 0.28 in.(7mm) DIA.

MOUNTING HOLES
P/N 31033
5.00 in.
(127 mm)
RESERVE
1.62 in.
(41 mm)
2, 0.28 in.(7mm) DIA.

MOUNTING HOLES
P/N 31034
MATERIALS

K-45-9010
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
CO2 Component Description

75 lb. and 100 lb. Carbon Dioxide Cylinders

K-81-1010
TYPE "I" CYLINDER

VALVE
THREAD FOR
DISCHARGE HEAD
CONTROL
PORT
SAFETY DISC
ASSEMBLY
THREAD FOR
PROTECTION CAP
CYLINDER
SIPHON TUBE
Pressure Ratings:
Working Pressure = 1800 psig
Maximum Pressure at T = 130F = 2250 psig
Hydrostatic Test Pressure = 3000 psig
PART
NUMBER
CYLINDER
870287
75 lb.
870269
FOR ADDITIONAL DATA,

SEE K-81-1030 FOR P/N - SEE TABLE

04/02
2002 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
60.0"
9.25"
62.0"
10.50"
5/8"
MATERIALS
CYLINDER: STEEL
VALVE: SEE K-81-1050 FOR 5/8"
SIPHON TUBE: ALUMINUM
K-81-1010
VALVE
TYPE
Printed in U.S.A.
100 lb.

25 lb. thru 50 lb. Carbon Dioxide Cylinders,
Bent Siphon Tube
CONTROL
PORT

K-81-1020
TYPE "I" CYLINDER

VALVE
THREAD FOR
DISCHARGE HEAD
SAFETY DISC
ASSEMBLY
NAMEPLATE
THIS LINE UP IF
CYLINDER NOT VERTICAL
THREAD FOR
PROTECTION
CAP (35 LB, AND
50 LB CYL INDERS ONLY)
CYLINDER
BENT SIPHON
TUBE
MATERIALS
CYLINDER: STEEL
VALVE: SEE K-81-1040 FOR 1/2"
SIPHON TUBE: ALUMINUM
FOR ADDITIONAL DATA,
SEE K-81-1030

K-81-1020
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
PART
NUMBER
CYLINDER
870486
25 lb.
982547
35 lb.
982548
50 lb.
VALVE
TYPE
1/2"
30.0"
8.50"
40.0"
8.50"
55.0
8.50
CO2 General Information

K-81-1030
Carbon Dioxide Cylinder D
PART
NUMBER
870269
870287
982548
982547
870486
PART
NUMBER
870269
870287
982548
982547
870486
CY LINDER CO2
CAPACITY
LBS
KG
100
75
50
35
25
45.3
34.0
22.6
15.8
11.3
DIM. "B"
(DIAMETER)
VALVE
SIZE
5/8"
5/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
SAFETY
DISC
RED
RED
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE
CY LINDER
VOLUME
04/02
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
BENT
BENT
BENT
IN
MM
62
60
55
40
30
1570
1520
1390
1010
760
NOMINAL CHGD.
WEIGHT
IN
MM
IN3
M3
LBS
KG
10.50
9.25
8.50
8.50
8.50
266
234
215
215
215
4070
3055
2300
1510
1040
0.0667
0.0501
0.0377
0.0247
0.0170
288
204
155
114
84
130.6
92.9
70.3
51.7
38.1

K-81-1030
DIM. "A"
(HEIGHT)
SIPHON
TUBE
Printed in U.S.A.
DOT
CY LINDER
SPECIFICATION
3AA-2300
3AA-2300
3A-2015
3A-2015
3A-2015

Type "I" Cylinder Valve, 1/2" With Typical Cylinder
P/N: 981372
MATERIALS
VALVE BODY: BRASS
VALVE SEAT: BRASS
SLEEVE: BRASS
SLEEVE RETAINER: BRASS
MAIN CHECK: BRASS WITH RUBBER SEAT
PILOT CHECK: STAINLESS STEEL WITH RUBBER SEAT
PRESSURE RATING:
2400 PSIG TO 2800 PSIG (165 BAR TO 193 BAR)

K-81-1040
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1040

Type "I" Cylinder Valve, 5/8" With Typical Cylinder
P/N: 840253
MATERIALS
VALVE BODY: BRASS
VALVE SEAT: BRASS
SLEEVE: BRASS
SLEEVE RETAINER: BRASS
MAIN CHECK: BRASS WITH RUBBER SEAT
PILOT CHECK: STAINLESS STEEL WITH RUBBER SEAT
PRESSURE RATING:
2400 PSIG TO 2800 PSIG (165 BAR TO 193 BAR)

K-81-1050
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1050

Discharge Head, Grooved-Nut and Plain-Nut
Effective: June 2002

K-81-9130
FEATURES
Grooved-Nut Discharge Head (P/N 872442)

Plain-Nut Discharge Head (P/N 872450)
Plain-Nut Discharge Head is Used on Each
Cylinder of a Mulitple-Cylinder System
Grooved-Nut Discharge Head is Used for a Single

CO2 Cylinders That Are Connected to Single Main
and Reserve Systems
See Datasheets K-1060, K-1070 and K-1071 for
More Information
DESCRIPTION
Each CO2 cylinder and valve assembly must be equipped
with a Discharge Head at installation to actuate the cylinder
valve. The Discharge Head is assembled to the top of the
cylinder valve and contains a spring-loaded piston, which,
when actuated by CO2 pressure, is designed to depress
the main check in the valve and discharge the contents of
the cylinder. The piston provides the necessary mechanical
advantage to open the main check on the valve. The transfer outlet is designed to mate with the swivel adapter on the
1/2 and 3/4 Flexible Discharge Hoses (P/Ns 252184 and
251821 respectively). The Discharge Head also contains
an integral Stop Check thats function is to automatically
prevent the loss of CO2 during system discharge in the event
that a cylinder is removed from the distribution piping.
The Grooved-Nut Discharge Head will allow discharge of
CO2 when the I-Valve is actuated by a control head. Pressure entering the outlet will not actuate the cylinder. Pressure actuation is isolated only to that single cylinder.
The Plain-Nut Discharge Head offers two means of actuation: the contents of the cylinder can be discharged by pressure entering the outlet from the pressure in the manifold
being discharged from a master cylinder, or, when the
I-Valve is actuated by a control head. The Plain-Nut Discharge Head is used on each cylinder of a multiple-cylinder
system.
INSTALLATION
1. Wipe off the cylinder valve sealing surface.
2. Verify that the O-Rings are installed in the mating surface grooves at the bottom of the swivel nut cavity.
O-rings must be free of dirt and other contaminants.
The o-rings are pre-greased at the factory and should
not require further greasing.
3. Ensure that the pilot orifice located between the inner
and outer o-ring is unobstructed.
4. Ensure that the discharge port is clean and unobstructed.
5. Install the discharge head on the cylinder valve. Tighten
securely.
Note:
The CO2 cylinder must be permanently connected

into the system piping. Never attach the discharge
head to the cylinder valves until the cylinders are
secured in brackets or racking. Under no circumstances is the discharge heads to remain attached
to the cylinder valve after removal from service,
during shipment, handling, storage or during filling.
MAINTENANCE
MONTHLY:
Inspect the CO2 Discharge Head for cracks, corrosion,
grime, etc. Ensure that the discharge head is tightly secured to the CO2 cylinder valve and connected to the agent
cylinder with the 1/2 or 3/4 Discharge Hose. If any defects
are found during the monthly inspection, immediately contact Kidde Distributor to service the systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: Brass
O-Rings: Rubber
Spring: Stainless Steel
Stop Check: Brass
Weight: 4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)
DIMENSIONS
3.81"
(97mm)
PISTON
BALL RETAINER
STOP
CHECK
BALL CHECK
SPRING
3.94"
(100mm)
DISCHARGE OUTLET
3/4" NPS
SET
POSITION
2 1/2 - 14N-3
OPERATED
POSITION
OUTER O-RING
P/N 242466
SWIVEL NUT
(FOR CONNECTION
TO CYLINDER VALVE)
INNER 0-RING
P/N 242467
STEM
Figure 1. Discharge Head, Plain-Nut
Figure 2. Discharge Head, Grooved-Nut

K-81-9130
06/02
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Printed in USA

K-81-1090
Flex Hose - 3/4
P/N: 251821
16.4"
SWAGED OR CRIMPED
HOSE
MALE COUPLING
FEMALE SWIVEL COUPLING
3/4" NPT
3/4" NPS
MINIMUM BURST PRESSURE: 11000 PSI (758 BAR)

HYDROTEST: 4000 PSI (276 BAR)
TEMPERATURE RATING: -40F TO +200F (-40C TO

K-81-1090
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1110
Vent Nozzle, Type V
P/Ns:
81-930067-000
81-919309-000
81-803327-000
81-929242-000
81-803328-000
81-915876-000
81-803329-000
81-214721-000 thru 81-214729-000
1.125
(29 MM)
HEX
NOZZLE CODE NUMBER

STAMPED HERE
1/2" NPT FEMALE
ARROW SHOWS
DIRECTION OF FLOW
1.690
(43 MM)
STRAINER-INCLUDED
IN TYPE "V" NOZZLES
WITH NOZZLE CODE
NUMBERS FROM 1+
TO 4+
1/2" NPT MALE
ORIFICE-(1)
MATERIALS
NOZZLE: BRASS
STRAINER: MONEL

K-81-1110
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1130
Multijet Nozzle, Type "S"
P/N: SEE K-81-1170
1.12"
2 OR 4
ORIFICES
(29mm)
HEX
1/2" NPT FEMALE
STRAINER - INCLUDED
IN TYPE "S" NOZZLES
WITH NOZZLE CODE
NOS. FROM 2 TO 5+
THROAT
5.00"
NOZZLE CODE NUMBER

STAMPED HERE
(127mm)
3.50"
(89mm)
MATERIALS
NOZZLE: COLD ROLLED STEEL
THROAT: BRASS
STRAINER: MONEL
AVAILABLE FINISHES (NOZZLE ONLY)
1. RED PAINT
2. ZINC PLATED

K-81-1130
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1150
Multijet Nozzle, Type "M"
P/N: SEE K-81-1170
1.38"
(35mm)
HEX
2 OR 4
ORIFICES
3/4" NPT FEMALE
STRAINER - INCLUDED IN
TYPE "M" NOZZLES
WITH NOZZLE CODE
NOS. FROM 4 TO 5+
THROAT
9.50"
(241mm)
NOZZLE CODE NUMBER
STAMPED HERE
5.13"
(130mm)
MATERIALS
NOZZLE: COLD ROLLED STEEL
THROAT: BRASS
STRAINER: MONEL
AVAILABLE FINISHES (NOZZLE ONLY)
1. RED PAINT
2. ZINC PLATED

K-81-1150
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1160
Multijet Nozzle, Type "L"
P/N: SEE K-81-1170
11mm DIA.
(2) MTG. HOLES
7.062
(179.4 MM)
6.000
(152.4 MM)
60.3mm
1.875
(47.6 MM)
.250
(6.4 MM)
152.4mm
NOZZLE CODE NUMBER

STAMPED HERE
THROAT
ORIFICES
1.250
(31.7 MM)
HEX
3.625
(92.1 MM)
STRAINER
INCLUDED IN TYPE "L"
NOZZLES WITH NOZZLE
CODE NUMBERS FROM
2 TO 5+
1/2" NPT FEMALE
MATERIALS
NOZZLE: CAST IRON
THROAT: BRASS
STRAINER: MONEL
FINISH: (NOZZLE ONLY) RED PAINT

K-81-1160
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1170
Carbon Dioxide Nozzle Data
V
S
S-ZINC
S-FLANGED
M
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
SIZE
ZINC
S-FLANGED
1+
930067
2
2+
919309
803327
803381
803365
803897
803881
802290
802974
X
X
X
X
3
3+
929242
803328
803366
803367
803882
803883
802975
802976
X
X
X
842334
4
4+
915876
803329
803368
803369
803884
803885
802977
802978
842319
842320
842335
242336
5
5+
214721
214722
803370
803371
803886
803887
802979
802980
842321
842322
842337
242338
6
6+
214723
214724
803372
803373
803888
803889
802981
802982
842323
842324
842339
242340
7
7+
214725
214726
803374
803375
803890
803891
802983
802984
842325
X
842341
842342
8
8+
214727
214728
803376
803377
803892
803893
802985
802986
842326
X
842343
842344
9
9+
214729
X
803378
803379
803894
803895
802987
802988
842327
X
842345
842346
10
11
X
X
803380
X
803896
X
802989
X
842328
842329
842347
X
12
13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
842330
842331
X
X
14
15
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
842332
842333
X
X
VENT NOZZLE TYPE "V"

MULTIJET NOZZLE TYPE "S"
MULTIJET NOZZLE TYPE "S" ZINC PLATED
MULTIJET NOZZLE TYPE "S" FLANGED
MULTIJET NOZZLE TYPE "M"
MULTIJET NOZZLE TYPE "L"

K-81-1170
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
- K-81-1110
- K-81-1130
- K-81-1130
- K-81-1140
- K-81-1150
- K-81-1160

K-81-1230
Carbon Dioxide Single Cylinder Straps
PART
NUMBER
CY LINDER
SIZE
270012
210013
270014
62669
270157
10
15 & 20
25, 35, & 50
75
100
IN
MM
IN
MM
IN
MM
IN
MM
IN
MM
IN
MM
6.22
6.44
7.94
5.63
10.0
158
164
202
143
254
9.81
10.8
11.5
12.3
14.0
249
274
292
312
356
8.75
9.63
10.4
11.1
12.4
222
245
264
282
315
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.25
1.75
25.4
25.4
25.4
31.8
44.4
2.62
2.36
3.5
3.75
4.5
66.5
60.4
88.9
95.2
114
3.41
3.88
4.25
4.63
5.31
86.6
96.6
108
118
135
E
A
R
D
C
MATERIAL: STEEL

K-81-1230
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1240
Carbon Dioxide Two Cylinder Straps
PART
NUMBER
CYLINDER
SIZE
241219
241254
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
50 and 75
7.75
197
22.8
579
21.5
546
1.75
44.4
2.88
73.1
4.63
118
100
10.3
262
25.6
650
24.3
617
1.75
44.4
4.75
120
5.28
134
MATERIAL: STEEL

K-81-1240
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-1250
CO2 Lock Out Valve With Limit Switch
GE N E R AL D IME N S ION S
AS S Y. PAR T N O.
S IZE :
IN
81-934711-000
1/2
.660
3.939
1.938
2.250
5.500
2.800
2.500
81-934712-000
3/4
.810
4.500
2.188
2.600
5.500
2.800
2.500
81-934713-000
1.000
4.938
2.375
2.990
6.500
2.800
2.500
81-934714-000
1 1/2
1.440
5.875
2.750
3.870
8.500
2.800
2.750
81-934715-000
1.720
6.875
3.375
4.500
8.500
2.800
2.750
* Dimensions are in inches.
MATERIALS
BODY: CARBON STEEL WITH
BALL AND STEM: 316 STAINLESS
SEATS AND SEALS: TEFLON
1. BALL VALVE:
PRESSURE RATING 2,500 PSIG
DOUBLE UNION END WITH NPT FEMALE PIPE CONNECTIONS LOCKING HANDLE AND BRACKET FOR
BOTH OPEN (PARALLEL WITH VALVE BODY) AND
CLOSED (PERPENDICULAR TO VALVE BODY)

K-81-1250
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
2. LIMIT SWITCH:
TWO (2) SPDT SWITCHES
NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE
3. LOCK NOT INCLUDED

K-81-5010
P/N: 878737
1.00" HEX
1/8"-27 NPT
PRESSURE INLET
PISTON
2.19"
SWIVEL NUT
SET
OPERATED
1.250-18
UNEF-3B
1.50" HEX
MATERIAL
BODY, RETAINING NUT AND PISTON: BRASS

K-81-5010
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5040
Pilot Actuation Fittings
MALE ELBOW
MALE BRANCH TEE

P/N 6992-0503

P/N 6992-0505
MALE CONNECTOR
P/N 6992-0501
MATERIAL: BRASS

K-81-5040
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5050
Nitrogen Pilot Cylinder, Bracket and Adapter
GAUGE
PLUG
SAFETY
OUTLET
OUTLET PORT-1/8" NPT FEMALE

ATTACH ADAPTER HERE
1/8" NPT
MALE
5/16"-TUBING
MALE
ADAPTER
P/N WK-699205-010
1-1/4"-18 NF-3
FOR CONTROL HEAD CONNECTION
CYLINDER P/N WK-877940-000
BRACKET P/N WK-877845-000
16"
(406mm)
3.56"
(90mm)
MATERIALS
CYLINDER: STEEL, PAINTED BLACK
VALVE: BRASS
BRACKET: STEEL, PAINTED BLACK
ADAPTER: BRASS
CYLINDER CAPACITY-108 IN3 (1770 CM3)
SAFETY OUTLET BURST RANGE - 2650- 3000 PSI (183-207 BARS) AT 70F (20C)
NITROGEN-BB-n-411b GRADE A, TYPE I 1800 PSI (124 BARS) AT 70F (20C)

K-81-5050
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5070
1/4 Flexible Actuation Hoses
PART
NO.
A*
264986
30
264987
22
* DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
A
.625" HEX SWIVEL
1.375"
NUT (BRASS)
HOSE - 1/4" I.D.
5/16" TUBING COUPLING

(BOTH ENDS)
MATERIALS
HOSE: WIRE BRAIDED, TEFLON LINING (CRES T304)
COUPLINGS: BRASS
MINIMUM BURST PRESSURE: 12,000 PSIG
OPERATING PRESSURE: 3000 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE: 4500 PSIG
MINIMUM BEND RADIUS 2.5"

K-81-5070
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5110
Check Valves 1/2 thru 2
PART NUMBER
81-800327-000
81-800266-000
WK-800443-000
81-800444-000
81-870152-000
81-870151-000
VALVE
SIZE
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
A
A
A
A
B
B
IN
MM
IN
7.5
7.5
151
151
6.28
6.28
MM

04/02
IN
160 4.75
160 4.75
MATERIAL: BRASS
K-81-5110
ILLUSTRATION
Printed in U.S.A.
MM
IN
121
121
3.34
3.34
3.97
3.97
-
MM
IN
85
2
85
2
101 3.18
101 3.18
-
MM
51
51
81
81
-

K-81-5120
Check Valves, 2-1/2 & 3
P/N: 870100
3/4 X 4 - 1/2 (114mm) LG.

HEX BOLT
P/N 1966-4872-16 REQ'D
10.5"
(267mm)
INLET
SIDE VIEW
WITHOUT
ASSEMBLED FLANGE
3/4 HEX NUT

P/N 1523-0800
16 REQUIRED
OUTLET
GASKET
P/N 200973
2 REQUIRED
2 - 1/2 WELDING NECK FLANGE
P/N 263716
2 REQUIRED
-OR3" WELDING NECK FLANGE
P/N 6810-1200
2 REQUIRED
MATERIALS
VALVE BODY: BRASS
GASKET: IRON
FLANGES, BOLTS, & NUTS: STEEL
VALVE MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ARROW POINTING IN
DIRECTION OF FLOW.

K-81-5120
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
8.25" (210mm) DIA.

FLANGE - 6.62" (168mm)
BOLT CIRCLE

K-81-5130
Stop (Directional) Valves, 1/2 thru 2
PART
VALVE SIZE
NUMBER
NPT
IN
870023
870022
870122
870032
870123
870049
1/2"
3.75
3/4" 4.25
1"
5.5
1-1/4" 5.5
7.5
1-1/2"
2" 7.5
MM
IN
MM
IN
MM
95
108
140
140
191
191
2.5
2.81
3.62
3.62
4.75
4.75
64
71
92
92
121
121
4.68
5.68
6.87
6.87
8.43
8.43
119
144
175
175
214
214
MATERIALS
BODY: BRASS
Operating Pressure (@ 70oF): 850 PSI (58 BAR)
Test Pressure:
2250 PSI (155 BAR)
Burst Pressure:
6000 PSI (413 BAR)
Notes:
1. VALVE MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ARROW
POINTING IN DIRECTION OF FLOW.
2. VALVE MAY BE INSTALLED IN HORIZONTAL OR
VERTICAL PIPE RUN.

K-81-5130
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5140
Stop (Directional) Valves, 2-1/2 & 3
P/N: 890010
3/4 X 4 1/2 (114mm) LG.

HEX BOLT
P/N 1966-4872-16 REQ'D
1-1/4 -18 NF-3 MALE

FOR CONTROL HEAD
CONNECTION
10.5"
(267mm)
9.81"
(249mm)
INLET
SIDE VIEW
WITHOUT
ASSEMBLED FLANGE
3/4 HEX NUT

P/N 1523-0800
16 REQUIRED
OUTLET
GASKET
P/N 200973
2 REQUIRED
2 - 1/2 WELDING NECK FLANGE
P/N 263716
2 REQUIRED
-OR3" WELDING NECK FLANGE
P/N 6810-1200
2 REQUIRED
MATERIALS
VALVE BODY: BRASS
GASKET: IRON
FLANGES, BOLTS, & NUTS: STEEL
DIRECTION OF FLOW.

K-81-5140
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
8.25" (210mm) DIA.

FLANGE - 6.62" (168mm)
BOLT CIRCLE

4" Stop (Directional) Valve

K-81-5150
P/N: 890208
1- 1/4 -18 NF-3 MALE

FOR CONTROL HEAD
CONNECTION
7/8 X 5" (127mm) LG.

HEX BOLT
P/N 1966-5680-16 REQ'D
12.12"
(308mm)
11.06"
(281mm)
INLET
SIDE VIEW
WITHOUT
ASSEMBLED FLANGE
7/8 HEX NUT

P/N 1523-5600
16 REQUIRED
OUTLET
GASKET
P/N 200150
2 REQUIRED
4"
WELDING NECK FLANGE

P/N 6810-1600
2 REQUIRED
MATERIALS
VALVE BODY; BRASS
GASKET: IRON
FLANGES, BOLTS & NUTS: STEEL
DIRECTION OF FLOW.
Operating Pressure (@ 70oF): 850 PSI (58 BAR)

Test Pressure:
2250 PSI (155 BAR)
Burst Pressure:
6000 PSI (413 BAR)

K-81-5150
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
10.75" (273mm) DIA.

FLANGE - 8.50" (216mm)
BOLT CIRCLE

K-81-5160
Discharge Indicators
3.25"
(83mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
BODY
CAP
3/4 NPT MALE

1.12"(29mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
STEM
P/N 967082
2.62"
(67mm)
NORMAL
POSITION
DISCHARGE
INDICATION
POSITION
BODY
1/2 NPT MALE
CAP
0.93"(24mm) HEX
ACROSS FLATS
P/N 875553
MATERIALS
BODY-967082: BRASS
BODY-875553: ALUMINUM
CAPS: CLEAR CELLULOSE ACETATE

K-81-5160
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
STEM-RED

K-81-5170
Safety Outlets
PART
NUMBER
803242
AGENT
N2/CO2
PRESSURE RELIEF
OPERATES AT
PSI
BARS
2400-2800
166-193
MATERIALS
BODY AND RETAINING NUT: BRASS
SEAL WIRE: COPPER AND LEAD

K-81-5170
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-5180
P/N: 486536
OPERATED
4 - 0.25"
MOUNTING HOLES

OPERATE SWITCH
OPERATED
SET
SET
0.375"
Kidde

3P.D.T.
WIRING
SCREW
TERMINALS
4.00"
8 COVER SCREWS
UL
FM
TO RESET
4.00"
15 AMP 125 VAC

10 AMP 250 VAC
3/4 HP 1-2-3 PH 125-480 VAC
FRONT VIEW
COVER REMOVED
1"
2
FRONT VIEW
SWITCH 3PDT
BOX - 3 EACH SIDE
1"
2
SUPPLY PIPE WITH UNION
CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
COVER
GASKET
1"
2
SIDE SECTION
Notes:
1. SWITCH MAY BE MOUNTED IN ANY POSITION
BUT PREFERRED INSTALLATION IS UPRIGHT
AS SHOWN.
2. ANY LOAD CONNECTED TO THE SWITCH
MUST NOT EXCEED SWITCH RATING AND
SHALL UTILIZE A SUITABLE PROTECTION
DEVICE. (i.e., CIRCUIT BREAKER, FUSE)
3. CONTACT RATINGS (3PDT)
15 AMP @ 125 Vac
10 AMP @ 250 Vac
3/4 HP @ 250 Vac
1,2 OR 3 PHASE
K-81-5180
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
NPT FEMALE - CONNECT TO SYSTEM PIPING


K-81-5190
P/N: 981332
MATERIALS
BASE: MALLEABLE IRON
OPERATING HEAD: CAST BRONZE
Notes:
1. TOGGLE SWITCH MAY BE MOUNTED IN BASE FOR
EITHER N.O. TO N.C. OR N.C. TO N.O. CONTACT
TRANSFER UPON OPERATION. ILLUSTRATION
SHOWS POSITION OF TOGGLE WHEN SWITCH IS
IN SET POSITION.
2. ANY LOAD CONNECTED TO THE SWITCH MUST
NOT EXCEED SITCH RATING AND SHALL UTILIZE
A SUITABLE PROTECTION DEVICE. (i.e., CIRCUIT
BREAKER, FUSE)

K-81-5190
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
3. REMOVE OPERATING HEAD TO MAKE ELECTRICAL

CONNECTIONS TO TOGGLE SWITCH. WHEN REPLACING OPERATING HEAD, ENSURE THAT
TOGGLE ENGAGES CLUTCH, TIGHTEN COVER
SCREWS SECURELY.

K-81-8010

ELECTRIC CONDUIT3/4" NPT FEMALE
LOCKING PIN
SEAL WIRE
PU
ELECTRIC
CONTROL HEAD
6.18"
(157mm)
INDICATOR AND
RESET STEM
VOLTS
AMPS
PART NO.
TO RESET
USE SCREWDRIVER
SET
RELEASED
MADE IN U. S. A.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN STREET
ASHLAND, MA 01721
4.00"
(102mm)
PART
NUMBER
890181
890149
890165
CONTROL HEAD
VOLTAGE AMPS
2.0
24 VDC
0.3
125 VDC
1.0
115 VAC

K-81-8010
04/02
LOCAL MANUAL
RELEASE LEVER
Printed in U.S.A.
SWIVEL NUT
1.50" (38mm) HEX
1-1/4"-18 NF-3 THREAD

K-81-8011
Electric Control Head, Installation Instruction
.750 NPT TO FLEXIBLE

CONDUIT ADAPTER
FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
PLUS OR HOT
CONNECTION
(TERMINAL #3)
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
FOR MICROSWITCH
(TERMINAL #2)
MINUS, NEUTRAL,
(TERMINAL #1)
TERMINAL STRIP
MICROSWITCH
SWIVEL NUT
MICROSWITCH LEVER
CAM
INDICATOR AND
RESET STEM
PART
NUMBER
890181
890149
890165

K-81-8011
06/02
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTROL HEAD
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
24 VDC
125 VDC
115 VAC
2.0A
0.3A
1.0A

Electric and Cable Operated Control Head with Explosion
Proof Solenoid

K-81-8040
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-8040

Carbon Dioxide Cylinder Weighing Scale
P/N: 982505
TO WEIGH CYLINDERS: REMOVE CONTROL HEAD, IF USED.

LOOSEN CYLINDER FROM FRAMING. HANG HOOK ON
WEIGHBAR. PLACE YOKE UNDER DISCHARGE HEAD. USE
ADJUSTMENT SLEEVE TO BRING BEAM TO INITIAL POSITION. PULL DOWN ON FINGER GRIP RING UNTIL BEAM IS IN
FINAL POSITION. READ WEIGHT ON WEIGHING SCALE.
DEDUCT 3.75 LBS. FOR DISCHARGE HEAD ALLOWANCE.
RESULT IS WEIGHT OF CYLINDER.

K-81-9090
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-9090

P/N: 802398
MATERIALS
CONDULET BOX: STEEL WITH RED ENAMEL FINISH
TOGGLE SWITCH LEVER: BAKELITE

K-81-8070
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.

K-81-8070

K-81-9010
MATERIALS: ALUMINUM WITH RED PAINT LETTERS

K-81-9010
04/02
Printed in U.S.A.
Wet Chemical Fire Protection

System
Wet Chemical
Cylinders
Effective: May 2007

K-87-001
DESCRIPTION
Kidde Fire Systems have five different cylinder sizes
available:
WHDR-125 - 1.25 gallon (4.7 L),

WDHR-260 - 2.6 gallon (9.5 L),
WHDR-400L - 4 gallon (15 L),
WHDR-400S - 4 gallon short (15 L), and
WHDR-600 - 6 gallon (22.7 L).
Each cylinder is pressurized with nitrogen or air to 175

PSIG (1205 kPa), at 70F (21C).
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS:
4 GALLON
(15 L)
Cylinder
Size
Part Number
6 GALLON
(22.7 L)
Charged
Weight
4 GALLON
SHORT
(15 L)
2.6 GALLON
(9.5 L)
1.25 GALLON
(4.7 L)
Diameter
Height to
Center of
Discharge
Port
Overall
Height
Overall
Height with
Mechanical,
Tandem, or
Electric
Control
Head
Overall Height
with Pressure
Operated
Control Head
WHDR-125
1.25 G (4.7 L)
87-120001-001
28.5 lb.
(12.9 kg)
7-5/8 in.
(194 mm)
14 in.
(356 mm)
15-3/8 in.
(391 mm)
21 in.
(533 mm)
16-3/4 in.
(425 mm)
WHDR-260
2.6 G (9.5 L)
87-120002-001
53 lb.
(24 kg)
9 in.
(229 mm)
19-5/8 in.
(498 mm)
21 in.
(533 mm)
26-5/8 in.
(651 mm)
22-3/8 in.
(568 mm)
WHDR-400S
4 G (15 L)
87-120003-001
80 lb.
(36.3 kg)
12 in.
(305 mm)
17-5/8 in.
(448 mm)
19 in.
(229 mm)
24-5/8 in.
(625 mm)
20-3/8 in.
(518 mm)
WHDR-400L
4 G (15 L)
87-120004-001
88 lb.
(40 kg)
9 in.
(229 mm)
33-3/4 in.
(857 mm)
35-1/8 in.
(892 mm)
40-3/4in.
(1035 mm)
36-1/2 in.
(927 mm)
WHDR-600
6 G (22.7 L)
87-120005-001
110 lb.
(50 kg)
10 in.
(254 mm)
33-7/8 in.
(860 mm)
35-1/4 in.
(895 mm)
40-7/8in.
(1038 mm)
36-5/8 in.
(930 mm)
K-87-001
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Cylinder and Valve Assembly
Effective: May 2007

K-87-002
RETAINING RING,
P/N 1849-0004
SPRING RETAINER,
P/N 253299
PRESSURE GAUGE,
P/N 118031-001
SPRING,
P/N 217768
O-RING,
P/N 6435-006
VALVE STEM,
P/N 877343
BONDED SEAL
VALVE BODY
CYLINDER NECK
O-RING, P/N 56610327
K-87-002
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Discharge Adapter Kit Installation
Effective: May 2007

K-87-003
P/N: 844908
DESCRIPTION
The discharge adapter provides a means to connect
3/4-inch discharge pipe (or 1-inch pipe with a concentric
reducer or reducing bushing) to any IND cylinder-andvalve assembly.
The Discharge Adapter Kit consists of a male, 3/4-inch
NPT, brass, discharge valve outlet adapter and a steel
flange plate for securing the discharge adapter to the
valve outlet.
K-87-003
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Mounting Brackets
Effective: May 2007

K-87-004
Distance
Between
Vertical Holes
Distance
Between
Horizontal
Holes
9-3/8 in.
(238 mm)
1-3/8 in.
(35 mm)
3-1/4 in.
(83 mm)
1-5/8 in.
(41 mm)
4-1/2 in.
(114 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm)
3-1/3 to 4-3/4 in.

(85 to 121 mm)
4 Gallon
(15 L)
4-1/2 in.
(114 mm)
20-1/2 in.
(521 mm)
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm)
3-1/2 in.
(89 mm)
4 Gallon
(15 L)
4-1/2 in.
(114 mm)
11-1/2 in.
(290 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
3-1/2 in.
(89 mm)
Cylinder
Size
60-9197430-000
1.25 Gallon
(4.7 L)
3 in.
(76 mm)
60-9197263-000
2.5 Gallon
(9.5 L)
60-9197414-000
60-9197415-000
Part Number
K-87-004
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Mechanical Control Head
Effective: May 2007

K-87-006
P/N:
486607 (no microswitch)

899063 (one Form C microswitch
899176 (two Form C microswitches
DESCRIPTION
The Mechanical Control Head is used on systems
equipped with fusible link detectors. When the fusible link
detector operates, the release of tension in the fusible
link cable allows the control head to actuate. A springloaded plunger depresses the check stem in the cylinder
valve, discharging the contents of the cylinder. The control head also releases tension in a cable to an optional
tandem control head or gas shutoff valve, causing operation of these devices. The control head is equipped with a
local manual release handle integral with the control
head cover plate. To manually operate the system locally,
pull the ring pinout and rotate the handle clockwise. A
mechanical, remote manual release may also be used
with the Mechanical Control Head.
TO FUSIBLE
LINKS ONLY
MANUAL RELEASE
LEVER
BACK PLATE
BACK PLATE OPENING
ALTERNATE (LOW PROFILE)

TO FUSIBLE LINKS ONLY
TO REMOTE MANUAL
PULL ONLY
TO TANDEM CONTROL HEAD

OR FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ONLY
ACTUATOR LEVER
ACTUATING CAM
(SHOWN IN SET POSITION)
K-87-006
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
6 Gallon (22.7 L) Mounting Bracket
Effective: May 2007

K-87-005
P/N: 60-9196779-001
10-3/16 in.
(259 mm)
CYLINDER STRAP
(IN OPEN POSITION)
BACK
18-3/4 in.
(476 mm)
2 in. TYPICAL
(51 mm)
K-87-005
Rev AB
Printed in USA
FOOT
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Effective: May 2007

K-87-007
P/N: 899175
DESCRIPTION
The Electric Control Head is used on systems that use
thermostats. The control head is rated at 120 Vac, 10
Amps nominal, or 24 Vdc, 2 Amps nominal. When electric power is applied to the control head, a solenoid
releases a spring-loaded plunger which depresses the
check stem in the cylinder valve, discharging the contents of the cylinder. The control head also releases tension in a cable to an optional tandem control head or gas
shutoff valve, causing operation of these devices. The
control head is equipped with a local manual release
handle integral with the control head cover plate. To manually operate the system locally, pull the ring pin out and
rotate the handle clockwise. A mechanical, remote manual release may also be used with the electric control
head.
BACK PLATE
MANUAL RELEASE
LEVER
This control head is also equipped with two Form "C"

microswitches. The microswitch contacts in the control
head transfer when the control head operates. One set of
contacts, which is normally closed when the control head
is in the "set" position, must be wired in series with the
control head solenoid coil to disconnect the power from
the coil upon actuation.
CAUTION
TO FUSIBLE
LINKS ONLY
BACK PLATE
OPENING
TO TANDEM CONTROL
HEAD OR FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE ONLY
ACTUATION LEVER
ACTUATING CAM
Rev AB
RELEASE LINKAGE
(TO SET, ROTATE
CLOCKWISE)
SOLENOID ARMATURE
(BEHIND BACK PLATE)
TO REMOTE
MANUAL PULL ONLY
K-87-007
Where electric detection and/or actuation

is provided, supervision shall be provided
in accordance with NFPA 17A. Alarms and
indicators, along with a supervisory pressure source, shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm
Code. Electrical wiring and equipment shall
be provided in accordance with NFPA 70,
National Electric Code, or the request of
the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Nozzles
Effective: May 2007

K-87-011
DESCRIPTION
There are essentially five types of Nozzles in the Kidde
systems with offerings in a one-piece and two-piece body
configuration. An Appliance/Duct/Plenum Nozzle or ADP
Nozzle; a Fryer Nozzle or F Nozzle; a Duct/Mesquite
Nozzle or DM Nozzle; a Range Nozzle or R Nozzle; and
a Gas Radiant/Wok Nozzle or GRW Nozzle. Each nozzle
is provided with a special foil seal over the discharge orifice to prevent grease from depositing in the orifice and
plugging the nozzle. Each one-piece nozzle has a
3/8-inch (10 mm) NPT female connection while each twopiece nozzle has a 3/8-inch (10 mm) NPT male connection. All nozzles are equipped with a stainless steel internal strainer and incorporate chrome plated brass bodies.
Each nozzle is identified by the nozzle type stamped on
the body. Each nozzle has a flow number which is a measure of its discharge or flow rate. The nozzle types, code
number and flow numbers are given in the Table.
One Piece
Nozzle, Code
Number
Two Piece
Nozzle,
Code
Number
Flow
Number
ADP Nozzle
87-120011-001
96981
GRW Nozzle
87-120013-001
96506
R Nozzle
87-120014-001
96508
F Nozzle (or
Plenum Nozzle)
87-120012-001
96982
DM Nozzle
87-120015-001
96980
N/A
96979
Nozzle Type
ADP-S Nozzle
In addition swivel adapter, P/N 87-120021-001 may be

used in conjunction with any one-piece nozzle. The
ADP-S swivel nozzle may be used interchangeably only
with two-piece ADP nozzle.
FOIL DISK
DISK CAP
2-3/64 in.
(52 mm)
3/8 in. (10 mm) NPT
(INTERNAL THREAD)
NOZZLE
DESIGNATION
XXX
STRAINER
3/8 in. (10 mm) NPT
7/8 in. (22 mm) HEX

1 in. (25 mm) HEX
1 in. (25 mm) HEX
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) NPT

FOIL SEAL
(WASHER TOWARDS
NOZZLE BODY)
DISK CAP
PART NO.
NOZZLE
DESIGNATION
STRAINER
7/8 in. (22 mm) HEX
3/8-18 NPT
UPPER BODY
XXX
MARK ADP-S IN THIS AREA
LOWER BODY
3/8 in. (10 mm)

NPT MALE
2-5/32 in. .05 in.

(55 mm 13 mm)
STRAINER
K-87-011
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Fusible Link Housing Kit
Effective: May 2007

K-87-012
The maximum exposure temperature is the maximum
ambient air temperature in which a fusible link may be
installed. The maximum air temperature at the point of
link temperature shown in the table.
P/N: 804548
DESCRIPTION
The Fusible Link Housing Kit consists of a fusible link
housing. Two 1/2-inch EMT connectors, a supply of cable
crimp sleeves and an "S" hook to attach the fusible link to
the 1/16-inch cable leading to the control head.
Note:
Fusible links are used in conjunction with the fusible link

housing kit. The fusible links are held together with a low
melting alloy which melts at a predetermined temperature, allowing two halves of the link to separate.
There are two temperature designations which apply to
both fusible links and quartzoid bulb links. One temperature is called the rating temperature and the other is
called the maximum exposure temperature.
The rating temperature, which is stamped on the fusible
link, is the temperature at which the link will separate
when new. However, continual exposure to cycling ambient temperatures may cause a degradation of the link
over time. Therefore, the fusible links must be replaced
semi-annually with a new link having the proper temperature rating.
Detectors and links on this page cannot be used

in conjunction with the KRS-50 control box.
These detectors and links must be used with the
following control head part numbers: 486607,
899063, 899176, 899175 and 899082.
Part
Number
Fusible
Link
Rating
Maximum
Exposure
Temperature
282661
165F
100F (38C)
10 lb. (4.5 kg) Min.

40 lb. (18.1 kg) Max.
282662
212F
150F (65C)
10 lb. (4.5 kg) Min.

40 lb. (18.1 kg) Max
282664
360F
300F (149C)
10 lb. (4.5 kg) Min.

40 lb. (18.1 kg) Max
282666
500F
440F (226C)
10 lb. (4.5 kg) Min.

40 lb. (18.1 kg) Max
BRACKET
FUSIBLE
LINK
EMT
ADAPTER
CRIMP
SLEEVE
Load Rating
EMT
ADAPTER
1/2 in. EMT
1/2 in. EMT
CABLE TO MECHANICAL
CONTROL HEAD
FROM OTHER
DETECTORS
LAST DETECTOR
IN SERIES
1-1/2 in.
S-HOOK
EMT
ADAPTER
BRACKET
1/2 in. EMT

TO MECHANICAL
CONTROL HEAD OR
OTHER DETECTORS
S-HOOK
FUSIBLE
LINK
CRIMP
SLEEVE
K-87-012
Rev AB
Printed in USA
STAINLESS
STEEL CABLE
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
KRS-50 Detector
Effective: May 2007

K-87-015
P/N: 60-120061-001
DESCRIPTION
The KRS-50 Detector consists of a plated steel bracket
11-3/4 in. (298 mm) long, two cable crimps, and two S
hooks to connect the fusible links to the detection system
cable. This detector can be used with the KRS-50 Control
Box, the mechanical control head, or the electrical control
head. This detector can be used with either a fusible link,
glass bulb, or quartzoid bulb.
11-3/4 in.
(298 mm)
1/2 in. EMT
CONNECTOR
(NOT SUPPLIED)
LOCKNUT
S HOOKS
1/2 in. EMT

CONNECTOR
(NOT SUPPLIED)
LOCKNUT
3 in. MIN.
1/16 in. TO
ACTUATING DEVICE
CRIMP TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR
FUSIBLE
LINK
K-87-015
Rev AB
Printed in USA
CRIMP TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR
1/16 in. CABLE TO

ANOTHER DETECTOR
OR REMOTE MANUAL
CONTROL
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Mechanical, Remote Manual Release
Effective: May 2007

K-87-016
P/N: 875572
DESCRIPTION
The Mechanical, Remote Manual Release is provided as
a means of manually actuating the system from a remote
location. The Mechanical, Remote Manual Release is
used only with the Mechanical or Electric Control Heads
and cannot be used with the KRS-50 Control Box. The
Mechanical, Remote Manual Release is attached to the
primary control head with 1/16-inch cable. To actuate the
system at the Mechanical, Remote Manual Release, pull
out the ring pin and pull hard on the handle.
Each manual release is supplied with a separate nameplate. This nameplate must be attached to the mounting
surface 1-inch above or below the pull station.
A second manual release may be installed with the use
of the Tee Pulley Kidde P/N 843791.
K-87-016
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Remote Manual Controls for KRS-50 Control Box
Effective: May 2007

K-87-017
DESCRIPTION
The Surface Mounted Remote Manual Control is available for use with the KRS-50 Control Box. The Surface
Mounted Remote Manual Control Box is used as a
means to actuate the system manually from a remote
location. This is accomplished by removing the pull pin,
releasing the tension in the detection cable, allowing the
Control Box to activate the cylinder.
If an End-of-Line Remote Manual Control is not applicable, it can be converted to an In-Line Remote Manual
Control by using an In-Line Kit. Refer to the Installation
chapter of the manual for details. An In-Line Kit uses a
Tee Pulley and Corner Pulley bearing to modify the Endof-Line Remote Manual Control.
Note:
These Remote Manual Controls are only for use

with the KRS-50 Control Box. These Remote
Manual Controls cannot be used with the
Mechanical or Electric Control Heads.
1/2 in. (13 mm) EMT CONNECTORS

OUTLET BOX
COVER SCREWS
SURFACE MOUNTED END-OF-LINE

REMOTE MANUAL CONTROL
P/N 87-120052-001
COVER
1/16 in. CABLE
CLAMP BLOCK
LEAD SEAL & BLOCK
PULL PIN
U BRACKET
CHAIN
1/16 in. (2 mm) CABLE

TO DETECTORS
1/2 in. (13 mm) EMT

CONDUIT
SURFACE MOUNTED
REMOTE MANUAL
CONTROL IN-LINE
CONFIGURATION
IN-LINE KIT
P/N 87-120053-001
1/2 in. (13 mm) EMT

CONNECTIONS
OUTLET BOX
CORNER PULLEY BEARING

LEAD SEAL & BLOCK
PULL PIN
U BRACKET
Rev AB
3-WAY PULLEY BOX

1/2 in. (13 mm) EMT
CONDUIT
1/8 in. (3 mm) ROLL PIN
COVER
1/16 in. (2 mm) CABLE
K-87-017
1/2 in. (13 mm)

EMT CONDUIT
Printed in USA
REMOTE MANUAL
CONTROL
CORNER PULLEY
BEARING
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Corner Pulley
Effective: May 2007

K-87-019
P/N: 844848
DESCRIPTION
The Corner Pulley can be used in both low and high temperature environments. The pulley contains steel ball
bearings and the body is cast aluminum. A 1/16-inch
(2 mm) diameter stainless steel 7x7 strand cable is used
for the detection line. It is installed using 1/2-inch
(13 mm) EMT.
STAINLESS
STEEL CABLE
1/2 in.
(13 mm)
EMT
2-1/2 in.
(64 mm)
1-1/4 in.
(32 mm)
EXPANSION
FERRULE
INTERNAL
CORNER PULLEY
BEARING
STAINLESS
STEEL CABLE
K-87-019
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Vent Plug
Effective: May 2007

K-87-020
P/N: 9196984
DESCRIPTION
A Vent Plug is used in the discharge piping near a Kidde
cylinder to prevent pressure build-up in the discharge
pipe system, caused by heat, from rupturing the foil seals
on each nozzle.
The vent plug has a 1/2-inch (13 mm) NPT and can be
onstalled in the outlet or the run of a tee in the discharge
pipe. In all systems, including multiple cylinder systems,
only one vent plug is required. The vent plug must always
point up or horizontally, never down, to assure that it will
remain open except during discharge. It is necessary to
use a bushing with the vent plug when installing the vent
plug in a tee larger than 1/2-inch (13 mm).
1/2 in. (13 mm)

NPT
1-1/8 in.
(29 mm)
K-87-020
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Mechanical Gas Valve
Effective: May 2007

K-87-022
DESCRIPTION
The Mechanical Gas Valve has a spring, normally urging
it into the closed position, and a control stem with which
the valve may be held open against the force of the
spring.
Only Mechanical Gas Valves that are specifically UL
Listed and identified by part number in the manual may
be used with the Kidde system.
Control Box, a maximum of 16 Corner Pulleys and 50

feet (15.2 m) of cable are to be used with the Mechanical
Gas Valves. When using Mechanical, Electrical, or Tandem Control Head, a maximum of thirty (30) Corner Pulleys and 100 feet (30.4 m) of cable are to be used with
the Mechanical Gas Valves.
When using a Mechanical, Electrical, or Tandem Control
Head, a cable block (included with valve) is required.
Mechanical Gas Valves must be operated using either a

Pneumatic Release, directly off the discharge lever on
the KRS-50 Control Box, or directly off the actuating cam
on the Mechanical, Electrical, or Tandem Control Head.
There is no other method for closing Mechanical Gas
Valves. When using a Pneumatic Release or KRS-50
CAUTION
CONTROL
STEM
SPRING
Tee Pulleys cannot be used to operate dual

Gas Valves when using the KRS-50 Control
Head.
Part Number
Size
87-100001-001
3/4 in. (19 mm)
87-100001-002
1 in. (25 mm)
87-100001-003
1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
87-100001-004
1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
87-100001-005
2 in. (51 mm)
87-100001-006
2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
87-100001-007
3 in. (76 mm)
GAS FLOW
INLET
OUTLET
K-87-022
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Electric Gas Valve and Manual Reset Relay Box
Effective: May 2007

K-87-023
DESCRIPTION
A Listed Electric Gas Valve is an electronically operated
(120 V, 60 Hz) gas shut off valve. This valve is controlled
by a pressure switch or microswitch, and the Manual
Reset Relay Box (P/N 9101735). The relay box provides
DPDT contacts rated for 6 Amps at 115 Vac and prevents
immediate reopening of the Electric Gas Valve to eliminate accidental escape of gas through open hand operated gas valves and unit pilots after a power loss.
The Electric Gas Valve and the Manual Reset Relay must
be specifically UL Listed for use with the Kidde system.
Part Number
Size
60-9197017-000
1/2 in. (13 mm)
60-9197018-000
3/4 in. (19 mm)
60-9197019-000
1 in. (25 mm)
60-9197020-000
1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
60-9197021-000
1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
60-9197022-000
2 in. (51 mm)
60-9197023-000
2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
60-9197024-000
3 in. (76 mm)
ELECTRICAL
SOLENOID
ELECTRIC GAS VALVE
MECHANICAL RESET
RELAY BOX, P/N 9101735
K-87-023
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
Microswitches for KRS-50 Control Box
Effective: May 2007

K-87-024
DESCRIPTION
Two sets of switch kits are available for use in the KRS50 Control Box: the Listed single-switch SPDT kit and the
s two-switch DPDT kit. The DPDT kit consists of two
SPDT switches (see below). A switch kit consists of one
or two microswitches, an electrical connector for each
microswitch, a mounting bracket, and mounting hardware. These are used when it is necessary to open or
close electrical circuits in order to:
Sound an alarm
Trip a magnetic contact to turn off the electrically
operated cooking appliance
Operate an Electrical Gas Valve
Shut off exhaust fans
The single switch kit provides a microswitch rated at 11

Amps, 125/250 Vac. The two-switch kit includes an 11
Amp, 125/250 Vac; 1/2 Amp, 125 Vdc microswitch and a
15 Amp 125/250 Vac; 1/2 Amp, 125 Vdc microswitch that
are activated simultaneously. Electrical applications usually have a higher Amp rating than the switches. In this
case, such appliances shall not be wired directly to the
microswitch. A Listed magnetic contact or relay must be
used.
Note:
SWITCH
Installation of microswitches must be performed

prior to mounting of the KRS-50 Control Box.
SWITCH
NC
NC
NO
K-87-024
Rev AB
Printed in USA
NO
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Wet Chemical
6 Gallon (22.7 L) Mounting Bracket
Effective: May 2007

K-87-026
P/N: 87-100013-001
10-1/4 in.
(260 mm)
THROUGH HOLES
FOR 3/8 in.
BOLTS OR SCREWS
CYLINDER
STRAP
21 in.
(533 mm)
Rev AB
3/8 in. (10 mm)

FASTENING
HARDWARE
(TO WALL)
18-7/8 in.
(479 mm)
K-87-026
11 in.
(279 mm)
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde XV Control System

Effective: May 2007

K-87-027
P/N: 87-120099-001
FEATURES
Esthetically Pleasing Chrome Plating

Rugged, Die-Cast Aluminum Body
Cylinder or Wall Mount
Two Discreet Detection Lines
Up to 400 feet (122 m) Mechanical Detection Cable
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde XV Control System is designed to enhance
the quality and performance of Kidde pre-engineered
systems for commercial kitchen and industrial applications. Developed with the installer in mind, the XV offers
several options, allowing field decisions to reduce
installed cost of a system. As a component of Kiddes
industrial dry chemical and commercial kitchen systems
offering, the XV provides exceptional value, extreme versatility, and excellent visibility.
The XV ships ready to install. Included are three EMT
connectors, a system valve actuator, two microswitches,
and two cartridges. It is ready to go with a basic installation package.
The Kidde XV Control System is UL Listed with WHDR
System for commercial kitchen applications, and UL
Listed, FM Approved for industrial applications.
APPLICATIONS
Applications for the XV Control Head System are multiple
and varied, but typical functions would include:
Commercial kitchens
Automotive paint booths
Industrial open-face spray booths
Hazardous material storage facilities
Liquid flammable storage areas
Marine galleys
Processes involving flammable liquids, such as dip
tanks, containment areas, etc.
Actuates Up to 20 Cylinders
Up to Four Microswitches
24 V Electrical Actuation Assembly
Tamper or Lock Port Between Cover and Backbox
Low Maintenance
TECHNICAL DATA
Table 1: Mechanical Cable Parameters
Cable Line
Maximum Cable
Length
Maximum Corner
Pulleys
Maximum
Detectors
Maximum
Tee
Pulleys
Detection and Manual

Release-to-Trip Line 1
200 ft.
(61 m)
50
40
Detection and Manual

Release-to-Trip Line 2
200 ft.
(61 m)
50
40
Pull-to-Trip Remote
Manual Release
100 ft.
(30 m)
30
1*
Mechanical Gas Valve

Release
100 ft.
(30 m)
30
1*
Tee Pulleys counts as two Corner Pulleys. Maximum is from Control System, through Tee Pulley, to each device.
WHDR SYSTEM PRESSURE ACTUATION

Table 2: WHDR System Pressure Actuation
Maximum Total
Length of 1/4-in.
O.D. x .031-in. Wall
High Pressure
Tubing
Maximum Number
of Pressure
Switches
(P/N 486536) in
Actuation Line
12
106 ft.
(32 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
20
91 ft.
(28 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
Minimum
Operating
Temperature
Maximum Number of
Extinguishing System
Cylinders
0F
(-17.8C)
0F
(-17.8C)
Minimum
Tubing
IND SYSTEM PRESSURE ACTUATION

Table 3: IND System Pressure Actuation
Maximum Total
Length of 1/4-in.
High Pressure
Tubing
Maximum Number
of Pressure
Switches
(P/N 486536) in
Actuation Line
14
166 ft.
(51 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
20
121 ft.
(37 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
Minimum
Operating
Temperature
Maximum Number of
Cylinders
-40F
(-40C)
-40F
(-40C)
-2-
Minimum
Tubing
VEHICLE SPRAY BOOTH ACTUATION

Table 4: Vehicle Spray Booth System Pressure Actuation
Maximum Total
Length of 1/4-in.
High Pressure
Tubing
Maximum Number
of Pressure
Switches
(P/N 486536) in
Actuation Line
20
140 ft.
(43 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
-0F
(-17.8C)
15
160 ft.
(49 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
-0F
(-17.8C)
200 ft.
(61 m)
5 ft.
(1.5 m)
Minimum
Operating
Temperature
Maximum Number of
Cylinders
-0F
(-17.8C)
Minimum
Tubing
Part Number
Description
Weight
87-120099-001
XV Control System includes:

1 ea. 87-120042-001 System Valve Actuator
1 ea. 87-120043-001 System Cartridge
1 ea. 87-120044-001 Test Cartridge
1 ea. 87-120058-001 EMT Connector Kit
2 ea. 87-120039-001 Microswitch Kit
16 lb. (7.25 kg)
87-120042-001
System Valve Actuator
2 lb. (.9 kg)
87-120043-001
System Cartridge
1 lb. (.45 kg)
87-120045-001
High Pressure Hose for Cylinder Mount
1 lb. (.45 kg)
87-120044-001
Test Cartridge
1 lb. (.45 kg)
87-120058-001
EMT Connector Kit
1 lb. (.45 kg)
87-120039-001
Microswitch Kit (SPDT)
83-100034-001
Electric Actuator Kit
2 lb. (.9 kg)
87-120046-001
Valve Rebuild Kit
1 lb. (.45 kg)
87-120047-001
Terminal Type Microswitch Kit (SPDT)
83-100035-001
Actuation Delay
.1 lb. (.045 kg)
.1 lb. (.045 kg)

4 lb. (1.8 kg)
WHDR Systems designed and installed according to

manual P/N 87-122000-001.
IND Systems designed and installed according to manual
P/N 220423.
Vehicle Spray Booths Systems designed and installed
according to manual P/N 83-100036-001.
-3-
Kidde is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

K-87-027 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Alarm/Release Terminal
Type Microswitch
Effective: May 2007

K-87-029
P/N: 87-120047-001
FEATURES
Screw-type Terminals for Secure Wire Mounting

Meets Alarm Requirements for CSA (Canada)
Stackable with Standard XV Control System
Microswitch
Ships with Non-Conductive Barrier

Can Be Used for Alarm Circuit and Release Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The Alarm/Release Terminal Microswitch is used for the
supervision of the XV Control System for alarm activation
and release actuation. This Microswitch, when properly wired,
will provide approved supervision for the alarm zone circuit of
the SCORPIO Control Panel, and other UL Listed control
panels. In addition, this switch will be wired in series with a
releasing circuit in order to open the loop upon actuation of the
XV Control System.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Fire alarm activation when XV Control System actuates.

Opens releasing loop of SCORPIO and other listed
releasing control panels.
TECHNICAL DATA
15A, 250 Vac

1/2 HP, 250 Vac
1/2 HP, 125 Vac
Screw-Type Terminals
Part Number
DIMENSIONS
1-1/2 in.
(38 mm)
19/32 in.
(15 mm)
2
4
1-1/16 in.
(27 mm)
87-120047-001
Alarm/Release Terminal Microswitch
87-120099-001
XV Control System
87-120042-001
System Valve Actuator
87-120043-001
System Cartridge
87-120045-001
High Pressure Hose For Cylinder

Mount
87-120044-001
Test Cartridge
87-120058-001
EMT Connector Kit
87-230039-001
Microswitch Kit (SPDT with pigtail)
83-100034-001
Electric Actuator Kit
87-120046-001
Valve Rebuild Kit
83-100035-001
Actuation Delay
Note:
Kidde is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

WHDR, IND, XV, and SCORPIO are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
K-87-029
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Description
WHDR Systems are designed and installed

according to manual, P/N 87-122000-001; IND
Systems are designed and installed according to
manual, P/N 220423 and 83-100036-001. Refer to
the appropriate manual for detailed information.
Kidde Fire Systems
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Dry Chemical Fire Protection

System
Industrial Dry Chemical

Cylinder and Valve Assembly

K-83-001
DESCRIPTION
The cylinder and valve assembly is equipped with a
plated forged brass valve, pressure gauge, fusible plug
relief device, and a steel alloy cylinder shell. The cylinder
conforms to DOT Specification 4BW-360. The assembly
is pressurized with Nitrogen to 360 PSIG (24.8 bar
gauge) at 70F (21.1C). The cylinder valve mates with a
discharge adapter designed for use with Kidde PreEngineered Fire Suppression Systems. The cylinder
valve is also designed to accept any of the Pre-Engineered System control heads.
Cylinder/
Valve Model
Part Number
Type of
Powder
Charge or Fill
Weight of
Powder (lb.)
Nominal Dia.
(in.)
Overall
Assembly
Height (in.)
Wall
Mounting
Bracket Part
Number
IND-21
486573
ABC
21
17.6
486487
IND-25
486570
BC
25
17.6
486487
IND-45
486574
ABC
45
30.8
486488
IND-50
486571
BC
50
30.8
486488
IND-70
83-100018-001
ABC
68
12.3
30.2
87-100009-001
IND-75
83-100019-001
BC
75
12.3
30.2
87-100009-001
K-83-001
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Mounting Bracket Kits

K-83-002
DESCRIPTION
A mounting bracket kit is used for mounting all cylinder
and valve assemblies. The kit consists of a steel bracket
with a shelf to hold the cylinder bottom. A cylinder strap is
used to secure the cylinder to the bracket. Prior to installation, ensure that the wall or other mounting surface will
support the recommended load specified in the table.
Mount the bracket to the surface using three (3) 3/8-in.
bolts or screws.
Mounting
Bracket Part
Number
Cylinder/Valve
Model
Dimension
A
Dimension
B (in.)
Dimension
C (in.)
Dimension
D (in.)
Recommended
Wall-Support
Load
486487
IND-21
IND-25
13.12 in.
11.50 in.
9.75 in.
8.12 in.
65 lb.
486488
IND-45
IND-50
19.62 in.
18.00 in.
9.75 in.
8.12 in.
130 lb.
87-100009-001
IND-70
IND-75
21.00 in.
18.80 in.
13.25 in.
12.50 in.
225 lb.
K-83-002
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Discharge Adapter Kits

K-83-003
P/N: 844908
DESCRIPTION
The discharge adapter provides a means to connect 3/4inch discharge pipe (or 1-inch pipe with a concentric
reducer or reducing bushing) to any Industrial Dry Chemical cylinder and valve assembly.
The discharge-adapter kit consists of a male, 3/4-inch
NPT, brass, discharge-valve-outlet adapter and a steel
flange plate for securing the discharge adapter to the
valve outlet.
K-83-003
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Mechanical Control Head
K-83-004
P/N: 486607 (No microswitch)
899063 (Equipped with 1 Form-C microswitch)
899176 (Equipped with 2 Form-C microswitches)
DESCRIPTION
The mechanical control head is used in systems equipped
with fusible-link detectors. When a fusible-link detector operates, the release of tension in the fusible-link cable allows the control head to actuate. A spring-loaded plunger
depresses the check stem in the cylinder valve, discharging the contents of the cylinder, The control head also releases tension in a cable to an optional tandem control head,
causing operation of this device. The control head is
equipped with a local manual-release handle integral with
the control-head cover plate. To manually operate the system locally, pull the ring pin out and rotate the handle clockwise. A mechanical, remote manual release may also be
used with the mechanical control head.

K-83-004
04/02
Printed in USA


K-83-005
P/N: 899175
DESCRIPTION
The electric control head is used in systems that use
thermostats. The control head is rated at 120 Vac, 10
Amps nominal, or 24 Vdc, 2 Amps nominal. When electric power is applied to the control head, a solenoid
releases a spring-loaded plunger which depresses the
check stem in the cylinder valve, discharging the contents of the cylinder.
The control head also releases tension in a cable to an
optional tandem control head, causing operation of this
device. The control head is equipped with local manualrelease handle integral with the control-head cover plate.
To manually operate the system locally, pull the ring pin
out and rotate the handle clockwise. A mechanical,
remote manual release may also be used with the electric control head.
The electric control head is equipped with two Form-C
microswitches. The microswitch contacts in the control
head transfer when the control head operates. One set of
contacts, which is normally closed when the control head
is in the set position, must be wired in series with the control-head solenoid coil to disconnect the power from the
coil upon actuation.
BACK PLATE
MANUAL RELEASE
LEVER
TO FUSIBLE
LINKS ONLY
BACK PLATE
OPENING
TO REMOTE
MANUAL PULL
ONLY
ACTUATING CAM
Rev AB
SOLENOID ARMATURE
(BEHIND BACK PLATE)
TO RELEASE LINKAGE
INSERT SMALL
SCREWDRIVER
TO TANDEM CONTROL
HEAD ONLY
ACTUATOR LEVER
K-83-005
RELEASE LINKAGE
(TO SET ROTATE
CLOCKWISE)
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Tankside Nozzle

K-83-011
P/N: 259072
DESCRIPTION
The Tankside Nozzle is designed to discharge a flat,
semicircular blanket of dry chemical over the surface of a
flammable liquid.
K-83-011
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Total-Flooding Nozzle

K-83-012
P/N: 83-100005-001
DESCRIPTION
The Total-Flooding (TF) Nozzle is designed to uniformly
discharge dry chemical throughout an enclosed volume.
This nozzle is to be mounted at ceiling level (unless otherwise listed) with the orifice tip pointed vertically down.
The TF Nozzle is also used to protect the work area volume for open face spray booth applications and in automotive vehicle spray booth applications.
Each TF Nozzle is factory-equipped with a blow-off cap
to protect the nozzle orifices and prevent moisture
buildup in the discharge piping.
K-83-012
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Fusible Link Housing Kit with KGR Link

K-83-015
DESCRIPTION
The Fusible-Link Housing Kit consists of a fusible-link
housing, two 1/2-inch EMT connectors, a supply of cable
crimp sleeves and an S-hook to attach the Kidde KGR
(quick-response) or KGS (standard-response) links to the
1/16-inch cable leading to the control head.
UL Listed and FM Approved KGR or KGS links are used
in conjunction with Fusible-Link Housing Kits. ThermoBulb links are used in conjunction with the Kidde 804548
or 87-120061-001 Fusible-Link Housing Kits. The Kidde
links are held together with a large tube, which fails to
predetermine temperature, allowing the two halves of the
link to separate.
Thermo-Bulb links are available in various temperature
ratings as shown in the table.
1.625
Part Number
Type
Temperature
Color
87-120090-165
Standard
165F
Red
87-120095-165
Quick
Response
165F
Red
87-120090-212
Standard
212F
Green
87-120095-212
Quick
Response
212F
Green
87-120090-286
Standard
286F
Blue
87-190095-286
Quick
Response
286F
Blue
87-120090-360
Standard
360F
Mauve
87-120095-360
Quick
Response
360F
Mauve
87-120090-450
Standard
450F
Black
87-120095-450
Quick
Response
450F
Black
87-120090-500
Standard
500F
Black
87-120095-500
Quick
Response
500F
Black
1.000
THERMO BULB
.320
11-3/4"
1/2" EMT
CONNECTOR
(Not Supplied)
LOCKNUT
3" MIN.
1/16" CABLE TO
ACTUATING DEVICE
CRIMP TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR
"S" HOOKS
LINK
(BTBR Shown)
K-83-015
Rev AB
1/2" EMT
CONNECTOR
(Not Supplied)
LOCKNUT
Printed in USA
CRIMP TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR
1/16" CABLE TO
ANOTHER DETECTOR
OR REMOTE MANUAL
CONTROL
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Fusible Link, Thermobulb

K-83-016
1.625
1.000
THERMO BULB
Part Number
Type
Temperature
Color
87-120090-165
Standard
165F
Red
87-120095-165
Quick
Response
165F
Red
87-120090-212
Standard
212F
Green
87-120095-212
Quick
Response
212F
Green
87-120090-286
Standard
286F
Blue
87-190095-286
Quick
Response
286F
Blue
87-120090-360
Standard
360F
Mauve
87-120095-360
Quick
Response
360F
Mauve
87-120090-450
Standard
450F
Black
87-120095-450
Quick
Response
450F
Black
87-120090-500
Standard
500F
Black
87-120095-500
Quick
Response
500F
Black
.320
K-83-016
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Duct-Plenum (DP) Nozzle

K-83-013
P/N: 83-100006-001
K-83-013
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Fusible Link Housing Kit with Fusible Link

K-83-014
P/N: 804548
DESCRIPTION
UL Listed and FM Approved Fusible Links are used in
conjunction with the Fusible Link Housing Kit. The Fusible Links are held together with a low melting alloy,
which melts at a predetermined temperature, allowing the
two halves of the link to separate.
Fusible Links are available in various temperature ratings
as shown in table.
There are two temperature designations which apply to
both fusible links and quartizoid bulb links. One temperature is called the rating temperature, and the other is
called the maximum exposure temperature.
Load Rating
Maximum Exposure
Temperature
Part Number
165F (74C)
100F (38C)
212F (100C)
Fusible Link Rating
Minimum
Maximum
282661
10 lb.
40 lb.
150F (65C)
282662
10 lb.
40 lb.
306F (182C)
300F (149C)
282664
10 lb.
40 lb.
500F (260C)
440F (226C)
282666
10 lb.
40 lb.
K-83-014
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Thermostat

K-83-017
DESCRIPTION
Thermostats are electric heat detectors. Thermostats are
equipped with resettable, normally-open contacts which
close when a predetermined temperature is reached.
Thermostats are constructed to compensate for rate of
temperature rise. If the temperature rise is great enough,
the detector contacts will close a temperature somewhat
below the set point.
Part Number
Point
Maximum Exposure Temperature
12-E27121-0000-02
140F (60C)
80F (27C)
12-E27121-0000-04
190F (88C)
100F (38C)
12-E27121-0000-05
225F (107C)
125F (52C)
12-F27121-0000-07
325F (163C)
225F (107C)
12-G27121-0000-07
450F (232C)
350F (177C)
12-F27121-0000-08
600F (316C)
500F (260C)
K-83-017
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Mechanical, Remote Manual Release

K-83-021
P/N: 875572
DESCRIPTION
The Mechanical, Remote Manual Release is provided as
a means of manually actuating the system from a remote
location. The Mechanical, Remote Manual Release is
attached to the primary control head with 1/16-inch cable.
To actuate the system through the Mechanical, Remote
Manual Release, pull out the ring pin and pull hard on the
handle.
Each manual release is supplied with a separate nameplate. This nameplate must be attached to the mounting
surface 1 inch above or below the pull station.
An additional Mechanical, Remote Manual Release may
be installed with a Kidde Tee Pulley (P/N 843791).
K-83-021
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Corner Pulley

K-83-025
P/N 844648
DESCRIPTION
The Corner Pulley is used to change the direction of the
system cable runs. The cable's protective conduit (1/2inch EMT) is attached to the corner pulley with the provided coupling nuts. The Corner Pulley is equipped with a
ball-bearing pulley for minimum resistance to the cable
travel.
K-83-025
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Main to Reserve Transfer Switch

K-83-026
P/N 802398
DESCRIPTION
The Main-to-Reserve Transfer Switch is installed on electrically activated systems having main and reserve cylinders. The switch is normally placed in the "main" position,
but, in the event of the main extinguishing system discharge, the switch is placed in the "reserve" position to
provide uninterrupted fire protection while the main system is being recharged.
K-83-026
Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

Tee Pulley

K-83-032
P/N 843791
DESCRIPTION
The Tee Pulley is required when more than one mechanical, remote manual release is used in the same system.
It is also used to operate two gas valves that are installed
with the Kidde mechanical or electrical control heads.
To Control Head
Cable Clamp to be
Installed as Close
to Single Outlet
End as Possible
Single Outlet
End
Cable Clamp
To Remote Pull
To Remote Pull
(Cover Removed)
K-83-032 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde XV Control System

Actuation Delay

K-83-037
P/N 83-100035-001
FEATURES
Secures to Bottom of XV Control System

Provides UL 1254 Actuation Delay for Enclosed Paint
Booths
Easy to Service
Works Independent of Cylinders
Flexible Tubing Parameters
Up to 20 Dry Chemical Cylinders

Up to 200 ft. 1/4 inch Copper Tubing
Rugged Nickel Plated Brass Body
Dependable Stainless Steel Stem
UL Listed for use with all Dry Chemical Cylinders
ACTUATION DELAY ASSEMBLY

Enclosed paint booths require 10 to 20 seconds of actuation delay between detection/actuation and release of the
agent cylinders. The Kidde XV Control System Actuation
Delay (P/N 83-100035-001) provides an easy and elegant solution for this requirement.
UL Listed, the Actuation Delay attaches directly to the
bottom of the XV Control System. It fits within the profile
of the XV Control System, protecting it from being damaged by tools and other equipment in the area of protection.
The Actuation Delay is made of rugged nickel plated
forged brass with a stainless steel actuation stem. This
trouble-free design has only one moving part, ensuring
reliable, long-term service.
The Actuation Delay is easy to install. No intermediary
hardware is needed. The System Nitrogen Cartridge
(P/N 87-120043-001) of the XV Control System feeds
directly into the Actuation Delay. After the proper time,
the outlet of the Actuation Delay then feeds directly into
the System Valve Actuators (SVAs, P/N 87-120042-001)
on the agent cylinders.
The Actuation Delay is designed to complement the XV
Control System and agent cylinders, creating a clean,
elegant and easy-to-install system.
A C C U M U L AT O R C A P
DO NOT REMOVE
1/8 NPT OUTLET
FRONT OF TIME DELAY

MUST FACE OUT
NITROGEN MUST FLOW IN
DIRECTION OF ARROW
MOUNTING HOLES
5/16-18 UNC THREAD
TECHNICAL DATA
Part Number
Set
Table 1: Dimensions
Dimension
Designation
Description
Dimensions
Total width of XV Control

System with Actuation
Delay and Actuation Hose
9 in.
(229 mm)
Total height of XV Control

System with Actuation
Delay and Actuation Hose
12-1/2 in.
(316 mm)
Description
83-100035-001
XV Actuation Delay
87-120045-001
XV Actuation Hose (required, included

with Actuation Delay)
486573
IND-21 Cylinder and Valve Assembly
486574
83-100018-001
486487
Heavy Duty Shelf Bracket, IND-21
486488
87-100009-001
83-100005-001
Total Flood Nozzle, Work Area
83-100037-001
3-Way Nozzle, Pit/Tunnel Interface
83-100006-001
D/P Nozzle for Ducts and Plenums
87-120099-001
XV Control System
83-100037-001
XV Actuation Delay
87-120096-XXX
Rapid Response Thermo-Bulb Links
Table 2: Actuation Length Limitations

Max. Number of
Extinguishing
System
Cylinders
Max.
Tubing
Max.
Pressure
Switches
Min. Total
Actuation
Tubing
20
140
15
160
200

881-2000.
K-83-037 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Addressable Fire Alarm/

Detection System
ARIES
Fire-Alarm/Suppression System Control Unit

K-76-600
FEATURES
Distributed Intelligence to Sensor Level

Fully-Digitized Communications Protocol
Up to 255 Points without Device-Type Restrictions
Triple-R Protection Against Inadvertent ExtinguishingSystem Activation
Inherently Power Limited

USB Communications Port
Internet Accessible
Simple Programming
UL Listed and FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
The ARIES Fire Alarm/Suppression System Control
Unit is a compact control unit that provides one signaling
line circuit, four notification-appliance circuits, two releasing circuits, and four on-board relays. Two of the four
notification-appliance circuits are user-configurable to
actuate one solenoid valve for control of a special extinguishing system or a pre-action/deluge sprinkler system.
A 5.4 Amp, filtered and regulated power supply provides
charging capabilities for batteries up to 70 Ah.
The ARIES Control Unit annunciates alarm, trouble, and
supervisory events via an 80-character, backlit LCD display with integral status LEDs. Event acknowledgment,
alarm silence, and system reset are accomplished with
dedicated control keys. Basic user and maintenance
operations such as viewing history or isolation commands to initiating points and system outputs are performed via the control keys and associated digit keys. A
security password prevents unauthorized access to the
system.
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
The signaling line circuit communicates with up to 255
SmartOne automatic initiating devices, monitor modules, and control modules via a highly-efficient, fully-digitized protocol. The SmartOne communications protocol
imposes no limitations on the mix of automatic initiating
devices and monitor/control modules on the signaling line
circuit. Each SmartOne initiating device has a microprocessor, memory, and decision-making algorithms to interrupt normal control-unit communications and initiate an
alarm signal.
This distributed intelligence to the sensor level ensures
rapid response to all types of initiating signals, and is far
superior to the various sequential, poll and respond communication schemes employed by others that rely on the
control unit to make all alarm decisions. SmartOne
smoke detectors manage their individual drift compensation routines, and have pre-alarm and alarm thresholds
that are configurable in 0.1 percent-per-foot increments
throughout the entire range of Listed sensitivities. The
control unit can dynamically adjust the smoke detector

alarm thresholds as the result of one or more alarm-initiating events to confirm that a fire requiring the rapid
action of an associated extinguishing system has
occurred. SmartOne smoke detectors can also be configured for non-latching operation that requires them to
measure smoke signatures in excess of their alarm
thresholds for the entire pre-discharge time period in
order to discharge the extinguishing system. This prevents a transitory event that mimics a smoke signature
such as the leakage of air-conditioning fluid from accidentally discharging the extinguishing system.
SmartOne heat detectors have pre-alarm and alarm
thresholds that are programmable in 1F intervals.
The signaling line circuit can be wired for Class-A, Style-6

or Class-B, Style-4 operation. Optional isolator modules
can be used for a Class-A, Style-7 circuit.
RELEASING CIRCUITS
The ARIES Control Unit has two releasing circuits that
can be configured to actuate releasing devices via any of
the following ways:
Single control head or solenoid valve

Two series-supervised, parallel-actuated control
heads or solenoid valves.
One Metron actuator
These releasing circuits can be used to actuate various
Kidde control heads for waterless-extinguishing-system
storage containers, or solenoid valves for sprinkler control that fall within the Factory Mutual System Groups A,
B, D, E, and G. A releasing circuit can actuate an
unmatched pair of control heads or solenoid valves
because it activates these releasing devices in parallel,
not in series. This means that a releasing circuit can activate the control valves for a waterless suppression system and a back-up pre-action-sprinkler system
simultaneously which makes efficient use of the control
units circuitry and increases system reliability by
enabling a single action to operate both extinguishing
systems.
The releasing circuits are protected against inadvertent
activation via the main microprocessor by the ARIES
exclusive Triple-R (for triple redundancy) safeguard
system. The Triple-R system requires that the main
microprocessor issue two release commands, of opposite polarity and via separate signaling channels, and that
these commands be combined with a signal from the
control units watchdog timer confirming proper microprocessor operation, in order to activate a release circuit.
This triply-redundant release-command requirement
ensures that an electrical transient or disturbance that
temporarily interferes with the operation of the main
microprocessor will not inadvertently activate an extinguishing system.
NOTIFICATION-APPLIANCE CIRCUITS
The ARIES Control Unit has four notification-appliance
circuits (NACs). Each circuit can provide up to 1.5 Amps
@ 24 Vdc for horns, strobes, chimes, or other notification
appliances. Power for the notification appliances is fully
filtered and regulated. Each NAC is programmable, and
supports continuous and master-coded outputs for audible devices. The NACs coded patterns are dynamically
adjustable and can be programmed to sound different
codes to notify the occupants of progressively-more-serious conditions.
Both circuits are supervised, power limited, and are compatible with conventional, UL Listed, 24 Vdc notification
appliances. They can also be used with the following
Kidde synchronizable horns and strobes without the

requirement of an external synchronization module:
MT Series Multi-Tone Horns and Horn/Strobes
NS Series Horn/Strobes
NH Series Horns
RS Series Strobes
The MT and NS Series notification appliances provide
the option to use silenceable horns and non-silenceable
strobes on the same NAC.
Two of the NACs are also user-configurable to activate
one solenoid for special-extinguishing-system actuation
or pre-action/deluge sprinkler-system actuation like the
regular releasing circuits. These NACs are also protected
against inadvertent activation via the main microprocessor by the ARIES Triple-R safeguard system when they
are configured for releasing applications.
ON-BOARD RELAYS AND AUXILIARY POWER
The ARIES has four Form-C relays. Three of the four
relays are user-programmable for any system condition
and the fourth relay is dedicated to trouble conditions.
Each relay is rated for 1 Amp @ 28 Vdc.
Two auxiliary power outputs are provided, each with a 1A output. These auxiliary power outputs are user configurable for resettable or continuous power.
INTEGRATION WITH SPECIALTY DETECTION
SYSTEMS
The ARIES is designed to integrate seamlessly with
ORION XT High Sensitivity Smoke Detectors (HSSD)
via one or more ORION XT Interface Modules (PALM). It
also integrates with Kiddes AlarmLine Cable via
AlarmLine Addressable Modules and with Linear HeatSensing Cable (LHS) via regular monitor modules.
The PALM permits an HSSD to be connected to the signaling line circuit and report pre-alarms and alarms in an
addressable manner analogous to a SmartOne smoke
detector.
The AAM permits an AlarmLine cable to be connected to
the signaling line circuit and report pre-alarms and
alarms in an addressable manner analogous to a SmartOne heat detector. The LHS can report as a point-specific alarm via an AI Monitor Module.
PROGRAMMING
The ARIES configuration tool is used to program the control unit for each individual, site-specific application. Programming is for control-by-event scenarios, and consists
of entering a series of conditional control statements that
logically join initiating points to control-unit-based outputs
and remote control modules. Each SmartOne field device
can be assigned a location message of up to 40 characters via the ARIES configuration tool. A USB Device Port
is available to connect to a laptop computer for application upload.
-2-
A front panel-activated AutoLearn routine can be executed that will create a general alarm, one input activates
all outputs application to speed the system-configuration
process. The more sophisticated Auto-Setup routine
allows the ARIES System to be automatically configured
for the typical control scenario utilized by waterless firesuppression systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary AC Power:
120 Vac, 50 Hz, 3.2 A

220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1.6 A
Power Output:
5.4 A @ 24Vdc
Filtered and Regulated Inherently Power-Limited
Battery (Sealed, LeadAcid Only):
70 Ah Maximum Capacity
12 Ah Fits Within Enclosure
1 Signaling Line Circuit:
255 Devices Maximum, Style-4, 6, or -7 (with Isolater Modules)
2 Notification Appliance Circuits:
Class-A, Style-Z or Class B,

Style-Y 24 Vdc, 1.5 A (maximum
per circuit)
Suitable for Synchronized Notification Appliances
2 Releasing Circuits:
Configurable for:
OPTIONAL MODULES
REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR
The ARIES Control Unit supports up to 15 remote LCD
annunciators called RDCMs. This remote annunciator
uses the same 80-character, backlit LCD display found
on the main control unit. The RDCM permits remote
event acknowledgment, alarm silencing, and system
reset, and is secured with a key lock. User- and maintenance-level functions are also possible from the remote
annunciator.
GRAPHIC-ANNUNCIATOR DRIVER
The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides
the ARIES Control Unit with up to 32 programmable,
supervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular annunciators, along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5 system-level inputs circuits for functional switches.
The system-level LEDs correspond to the following general conditions: Module Power, Pre-Alarm, Alarm, Alarm
Silence, Supervisory, and Trouble.
- One or two Control Heads and/

or Solenoid Valves
- One Metron Actuator 24 Vdc,
2.4 A (maximum per circuit)
2 Combination
Circuits:
Class-A, Style-Z or Class-B,

Style-Y NAC, 24 Vdc, 1.5 A
(Maximum per circuit) Suitable
for Synchronized Notification
Appliances
OR
The input circuits for functional switches provide for the

following operator intervention: System Reset, Event
Acknowledgment, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, and Lamp
Test.
The ARIES supports up to 16 graphic annunciator driver
modules.
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
The Intelligent Communications Module (ICM) can be
used to access the ARIES System via the Internet to
view system status and current events and to download
the history log. The ICM can be programmed to transmit
up to five e-mails upon the occurrence of any unsolicited
event in the system. The e-mail message embeds a link
with the IP address of the control unit that sent the message for instant access to the remote system.
The ICM can be accessed using any standard Webbrowsing program and requires no special proprietary
software.
The ICM also allows the ARIES Control Unit to report as
a slave device via the Modbus TCP/IP Protocol to a master monitoring system for automated process control.
-3-
Each Configurable as:
Release Circuit with One Control

Head or Solenoid Valve 24 Vdc,
2.4A (maximum per circuit)
Relays:
3 Programmable and 1Trouble

Relay.
- 1.0 A @ 30 Vdc
(resistive)
- 0.5 A @ 30 Vdc
(inductive)
- 0.5 A @ 120 Vdc
(inductive)
2 Auxiliary-Power
Outputs:
Programmable for Resettable or

Continuous Output 1 A @ 24
Vdc (each output)
2 RS-232 Serial Ports:
Bi-Directional
9600 Baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop
Bit, No Parity
1 RS-485
Communications Port:
Maximum 31 Remote Addresses

(RDCM and ATM-L)
1 USB Device Port:
USB Serial
Dimensions:
Optional Modules:
Enclosure Only:
14-1/4 in. W x 19 in. H x 5 in. D
Enclosure with Door:
14-13/32 in. W x 19-5/32 in. H x
5 in. D
- RDCM Remote Display Module

- ATM-L Annunciator Driver
Module
- ICM Internet-Accessible/Modbus-Conversion Module
Part Number
Description
76-600000-001
ARIES Control Unit (Red)
76-600000-007
Trim Ring (Red)
Kidde, HSSD, and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

ARIES, ORION, and AlarmLine are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

K-76-600 Rev AC
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Distributed Intelligence
Photoelectric, Ionization and
Thermal Detectors
TM

K-76-010
The Intelligent Smoke Detectors

FEATURES
True Distributed Intelligence

Fully Digital Communications
Field Programmable Alarm and Pre-Alarm Set Points
Internal Supervision
FailSoft Operation
Alarm Verification
Calibrated Alarm Test by Command to Sensor Level
Drift Compensation
Non-Polarized
Low Profile Style
Eurostyle Base
Full Analog Display of Detector Values
Electronic Addressing
DESCRIPTION
SmarOne detectors provide true distributed intelligence by storing and analyzing calibration data and prealarm and alarm values. The detector continuously
makes real-time decisions and reports its status, as
required, to the central control panel.
This distributed intelligence architecture, featuring an
intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatile memory in
each individual detector, analyzes data and makes decisions within the monitored area. This unique distribution
of processing power makes possible a system with
greater capacity and flexibility than a conventional centralized processing system.
As an example, up to 255 detectors can be connected on
a single pair of wires connected to one RX/TX module.
All devices can be in alarm simultaneously. The communications between the RX/TX Module and SmartOne
sensors takes place via a fully digital protocol.
TWO PROGRAMMABLE ALARM SET POINTS
The detector alarm and pre-alarm set point levels are factory-set in units of percent obscuration/foot or degrees
(F) and may be changed by the operator. Both set points,
however, can be set within the UL allowable limits which
are stored in the control sensors nonvolatile memory.
The pre-alarm set point typically is used as an early
warning signal. On receipt of a pre-alarm signal, a trouble
condition is generated at the panel. The operator may, in
addition to sending someone to investigate, request
actual percent obscuration levels from the soecific detector, or any other detector. To disable the pre-alarm function, the pre-alarm and alarm set points are programmed
identically.
DRIFT COMPENSATION
Each smoke detector is self-monitoring for drift from the
alarm set point caused by long-term environmental conditions, contamination or electronic component aging.
Using a carefully designed algorithm, the detector measures and averages 32 days of "normal" smoke level.
This data then is used in the drift compensation algorithm

to maintain the proper set point as programmed for the
unit. If the detector cannot compensate, a trouble signal
is sent to the Central Control Panel identifying the
affected detector and the state: "Drift Error."
INTERNAL SUPERVISION
The weakest link in a conventional or standard addressable system is the inability to monitor the operating condition of the smoke detector. The SmartOne constantly
monitors its own status by supervising and reporting a
trouble condition when a fault occurs in one of the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Internal Power Supply Voltage

Improper Line Voltage from the Control Panel
Faulty Writings of Data into Memory
Uncompensatible Drift
FAILSOFT OPERATION
Should there be a failure in the communications link
between the PEGAsys control unit and a detector, the
detector will operate as a conventional sensor. That is, it
will cause a general alarm by signaling line circuit when
smoke density or temperature reaches the alarm point. It
will not, however, report its status.
Note:
Upon re-establishment of communications with central

control, the detector will return to its prior program without further action.
STATUS LED
A LED is provided on the SmartOne to indicate detector
status. A two-second flash rate indicates alarm; a ninesecond rate indicates normal operation; when trouble
exists, the LED is off.
PROGRAMMING INFORMATION
Each detector is field programmed with its owner location
message (location of the detector in the building or on the
site), its system address (a four digit code), pre-alarm set
point, and alarm set point (if different from factory settings). In addition, the detector type (i.e., photoelectric,
ionization, or therma)l and the proper calibration are
stored into the memory at the factory. This permits the
PEGAsys control unit to verify that the proper type detector and correct address is installed in the system.
BASE WIRING INFORMATION
1
8
1
8
2
3
7
6
4
5
3
6
4
5
TO RX/TX
WARNING
Nominal factory settings of detectors are as follows:
Photoelectric detectors:
Alarm 2.0%/ft.,
Pre-alarm 1.5%/ft.
Ionization detectors:
Alarm 1.0%/ft.,
Pre-alarm 0.8%/ft.
Thermal:
Alarm 140F (60C)

Pre-alarm 80F (27C)
Programming is done via a PC or hand held programmer

at the job site or may be accomplished remotely via a
modem. To avoid tampering, three levels of security are
provided to program or alter the program.
The system will reject attempts to program alarm and
pre-alarm set point levels exceeding the UL designated
window.
ALARM TEST BY COMMAND
Any or all detectors can be tested by command from the
PEGAsys control unit. This test procedure precisely
duplicates in-place testing of each detector by imposing a
signal on the detectors sensing chamber that will cause
an alarm output. Results of the test will be indicated at
the PEGAsys control unit, or virtually any remote location, for monitoring or troubleshooting purposes.
COMMUNICATION VERIFICATION
When a detector reaches its pre-alarm or alarm set point,
it conducts a verification procedure with the PEGAsys
control unit which repeats the communication cycle four
separate times before the system accepts its change of
status. The maximum time for this verification procedure
is a rapid 2.5 seconds.
DETECTOR IDENTIFICATION
Part Number
TO PREVENT DETECTION CONTAMINATION AND SUBSEQUENT WARANTY

CANCELLATION, SMOKE DETECTORS
MUST REMAIN COVERED UNTIL AREA
IS CLEAN AND DUST FREE.
GENERAL NOTES
1. No E.O.L. device is needed for SmartOne detectors.
2. T-Tapping wiring method is acceptable for Class "B"
wiring. Number of taps only a function of good practice.
3. To ensure proper installation of the detector head to
the base, be sure wires are properly dressed at
installation.
a. Position all wires flat against the base.
b. Take up all slack in outlet box.
c. Route wires away from the connector terminals.
-2-
Description
70-400001-100
Common Mounting Base Model 6SB
70-400001-101
Common Mounting Base Model 4SB
70-402001-100
Ionization Detector Model CPD-7052
71-402001-100
Photoelectric Detector Model PSD 7152
70-404001-100
Thermistor Heat Detector Model THD

7252
requires a change in system programming.) Installation is

both simple and fast because of screw type connections
and the non-polarized detector feature. The detector is
fitted to the base by a twist-to-lock action. A removable
locking tab secures the head to the base to provide a
degree of vandal resistance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage:
16.5 - 27.5 Vdc
Standby Current:
350 A, typical
Alarm Current:
425 A, typical
Max. Detectors per SLC:
255 (all can be simultaneously

in alarm)
SMARTONE IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR

Model CPD-7152 is a dual-chamber, ionization-type
detector which sense both visible and invisible smoke. A
unique sensing chamber design permits 360 smoke
entry and response.
LED PULSE MODE

Normal:
9 second interval
Trouble:
LED is off
Alarm:
2 second interval
Operating Temperature:
32 - 100F
EMI Immunity:
Exceeds UL268
Note:
SMARTONE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR

Model THD-7152 is a photoelectric smoke detectors.
This detector will respond to a broad range of flaming
and smoldering fire conditions.
SMARTONE THERMISTOR HEAT DETECTOR
Model THD-7252 is a thermistor-based device that can
be programmed to respond to fixed temperature levels
without problems associated with thermal lag.
These Detectors are compatible only with

PEGAsys Fire Alarm Systems, utilizing a
Receiver/Transmitter Module, P/N 76-100005001 and 76-100005-002.
MAINTENANCE
The minimal requirement for detector maintenance consists of an annual cleaning of dust from the detector head
by using the suction of a vacuum cleaner. Cleaning programs should be geared to the individual environment
(refer to Chapter 7 of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm
Code, 1999 Edition).
SMARTONE DETECTOR MOUNTING BASES

All models of SmartOne detection devices use a universal mounting base arrangement. The mounting base is
available in two models, Model 6SB and Model 4SB.
Base model 6SB provides a trim ring which masks any
inconsistencies between the electrical box and the ceiling
material. Model 4SB is electrically the same as Model
6SB, but does not provide the trim ring. The 4SBs outside diameter matches that of the detection devicess,
thus allowing installation into tight places (i.e., under floor
areas).
RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL
Less than 1.0 microcuries Americium 241 in ionization
detector. Shielded by stainless steel housing.
CAUTION
Do not attempt disassembly of the factory sealed sensing chamber. This

assembly is sealed for your protection
and is not intended to be opened for
servicing.
APPLICATION DATA
The smart detectors are compatible with PEGAsys control equipment which utilizes the RX/TX communications
controller. Each RX/TX can communicate with 255
SmartOne devices. The RX/TX supports NFPA Style 4, 6,
and 7 wiring schemes. Style 4 allows unlimited
T-Tapping and Style 6 require redundant wiring. Style 7
requires the use of loop isolator devices. Loop isolator
devices are available for mounting on the RX/TX, in a
single gang electrical box and in the Model 6SB base.
All SmartOne detectors utilize the same base and may
be interchanged. (changing detector types, however,
-3-

K-76-010 Rev AB
Printed in USA
TM
KIDDE-FENWAL INC.
400 MAIN STREET, ASHLAND, MA 01721
TEL: (508) 881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
Intelligent Air Duct

Smoke Detector

K-76-024
Model DH-2000
FEATURES
Accommodates Photoelectric or Ionization Distributed

Intelligent Detectors
Easily mounts to round or rectangular ducts 8 inches to
12 feet wide
Air Verlocity rating 500 to 4000 FPM

Clear Lexan cover for easy viewing of smoke detector status and cleanliness
UL Listed/FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
The DH-2000 Air Duct smoke detector is designed for
detecting particles of combustion in air handling systems.
Upon smoke detection, the integral detection device will
signal the PEGAsys control unit to which it is connected. The PEGAsys control unit can control a variety of
HVAC equipment such as fans and dampers.
The duct detector housing accepts the SmartOne Intelligent CPD-7052 ionization and PSD-7152 photoelectric
detectors. A transparent Lexan cover over the detection
chamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector's
chamber and internal detector status. Sampling air in
HVAC ducts is accomplished with the use of sampling
tubes which extend into the HVAC duct.
APPLICATION
The DH-2000 duct detector is suited for use in commercial, industrial, institutional and residential fire alarm
applications. The unit is compatible with PEGAsys control units which employ the exclusive SmartOne series of
Distributed Intelligent loop devices. The PEGAsys control
systems utilize the receiver/transmitter module (RX/TX).
Each RX/TX can communicate with up to 255 SmartOne
sensors or addressable monitor/control modules.
The circuitry may be either Class B, Style 4 or Class A,
Style 6 or 7 utilizing No. 18 wiring as a minimum. Class B,
Style 4 permits unlimited "T" tapping. Class A, Style 7
requires the use of isolator modules which protect the
RX/TX (SLC) from wire to wire short conditions.
The DH-2000 will accommodate all ducts with air velocities between 500 to 4000 feet per minute. Both the photoelectric (PSD-7152) and the ionization (CPD-7052)
smoke detector, along with the duct housing, will operate
over this entire range. The duct detector is easily
mounted to both rectangular and round ducts from 8
inches to 12 feet wide.
WARNING
When used with the DH-2000 unit, both

the photoelectric (PSD-7152) and ionization (CPD-7052) detectors must be
configured for duct application when
programmed in the control unit.
SAMPLING TUBES
The DH-2000 duct detector operation is based upon an
air sampling principle. Two sampling tubes extend into
the HVAC duct to transport air from the inside of the duct
into the duct detector's sensing chamber and then
exhaust it back out into the duct. If the sampled air contains a concentration of smoke greater than or equal to
the alarm threshold of the smoke detector, the smoke
detector will transmit an alarm signal to the control unit.
The duct detector's inlet supply sampling tube is selected
according to the size of the HVAC duct. The unit's
exhaust tube is molded into the housing to simplify installation.
SMARTONE DETECTOR SPECIFICATION

Detector Models:
CPD-7052 and PSD-7152
Input Voltage:
16.5 to 27.5 Vdc
Standby Current CPD-7052:
400 A, typical
Alarm Current CPD-7052:
425 A, typical
Standby Current PSD-7152:
400 A, typical
Alarm Current PSD-7152:
425 A, typical
Maximum Number of Detectors

per SLC:
255
LED Pulse Modes:

Normal:
9 seconds
Trouble:
LED is extinguished
Alarm:
EMI Immunity:
Note:
Part Number
70-403001-152
Duct detector with SmartOne Photoelectric Detector included DH-2000PSDI
70-403001-052
Duct detector with SmartOne Ionization Detector included DH-2000CPDI
70-403001-100
Duct detector housing without a detector
70-402001-100
SmartOne Ionization Detector Head

CPD-7052
71-402001-100
SmartOne Photoelectric Detector Head

PSD-7152
06-129500-001
12 inch sampling tube

(for ducts less than 2 ft.)
06-129500-002

(for ducts between 2 and 3 ft.)
06-129500-003

06-129500-004

06-129500-005

06-129500-006

(for ducts between 8 and 10ft.)
06-129554-001
Exhaust tube kit
2 Seconds
Exceeds UL 268A
requirements
The SmartOne Intelligent detectors are only

compatible with control units which employ the
RX/TX loop controller.
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS
DUCT
DETECTOR
MODEL
DH-2000
5.000
Description
14.500
2.500
6.750
ENCLOSURE
END PLUG
INLET TUBE
(SUPPLY)
CT OR
DU ECT
T
DE
L
DE
MO 000
-2
DH
EXHAUST TUBE
(MOLDED INTO
ENCLOSURE)
DETECTOR
VIEW PORT
MTG. SCREW
AND O-RING
DETECTOR HEAD
ION OR PHOTO
COVER
Kidde and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

PEGAsys is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

881-2000.
K-76-024 Rev AB
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Addressable Manual Pull Station

Series 3300

K-84-11
FEATURES
Exclusive KIDDE Design

Unique Field Labeling for either Fire Alarm or
Suppression Applications
Dual Action Operation
Interfaces directly to Kidde Addressable Control
Panel SLC
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde Addressable Manual Pull Stations is an intelligent initiating device that contains its own SmartOne
Addressable Input (AI) module and interfaces directly to
the Kidde PEGAsys and ARIES control panel. The
initiating device circuit is wired as NFPA Class B.
The Manual Pull Station is constructed of heavy die-cast
aluminum for long life and uses an internal toggle switch
for reliable operation.
Similiar to othe SmartOne devices, the unit is field programmable using the control panel keypad or Hand-Held
Programmer. The owner location message and reporting
type can be customized by the use of a programming utility utilized with the control panel. A status LED is
mounted on the unit and indicates the status by a 2 or 9
second flash interval. A Trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely.
While the Station is designed for quick, efficient emergency response, its double action PUSH/PULL levers
prevent accidental operation.
The Station can be mounted in an indoor or outdoor
weatherproof backbox (Model SBG-32S or Model SGB32C) or a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep 1-gang
box.
The Station terminal block on the AI module accepts 14,
16 and 18 AWG (1.5 mm2, 1.0 mm2, and 0.75 mm2) wire.
Size #18 is the minimum requirement.
FIRE ALARM OR SUPPRESSION RELEASE

LABELING
The Pull Station has a unique labeling method which provides the installer the greatest amount of flexibility without the expense of having to carry extra inventory. Seven
heavy-duty Lexan self-adhesive labels are shipped with
each station:
FIRE ALARM
FM-200 RELEASE
CO2 RELEASE
FE-13 RELEASE
FIRE SYSTEMS RELEASE HALON-1301 RELEASE

NOVEC 1230 RELEASE
FM Approved
cULus Listed for US and Canada
Other domestic approvals in process
Surface and Weatherproof Backboxes
Flashing LED
Keylock for Reset
SPECIFICATIONS
Station Type:
Double Action, with integral SmartOne Addressable Module
Initiating Device
Circuit:
EOL Resistor Value:
Max. Circuit
Resistance:
Max. Circuit
Capacitance:
Style B (Class B) Wiring
Operating Temperature Range:
-40F to 150F (-40C to 66C)
Operating Humidity
Range:
0-95% RH
Construction:
Die-cast metal housing
Compatible Electrical
Boxes:
Indoor: Sheet metal Model SGB32S

Outdoor: Weatherproof Die-cast
Model SGB-32C
Shipping Weight:
Part Number
Description
84-330002-001
Addressable, Double Action Manual Pull

Station ships with mounting hardware, 2 keys, 1 break rod, and label set.
70-407008-001
Addressable Input Module (Normally

Open Devices)
84-100009-001
SGB-32S Indoor Backbox
84-100009-002
SGB-32C Outdoor Waterproof Backbox
06-129025-003
10 K Ohm Resistor
84-100008-002
Pkg. of (12) Breakrods
06-118013-001
Spare Key
06-231866-930
Label Set
10 K Ohm (06-129025-003)
50 Ohm (25 ohm per conductor)
0.1F
DIMENSIONS
(shown with Fire System Release Label installed)
1-5/64 in.
(27 mm)
1.12 lbs. (510 g)
SGB-32S INTERIOR SURFACE BACKBOX

Dimensions:
4-3/4 in. H x 3-1/4 in. W x 2-1/4 in. D
Construction:
Steel sheet metal.
Conduit:
Two knockouts for 1/2 in. conduit

connectors, one on top and bottom.
Mounting:
Mounts to the box with (4) 8/32

screws, which ship with each box.
3-1/4 in.
(83 mm)
31/32 in.
(24 mm)
FIRE
SYSTEM
RELEASE
FIRE
SYSTEM
RELEASE
PUSH
4-3/4 in.
(121 mm)
PULL
SGB-32C WEATHERPROOF SURFACE

BACKBOX
Dimensions:
4-3/4 in. H x 3-1/4 in. W x 2-1/4 in.D
Construction:
Cast aluminum.
Conduit:
One threaded opening for 1/2 in.

conduit connector.
Mounting:
Mounts to the box with (4) 8/32

screws and a foam gasket, which
ship with each box.
2-1/4 in. MAX.

(57 mm)

SmartOne is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
FM-200 is a registered trademark of the Greak Lakes Chemical Corporation.
FE-13 is a trademark of DuPont.
Lexan is a registered trademark of the General Electric Company.

assumes no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to work correctly.
K-84-11 Rev AA
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Effective: August 2000
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL
MODULE
TM
74.234
FEATURES
Full-digital communications
Addressable notification-appliance circuit
(NAC)
Class A, Style Z or Class B, Style Y wiring
Field-configurable for 24-VDC notification
appliances or 25/70.7 Vrms speakers
Status indicator
Supervises power for notification appliances
UL Listed / FM Approved
DESCRIPTION
The SmartOne Addressable Signal Module (ASM) is a notification-appliance circuit that connects to the signaling line circuit of a compatible control unit. The ASM is an intelligent field
device that contains its own microprocessor, 4K of memory and
the necessary electronics to provide either 24 VDC for conventional notification-appliances or 25/70.7Vrms for speakers.
Alarm contact position

Communications with the control unit
Internal power supply
Connections to external power supply for notificationappliances
Memory status
Module supervision prevents switching audible or audio power
into a shorted circuit.
PROGRAMMING
Each ASM can be configured to support speakers or audiblevisual notification appliances, and Class B, Style Y or Class A,
Style Z operation. The module can also be programmed to support water flow, walk test, and drill modes. As with any SmartOne
device, addressing can be implemented from the hand-held programmer (P/N 74-100013-001) or the control panel keypad/menu.
The Module can also be alarm tested upon command from the
control unit. Module faults are individually reported to compatible control units by module address, fault type, and fault-location message.
STATUS LED
A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the modules
status by a two-second (alarm) or nine-second (normal) flash
interval. A trouble condition stops the flashing.
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
The unit can be mounted in a 4" x 4 electrical box. Terminal

connections support wiring from #18 AWG (1.0 mm2) to #12
AWG (4.0 mm2). The size of the wires used will determine electrical box depth.
Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no

maintenance. Operation can be changed on site using onboard switches and jumpers.
The depth of the electrical box is determined per Article 370 of

the National Electrical Code. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.
For ease of wiring, especially with solid wire, an extension ring
must be used.
SUPERVISION
The ASM provides a fully supervised notification-appliance
circuit for connection to either 24 VDC audible/visual appliances or 25/70.7 Vrms speakers. The module provides continuous internal supervision of:
AUDIO CIRCUIT OUTPUT

25 or 70.7 Vrms, 20 W (max.), non-power limited,
reverse polarity supervised
POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE CIRCUIT END OF LINE
RESISTOR
4.7Kohms, 0.5 W
SPECIFICATIONS
OUTPUT CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
Output Current Rating: 2.0 A max. @ 30 VDC
20 W @ 70.7 Vrms
20 W @ 25.0 Vrms
MAXIMUM LINE RESISTANCES (#12 AWG WIRE)
L o ad
(a m p s )
R esistan ce
(o h m s )
L e n g th
(ft.)
0.2
20.0
12.0K
0.5
8.0
5.0K
1.0
4.0
2.5K
1.5
2.7
1.6K
2.0
2.0
1.2K
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
-31 F to 151 F, (-35 C to 66C)
OPERATING HUMIDITY RANGE

0 to 95%, non-condensing
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL MODULE
70-200200-001
FRONT COVER PLATE (PROVIDED WITH MODULE)
06-235714-001
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
INTERNAL INSULATOR (PROVIDED WITH MODULE)

06-235714-001
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
Single printed circuit board secured to a universal plate
with insulator
WIRING DIAGRAM
MOUNTING
A 4", 2-1/8" deep (for #18 AWG) or 4-11/16", 2-1/8" deep
(for #12 AWG) standard, square electrical box is used.
Wiring specifications are recommended as minimums
for ease of wiring. See National Electrical Code (370).
CONSTRUCTION
High impact polymer housing with 16 gauge mounting
bracket
SHIPPING WEIGHT
10.5oz (298g)
CURRENT DRAW
500 uA in standby or alarm
OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE
16.5 to 27.5 VDC
24 VDC nominal
NOTIFICATION-APPLIANCE CIRCUIT END OF LINE
RESISTOR
47K ohms, 0.5 W
NOTIFICATION-APPLIANCE CIRCUIT OUTPUT
24 VDC, 2 A (max.), power limited, reverse polarity
supervised
Refer to installation instructions (P/N 06-235717-001) for additional information
TM
KIDDE-FENWAL INC.
TEL: (508) 881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920

74.234
10/99
Kidde Fenwal Inc.
Printed in USA
Effective August 2000
Addressable Contact
Input Device
TM
SmartOne
TM
74-214
FEATURES
MONITORS N/O OR N/C UNPOWERED CONTACTS

FULL DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
SIGNALING-LINE-CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS:
-CLASS A, STYLE 6 OR 7 OR,
-CLASS B, STYLE 4
CLASS B, STYLE B INITIATING DEVICE
CIRCUIT
REMOTE-LED OUTPUT
ALARM TEST FROM FENWALNET 2000
KEYPAD
UL LISTED / FM APPROVED
DESCRIPTION
The SmartOneTM Addressable Contact Input Device (AI)
is an intelligent field device with its own microprocessor,
4K of memory and electronics necessary to interface
N/O or N/C unpowered contacts to the FenwalNET
2000 system. All of the electronics are contained in a
high-impact polymer case, creating a very small and
durable device for installation.
Two types of AI's are available: an AI/NC for interfacing to
normally-closed devices and an AI/NO for interfacing to
normally-open devices. The AI may be located up to
2,500 feet from the monitored device with #18 AWG wiring. An end-of-line-resistor is required for supervision of
the wiring to the device.
FIELD PROGRAMMING
System address, owner location message and reporting type are programmable via the FenwalNET 2000 configuration software program.
The System address is a 4-digit number that uniquely
identifies each device. The owner location message is
a 40-character, alpha numeric message that describes
the location of the device. The reporting type is assigned
to the AI depending on the functionality of the device being monitored.
SUPERVISION
The AI continuously monitors the integrity of the
following:
Continuity of supervised wiring
Power/Communications circuit voltage
Internal power supply

Memory data
Faulty entering of data into AI memory
FAILSOFT OPERATION
Should there be a failure in the communication link between the AI and the microprocessor that controls its
signaling line circuit, the AI is capable of reporting a Zone
Alarm for the signaling line circuit and initiating a general
alarm signal. During a general alarm, all outputs programmed for failsoft operation will activate.
STATUS LED
A remote status LED may be connected to the AI. A
slow flash rate of approximately nine seconds indicates
a normal condition, a two-second flash rate indicates
alarm and no flash indicates a trouble condition.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTES
ALARM TEST
Any or all AIs can be tested by command from the
FenwalNET 2000 Control Unit. Results of the test may
be printed out at the system printer.
1.
Maximum 25 resistance per conductor/ 50

per circuit.
2.
Max. #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) wire.

Min. #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) wire.
3.
Refer to Control Panel Manual for wiring specification.
4.
Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA.
5.
All wiring is power limited and supervised.
6.
This module will not support 2-wire smoke

detectors.
7.
Rating of LED circuit: 26 VDC Max., 7mA Max.

If not used leave terminals open circuit.
8.
N/O and N/C initiating device circuits are NFPA

Class B/Style B.
9.
AI N/C is intended for non-fire applications.
INSTALLATION
Part Number
The AI can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 (64

mm) deep, 1-gang box, or standard 4 square box, 1-1/2
(38 mm) deep with cover. The terminal block will accept
#14, 16 and 18 AWG wire (1.5 mm2, 1.0 mm2, 0.75 mm2).
70-407008-001 Addressable Contact Input Device N.O.

70-407008-002 Addressable Contact Input Device N.C.
70-411001-005 Package of 10 End-of-Line Resistors
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage:
16.5 - 27.5 VDC
Standby Current:
450 A Max
Alarm Current:
450 A Max
Max. No. Of Devices per

Communication Circuit:
Description
ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING
SPECIFICATIONS
For specifications request a copy of the Architectural/
Engineering Specification Disk: Available from KiddeFenwal Marketing Department.
255
(Will support all devices in alarm simultaneously)

-31 - 151oF (-35 - 66oC)

0 - 95% RH
LED Pulse Modes

Normal:
9 second interval
Trouble:
LED is off
Alarm:
2 second interval
TM
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TEL:(508) 881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920

responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The product must be
properly applied to perform as described herein.
contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721; Telephone (508) 881-2000
74-214
8/97
Printed in U.S.A.
Conventional Fire Alarm/

Detection System
AEGIS
Conventional Fire Alarm-Suppression Control Unit

84-100
FEATURES
Agency Approvals
Input and Output
FM Approved
3 Detection Circuits
FM Approved to ANSI/UL 864, 9th edition
2 Supervisory Circuits
FM Approved to ULC-S527-99
Other domestic U.S. approvals/listings pending/

in-process
1 Manual Release Circuit

1 Abort Input Circuit
3 Notification Appliance Circuits
Suppression focused Control Unit
2 Release Circuits
Listed for a Wide Range of Suppression Systems
4 Form-C Relays
Kidde FM-200, FE13TM, CO2, 3MTM Novec 1230

Fire Protection Fluid, ArgoniteTM, and Halon
Clean Agents
Kidde IND Dry Chemical & WHDR Wet
Chemical Systems
Programmable Relays
Robust Power Supply

Elegant User-Interface
Simple Configuration
Sprinkler Supervisory Service

Deluge, Preaction, Foam, Foam-Water Systems
Password Protected
Digital Release Countdown
Combination Clean Agent plus Pre-Action System
Battery Voltage and Charging Current Display
Extensive Diagnostics
Backwards Compatible
Improved and Enlarged Cabinet Design
5-Year Warranty
Built-in Class-A and Class-B Circuitry
Sophisticated Programmable Notification Appliance

Circuits
Independently Programmable Agent Releasing Circuits
with Triple-R Protection
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde AEGIS is the technologically most advanced Conventional Single Hazard Agent Releasing Unit available to
the Fire-Alarm Suppression industry today. It combines the
high quality, system reliability, and flexibility required by
modern commercial, high-tech and industrial applications
in an aesthetically pleasing and physically robust package.
The AEGIS is well equipped to handle all special hazard
extinguishing systems due to the high degree of programming flexibility provided and the following full complement
of input and output circuits:
Three (3) Class A or Class B Detection Circuits

Two (2) Class A or Class B SupervisoryCircuits
One (1) Class A or Class B Manual Release Circuit
One (1) Class A or Class B Abort Input Circuit
Three (3) Class A or Class B Notification Appliance
Circuits
Two (2) Class B Agent Release Circuits

Four (4) Form-C Relays
MANUAL RELEASE AND ABORT CIRCUITS

Both the Manual Release and Abort Circuits accept Normally Open contact closure type devices. Activation of the
Agent Release Circuits can either be instantaneous or delayed up to 30 seconds (maximum) upon receipt of Manual
Release input. Agent release can be temporarily delayed
by activating the Abort Circuit. The Abort input can be programmed for 5 modes of operation. These include the UL
10-second mode, the full-delay mode, the IRI mode, the
NYC mode, or the abort can be disabled. Aborts can also
be programmed to be applicable for either one or both Agent
Release Circuits thereby allowing use with Deluge/Pre-Action systems.
DETECTION CIRCUITS
The Detection Circuits can support up to 25 Conventional
CPD-705x Ionization Smoke, PSD-715x Photoelectric
Smoke, or THD-705x Heat Detectors each as well as Normally Open contact closure type devices. Two circuits are
dedicated to the main suppression function and can be programmed to activate the release circuits by either singleshot or cross-zone input. The user-configuration allows
automatic release via detection to be delayed from 0 to 60
seconds in 10-second intervals and also allows a choice of
which of the two Agent Release Circuits to activate.
The third Detection Circuit is programmable for either
Waterflow or as an independent Detection circuit. When
programmed for Waterflow, Notification Appliance Circuits
can be programmed as Non-Silenceable as required by
certain jurisdictions.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NAC)

The three Notification Appliance Circuits are rated 1.5 Amps
each and accept polarized 24 VDC Notification Appliances.
Of the three circuits, NAC 1 activates on First Alarm, NAC 2
in Pre-Release condition and NAC 3 in Releasing condition. Each circuit is driven independently and is user
configurable for 60 BPM, 120 BPM, Temporal, or Continuous pattern.
The MT and NS series appliances provide the option to use
silenceable horns and non-silenceable strobes on the same
NAC. Multiple NAC circuits (connected to audible devices
only) programmed with the same master code pattern are
synchronized, regardless of any differing starting times that
preceded their concurrent operation. The NACs configuration includes a user-selectable intelligent synchronization
feature which allows a silenceable horn to be shut off while
the strobe continues to flash in synchronized fashion.
SUPERVISORY CIRCUITS
The Supervisory Circuits accept Normally Open contact closure type devices such as pressure switches on the agent
cylinders or on the water or air pipe network. The system
configuration enables the supervisory input to be a participant in the suppression function. For example, low air supervisory can be included with detection for release of
pre-action systems as required by certain jurisdictions.
SUPERVISORY
2
TB7
TROUBLE
TB8
RELAY 3
TB9
RELAY 2
TB10
RELAY 1
TB11
BATT OUT
TB12
MANUAL WATERFLOW/
ABORT RELEASE DETECTOR 3
SUPERVISORY
1
TB6
TB5
TB4
TB3
DETECTOR 2
TB2
TB1
AC SUPPLY SELECT SWITCH (S6)

TB19
AC IN
TB14
TB15
TB16
TB17
AUX
24 VDC
NAC 3
TB13
RELEASE 1
ARC 1
RELEASE 2
ARC 2
Figure 1. Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
TB18
DETECTOR 1
NAC 1
NAC 2
BUILT-IN CLASS A AND B CIRCUITRY

For the input and NAC circuits, the choice of Class A or
Class B supervision is made at site on the board itself by
selecting the terminals used for wiring. Neither conversion
boards nor additional hardware nor jumper selection is required for this purpose.
POWER-LIMITED CIRCUITRY
All circuits, excluding ARCs are inherently power-limited.
Agent Release Circuits, except when firing Initiators, can
also be made power-limited by a field located inline releasing diode device thereby allowing cost effective installation
with all wiring in the same conduit.
AGENT RELEASE CIRCUITS (ARC)

The two circuits can be programmed for activation by different inputs, with independent time delays and abort modes
to fire combinations of two of the following releasing devices:
1 or 2 Kidde Continuous and Momentary Solenoid
Control Heads
ROBUST POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU)

The AEGIS features a universal 120/240 V, 50/60 Hz AC
Power Supply Unit with a robust 5.4 Amps of 24 VDC power.
Input voltage selection is via a slider switch with no jumper
cutting required. The on-board battery charger is able to
charge 24 VDC (2 x 12) batteries of capacity up to 68 AH
thereby allowing from 24 hours of supervision plus 5 minutes of alarm to 90 hours of supervision plus 10 minutes of
alarm required by some jurisdictions.
1 Kidde Initiator
1 Factory Mutual Group A, B, D, E, F, G, I, J, or K
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

Up to 1 Amp of auxiliary power at 24 VDC is available to
power external 4-wire devices such as Flame Detectors,
AlarmLine modules, Duct Detectors, etc.
Solenoid
In other words, operating in tandem, the two circuits can
release:
1 or 2 Control Heads on ARC1 and 1 or 2 Control
ELEGANT USER-INTERFACE
The user-interface consists of an array of LED Indicators,
Control Switches, a Digital Display, and Buzzer. Over and
above the System, Power Supply status, Input circuit Fire
and Trouble and Output circuit Trouble LEDs, the AEGIS
annunciates its suppression state-of-alarm via three additional Pre-Release, Releasing and Post Release LEDs. Four
switches are provided, one each for Acknowledge, Signal
Silence, System Reset and Output Disable. The 3-digit display provides a countdown of impending agent release. On
command from the user-interface switches, it also indicates
the battery open circuit voltage and charging current.
Heads on ARC2
1 or 2 Control Heads on ARC1 and 1 Initiator on ARC2

or vice-versa
1 or 2 Control Heads on ARC1 and 1 FM Sprinkler

Solenoid on ARC2 or vice-versa
1 Initiator on ARC1 and 1 Initiator on ARC2

1 FM Solenoid on ARC1 and 1 FM Solenoid on ARC2
This configurability is useful for those jurisdictions where
the gaseous suppression agent is required to be supplemented with a pre-action system.
SIMPLE SITE-SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION

Accessed via the digital display and user-interface switches,
site-specific configuration is simple, yet detailed and can
typically be performed in a matter of minutes. To prevent
unauthorized use, the configuration menu is protected by a
user-changeable password. Factory technical support can
provide assistance with lost or forgotten passwords.
Apart from the input voltage selection performed on both
the PSU and main board via a slider switch, no other onboard settings or jumper cuttings are required.
TRIPLE-R PROTECTION FOR AGENT RELEASING

CIRCUITS (ARC)
The two ARCs feature a triple failure redundancy safeguard
system to protect them from inadvertent activation by the
main microprocessor. The Triple-R system requires that in
order to activate an ARC, the main microprocessor issues
two release commands of opposing polarity via separate
channels and that these commands be combined with a
third signal from the panel watchdog timer to confirm the
microprocessor operation. The Triple-R system ensures that
electrical transients or disturbances such as power surges
that could interfere with the operation of the main microprocessor will not inadvertently activate the connected suppression system. The result is a more robust and reliable
suppression-focused panel.
EXTENSIVE DIAGNOSTICS
Also initiated via the digital display and user-interface
switches, the troubleshooting function displays diagnostic
codes that assist in determining causes of trouble. A complete list of diagnostic codes and their meanings ships factory installed on the inside of the enclosure door for easy
reference.
PROGRAMMABLE RELAYS
Of the 4 relays, three are user-programmable for a variety
of alarm related conditions and the fourth is a dedicated
trouble relay. All relay contacts are rated 3.0 Amps at 30
VDC/120 VAC (resistive).
BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY
Consistent with previous generation Kidde control equipment, the AEGIS is listed to be backwards compatible with
the full range of Kidde-Fenwal conventional detectors, alarm
devices and suppression accessories. Going forward, this
will allow older generation panels to be replaced with relative ease.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTD)
IMPROVED AND ENLARGED CABINET DESIGN

The cabinet design allows for easy installation by fitting between the studs of a standard 16 inch studded wall. It is
large enough to house two 12 VDC, 12 AH Batteries and
provides up to 2 inches (51 mm) of wiring and finger space
between the circuit board and the cabinet wall.
An optional door design features a factory installed Manual
Release and Abort switch for applications with space constraints. Both switches incorporate guards that prevent their
inadvertent activation.
Other cabinet options include a flush mounting trim-ring and
a dead-front plate required for Canadian applications.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hazards Protected
- One
Power Supply
- 120/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz (90 to 264 Vrms, 47 to 63 Hz)
AC Main Input
- 5.4 Amps at 27 Vdc Output
- Battery capacity up to 68 AH @ 24 Vdc
- Auxiliary power output rated at 1 Amp at 18.8 - 27.6
Vdc (resettable)
Three (3) Detection Circuits
- Compatible with up to 25 CPD-705x, PSD-715x, and
THD-705x detectors and normally open contact-closure type devices
- Configurable as Class A/Style D or Class B/Style B
- Supervised for ground faults and open circuits
- Power limited
- DET 1 and DET 2 used for suppression
- DET3/WF configurable for detection or waterflow
One (1) Manual Release Circuit
- Compatible with normally open contact-closure type
devices

- Power limited
One (1) Abort Circuit

devices
- Power-limited
Two (2) Supervisory Circuits
devices
- Power-limited
Three (3) Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs)
- Compatible with polarized 24 VDC Audio-Visual devices
- Rated at 1.5 Amps each
- Configurable as Class A/Style Z or Class B/Style Y
- Supervised for ground faults, shorts, and open circuits
- Power-limited
- First Alarm operates NAC 1, Pre-Release operates
NAC 2, Releasing operates NAC 3
- Common NAC/ARC output disconnect switch
Two (2) Agent Release Circuits
- Each compatible with 1 or 2 control heads, or 1 initiator, or 1 FM sprinkler solenoid
- Circuits electrically capable of simultaneously releasing any combination of two of the above devices
- Factory configured as Class B/Style Y
- Non-power-limited. May be power-limited (except with
initiators) and supervised for short circuit using inline
releasing resistor-diode device
- Common NAC/ARC output disconnect switch
Four (4) Relays
- 3 independently programmable, normally de-energized
Form-C
- 1 dedicated normally energized Form-C Trouble Relay
- Relay contacts rated 3 Amps at 30 Vdc/120 Vac (resistive)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTD)
Enclosure
- NEMA 1 rated 18 gauge sheet steel with door
DESCRIPTION
- Red color
- Suitable for wall and surface mounting
- Optional Trim Ring
- Optional Dead-Front Panel
- Optional door with Manual Release and Abort switches
- Dimensions:
- with Standard Door:

14-1/4 in. W x 5 in. D x 19 in. H
(362 mm x 127 mm x 483 mm)
- with Switch Door
14-1/4 in. W x 6 in. D x 19 in. H
(362 mm x 152 mm x 483 mm)
Environmental Criteria
- Indoor/Dry use only
- Operating temperature range: 32F to 120F (0C to
49C)
- Humidity: 93 2% RH at 90 3F (32 2C )
Packaging/Shipping
- Enclosure, PCB, and PSU packaged in individual cartons
PART
NUMBER
Kidde AEGIS Control Unit
84-732001-001
Kidde AEGIS Control Unit with

Switches
84-732001-201
In-Line Releasing Diode (10K) Kit
06-220023-001
Trim Ring
76-600000-007
Dead-Front Panel*
06-236725-001
Battery Enclosure
76-100010-001
Kidde AEGIS Conventional Fire

Alarm-Suppression Control Unit IOM
Manual
06-236716-001
Kidde AEGIS User's CD
06-236727-001
*For Canadian applications, order Control Unit and

Dead-Front Panel separately.
- Accessories shipped include mounting hardware, battery leads, IOM manual on CD-ROM, operating instruction sheet, and EOL resistor kit
- Order inline releasing resistor-diode device (if required)
and batteries separately

AEGIS and Gemini are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
FM-200 is a registered trademark of Chemtura.
FE-13 is a registered trademark of DuPont.
3MTM NovecTM 1230 Fire Protection Fluid is a trademark of 3M.
Argonite is a registered trademark of Ginge Kerr.
For detailed installation, operation, and configuration information, refer to the Kidde AEGIS Conventional Fire AlarmSuppression Conventional Unit Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual P/N 06-236716-001.

84-100
3/07
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Advanced Ionization
Smoke Detectors
Effective: January 2006
Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D

70.01
FEATURES
Approvals/Listing
US and Canadian UL Listed (cULus)
FM Approved
CSFM Approved
NYC MEA Accepted (pending)
Dual Ionization Chamber Technology
Nominal Sensitivity
CPD-7054:
1.30% per foot Obscuration
CPD-7054D:
Sensitivity Measurement/Testing
Wireless Measurement in %/ft Obscuration
Remote and Local Functional Test Capability
Wide Range of Input Voltage 10.2 to 36.8 VDC
Low Current design
Dual Response LEDs allow 360-degree viewing
Trouble Indication
Low Profile Appearance using Surface Mount Technology
Electrically and Mechanically Compatible with all Fenwal

Smoke and Electronic Heat Detectors and Bases
Interchangeable 2-Wire and 4-Wire Bases
Table 2 lists the Technical Specifications for Models CPD-7054

and CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors.
Universal Relay Modules
CONTROL UNITS
Non Polarized
Locking Feature for Vandal Resistance
Fine Mesh Insect Screen
EMI and RFI Resistant
The Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Detectors are designed

to operate with control units and releasing devices having specific voltage and current characteristics that are compatible with
the detector circuitry. Both models are compatible with the Fenwal
control units and interface modules listed in Table 1.
acceptable limits. A unique gated output circuit design provides

improved stability and transient suppression. Special signal processing techniques verify the presence of smoke before the detector will alarm. A fine mesh insect screen protects the chamber
area and is used to avoid potential nuisance alarms. The detector
head is installed into its mounting base with a simple twist-lock
action. A locking feature is provided for vandal resistant security.
DESCRIPTION
DETECTOR BASE OPTIONS
The Fenwal Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D are dual chamber Ionization Smoke Detectors designed to sense both visible
and invisible products of combustion. The Detectors have advanced solid-state, low-voltage, surface-mount circuitry and are
designed for 2-Wire and 4-Wire installation using the appropriate
Detector base. The characteristic 360-degree detector design
permits smoke entry from any direction. A unique sensing chamber design permits the operation of the Models CPD-7054 and
CPD-7054D in open areas with air velocities from 0 to 300 fpm
and 0 to 500 fpm, respectively. The Model CPD-7054D is also
suitable for duct housing applications in air velocities from 500 to
4000 fpm. The Detectors are designed for open area/duct housing applications per UL268/UL268A and may be installed in systems intended for Releasing Device Service through use of
compatible Fire Alarm Control Panels.
The Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D can be used with the detector base options and accessories in Tables 3 and 4. Various base
options are available to provide auxiliary relay and/or remote indication and remote test feature. The Model CPD-7054 and CPD7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors may be interchanged with other
Fenwal Series THD-705X Electronic Heat Detector and Series PSD715X Photoelectric Smoke Detectors when using multifunction base
configuration.
Two red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are located diametrically

opposite each other so as to allow 360-degree viewing. Both LEDs
continuously indicate the operating condition of the Detector. During standby, the LEDs flash once every six seconds. During alarm,
both LEDs light steady at full brilliance. A double flash every six
seconds indicates a detector with a sensitivity threshold outside
SPACING (OPEN AREA LOCATION)

The Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Detectors are listed to
be installed on maximum 30 foot (9.1 m) centers, typically on
smooth ceilings up to 15 feet (4.6 m) high and will operate with
minimum air circulation.
Resultant maximum 900 square foot (83.6 m2) spacing may be
used as a reasonable guide for comparable applications. Where
special conditions exist (ceiling obstructions, high air exchange
rates, etc.), reduced spacing must be used to achieve adequate
protection. Computer rooms and other such installations may require spacing with a maximum of 200 square feet (18.6 m2) due to
high air exchange rates.
Detectors should not be located in areas with excessive exhaust

fumes, kitchen areas, near fireplaces or furnace rooms and within
three (3) feet of air supply ducts or air diffusers.
Regulations, Part 10 (10CFR), Paragraph 30.20, any person receiving, using, owning, etc., by-product material in detectors designed to protect life or property from fires or airborne hazards is
automatically granted a general license which, conversely, exempts them from a specific license, thereby allowing them to both
receive and dispose of smoke detectors without returning to the
manufacturer.
For additional information, consult the Fenwal Automatic Fire Detection Application Engineering Manual MC-402, NFPA-72 and the
local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS
For detailed wiring diagrams with Fenwal 2- and 4-wire bases,

please refer Fenwal Document 70.104.
The contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the

plans, UL268/UL268A listed dual-chamber, Ionization Smoke
Detectors, Fenwal Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D. Ionization Smoke Detectors containing a radioactive source of strength
greater than 0.8 microcuries (29.6 kBq) shall not be acceptable.
The combination detector head and twist-lock base shall be UL
Listed compatible with a UL Listed fire alarm control unit. The
Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors
shall share interchangeable bases with the PSD-7157 and PSD7157D Photoelectric Smoke Detectors and the THD-7052 and
THD-7053 Heat Detectors.The Fenwal Models CPD-7054 and
CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors shall have two Red LEDs
located diametrically opposite each other so as to allow 360-degree viewing. The LEDs shall continuously indicate the operating
condition of the Detector. During standby, the LEDs shall flash
once every six seconds. During alarm, both LEDs shall light steady
at full brilliance. If the sensitivity of the detector drifts outside acceptable limits, the LEDs shall double flash every six seconds.
The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset
switch. The vandal-resistant security locking feature shall be used
in those areas as indicated on the drawings. The locking feature
shall be field removable when not required.
INSTALLATION
Detector bases are directly mounted on the electrical junction
boxes (3", 3.5" and 4" octagonal, 3" round or 4" square) without
the need for any mechanical adapter required. Refer Fenwal Document 70.104 for additional details.
TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

Testing shall be performed upon installation of the detector and
once a year thereafter as stated in NFPA-72 latest edition. Detector sensitivity shall be checked within one year of installation and
every alternative year thereafter as stated in NFPA 72. Refer
Fenwal Documents 70.103 and 70.104 for details on using the
Infrared Wireless Sensitivity Tester Model DST-003. The tester
provides direct readout in percent per foot obscuration from a distance of 15-feet without removing the detector from its base. A go/
no-go test can be performed using a test magnet.
The recommended requirement for detector maintenance consists
of an annual cleaning of dust from the detector head by using the
suction of a vacuum cleaner. Cleaning programs should be geared
to the individual environment in conformance with NFPA 72.
It shall be possible to measure the sensitivity of the Fenwal Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors from
a distance of up to 15 feet (4.6 m) without removal from the base.
Measurement shall be accomplished with a wireless infrared
Fenwal Sensitivity Tester (DST-003) allowing direct measurement
in percent per foot obscuration. Sensitivity measurement techniques requiring wiring between the Detector-Base combination
and the Tester shall not be acceptable. It shall also be possible to
perform a functional test of the detector without the need for generating smoke.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt disassembly of the factory sealed
smoke detector. This assembly is sealed for your
protection and should not be opened for servicing.
Opening of the detector will void its warranty.
SPARE PARTS
The Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Detectors are factory repairable only and have no field serviceable spare parts. No field
repair should therefore be attempted. For service, return detector
head intact to Fenwal.
The Fenwal Models CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke

Detectors shall operate over an input voltage range from 10.2 to
36.8 VDC. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques to
withstand up to 20 volt/meter shall be employed to minimize susceptibility to false alarms.
RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL/DISPOSAL
The Americium 241 radioactive material used is shielded by a stainless steel housing and has a maximum activity of 0.8 microcuries
(29.6 kBq).
Supplementary SPDT relays, remote test, and/or remote LED

alarm indicators shall be installed where indicated.
The United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission (USNRC) allows the user of Americium 241 filled smoke detectors to dispose
of them without obtaining a license. Under the Code of Federal
Table 1. Control Unit
Control Unit Compatibility
Identifier Number
Maximum Detectors per Loop
2210/2212
C10FE1
40
2410/2412
C10FE1
40
2320
C30FE1
15
3210
ZDM01, ZDMD01, VZM01
25
3220
C32FE1
40
Note: Please refer to Document 70.63 for compatiblity with other Fire Alarm Control Panels.
Table 2. Technical Specification

Model Number
CPD-7054
CPD-7054D
70-540000-001
70-540000-002
Detection
Dual Ionization Chamber
Dual Ionization Chamber
Approvals
cULus, FM, CSFM, MEA-NYC, USNRC, CNSC
cULus, FM, CSFM, MEA-NYC, USNRC, CNSC
I51FE1
I51FE1
30 ft. (9.1 m) centers or 900 sq. ft. (83.6 m2)
Radioactive Source Material Activity
Americium 241 (sealed) 0.8Ci (29.6 kBq)
Americium 241 (sealed) 0.8Ci (29.6 kBq)
Nominal Sensitivity
1.30% + 0.25% - 0.42% per Obscuration
1.00% + 0.10% - 0.12% per Obscuration
Using 2WB
10.2 to 36.8
10.2 to 36.8
Using 4WRB
16.8 to 36.8
16.8 to 36.8
70 A
70 A
100 mA
100 mA
2 external LEDs
2 external LEDs
Standby Condition
One flash every 6 seconds
Thermistor Trouble
Double flash every 6 seconds
Steady at full brilliance
32o to 120oF (0 to 49oC)
32o to 120oF (0 to 49oC)
-20 to 180oF (-29o to 82oC)
-20 to 180oF (-29o to 82oC)
0 to 93% Non-condensing
0 to 300 fpm (0 to 1.5 m/s)
0 to 500 fpm (0 to 2.5 m/s)
N/A
500 to 4000 fpm (2.5 to 20 m/s)
Up to 7,500 feet (2,286 m)
Up to 7,500 feet (2,286 m)
High-impact, flame-retardant plastic, off white
35.3 oz. (110g) w/o base
35.3 oz. (110g) w/o base
Detector Height
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.38 in (35 mm)
Detector Diameter
3.90 in (99 mm)
3.90 in (99 mm)
Base Height
0.43 in (11 mm)
0.43 in (11 mm)
5.90 in (150 mm)
5.90 in (150 mm)
Part Number
UL Compatibility I.D.
Listed Spacing
Standby Voltage (VDC)
Maximum Current
Standby
Alarm
Response Indicators
Quantity
Alarm Condition
Operating Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Air Velocity
Open Area
Duct Housing
Altitude
Physical Characteristics
Material and Finish
Weight
Dimensions
Base Diameter
Table 3. Detector Base Options

Part Number
Model
CID
Description
70-501000-001
2-WIRE
FE51A
2-W Base. Connects to circuit via screw terminals
70-501000-002
2WRLT
FE52A
2-W Base w/ Remote LED & Test capabilities. Connects to detection via screw
terminals. Minimum Alarm Current 15 mA @ 24 VDC.
70-501000-005
2WRB
FE55A
2-W Base w/ 2WRM, Remote LED & Test capabilities. Connects to detection circuit
via pigtail leads. Minimum Alarm Current 19 mA @ 24VDC
70-501000-101
4WRB
N/A
70-500000-004
2WRM
N/A
SPDT Relay for 2WRB Bases. Contacts rated 1.0 A, 30 VDC/ 0.5 A, 125 VAC
70-500000-102
4WRM
N/A
SPDT Relay for 4WRB Bases. Contacts rated 1.0 A, 30 VDC / 0.5 A, 125 VAC
70-501000-003
MA-001
MAFE1
Mechanical Adapter allows CPD-705X & PSD-715X Detectors to physically connect to

Base P/Ns 70-201000-001, -002, -003, -005 & DH-22
Table 4. Ordering Information

Part Number
Model
Description
Detector Heads - Ionization Smoke

70-540000-001
CPD-7054
Ionization Advanced Smoke Detector (cULus)
70-540000-002
CPD-7054D
Detector Heads - Photoelectric Smoke

71-570000-001
PSD-7157
Photoelectric Advanced Smoke Detector (cULus)
71-570000-002
PSD-7157D
Detector Heads - Heat

70-520000-001
THD-7052
135oF Fixed Heat Detector, 15oF Rate of Rise (cULus)
70-530000-001
THD-7053
135oF Fixed Heat Detector (cULus)
Detector Bases
70-501000-001
2-WIRE
2-Wire Standard Base
70-501000-002
2WRLT
2-Wire Base with Remote LED & Test Capabilities
70-501000-005
2WRB
2-Wire Base with Auxiliary Relay, Remote LED & Test Capabilities
70-501000-101
4WRB
70-500000-004
2WRM
Spare 2-Wire Relay Module
70-500000-102
4WRM
Detector Accessories
06-117883-001
Test Magnet
29-116788-001
EOL Supervisory Relay
70-200000-911
RA-911
Remote Alarm Indicator
70-200000-914
RA-914
Remote Alarm Indicator with Smoke Detector Test Switch
70-500000-003
DST-003
Advanced Handheld Wireless Smoke Detector Sensitivity Tester
70-501000-003
MA-001
Mechanical Retrofit Adapter
TM
Protection Systems
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TEL: (508)881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
www.fenwalfire.com

70.01 Rev. AA
Printed in USA
Advanced Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors
Effective: January 2006
Models PSD-7157 & PSD-7157D

70.02
FEATURES
l
Approvals/Listing
n
US and Canadian UL Listed (cULus)
FM Approved
CSFM Approved
NYC MEA Accepted
Nominal Sensitivity
n
PSD-7157:
PSD-7157D:
Sensitivity Measurement/Testing
n
Wireless Measurement in %/ft Obscuration
Remote and Local Functional Test Capability
Wide Range of Input Voltage 10.2 to 36.8 VDC
Low Current design
Dual Response LEDs allow 360-degree viewing
Trouble Indication
Low Profile Appearance using Surface Mount Technology
Electrically and Mechanically Compatible with all Fenwal

Smoke and Electronic Heat Detectors and Bases
Interchangeable 2-Wire and 4-Wire Bases
Universal Relay Modules
Non Polarized
Locking Feature for Vandal Resistance
Fine Mesh Insect Screen
EMI and RFI Resistant
DESCRIPTION
The Fenwal Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors respond to a broad spectrum of both flaming
and smoldering fire conditions. The Detectors have advanced
solid-state, low-voltage, surface-mount circuitry and are designed
for 2-Wire and 4-Wire installation using the appropriate Detector
base. The characteristic 360-degree detector design permits
smoke entry from any direction. A unique sensing chamber design permits the operation of the Models PSD-7157 and PSD7157D in open areas with air velocities from 0 to 300 fpm and 0
to 4000 fpm respectively. The Model PSD-7157D is also suitable
for duct housing applications in air velocities from 500 to 4000
fpm. The Detectors are designed for open area/duct housing
applications per UL268/UL268A and may be installed in systems
intended for Releasing Device Service through use of compatible Fire Alarm Control Panels.
Two Red Light Emitting Diodes are located diametrically opposite each other so as to allow 360-degree viewing. Both LEDs
continuously indicate the operating condition of the Detector.
During standby, the LEDs flash once every six seconds. During
alarm, both LEDs light steady at full brilliance. A double flash
every six seconds indicates a detector with a sensitivity threshold outside acceptable limits. A unique gated output circuit de-
sign provides improved stability and transient suppression. Special signal processing techniques verify the presence of smoke
before the detector will alarm. A fine mesh insect screen protects
the chamber area and is used to avoid potential nuisance alarms.
The detector head is installed into the base with a simple twistlock action. A locking feature is provided for vandal resistant security.
Table 2 lists the Technical Specifications for Models PSD-7157
and PSD-7157D Photoelectric Smoke Detectors.
CONTROL UNITS
The Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Detectors are designed
for operation with control units and releasing devices having specific voltage and current characteristics that are compatible with
the detector circuitry. The Detectors are compatible with the
Fenwal control units and interface modules listed in Table 1.
DETECTOR BASE OPTIONS

The Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D can be used with the
detector base options and accessories in Tables 3 and 4. Various
base options are available to provide auxiliary relay and/or remote indication and remote test feature.
The Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Photoelectric Smoke
Detectors may be interchanged with other Fenwal Series THD705X Electronic Heat Detectors and Series CPD-705X Ionization
Smoke Detectors when using multifunction base configuration.
SPACING (OPEN AREA LOCATION)

The Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Detectors are listed to
be installed on maximum 30 foot (9.1 m) centers, typically on
smooth ceilings up to 15 feet (4.6 m) high and will operate with
minimum air circulation.
Resultant maximum 900 square foot (83.6 m2) spacing may be
used as a reasonable guide for comparable applications. Where
special conditions exist (ceiling obstructions, high air exchange
rates, etc.), reduced spacing must be used to achieve adequate
protection. Computer rooms and other such installations may require spacing with a maximum of 200 square feet (18.6 m 2) due
to high air exchange rates.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS
Detectors should not be located in areas with excessive exhaust

fumes, kitchen areas, near fireplaces or furnace rooms and within
three (3) feet of air supply ducts or air diffusers.
The contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the

plans, UL268/UL268A listed Photoelectric Smoke Detectors,
Fenwal Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D. The combination
detector head and twist-lock base shall be UL Listed compatible
with a UL Listed fire alarm control unit. The Models PSD-7157
and PSD-7157D Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall share interchangeable bases with the CPD-7054 and CPD-7054D Ionization Smoke Detectors and the THD-7052 and THD-7053 Heat
Detectors.
For additional information, consult the Fenwal Automatic Fire

Detection Application Engineering Manual MC-402, NFPA-72 and
the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
For detailed wiring diagrams with Fenwal 2- and 4-wire bases,
please refer Fenwal Document 70.104
INSTALLATION

Smoke Detectors shall have two Red LEDs located diametrically
opposite each other so as to allow 360-degree viewing. The LEDs
shall continuously indicate the operating condition of the Detector. During standby, the LEDs shall flash once every six seconds. During alarm, both LEDs shall light steady at full brilliance.
If the sensitivity of the detector drifts outside acceptable limits,
the LEDs shall double flash every six seconds. The detector may
be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. The vandalresistant security locking feature shall be used in those areas as
indicated on the drawings. The locking feature shall be field removable when not required.
Detector bases are directly mounted on the electrical junction

boxes (3", 3.5" and 4" octagonal, 3" round or 4" square) without
the need for any mechanical adapter required. Refer Fenwal
Document 70.104 for additional details.
The detector bases also include a locking feature that prevents
removal of the detector without use of a tool.
TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

Testing shall be performed upon installation of the detector and
once a year thereafter as stated in NFPA-72 latest edition.
Detector sensitivity shall be checked within one year of installation and every alternative year thereafter as stated in NFPA 72.
Refer Fenwal Documents 70.103 and 70.104 for details on using
the Infrared Wireless Sensitivity Tester Model DST-003. The tester
provides direct readout in percent per foot obscuration from a
distance of 15-feet without removing the detector from its base. A
go/no-go test can be performed using a test magnet.
It shall be possible to measure the sensitivity of the Fenwal Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Photoelectric Smoke Detectors
from a distance of up to 15 feet (4.6 m) without removal from the
base. Measurement shall be accomplished with a wireless infrared Fenwal Sensitivity Tester (DST-003) allowing direct measurement in percent per foot obscuration. Sensitivity measurement
techniques requiring wiring between the Detector-Base combination and the Tester shall not be acceptable. It shall also be
possible to perform afunctional test of the detector without the
need for generating smoke.
The recommended requirement for detector maintenance consists of an annual cleaning of dust from the detector head by
using the suction of a vacuum cleaner. Cleaning programs should
be geared to the individual environment in conformance with NFPA
72.

Smoke Detectors shall operate over an input voltage range from
10.2 to 36.8 VDC. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques to withstand up to 20 volt/meter shall be employed to
minimize susceptibility to false alarms.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt disassembly of the factory sealed
detector. This assembly is sealed for your protection
and should not be opened for servicing. Opening of
the detector will void its warranty.
SPARE PARTS
The Models PSD-7157 and PSD-7157D Detectors are factory
repairable only and have no field serviceable spare parts. No
field repair should therefore be attempted. For service, return
detector head intact to Fenwal.
Table 1. Control Unit

Control Unit Compatibility
Identifier Number
Maximum Detectors per Loop
2210/2212
C10FE1
40
2410/2412
C10FE1
40
2320
C30FE1
15
3210
ZDM01, ZDMD01, VZM01
25
3220
C32FE1
40
Note: Please refer to Document 70.63 for compatiblity with other Fire Alarm Control Panels.
Table 2. Technical Specification

Model Number
PSD-7157
PSD-7157D
71-570000-001
71-570000-002
Detection
Photoelectric
Photoelectric
Approvals
cULus, FM, CSFM, MEA-NYC
cULus, FM, CSFM, MEA-NYC
Part Number
UL Compatibility I.D.
P55FE1
P55FE1
30 ft. (9.1 m) centers or 900 sq. ft. (83.6 m )
3.25% + 0.45% - 1.78% per foot Obscuration
2.40% + 0.04% - 1.34% per foot

Obscuration
Using 2WB
10.2 to 36.8
10.2 to 36.8
Using 4WRB
16.8 to 36.8
16.8 to 36.8
70 A
70 A
100 mA
100 mA
2 external LEDs
2 external LEDs
Standby Temperature
32o to 120oF (0 to 49oC)
32o to 120oF (0 to 49oC)
Storage Temperature
-20 to 180oF (-29o to 82oC)
-20 to 180oF (-29o to 82oC)
0 to 300 fpm (0 to 1.5 m/s)
0 to 500 fpm (0 to 2.5 m/s)
N/A
500 to 4000 fpm (2.5 to 20 m/s)
Up to 7,500 feet (2,286 m)
Up to 7,500 feet (2,286 m)
35.3 oz. (110g) w/o base
35.3 oz. (110g) w/o base
Detector Height
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.38 in (35 mm)
Detector Diameter
3.90 in (99 mm)
3.90 in (99 mm)
Base Height
0.43 in (11 mm)
0.43 in (99 mm)
Base Diameter
5.90 in (150 mm)
5.90 in (150 mm)
Listed Spacing
Nominal Sensitivity
Standby Voltage (VDC)
Maximum Current
Standby
Alarm
Response Indicators
Quantity
Standby Condition
Abnormal Sensitivity
Alarm Condition
Operating Environment
Relative Humidity
Air Velocity
Open Area
Duct Housing
Altitude
Physical Characteristics
Material and Finish
Weight
Dimensions
Table 3. Detector Base Options

Part Number
Model
CID
Description
70-501000-001
2-WIRE
FE51A
2-W Base. Connects to circuit via screw terminals
70-501000-002
2WRLT
FE52A
2-W Base w/ Remote LED & Test capabilities. Connects to detection via screw
terminals. Minimum Alarm Current 15 mA @ 24 VDC.
70-501000-005
2WRB
FE55A
70-501000-101
4WRB
N/A
70-500000-004
2WRM
N/A
SPDT Relay for 2WRB Bases. Contacts rated 1.0 A, 30 VDC/ 0.5 A, 125 VAC
70-500000-102
4WRM
N/A
SPDT Relay for 4WRB Bases. Contacts rated 1.0 A, 30 VDC / 0.5 A, 125 VAC
70-501000-003
MA-001
MAFE1
Mechanical Adapter allows CPD-705X & PSD-715X Detectors to physically connect to

Base P/Ns 70-201000-001, -002, -003, -005 & DH-22
Table 4. Ordering Information

Part Number
Model
Description
Detector Heads - Ionization Smoke

70-540000-001
CPD-7054
70-540000-002
CPD-7054D
Detector Heads - Photoelectric Smoke

71-570000-001
PSD-7157
71-570000-002
PSD-7157D
Detector Heads - Heat

70-520000-001
THD-7052
135oF Fixed Heat Detector, 15oF Rate of Rise (cULus)
70-530000-001
THD-7053
135oF Fixed Heat Detector (cULus)
Detector Bases
70-501000-001
2-WIRE
2-Wire Standard Base
70-501000-002
2WRLT
2-Wire Base with Remote LED & Test Capabilities
70-501000-005
2WRB
70-501000-101
4WRB
70-500000-004
2WRM
70-500000-102
4WRM
Detector Accessories
06-117883-001
Test Magnet
29-116788-001
EOL Supervisory Relay
70-200000-911
RA-911
70-200000-914
RA-914
Remote Alarm Indicator with Smoke Detector Test Switch
70-500000-003
DST-003
Advanced Handheld Wireless Smoke Detector Sensitivity Tester
70-501000-003
MA-001
Mechanical Retrofit Adapter
TM
Protection Systems
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TEL: (508)881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
www.fenwalfire.com

responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The product must be
70.02 Rev. AC
Printed in USA
Effective: August 1999
Series 27100, 28000

Vertical DETECT-A-FIRE Units
Installation Instructions
12.01.D
DESCRIPTION
DETECT-A-FIRE thermal detectors are UL Listed, UL of
Canada available upon request, and FM Approved detection and release devices used with fire detection systems to
activate alarms and actuate extinguishing systems. This Rate
Compensated device combines the best features of both
fixed temperature and rate-of-rise detectors.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Model Number
27120
28020
Contact
Operation on
Temperature
Rise
Electrical Rating*
(Resistive Only)
Opens
(450oF Max)
5.0 Amps 125 VAC

0.5 Amps 125 VDC
Closes
5.0 Amps 125 VAC

0.5 Amps 125 VDC
2.0 Amps 24 VDC
1.0 Amps 48 VDC
27121
28021
*Although incandescent lamps are considered resistive, their inrush current is 10 - 15 times their steady current. Do not exceed ratings.
Table 1.
LOCATION
DETECT-A-FIRE Units are precision temperature sensors.
They must be mounted in an area (normally a ceiling) so
that:
1. The detector spacing complies with both system requirements and requirements of the agency having local jurisdiction.
2. The thermal air path to the shell is not obstructed.
Spacing per UL, FM, and UL of Canada is shown in Table 1.
Distances given are for between units on smooth ceilings.
Distances from partitions or walls are half that shown. To
assure that all spacing requirements are met, consult the
authority having local jurisdiction.
MOUNTING
Detect-A-Fire units are not position sensitive. Horizontal and
vertical detectors refer to the most common mounting configuration for that unit. However, each type can be mounted
either horizontally or vertically depending on the application
and installation requirements.
SPACINGS (in feet)
Color
Coding
F
Setting
F
Tolerance
140
+7/-8
50
50
25
Black
160
+7/-8
25
25
25
Black
190
+7/-8
50
50
25
White
210
+7/-8
25
50
25
White
225
+7/-8
25
50
25
White
275
10
25
50
25
Blue
325
10
50
50
25
Red
360
10
25
50
25
Red
450
15
25
50
25
Green
500
15
50
50
25
Orange
600
20
N/A
50
25
Orange
725
25
N/A
50
25
Orange
Note:
U
L
For clean agents and CO2 suppression systems,

ceiling spacing 20 ft. (6.1 meters) apart unless otherwise specified.
Not all units are suitable for all hazard location applications.
Refer to Table 2 and markings on the detector for hazardous location suitability.
1
Table 2.
Haz ardous
Location
Model
Numbr
Class I*, Groups

A, B, C and D;
Class II*, Groups
E, F and G
27120-22
27121-20
28020-3
28021-5
Class I*, Groups

B, C and D;
Class II*, Groups
E, F and G
27120-0
27121-0
28021-0
Series 28000 units are similar to Series 27100 units except

they have two 1/2-14 NPT threads for mounting.
The unit may be mounted as described above or may be
threaded into a 1/2-14 NPT tapped hole in the vessel wall or
threaded into a coupling brazed or welded to the vessel wall.
Fitting Required For

UL, ULC Listings
and FM Approval
Mount detector to a
suitably-listed fitting in
acordance with
National Electric Code
and/or local authority
having jurisdiction.
FIELD WIRING REQUIREMENT

Field wiring must be capable of withstanding the maximum
anticipated ambient temperature in the application.
FUNCTIONAL TEST
When used with automatic fire extinguishing systems first
disconnect the initiator/solenoid leads from the panel and
connect a 24 VDC bulb to initiator terminals in the control
unit. Heat the D-A-F units with a heat lamp or other convenient source. When the bulb in the control unit changes state,
remove heat source and allow D-A-F unit to cool. Reset control unit. Test lamp must change state and stay changed
after system is reset. Do not reconnect initiator/solenoid leads
until all D-A-F units have cooled below set point as indicated
by test lamp. When D-A-F units are used in other types of
systems, disconnect them from the system, connect a 24
VDC lamp and power source in series with the D-A-F units
and test with heat source as above. Make sure that contacts
have reset to normal condition before reconnecting to system circuit.
*Division 1 and 2.
INSTALLATION
Figure 1
Figure 2
1. Kidde-Fenwal recommends that standard 4-inch octagonal outlet boxes be used to mount detectors.
2. Attach detector to outlet box cover through a 0.875 inch
diameter hole and using two 1/2-14 NPT retainer nuts
as indicated.
3. Connect system wiring to detector per Figure 3 and applicable electrical codes.
4. Ordinary Locations: The DETECT-A-FIRE Units are
to be installed in grounded metallic junction boxes only.
They are to be secured to the boxes using two lock
nuts, one on either side of the mounting plate. DETECTA-FIRE Units are not to be installed in non-metallic junction boxes.
5. Hazardous Locations: For Class I, Division 1 and 2
locations, install the DETECT-A-FIRE Unit in a listed
explosion-proof enclosure with a minimum thread engagement of five full turns. No non-conductive material
is to be placed on the threaded joint of the DETECT-AFIRE Unit or in the listed explosion-proof enclosure.
For Division 2 locations, assure that a protective ground
terminal is provided in the listed explosion-proof enclosure when flexible metal conduit is used.
6. Do not exceed a maximum torque without thread lubricant of 20 foot-pounds (27.1 Newton Meters).
! WARNING
1. In order to function properly, the sensing shell of the unit must remain free from paint, grease, oil, etc. Should such a
build up occur, do not, under any circumstances, attempt to remove it. Replace the unit.
2. Detectors mounted in an area subject to physical abuse or damage, other than above, must be suitably protected
without obstructing the thermal air path to the unit.
3. Do not install the unit where the shell would be physically damaged by sand, grain, rocks, etc.
4. Do not overtorque the unit when installing.
5. Any detector that has been abused or damaged must be replaced.
6. Consult the factory for special precautions necessary for outdoor use or moist environments.
ANY OF THE ABOVE COULD CHANGE THE FACTORY TEMPERATURE SETTING, WHICH MAY RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND/ OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A UNIT TO HAVE BEEN ABUSED OR DAMAGED AND NOT DISPLAY ANY OUTWARD INDICATION OF THE DAMAGE. ALL UNITS SHOULD BE TESTED PERIODICALLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION REQUIREMENTS (72E) OR THE AGENCY HAVING LOCAL JURISDICTION.
Typical Security System Method
Typical Fire Alarm System Method

Figure 3. System Wiring
These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment described, nor do they provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without notice. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter
should be referred to KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., Ashland, Massachusetts.

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TEL: (508) 881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
www.fenwalfire.com
Protection Systems
12.01.D
8/99
Printed in U.S.A.
CP
SPECIFICATION DATA
IR Flame Detector
X9800
DE S CRIP TION
WARRANTY
The evolution continues with the new X9800 IR

Flame Detector. The X9800 meets the most
stringent requirements worldwide with advanced
detection capabilities and immunity to extraneous
sources, combined with a superior mechanical
design. The detector is equipped with automatic,
manual and magnetic oi test capability. The
detector has Division and Zone explosion-proof
ratings and is suitable for use in indoor and
outdoor applications.
The standard output configuration includes fire, fault and auxiliary

relays. An optional 4 to 20 mA output can be provided in addition
to the three relays. A model with pulse output is available
for easy retrofitting into existing Det-Tronics controller based
systems. Auxiliary relay and 4 to 20 mA output are not available
with the pulse model. A tricolor LED on the detector faceplate
indicates detector status condition.
The X9800 housing is available in aluminum or stainless steel,
with NEMA 4X and IP66 rating.
F E AT U R E S
Typical applications include:

Dirty environments
Petrochemical applications
Automotive applications
Powder coating applications
Turbines.
* oi is Detector Electronics' Trademark for its patented Optical Integrity

Systems, U.S. Patent 3,952,196, United Kingdom Patent 1,534,969,
Canada Patent 1,059,598.
2.2
Detector Electronics Corporation 2007
FM 3260 (2000).
EN 54-10 Certified (VdS).
ATEX Directive compliant.
EQP models available.
TDSA (Time Domain Signal Analysis) for unequaled false alarm
rejection.
Responds to a fire in the presence of modulated blackbody
radiation (i.e. heaters, ovens, turbines) without false alarm.
High speed capability 40 milliseconds.
Microprocessor controlled heated optics for increased
resistance to moisture and ice.
Automatic, manual or magnetic optical integrity (oi) testing
no external test lamp required.
Easily replaceable oi plate.
Fire, fault and auxiliary relays standard.
MODBUS RS-485 communication.
4 to 20 mA isolated output (optional).
Pulse output for compatibility with controller based systems
(optional).
Tricolor LED indicates normal operation, fire and fault
conditions.
Operates under adverse weather conditions and in dirty
environments.
Mounting swivel allows easy sighting.
Integral wiring compartment for ease of installation.
Class A wiring per NFPA-72.
Meets NFPA-33 response requirement for under 0.5 second
(available when model selected).
RFI and EMC Directive compliant.
Built-in data logging/event monitoring.
4/07
90-1160
S P E C IF IC ATIO NS
Operating Voltage
24 vdc. Operating range is 18 to 30 vdc.
Power Consumption
2.1 watts @ 24 vdc minimum.

16.5 watts @ 30 vdc with EOL resistor installed and
heater on maximum.
Relays
Certification
Contacts rated 5 amperes at 30 vdc.

Fire Alarm:
Fault:
Auxiliary*:
Form C (NO and NC contacts)

normally de-energized
latching/non-latching.
Form A (NO contacts)
normally energized
Form C (NO and NC contacts)
normally energized
Current Output*
(Optional)
420 mA, with a maximum loop resistance of 500

ohms from 1819.9 vdc, 600 ohms from 2030 vdc.
Temperature Range
Operating:
Storage:
Humidity Range
0 to 95% relative humidity, can withstand 100%

condensing humidity for short periods of time.
40F to +167F (40C to +75C).

67F to +185F (55C to +85C).
FM
APPROVED
Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C & D;

Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, & G;
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C & D (T3);
Class II, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T3);
Class III.
NEMA/Type 4X.
Increased Safety Model

0539 II 2 GD
EEx de IIC T5T6 T86C
DEMKO 02 ATEX 132195
T6 (Tamb = 55C to +60C).
T5 (Tamb = 55C to +75C).
IP66.
IECEx
Certificate of Conformity
IECEx ULD 06.0018X
Ex d IIC T5-T6 or Ex de IIC T5-T6
T6 (Tamb = 55C to +60C).
T5 (Tamb = 55C to +75C).
Flameproof Model
0539 II 2 GD
EEx d IIC T5T6 T86C
DEMKO 02 ATEX
T6 (Tamb = 55C to +60C).
T5 (Tamb = 55C to +75C).
IP66.
Dimensions
Dimensions shown in inches (centimeters).
4.7
(11.9)
Field of View
The X9800 has a 90 degree cone of vision with the

highest sensitivity lying along its central axis.
Warranty
3 years.
Enclosure Material
Copper-free aluminum or 316 stainless steel.
9.7
(24.6)
A2142
14 AWG (2.08 mm2) or 16 AWG (1.31 mm2)

shielded cable is recommended.
Wiring
Conduit Entry Size
3/4 inch NPT or 25 mm.
Shipping Weight
(Approximate)
Aluminum:
Stainless Steel:
4.8
(12.2)
6 pounds (2.7 kg).

10 pounds (4.5 kg).
4-20 mA +
19
4-20 mA
SPARE
29
4-20 mA + REF
18
4-20 mA REF
SPARE
28
Response Characteristics
17
COM AUX
27
Very High Sensitivity, TDSA On
N.O. FIRE
16
N.O. AUX
26
N.C. FIRE
15
N.C. AUX
25
14
RS-485 A
24
13
RS-485 B
23
MAN Oi
22
Fuel
Size
Distance
Feet (M)
Typical Response
Time (Sec.)
Quick Fire
4
3
n-Heptane
1 x 1 foot
85 (25.9)
15
Off
Methane
32 inch plume
60 (18.3)
Off
Propane
Torch
2 (0.6)
0.04
On
2
1
COM FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
24 VDC +
24 VDC
12
11
24 VDC
21
A2061
NOTE:
Wiring Terminal Identification for Standard X9800
Refer to the X9800 instruction manual (form number 95-8554) for details
regarding detector response.
ED
ER
BY UL
AN
Detector Electronics Corporation
RE
T
IS
BS
*Auxiliary relay and 4 to 20 mA output are not available on pulse output model.
S
REGI
TER
ED FIR
A 23
REGIS
NO
.
TE
RM
ISO 9001
RED FI
05 NO. 25
6
82
6901 West 110th Street Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA

Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491 Fax (952) 829-8750
http://www.det-tronics.com E-mail: detronics@detronics.com
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Effective: May 2007

TM
Air Duct Smoke Detector
Protection Systems
Model DH-60 (2W) for 2-Wire Applications

F-70-62
FEATURES
Lower Cost Two Wire Detector for Connection to Fire

Alarm Control Panel Initiating Circuits
Accommodates Fenwal Ionization or Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors
Remote Indication and Test Capabilities
Easily Mounts to Round or Rectangular Ducts 8
inches (203 mm) to 12 feet (3.6 m) Wide
Air Velocity Rating 500 to 4000 FPM
Clear Lexan Cover for Easy Viewing of Smoke Detector Status and Cleanliness
UL 268A Listed File S1064
Factory Mutual Approved
CSFM Listed
NYC MEA Listed
City of Los Angeles Approval #RR8318
3 Year Warranty
DESCRIPTION
The Fenwal DH-60 (2W) Air Duct smoke detector is
designed for detecting particles of combustion in air handling systems. The DH-60 (2W) unit is designed to be
connected to the initiating circuit of an Underwriters Laboratories listed compatible fire alarm control panel. Upon
detection of smoke levels at the set point of the detector,
the DH-60 (2W) will put the control panel into alarm. The
alarmed panel may then control a variety of devices,
such as HVAC fans and dampers, to prevent the spread
of smoke throughout the facility.
The duct detector housing accepts the CPD-7051D ionization or PSD-7155D photoelectric smoke detectors. A
transparent Lexan cover over the detection chamber
allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamber and
the internal smoke detector status. Sampling air in HVAC
ducts is accomplished with the use of sampling tubes
which extend into the HVAC duct.
Outputs are provided which can accommodate remote
alarm indication and remote test. Fenwal offers a line of
remote accessories which work in conjunction with the
duct detectors.
APPLICATION
The Fenwal DH-60 (2W) duct detector is suited for use
within HVAC systems in commercial, industrial, and institutional fire alarm applications.
The DH-60 (2W) will accommodate all ducts with air
velocities between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Both
the photoelectric (PSD-7155D) or the ionization (CPD7051D) smoke detector with the duct housing will operate
over this entire air velocity range. The duct detector is
easily mounted to both rectangular and round ducts from
8 inches (203 mm) to 12 feet (3.6 m) wide.
SAMPLING TUBES
Duct detector operation is based upon an air sampling
principle. Two tubes extend into the HVAC duct to transport air from inside the duct into the duct detector sensing
chamber and back out to the duct. If the sampled air contains a concentration of smoke greater than or equal to
the alarm threshold of the internal smoke detector, the
unit will go into alarm.
The duct detectors inlet supply sampling tube is selected
according to the size of the HVAC duct. No exhaust tube
is required. The units exhaust tube is molded into the
housing to simplify installation.
REMOTE INDICATORS/CONTROLS
A series of easily installed remote indicators are available
to add versatility and flexibility to the DH-60 (2W) duct
housing. These attractive and functional devices provide
convenient status information along with remote capabilities. The remote indicators are helpful when the detector
is out of view or located in hard-to-get-at locations.
DIMENSIONS/EXPLODED VIEW DRAWING
5 in.
127 mm
DH-60 (2W)
FENWAL
14-1/2 in.
(368 mm)
2-1/2 in.
(64mm)
6-3/4 in.
(171 mm)
ENCLOSURE
END PLUG
COVER/TERMINAL
DESIGNATION PLATE
INLET TUBE
(SUPPLY)
CT OR
DU ECT
T
DE
L
DE
MO 0
-6
DH
AL
NW
FE
EXHAUST TUBE
(MOLDED INTO ENCLOSURE)
MTG. SCREW
AND O-RING
DETECTOR
VIEW PORT
DETECTOR HEAD
ION OR PHOTO
COVER
REMOTE INDICATORS
ALARM
ALARM
TEST
INDICATOR
MODEL RA-911
REMOTE ALARM INDICATOR
MODEL RA-914
REMOTE ALARM INDICATOR
WITH TEST
-2-
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1: Input Voltage And Current Ratings
Power Source
Voltage Range
24 Vdc
10.2 - 38.6
Average Standby
Current
(No Accessories)
Maximum Standby
Current
(No Accessories)
PSD-7155D: 55 A
CPD-7051D: 45 A
70 A
Maximum Alarm Current

(Maximum Accessories)
100 mA
(limited by panel)
UL COMPATIBILITY ID: FE52A

Note:
Please contact Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. for a list of UL compatible fire alarm control panels.
Table 2: Remote Indicator Current Ratings
Model
Description
Standby
Alarm
RA-911
0 mA
20 mA
RA-914
Remote Alarm Indicator with Test
0 mA
20 mA
Component
Part Number
Duct detector housing with photoelectric smoke detector included (2 wire) DH-60(2W)PSD
70-600000-255
Duct detector housing with ionization smoke detector included (2 wire) DH-60(2W)CPD
70-600000-251
Duct detector housing without a smoke detector (2wire) DH-60(2W)
70-600000-200
Ionization Detector Head CPD-7051D
70-510000-060
Photoelectric Detector Head PSD-7155D
71-510000-060
Remote Alarm Indicator RA-911
70-200000-911
Remote Alarm Indicator with Test RA-914
70-200000-914
12 in. (305 mm) sampling tube (for ducts less than 2 ft. [.6 m])
06-129500-001
24 in. (610 mm) sampling tube (for ducts between 2 to 3 ft. [.6 m to .9 m])
06-129500-002
48 in. (1219 mm) sampling tube (for ducts between 3 to 4 ft. [.9 m to 1.2 m])
06-129500-003
72 in. (1829 mm) sampling tube (for ducts between 4 to 6 ft. [1.2 m to 1.8 m])
06-129500-004
06-129500-005
06-129500-006
Optional Exhaust Tube Kit
06-129554-001
Sensitivity Tester (ST-001)
70-500000-002
Spare Key for RA-914
06-118012-001
Test Magnet
06-117883-001
Installation and Instruction Manual
06-235201-001
-3-
TM

F-70-62 Rev AB
Printed in USA
Protection Systems
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
www.fenwalfire.com
STI STOPPER II
Protective Cover To Help Stop Malicious and Accidental
False Fire Alarms
This unique and patented device has been helping stop
false fire alarms around the world for more than 25 years,
without restricting legitimate alarms. It offers excellent
protection against physical damage (both accidental and
intentional), dust and grime as well as severe
environments inside and out. It is ideal for schools,
colleges, hospitals, nursing homes, stores, hotels and
public buildings of almost every kind where there is a
threat of false fire alarms.
How It Works
Stopper II consists of a clear, tamperproof, a super tough
polycarbonate shield and frame that fits over a manual
pull station. When lifted to gain access to the actual
alarm, it sounds a piercing self-contained 95 dB or 105 dB
warning horn (at one foot). Immediate attention is drawn
to the area and a prankster will either run or be caught.
The cover is connected to the frame by a cable. When the
cover is lifted, it drops off of the frame and a horn will
sound (models with horn). Horn will sound until the cover
is snapped back onto the frame or for the life of the
battery.
Features
Proven effective for more than 25 years in helping

stop false fire alarms without restricting legitimate
alarms.
Lifetime guarantee against breakage of the
polycarbonate housing in normal use (one year
on electronic components).
Can be used as a guard against physical damage to
a manual pull station, with or without the optional
warning horn.
Cover is UV-stabilized against sun deterioration.
Optional horn has choice of 95 dB or 105 dB at one
foot.
Standard red units have In Case of Fire... label
unless specified no label or custom label (charge for
custom label).
Horn housing available in red, blue, green or yellow
with optional custom labeling.
When covering a pull station outside, UL requires
stations to be listed for outdoor use.
ADA
Compliant
STI-1100
NEMA 3R
See reverse for details
UL Listed to U.S. and Canadian safety standards (also

for custom labeling).
Larger sizes and surface mounted pull stations
accommodated with STI-3100 conduit spacer.
Polycarbonate rated -40F to 120F (-40C to 49C).
Weather models have closed cell gaskets.
Power source is 9 VDC alkaline battery included on
standard Stopper II (remote powered unit is
available).
RC models include one form C dry relay contact
and is capable of operating from 9-24 VDC remote
power or internal 9 VDC battery power.
Not just for pull stations, this cover can also help
protect other devices such as EPOs, call boxes,
telephones and emergency shutdowns just by
changing the color and messaging.
With backplate and gaskets, UL Listed to NEMA 3R
Standards.
Safety Technology International, Inc.

2306 Airport Road Waterford, Michigan 48327-1209
Phone: 248-673-9898 Fax: 248-673-1246 Toll Free: 800-888-4STI E-mail: info@sti-usa.com Web: www.sti-usa.com
Europe Branch Office Unit 49G Pipers Road Park Farm Industrial Estate Redditch Worcestershire B98 0HU England
Tel: 44 (0) 1527 520 999 Fax: 44 (0) 1527 501 999 Freephone: 0800 085 1678 (UK only) E-mail: info@sti-europe.com Web: www.sti-europe.com
STI STOPPER II
Dimensions and Technical Information
Approvals
Models Available
Stopper II Models Indoor Use:

STI-1100
With horn for flush mount
STI-1100RC* With horn and relay flush mount
STI-1130
With horn and spacer
STI-1130RC* With horn and relay with spacer
STI-1200
Without horn flush mount
STI-1230
Without horn with spacer
Weather Stopper (Indoor/Outdoor rated) with gaskets:
STI-1150
Stopper II with horn flush mount (indoor/outdoor
rated)
STI-1150RC* Stopper II with horn and relay flush mount
(indoor/outdoor rated)
STI-1155
Stopper II with horn and spacer (indoor/outdoor
rated)
STI-1155RC* Stopper II with horn, relay and spacer (indoor/outdoor
rated)
STI-1250
Weather Stopper without horn flush mount
STI-3150
Weather Stopper without horn with spacer
HORN HOUSING
5.5 in.(140mm)
COVER
3.2 in.(81mm)
6.2 in.(158mm)
Accessories:
STI-3100
2 conduit spacer with 1/2 conduit entry (no gaskets
included)
STI-3104
2 conduit spacer with 3/4 conduit entry (includes 1
3/4 conduit entry gasket)
STI-1102
Replacement horn for cover with alarm
Custom-LBL Custom text message for horn housing
Important Notice
TESTING
It has been tested and approved or listed by:
UL/cUL Listed No. S2466
For fire alarm applications, UL38 requires outdoor listed
stations for outdoor use
Factory Mutual No. OG6A2.AY (STI-1100 and STI-1130 only)
State of California (obtain local fire marshal approval)
NEMA 3R Rated (only for Stopper II models with backplate
and gaskets)
New York City Board of Standards No. 947-81-SA
(STI-1100 only)
ADA Compliant (UL Certified No. S2466)
PATENTS
United States No. 4267549, Canada No. 1147828
SPACER
2 in.(51mm)
SIDE VIEW
MODELS WITH HORN (STI-1100 Series)
Stopper II is intended to be used in areas where the incidence of false fire

alarms from manual pull stations is high or has proven to be a serious
problem. Any disadvantage of this device is more than balanced when one
considers the consequences of false fire alarms, especially if fire service
personnel and equipment are responding to a false fire alarm when they are
needed for a real fire somewhere else. Add to this the disruption to the
facility when false alarms occur. If you have, or may have, a problem with
false fire alarms or physical/weather damage to your fire alarm activation
devices, the Stopper II could prove invaluable.
*WARNING: ! For RC models: UL Listing does not permit relay contacts to
connect to the fire alarm or a life safety function. The power supply for
horns, according to UL Listing, cannot be connected to a UL Listed fire alarm
system. For electrical specifications see install book. RC models contain one
set of Form C dry contacts. Contacts rated 30 VAC/VDC 1 amp.
8.5 in.(216mm)
6.5 in.(165mm)
COVER
3.2 in.(81mm)
7.0 in.(178mm)
SPACER
8.5 in.(216mm)
2 in.(51mm)
SIDE VIEW
MODELS WITHOUT HORN (STI-1200 AND STI-3150 Series)

3.2 in.
A (81mm)
2.75 in.
B (70mm)
C 2.375 in.
(60mm)
NOTE: End user must verify the alarm and battery every six months and replace
battery annually or as required.
3 in.(76mm)
4 in.(102mm)
5 in.(127mm)
5.5 in.(140mm)
D 1.625 in.
(41mm)
E .75 in.
(19mm)
WALL
A
B
5.5 in.(140mm)
E
STI-3100 SPACER
ADDS 2" DEPTH(51mm)
ALL MODELS END VIEW

STI-3003 GASKET (1/2 in. CONDUIT)
STI-3004 GASKET (3/4 in. CONDUIT)
INSERT
(2) PROVIDED
PU
STI-1280 BACKPLATE
LL
DO
STI-3100 CONDUIT SPACER - STANDARD SPACER

INCLUDED WITH SURFACE MOUNT UNITS
STI-3104 CONDUIT SPACER ACCOMMODATES
3/4 in. CONDUIT FOR WEATHER STOPPER
WN
SUB-316
LOUVER
*NOTE: STI SUGGESTS USING THE

STI-1280 BACKPLATE FOR WEATHER UNITS
OR WHEN MOUNTED ON AN UNEVEN SURFACE.
SUB-315 GRILL
STI-3002 WEATHER GASKET
FOR WEATHER OPTION
(USE TWO WITH SPACER)
Printed In U.S.A.
1987, 92, 94, 95, 96, 97, 2000, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 STI
STI-1100 Spec.
10/06
Series MT Multitone Horns and

Series MT Multitone Horn-Strobes
Effective: October 2004
75-001
FEATURES
Approvals include: UL 1971 and UL 464. Factory

Mutual (FM), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM)
and New York City (MEA).
Designed to meet or exceed ADA/NFPA/UFC/ANSI
Standards and Accessibility Guidelines. Meets
OSHA 29 Part 1910, 165.
One alarm appliance with eight (8) selective
signals to provide superior sound penetration for
various ambient and wall conditions with two
field selectable sound output levels.
Audible and strobe can operate from a single
signaling circuit with any of the eight (8) audible
signals.
Code-3 Horn and Tone meet ANSI/NFPA temporal
pattern for standard emergency evacuation
signaling.
Multi-Candela MT Strobe models available with
field selectable 15/30/75/110 candela settings.
Single Candela MT Strobe models available with
15/75 candela rating.
Weatherproof MT Strobe models available with
75/180 candela rating
Strobe markings for fire and suppression
applications.
Wide listed voltage range, filtered (DC) and FWR.
Polarized inputs for compatibility with standard
reverse polarity type supervision of circuit wiring
by an alarm panel.
Low cost installation via standard electrical
boxes. Attractive flush or surface mounting
options. No additional trimplate required for
flush mounting.
IN and OUT wiring terminations that accept
two (2) #12 to #18 AWG wires at each terminal.
DESCRIPTION
Fenwal Series MT and MT Strobe Multitone electronic signals offer a choice of eight (8) nationally and internationally
recognized alerting sounds: Horn, Bell, March Time Horn,
Code-3 Tone, Code-3 Horn, Slow Whoop, Siren or Hi/Lo
Tone. Our Code-3 horn and tone patterns are engineered
to comply with NFPA/ANSI Temporal Pattern specifications
without requiring additional equipment. With MT and MT
Strobe Signals, one alarm appliance meets most of your
signaling needs.
The MT Strobes are designed for ADA applications with
maximum performance, reliability and cost-effectiveness
while meeting or exceeding the latest requirements of NFPA
72 (1999), ANSI 117.1, UFC (2000) and UL Standard 1971
as well as meeting ADA requirements concerning photosensitive epilepsy.

Each MT and MT Strobe appliance has two user selective
sound output levels: STANDARD dBA and HIGH dBA. The
MT-12/14 provides dual voltage capability in one unit,
12 Vdc or 24 Vdc operation, filtered or FWR. The MT Strobe
Electronic Signals operate with 24 Vdc and may be used
with filtered or unfiltered (full-wave-rectified) input voltages.
Separate input terminals are available and shunt wires are
provided to enable both tone and strobe to operate simultaneously from a single input.
The Multitone Strobe Signals are UL Listed for indoor wall
mount applications, under Standard 1971 for Devices for
the Hearing Impaired and under Standard 464 for Audible
Signal Appliances. MT Strobe models are listed for indoor
use with a temperature range of 32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
and maximum humidity of 93% 2%. The MT-12/24 and
MTWP models for outdoor use are Listed for -31F to 150F
(-35C to 66C) and maximum humidity of 95%. The strobe
devices use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry enclosed in a rugged Lexan (or equivalent) lens to provide
maximum reliability for effective visible signaling. Strobe lens
markings available for Fire and Agent labeled applications.
The Series MT Signals have IN and OUT wiring terminations

that accept two #12 to #18 AWG wires at each terminal.
Inputs are polarized for compatibility with standard reverse
polarity type supervision.
Table 1. Alarm Tones
Tone
The MT Audible is UL 464 Listed.

Regulated Voltage Range is the newest terminology
used by UL to identify the voltage range. Prior to this
change, UL used the terminology Listed Voltage
Range.
Table 3. Current Ratings for Series MT Strobe Portion
Alarm Tones Pattern Description
RMS Current (Amps)
Horn
Broadband Horn (Continuous)
Bell
1560 Hz Modulated (0.07 sec. ON/Repeat)
March Time Horn
Horn (0.25 sec. ON/0.25 sec. OFF/Repeat)
Code-3 Horn
Horn (ANSI S3.41 Temporal Pattern)
Code-3 Tone
500 Hz (ANSI S3.41 Temporal Pattern)
Slow Whoop
500-1200 Hz SWEEP
(4.0 sec. ON/0.5 sec. OFF/Repeat)
Siren
600-1200 HZ SWEEP (1.0 sec. ON/Repeat)
Hi/Lo
1000/800 (0.25 sec. ON/Alternate)
Model
MT-241575
MTWP-2475
Candela
1575cd
180cd
15cd
30cd
75cd
110cd
24.0 Vdc
0.060
0.094
0.041
0.063
0.109
0.140
UL Max*
0.090
0.138
0.060
0.092
0.165
0.220
* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current
rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range
(16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the
minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current
is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For
unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions.
GENERAL NOTES
MT-24MCW
Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their Regulated Voltage Range. Note that
NFPA-72 (1999) specifies a flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes
per second and ADA Guidelines specifies a flash rate of
1 to 3 flashes per second.
All candela ratings represent minimum effective Multiton Strobe intensity based on UL 1971.
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2. dBA and Current Ratings for Series MT Audible Portion
RMS Current (Amps)
24 VDC
dBA @ 10 Ft (UL Reverberant)

12 VDC
24 VDC
12 VDC
dBA @ 10 Ft
(anechoic)
12 and 24 VDC
Tone
HI Output
STD Output
HI Output
STD Output
HI
Output
STD
Output
HI
Output
STD
Output
HI
Output
STD
Output
0.034
92
87
90
77
99
93
0.014
0.020
86
80
85
69
92
87
0.142
0.023
0.034
89
84
89
74
99
93
0.100
0.142
0.023
0.034
88
83
88
73
99
93
0.035
0.088
0.105
0.015
0.021
85
80
84
70
95
90
0.028
0.037
0.100
0.142
0.025
0.035
90
89
89
75
99
94
0.104
0.027
0.036
0.122
0.152
0.021
0.030
89
84
89
75
98
93
0.057
0.020
0.026
0.089
0.114
0.018
0.026
86
81
86
71
93
88
@ 24
VDC
UL
max*
@ 24
VDC
UL
max*
@ 24
VDC
UL
max*
@ 24
VDC
UL
max*
Horn
0.074
0.108
0.033
0.044
0.145
0.176
0.023
Bell
0.040
0.053
0.018
0.024
0.077
0.095
March Time Horn
0.067
0.104
0.033
0.038
0.109
Code-3 Horn
0.069
0.091
0.026
0.035
Code-3 Tone
0.061
0.075
0.026
Slow Whoop
0.069
0.098
Siren
0.080
HI/LO
0.044
* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range
(16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current
is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
MT SIGNAL
FROM
PRECEDING
APPLIANCE,
SM/DSM
OR FACP
+
_
+
_
TO NEXT
APPLIANCE
OR EOLR
SIGNAL
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND STROBE

OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY
FROM
PRECEDING
AUDIBLE OR
FACP
+
_
+
_
TO NEXT
APPLIANCE
OR EOLR
FROM
PRECEDING
APPLIANCE,
SM/DSM
OR FACP
+
_
+
_
TO NEXT
STROBE
OR EOLR
STROBE
AUDIBLE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND STROBE

OPERATE IN UNISON, RED AND
BLACK SHUNT-WIRES ARE
SUPPLIED.
FROM
PRECEDING
APPLIANCE,
OR FACP
RED
+
_
+
_
BLACK
STROBE
TO NEXT
APPLIANCE
OR EOLR
AUDIBLE
INSTALLATION NOTES
1. If the strobe and audible operate on the same circuit,
add the strobe current from Table 3 to the audible current from Table 2. For Peak and Inrush current across
the listed voltage range, refer to Installation Instructions.
2. The average current indicated is per actual Production
Testing at listed Vdc. For rated average and Peak current across the UL listed voltage range for both filtered
DC and unfiltered VRMS, see Installation Instructions.
! WARNING
Failure to comply with the installation

instruction sheets could result in improper
installation, application, and/or operation of
these products in an emergency situation,
which could result in property damage and
serious injury or death.
3. Contact Fenwal for Installation Instructions sheets on

these products. These materials contain important information that should be read prior to specifying or installing these products, including:
Total current required by all devices connected to
system primary and secondary power sources.
Fuse ratings on signaling circuits to handle maximum inrush or peak currents from all devices on
those circuits.
Composite flash rate from multiple strobes within
a persons field of view.
Installation in office areas and other specification
and installation issues.
Use strobes only on circuits with continuously applied operating voltage. Do not use strobes on
coded or interrupted circuits in which the applied
voltage is cycled on and off, as the strobe may not
flash.
The voltage applied to these products must be
within their rated input voltage range.
Conductor size (AWG), length and ampacity should
be taken into consideration prior to design and installation of these products, particularly in retrofit
installations.
4. Fenwal notification appliances must be used within their
published specifications and must be PROPERLY
specified, applied, installed, operated, maintained and
operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installation and at least
twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, regulations and laws.
Specification, application, installation, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified
personnel for proper operation in accordance with all
of the latest National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), National Electrical Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), local, state, county, province,
district, federal and other applicable building and fire
standards, guidelines, regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS

SPECIFICATIONS
The notification appliance shall be a Fenwal MT Series audible/visual device or equivalent. Notification appliance shall be
electronic and use solid state components. Electromechanical alternatives are not approved. Each electronic signal shall
provide eight (8) field selectable alarm tones. The tones shall
consist of: HORN, BELL, MARCH TIME HORN, CODE-3
HORN, CODE-3 TONE, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN AND HI/LO.
Tone selection shall be by durable dip switch assembly and
not clips or jumpers. The Multitone Audible appliance shall be
UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances.
The audible and the strobe shall be able to operate from a
single notification circuit while producing any of these tones.
The device shall provide two output sound levels: STANDARD
and HIGH dBA. The HIGH dBA setting shall provide a minimum 5 dBA increase in sound output at nominal voltage. The
HIGH anechoic dBA measurement at 10 feet at the alarm HORN
SETTING shall be 99 dBA minimum. Operating voltages shall
be 24 Vdc using filtered power or unfiltered power supply (fullwave-rectified). All models shall have provisions for standard
reverse polarity type supervision and IN/OUT field wiring using
terminals that accept #12 to #18 AWG wiring.
Combination audible/visual appliances shall incorporate a
Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or
equivalent with solid state circuitry. Strobe shall produce a
flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the
voltage range. The strobe intensity shall be rated per UL
and Listed under Standard 1971 for Signaling Devices for
the Hearing Impaired for 15/75 cd multi-candela with field
selectable 15/30/75/110 candela settings. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela or with 75
candela intensity on-axis is required. Strobe models shall
incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash and shall
be designed for compatibility with Fenwal SM and/or DSM
Sync Modules. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the module fails to
operate (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobes shall revert to a non-synchronized default flash rate.
All Listed strobe appliances shall incorporate low temperature compensation to insure the lowest possible current consumption. Strobe activation shall be via independent input
or from the same input circuit as the audible.
The combination audible/visual appliances may be installed
indoors and surface or flush mounted. They shall mount to
standard electrical hardware requiring no additional trimplate
or adapter. The aesthetic appearance shall not have any mounting holes or screw heads visible when the installation is completed. The appliance shall be finished in a textured red color.
The audible device may be installed indoors or outdoors

with the proper backbox.
For weatherproof applications where specifications require
75 cd at -31F (-35C) and full temperature range of -31F to
150F, the Fenwal Model MTWP-2475W FR shall be used.
Model Number
Part Number
Input
Voltage
Rated
Candela
Strobe
Label
Mounting
Options
MT-12/24-R
75-000010-001
12/24
B,H,I,J,K
MT-241575W-FR
75-000015-001
24
15
(75
on AXIS)
FIRE
B,H,I,J,K
MT-241575W-AR
75-000015-002
24
15
(75
on AXIS)
AGENT
B,H,I,J,K
MT-24MCW-FR
75-000018-001
24
15/30/75/
110
FIRE
B,H,I,J,K
MT-24MCW-AR
75-000018-002
24
15/30/75/
110
AGENT
B,H,I,J,K
MTWP-2475W-FR
75-000017-001
24
180 @
77F
(25C)
FIRE
Notes:
1. MT-12/24 Audible can be used with Fenwals RSSP
Multi-Candela for applications requiring 15, 30, 75, 110
cd Wall Strobes.
2. MTWP-2475W is weatherproof and rated for 180 cd @
77F (25C) and 75 cd @ -31F (-35C) with low current
draw.
3. SM Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes at 12/24
Vdc; DSM Dual Circuit Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes per circuit. Maximum number of interconnected
DSM modules is twenty (20). Refer to Data Sheet
75-12.
4. Use MT-241575W when 15 cd is specified. 15/75 is
UL Listed for 15 cd with 75 cd on AXIS.
MOUNTING OPTIONS
Model
Number
Part
Number
Mounting
Options
DBB-R
75-000000-009
ISP-R
75-000000-002
WBB-R
75-000000-008
IOB-R
75-000000-001
RP-R
75-000000-003
For complete installation options, refer to the Alarm Signals

Installation Data Sheet 75-008.A.
Fenwal is a registered trademark of Kidde-Fenwal Inc.

Lexan is a registered trademark of the General Electric Company
TM
Protection Systems
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TEL: (508)881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
www.fenwalfire.com
This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL,INC. assumes

no responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The product must be
75-001
10/2004
Printed in U.S.A.
DN-6910:A J-200
SSM Series
Alarm Bells
Audio/Visual Appliances
General
System Sensors SSM Series alarm bells are low-current,
high-decibel notification appliances for use in fire and burglary
systems or other signaling applications. They come pre-wired
to reduce installation time, and also incorporate a polarized
electrical design for use with supervision circuitry.
With reliable performance, SSM Series alarm bells provide
loud, resonant tones. They operate on 24 VDC and are motordriven.
SSM Series alarm bells offer simplified installation. For indoor
use, SSM Series alarm bells mount to a standard 4" (10.16
cm) square electrical box. For outdoor applications, a WBB
weatherproof backbox is used.
6910pho1.jpg
Features
Approved for indoor or outdoor (with WBB backbox) use.

Low current draw.
High dB output.
Three sizes available: 6" (15.24 cm), 8" (20.32 cm), and
10" (25.40 cm) diameter.
24 VDC models; polarized for use with supervision circuitry.
Bells mount directly to standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box.
Specifications
Nominal voltage: 24 VDC.
Operating voltage range: 19.2 to 26.4 VDC.
Average current draw: 0.03 A.
Agency Listings and Approvals

These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in
this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications
may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may
be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S4011
ULC Listed: S7539 (SSM24-6A, SSM24-8A, SSM24-10A)
MEA Listed: 331-01-E
FM Approved
CSFM: 7135-1653:125
Sound output: 85 dB.
Ordering Information
Operating temperature range: 31F (35C) to +140F

(+60C).
SSM24-6: 6" (15.24 cm) bell, 24 VDC, polarized, 85 dBA.
Termination: provided with two sets of leads for in/out wiring.
SSM24-6A: Canadian model of 6" bell above.
Service use: Fire Alarm, General Signaling, Burglar Alarm.

SSM24-8A: Canadian model of 8" bell above.
Engineering and Architectural

Specifications
Model shall be a SSM Series alarm bell. Bells shall have

underdome strikers and operating mechanisms. Gongs on
said bell shall be no smaller than nominal 6" (15.24 cm), 8"
(20.32 cm), or 10" (25.40 cm) (specify size) with an operating
voltage of 24 VDC. Bells shall be suitable for surface or semiflush mounting. Outdoor surface-mounted installations shall
be weatherproof (using optional WBB weatherproof backbox);
otherwise, bells shall mount to a standard 4" (10.16 cm)
square electrical box having a minimum projection of 2.5"
(6.35 cm). Bells shall be located as shown on the installation
drawings or as determined by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Bells shall be Listed for indoor/outdoor use by Underwriters Laboratories, ULC (Canada), and the California State Fire
Marshal, and approved by Factory Mutual and MEA.
WBB: Weatherproof backbox.
SSM24-10A: Canadian model of 10" above.
DN-6910:A 3/6/07 Page 1 of 2
2008 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use

of this document is strictly prohibited.
This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes.

We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate.
We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Made in the U.S. A.
For more information, contact Notifier. Phone: (203) 484-7161, FAX: (203) 484-7118.
www.notifier.com
Page 2 of 2 DN-6910:A 3/6/07
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Strobe Combination
Audible/Visual Signal
Model AV1ST
Federal Signal introduces the Model AV1ST combination

audible/visual signal. The AV1ST features a 100% polycarbonate
housing that is rated for Type 3R rain-tight applications. Available
dome colors include amber, blue, clear, green and red.
ECONOMICAL AUDIBLE/
VISUAL SIGNAL
Surface mount, integrated 1/2-inch

pipe mount, and 4-inch electrical
box mount
Five dome colors
Twist-off lens for easy access
Internal buzzer produces

85dB at 10' (95dB @ 1m)
Type 3R enclosure
Available in 24VDC or 120VAC
UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified
Operating
Current
All AV1ST units feature a unique twist and lock dome to allow for
tool free access to the strobe tube. The fresnel lensing provides
superior visibility in all directions.
The integrated buzzer provides 85dB output at 10 feet
(95dB @ 1 meter).
Model Voltage
The AV1ST design provides three mounting configurations. The

black base will accommodate mounting to a 1/2-inch NPT pipe, a
4-inch octagonal electrical box or any flat surface. The surface
mount gasket serves as a template for preparing a flat surface
with appropriate mounting holes.
The AV1ST comes in two voltage variations: 24VDC and 120VAC.

Each unit is factory assembled with two color-coded leads. If
desired, the user can remove the leads and connect directly to the
terminal block located in the base of the unit. The AV1ST is UL
and cUL Listed; CSA Certified.
Flash Rate/
Minute
Joule
Output
Candlepower
Peak1
ECP2
Decibels @
10'
1m
Mount
AV1ST
24VDC
.39 amps
65-95
2.2
175,000 51.5
85
95
Pipe/Surface
AV1ST
120VAC
0.15 amps
65-95
2.2
175,000 51.5
85
95
Pipe/Surface
1
2
Peak candlepower is the maximum light intensity generated by a flashing light during its light pulse
ECP (Effective Candlepower) is the intensity that would appear to an observer if the light were burning steadily
AUDIBLE/VISUAL SIGNALING DEVICE (AV1ST)
Fresnel dome
optimizes light output
Strobe Tube
Lens gasket provides a
raintight seal
Buzzer is located
under upper housing
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Lamp Style:
Lamp Life*
Operating Temperature
Net Weight:
Shipping Weight:
Diameter:
Height (from bottom):
HOW TO ORDER
Strobe
7000 Hours
-31F to 150F
1.25 lbs.
1.75 lbs.
5.76"
6.48"
Strobe
7000 Hours
-35C to 66C
0.57 kg
0.80 kg
14.6 cm
16.5 cm
Specify model, voltage and color

Please refer to Model Number Index
AV1ST beginning on page 377
* Optimal hours under ideal conditions.
R E P L A C E M E N T PA RT S
Description
Dome, Amber
Dome, Blue
Dome, Clear
Dome, Green
Dome, Red
Part Number
K8550292A-02
K8550292A-01
K8550292A
K8550292A-04
K8550292A-03
2645 Federal Signal Dr., University Park, IL 60466 Tel: 708.534.4756
Description
PCB Assembly (120VAC)
PCB Assembly (12-48VDC)
Lens Gasket
Surface Mount Gasket
Strobe Tube
Fax: 708.534.4852
Part Number
K2001887A
K2005083A
K8550306A
K8591003A
K149130A
www.federalsignal-indust.com
95
Model 878752 Suppression

System Abort Station
FEATURES

I-152
UL Listed, File # S3743

Flush or Surface Mount
Sized for Double Gang Box

Large Yellow Push Button Switch
One Normally Open Contact
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde Model 878752 Abort Station features a large,
easy-to-operate abort push button. The momentary type
switch is very easy to see due to its highly visible yellow
color. The abort station stainless steel faceplate is clearly
labelled with operation procedureseliminating indecision
and hesitation.
The Backbox is painted with red enamel and is provided
with four 1/2" knockouts. The pre-drilled and tapped mounting tabs allow for easy attachment of the abort station.
Electrical Ratings:
One N.O. momentary contact rated 2.5 Amps @ 120 Vdc.
Ambient Temperature:
-13F to 158F
(-25C to 70C)
Terminals:
Captive screws and saddle clamps accept 14 AWG to 24
AWG wire.
Mounting:
Four 6-32 x 1/2" mounting screws included.
4.5"
(114 mm)
4.5"
(114 mm)
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT
KIDDE
P a rt N u m b e r
D escrip tio n
Ap p ro ximate
S h ip p in g
Weig h t
878752-01
Abort Stati on wi thout

Backbox
2 lb.
878752-02
Abort Stati on wi th
Backbox
3 lb.
296105
Backbox
1 lb.
1.70
(43.18 mm)
3.05
(77.47 mm)
2.25
(57.15 mm)
4.0
101.6 mm
Figure 1. Dimension Details

I-152
03/02
Printed in USA
Key Maintenance Switch


K-76-606
FEATURES
Stainless Steel Plate
Status LED Indicators
Surface or Flush Mount Installations
Safely Disconnects Actuation Circuits by Shorting Initiators
Key Operated
Four-Pole Double-Throw Switch
Meets the Requirements of NFPA72 (2007 edition)
DESCRIPTION
This Key Maintenance Switch is a key-switch that disconnects actuation circuits in the system to prevent accidental discharge of fire suppression systems during
maintenance operations.
The Key Maintenance Switch provides a means to short
the initiator circuit leads for safe disconnection of conventional and addressable control units. Refer to the installation wiring diagram for detailed wiring connections.
Two LEDS indicate "SYSTEM ARMED" or "SYSTEM

INACTIVE" when the key is inserted and turned. The
key can only be removed in the armed position.
Key Maintenance Switch mounts to a 4-inch backbox
and operates on 24 Vdc.
Designed for mounting on the wall with a back box.
Key Maintenance Switch can be installed in either
surface mount or flush mount configurations.
Key Maintenance Switch physically disconnects the
release circuit wiring in addition to the trouble open
signal, the switch provides a means to generate a
supervisory condition.
ELECTRICAL
Switch:
- one set of contacts control

indicators on the faceplate.
- Three remaining contacts are
available for application wiring.
Device Current:
10 A @ 250 Vac
15 A @ 125 Vac
15 A @ up to 30 Vdc
Electrical Life:
50,000 cycles - maintained

25,000 cycles - -momentary
Part Number
Description
76-600000-200
Key Maintenance Switch
06-236881-001
Backbox
4PDT Key Switch
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Temperature 0 to 150F (-18 to 66C)
Range:
MECHANICAL
Mechanical Life:
100,000 cycles
Switch Plate
Construction:
Stainless Steel
Shipping Weight:
8-1/2 oz. (241 g)
K-76-606
Rev AA
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Surface Backbox
(2 Gang/4-inch Square)

K-84-101
FEATURES
1/2-inch and 3/4-inch EMT Knockouts on All Four Sides

and the Back
18 Gauge Steel
Appliance/Device Mounting Holes

Universal Mounting Pattern
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde Surface Mount Backbox is the ideal solution
for devices that require a professional surface
installation. Each Backbox has a solid surface area with
predrilled and tapped hole configurations to mount the
devices.
The Backbox is painted with red enamel and is provided
with five 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch knockouts strategically
located. The Backbox comes with a green ground screw
and is easily accessible.
Material:
18 gauge steel (.048 thick)
Dimensions:
4-5/8-inch H x 4-5/8-inch W x 2-inch D

(117 mm H x 117 mm W x 51 mm D)
4-5/8 in.
(117 mm)
4-5/8 in.
(117 mm)
Part Number
Description
Shipping
Weight
06-236881-001
Surface Mount
Backbox
14 oz.
(397 g)
2 in.
(51 mm)
Figure 1. Dimension Details
K-84-101
Rev AA
Printed in USA
Kidde Fire Systems

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Explosion Proof Manual Stations

Model B-9

K-84-09
FEATURES
Class I Groups B, C, and D

Class II Groups E, F, and G
Class III
Outdoor Rating of 4X
Responsive and Reliable
Strong, Functional Design

Dual Action Operation
Keylock for Test or Reset
UL Listed
Surface Mounting
DESCRIPTION
The Kidde B9 series manual fire alarm station is constructed of high strength metal die-cast alloy. These stations are designed for quick, efficient response to fire
emergency situations in almost all classified hazardous
areas. The pull handle bar mechanism is easily operated,
yet the lift and pull cover prevents accidental activation.
The keylock allows the unit to be reset or tested easily.
The B9 manual station provides a double pole double
throw switch arrangement. The additional set of contacts
are ideal for local annunication or remote signaling. The
B9 pull station may also use a glass rod as an indicator of
activation.
The B9 unit is explosion and weather proof allowing the
unit to offer unmatched placement flexibility. The unit is
UL approved for use in Class I groups B, C, and D; Class
II groups E, F, and G; Class III environments and has an
outdoor rating of 4X.
OPERATION
The dual action stations require that the lift and pull cover
be opened to expose the pull handle mechanism. The
pull handle is then pulled down to operate the switch contacts. The pull handle is now locked in the activated position. If a glass rod is present in the unit, it would now be
broken. To reset the unit, a key must be inserted and
turned 1/4 turn clockwise, opening the station. Once
opened, the unit may be reset by returning the pull handle to the normal position. Replace glass rod (if applicable). Hold the unit closed and return the key to the normal
position.
HAZARDOUS AREA RATING
The B9 manual station has been approved for use in the
following classified areas:
Class
Group
B, C, D
II
E, F, G
III
Type 4X (Outdoor)
LIFT AND PULL COVERS

The B9 station comes standard as a single action unit
and is made into a dual action unit by incorporating a Lift
and Pull cover. There are a total of five separate covers
to choose from, which allow the user to tailor the manual
station to the particular application. The choices are:
FIRE ALARM
CO2 RELEASE
FM-200 RELEASE
HALON RELEASE
FIRE SYSTEM RELEASE
The covers come complete with all necessary hardware

for mounting to the base station.
SPECIFICATIONS
The B9 unit (P/N 84-100004-001) comes without a Lift

and Pull cover, allowing the selection of the appropriately
labeled cover for each application.
Part Number
Description
84-100004-001
B9 Station (without Lift and Pull cover)
84-100000-001
Lift and Pull Cover (CO2 RELEASE)
84-100000-002
Lift and Pull Cover (FIRE ALARM)
84-100000-003
Lift and Pull Cover (FIRE SYSTEM

RELEASE)
84-100000-004
Lift and Pull Cover (FM-200 RELEASE)
84-100000-005
Lift and Pull Cover (HALON RELEASE)
84-100005-001
Pkg. of (10) Break Glass Rods
Contact:
Double Pole, Double Throw (DPDT)
Contact rating:
10 Amp @ 125/250 Vac
Wire AWG:
12 to 22 AWG
Wiring:
Terminal block connections - (6-32 with

sem plate)
Weight:
3 lb. 6 oz. (1.5 kg)
DIMENSIONS
2-1/8 in.
(54 mm)
5-3/8 in.
(137 mm)
PULL DOWN
6 in.
(153 mm)
4-3/4 in.
(137 mm)
3-5/16 in.
(84 mm)
3-5/8 in.
(92 mm)

FM-200 is a registered trademark of the Greak Lakes Chemical Corporation.
FE-13 is a trademark of DuPont.
Lexan is a registered trademark of the General Electric Company.

assumes no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to work correctly.
K-84-09 Rev AA
Printed in USA

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Explosion-Proof
Strobe Light
Model 27XST
DESIGNED FOR USE IN

EXPLOSION-PROOF
ATMOSPHERES
Available in 24VDC, 120VAC

and 240VAC
Six lens colors
10,000 hour strobe tube
/4 - inch pendant mount standard;

other options available
Dome guard optional
Type 4X, IP66 enclosure
Marine Rated
UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified

and CSFM Approved
Federal Signals Model 27XST explosion-proof strobe light

produces 80 high-intensity flashes per minute. This warning light
operates on 24VDC, 120VAC, and 240VAC 50/60Hz.
The 27XST is UL Listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D;
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B; and Class III. The 27XST is CSA Certified and Marine Rated.
The 24VDC 27XST features a voltage in-rush limiting PCB design
that provides greater compatibility with factory automation control
systems and less electrical interference with in-rush sensitive devices.
The 27XST is Type 4X rated; constructed to IP66. Corrosion
resistance is achieved with a powder epoxy finish applied over
the copper-free aluminum housing. All exposed hardware is 316
grade stainless steel.
Federal Signals Model 27XST has an effective candela (ECP) of
850 and a two million peak candela. A pendant mount is supplied
and a ceiling mount and 90 wall mount are available options. For
easy installation, the mounting box is first installed and the fixture
is then threaded onto the mounting box, making the electrical
connection. Electrical continuity is made when five threads are
engaged.
Federal Signals Model 27XST is specifically designed for explosionproof atmospheres and/or corrosive environments. Because it is
easy to install and requires very low maintenance, it is ideal for
use in areas such as oil rigs, mines, refineries, and chemical plants.
Model
Voltage
Operating
Current
Flash Rate/
Candela
Minute
Peak1
ECP2
27XST
24VDC
1.90 amps
80
2,000,000
850
Mount
/4" Pendant
(3.0 amp In-rush)
5
WA
yyr
RRANT
4 Pendant
27XST
120VAC 50/60Hz
0.60 amps
80
2,000,000
850
27XST
240VAC 50/60Hz
0.30 amps
80
2,000,000
850
Peak candela is the maximum light intensity generated by a flashing light during its light pulse
ECP (Effective Candela) is the intensity that would appear to an observer if the light were burning steadily
4 Pendant
EXPLOSION-PROOF STROBE LIGHT (27XST)

4.5"/
114.3 mm
3/4 Pendant
4"/101.6 mm
Electrical
Connection Block
Cast Aluminum
Corrosion Resistant
Explosion-Proof Housing
15.63"/397 mm
High Intensity
Strobe Tube
Fresnel Lens
Glass Dome
6.36"/162 mm
8.82"/224 mm
Lamp Life*:
Lamp Style:
Ambient Temp. Range:
Net Weight:
Shipping Weight:
Height:
Diameter:
10,000 hours
Strobe
-50C to 65C
-25C to 65C
14 lbs.
18.1 lbs.
15.63"
8.82"
10,000 hours
Strobe
Canada
USA
6.4 kg
8.2 kg
397.0 mm
224.0 mm
HOW TO ORDER
Specify model, voltage and color
(Magenta upon request)
Specify options:
Dome Guard (DGXC)
Ceiling Mount (CMXC)
Wall Mount (WMXC)
27XST beginning on page 377
* Optimal hours under ideal conditions.
Description
Exterior Dome Assembly, Clear
Interior Lens Assembly, Amber
Interior Lens Assembly, Blue
Interior Lens Assembly, Clear
Interior Lens Assembly, Green
Interior Lens Assembly, Red
Interior Lens Assembly, Magenta
Part Number
K8444C271A-01
K8550C095A-02
K8550C095A-01
K8550C095A
K8550C095A-04
K8550C095A-03
K8550C095A-07
Description
Part Number
24VDC Mechanism
120VAC Mechanism
240VAC Mechanism
Strobe Tube, Series C1, C2
Strobe Tube, Series C1, C2
Pendant Mount
Fax: 708.534.4852
K8436107F-03
K8436107E-02
K8436107E-01
K8107159A
K8107159A
K8444A272A
Explosion-Proof
Vibrating Horns
Models 31X and 41X
DESIGNED FOR USE IN

EXPLOSION-PROOF
ATMOSPHERES
Corrosion-resistant cast
aluminum housings
Produces 100dBa @ 10'

(110dBa @ 1m)
UL and cUL Listed and

CSA Certified
5 yyr
WA
RRANT
These Federal Signal explosion-proof vibrating horns are

constructed for safe use in hazardous environments. They are
enclosed in heavy-duty copper-free cast aluminum housings
tapped for 3/4 - inch conduit.
Federal Signal Models 31X and 41X are corrosion-resistant vibrating
horns with stainless steel diaphragms. Model 41X is available in
24VDC. The Model 31X is available in 120VAC and 240VAC and
features an internal volume control.
The 31X and 41X models are UL and cUL Listed for Class I,
Division 1, Groups C & D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G;
and Class III. Both are CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
Certified. A five minute duty cycle applies to both models.
Model
Voltage
Operating
Current
31X
31X
41X
120VAC 50/60Hz
240VAC 50/60Hz
24VDC
0.20 amps
0.10 amps
1.20 amps
Decibels @
10'
1m
100
100
100
110
110
110
EXPLOSION-PROOF HORNS (31X/41X)
6.5"
165.1mm
6.5"/
165.1 mm
7.625"
193.68 mm
Die Cast
Zinc Grille
/4" NPT
Net Weight:
31X
41X
Shipping Weight:
31X
41X
Height:
31X
41X
Depth:
31X
41X
Diameter:
31X
41X
Cast Aluminum
Corrosion- Resistant
Housing
/4" NPT
HOW TO ORDER
-31F to 150F
-35C to 66C
7.5 lbs.
9.0 lbs.
3.4 kg
4.1 kg
8.1 lbs.
10.3 lbs.
3.7 kg
4.7 kg
7.625"
7.625"
193.68 mm
193.68 mm
6.5"
6.5"
165.1 mm
165.1 mm
6.5"
6.5"
165.0 mm
165.0 mm
Specify model and voltage

31X/41X beginning on page 378
Description
Part Number
Grill, Cover
Coil, 120 VAC
Coil, 240 VAC
KH6962J
KFC1516C
KFC1506C
Fax: 708.534.4852
Series CVX/CSX Explosion-Proof Bells &

Series MB Motor Bells
75-003
SERIES CVX/CSX EXPLOSION-PROOF BELLS

FEATURES
Approvals include: UL, CSA

Rugged cast mechanism enclosure with hinged cover
Available in single stroke and vibrating models
High sound output
Standard red enamel finish
Outdoor models include protective guard
Indoor Model
CVX10/CSX10
Outdoor Model
CVXG10/CSXG10
UL LISTED FOR HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES

C lass
Gro u p
C o n ten ts o f H az ard o u s Atmo sp h ere
Hydrogen or gases and vapors of equivalent hazards, such as manufactured gas
Ethyl and ether vapors
Gasoline, petroleum, naphtha, alcohol, acetone, benzene, lacquer solvent, vapors, natural gas
II
Carbon black, coal, coke dust
II
Flour, starch, grain dusts
P art N u mb er
Wh ere U sed
S h ell S iz e
In p u t
Vo ltag e
d B A @ 1 0 ft.
C u rren t
(Am p s )
Mo u n tin g
Op tio n s
CVX10-115-R
75-000040-001
Indoor
10 i nch
115 Vac
90
.220
Note 1
CVXG10-115-R
75-000040-002
Outdoor
10 inch
115 Vac
90
.220
Note 1
CSX10-115-R
75-000040-003
Indoor
10 inch
115 Vac
87
.125
Note 1
CSXG10-115-R
75-000040-004
Outdoor
10 inch
115 Vac
87
.125
Note 1
CVX10-24-R
75-000040-005
Indoor
10 inch
24 Vdc
87
.500
Note 1
CSXG10-24-R
75-000040-006
Outdoor
10 inch
24 Vdc
87
.500
Note 1
M o d el N u m b er
V ib ratin g
S in g le S tro ke
Note: All models include an i ntegral cast backbox for surface mounting with 1/2" threaded condui t entrances on top and bottom of the housi ng.
Water Sprinkler Fire

Protection System
August 27, 2004
Sprinkler 11 a
TECHNICAL DATA
MICROMATIC AND
MicromaticHP STANDARD
RESPONSE SPRINKLERS
1. PRODUCT NAME
Viking Micromatic Model M and MicromaticHP Model M Standard Response

Sprinklers
Available Styles: Upright, Pendent, and
Conventional
2. MANUFACTURER
The Viking Corporation
210 N. Industrial Park Road
Hastings, Michigan 49058, U.S.A.
Telephone:
(269) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(269) 945-9599
e-mail: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com
3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Viking Micromatic and MicromaticHP

Standard Response Sprinklers are small
thermosensitive spray sprinklers available
in several finishes, temperature ratings,
and orifice sizes to meet design requirements. The small frame and 5 mm glass
bulb provide a pleasing appearance. Used
in conjunction with one of the various corrosion-resistant coatings, the units provide
protection against many corrosive environments. In addition, the Polyester finishes and Teflon coating can also be
used in decorative applications where colors are desired.
During fire conditions, the heat-sensitive
liquid in the glass bulb expands, causing
the bulb to shatter, releasing the pip cap
and sealing spring assembly. Water flowing
through the sprinkler orifice strikes the
sprinkler deflector, forming a uniform spray
pattern to extinguish or control the fire.
Viking Standard Response Glass-Bulb Style
Sprinklers may be ordered and/or used as
open sprinklers (glass bulb and pip cap assembly removed) on deluge systems.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Upright
Conventional
Pendent
Sprinkler Temperature Nominal Sprinkler Temperature
Max. Ambient
Bulb
Classification
Rating (Fusing Point)
Ceiling Temperature1 Color2
Ordinary
155 F (68 C)
100 F (38 C)
Red
Intermediate
175 F (79 C)
150 F (65 C)
Yellow
Intermediate
200 F (93 C)
150 F (65 C)
Green
Intermediate
212 F (100 C)
150 F (65 C)
Green
High
286 F (141 C)
225 F (107 C)
Blue
Extra High
360 F (182 C)
300 F (149 C)
Mauve
Ultra High4
500 F (260 C)
465 F (240 C)
Black
Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Polyester (White Poly finish for Sprinkler
Base Part Nos. 10138, 10139, 10141, 10173, and 10220), Black Polyester (Black Poly finish
for Sprinkler Base Part Nos. 10138, 10139, and 10173), and Black Teflon
Corrosion-Resistant Coatings 3: White Polyester (White Poly finish for Sprinkler Base Part
Nos. 10138, 10139, 10141, 10173, and 10220 only), Black Polyester (Black Poly finish for
Sprinkler Base Part Nos. 10138, 10139, and 10173), and Black Teflon in all temperature ratings. Wax-Coated Brass and Wax over Polyester finish5 for sprinklers with the following temperature ratings:
155 F (68 C) Lt. Brown Wax 200 F (93 C) Brown Wax 286 F (141 C) Dk. Brown Wax
175 F (79 C) Brown Wax
212 F (100 C) Brown Wax
1 Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and
other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards.
2
The temperature rating is stamped on the deflector.
3 The corrosion-resistant coatings havepassed the standard corrosion test required by the approving agencies indicated on pages 11 b-d. These tests cannot and do not represent all
possible corrosive environments. Prior to installation, verify through the end-user that the
coatings are compatible with or suitable for the proposed environment. For automatic sprinklers, the coatings indicated are applied to the exposed exterior surfaces only. Note that the
spring is exposed on sprinklers with Poly finishes and Teflon coatings. For Teflon coated
open sprinkers only, the waterway is coated.
4 Sprinklers of Ultra-High temperature rating are intended for use inside ov ens, dryers, or similar enclosures with normal operating temperatures above 300 F (149 C). Where the ambient temperature around the Ultra-High temperature rated sprinkler is significantly reduced
below 300 F (149 C), response time may be severely retarded.
5 Wax Over Polyester un avail able for Sprinkler Base P/Ns 09992, 09993, 09994, and 09995.
LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Refer to the charts on pages 11 b-d.
Spacing Requirements: Max. spacing 15
Pip Cap and Insert Assembly for all other
ft. (4,6 m), min. spacing 6 ft. (1,8 m).
for Sprinkler Base Part No. 09992.
Sprinkler Part Nos: Copper UNS-C11000
Glass bulb fluid temperature rated to -65 F
Brass
UNS-C51000
or
Copper
and Stainless Steel UNS-S30400
(-55 C).
UNS-C19500 for Sprinklers 10139,
Pip Cap Attachment: Brass UNS-C36000
Spring: U.S.A. Patent No. 4,167,974
10142, 10170, 10173, 10223, and
Ejector Spring (Part Nos. 12105 and
Min. Operating Pressure: 7 psi (48,3 kPa).
12105. Copper UNS-C19500 for Sprin 12106): Stainless Steel
RATED WATER WORKING PRESSURE
kler Base Part Nos. 10138, 10141,
Sprinklers with Teflon Coating
Sprinklers 09992, 09993, 09994, and
10169, 10174, 10187, 10190, 10193,
Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Ex09995 are rated for use with water
10220, 10233, and 12106. Brass
posed
working pressures ranging from the
UNS-C26000 for all other Part Nos.
Screw: Nickel plated
minimum 7 psi (48,3 kPa) up to 250
Bushing (for Sprinkler Base Part Nos.
Pip Cap: Teflon Coated
psi (1 724 kPa) for high-pressure sys09994, 09995, 10188, 10189, 10191,
Sprinklers with Poly Finishes
tems. High-pressure (HP) sprinklers
10192, 10218, 10219, 10221, and
Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Excan be identified by locating 250"
10222): Brass UNS-C36000
posed
stamped on the deflector.
Bulb: Glass, nominal 5 mm diameter
AVAILABLE FINISHES
All other Part Nos. not mentioned
Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel
Brass, Chrome-Enloy (patents pending),
above are rated to a maximum 175
Alloy, coated on both sides with Teflon
White Polyester (White Poly finish for
psi (1 207 kPa) wwp.
Tape
Sprinkler Base Part Nos. 10138, 10139,
Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (3
Screw: Brass UNS-C36000
10141, 10173, and 10220), Black Polyes448 kPa).
Pip Cap for Sprinklers 09992, 09993,
ter (Black Poly finish for Sprinkler Base
SPRINKLER MATERIALS
09994, 09995, and 10221: Bronze
Part Nos. 10138, 10139, and 10173), and
Frame: Brass Castings UNS-C84400
UNS-C31400 or UNS-C31600
Black Teflon in all temperature ratings;
Deflector: Brass UNS-C51000, Brass
Wax-Coated Brass or Wax over Poly esUNS-C26000, or Copper UNS-C19500
Note: Units of measure in parentheses may be approximations. Replaces page 11 a-d, dated May 14, 2004 (Sprinkler 10174 is now
VK145). Refer to technical data page SR1-2 for general care,
Form No. F_100397
installaion, and maintenance information.
August 27, 2004
Sprinkler 11 b
TECHNICAL DATA
MICROMATIC AND
RESPONSE SPRINKLERS
Temperature
Finish
Approval Chart
Micromatic
Thread
Size
Max.
Pressure
NPT BSP
PSIG
15 mm
15 mm
175
175
Sprinkler Description
Base Part
SIN
Number1
Pendent
10139
VK102
Pendent 1017312 VK102
Style
KEY
Standard Response Pendent Sprinklers

A1
Maximum 175 PSI WWP
Standard Orifice
Nominal
Overall
Listings and Approvals2
K-Factor
Length
U.S.
5.6
5.6
metric6 Inch mm
cULus4
FM
NYC3
VdS
LPCB
8,1
2-3/16 56 B2, D9, E11, F7 B5, C6, F5 B2, D9, E11 B5 B2, D9
8,1
2-3/16 56 B2, D9, E11, F7 B5, C6, F5 B2, D9, E11 B5 B2, D9
Large Orifice
15 mm
175
Pendent
10223
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60 B1, D8, E11, F7 B7, C10, F7 B1, D8, E11
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
10142
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-5/16 59 B1, D8, E11, F7 B7, C10, F7 B1, D8, E11
B4, D8
15 mm
175
Pendent
10187
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60 B1, D8, E11, F7
C10
20 mm
175
Pendent
10170
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60
B1, D8, E11
C10, A7
B7, D3
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
12105
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-3/16 56
A4
Small Orifice9
15 mm
175
Pendent 1022110 VK003 2.8
4,0
2-3/16 56
B1, D8, E11
B7, D10
15 mm
175
Pendent 1022210 VK004 4.2
6,0
2-1/4 58
B1, D8, E11
10 mm
175
Pendent
10175
VK004 4.2
6,0
2-1/4 58
B4 B7, D3
15 mm
175
Pendent 1018810,12 VK004 4.2
6,0
2-1/4 58
B1, D8, E11
15 mm
175
Pendent 1018910,12 VK003 2.8
4,0
2-3/16 56
B1, D8, E11
B7, D10
Installed with the Viking Micromatic Model E-1 or E-2 Recessed Escutcheon11
15 mm
175
Pendent
10139
VK102 5.6
8,1
2-3/16 56
D2
C58
D2
D5
D2
15 mm
175
Pendent
10223
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60
D1
D78
D1
15 mm
175
Pendent 102219,10 VK003 2.8
4,0
2-3/16 56
D1
C7
D1
D1
15 mm
175
Pendent 102229,10 VK004 4.2
6,0
2-1/4 58
D1
D1
D1
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
10142
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-5/16 59
D1
D78
D1
D4
15 mm
175
Pendent 1017312 VK102 5.6
8,1
2-3/16 56
D1
C78
D1
20 mm
175
Pendent
10170
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60
D1
D78
D1
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
12105
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-3/16 56
D4
Installed with the Viking Microfast Model F-1 Adjustable Escutcheon11

15 mm
175
Pendent
10139
VK102 5.6
8,1
2-3/16 56
D2
D2
E5
D2
15 mm
175
Pendent
10223
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60
D1
D1
15 mm
175
Pendent 102219,10 VK003 2.8
4,0
2-3/16 56
D1
D1
D1
15 mm
175
Pendent 102229,10 VK004 4.2
6,0
2-1/4 58
D1
D1
D1
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
10142
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-5/16 59
D1
D1
D4
15 mm
175
Pendent 1017312 VK102 5.6
8,1
2-3/16 56
D1
20 mm
175
Pendent
10170
VK202 8.0
11,5
2-3/8 60
D1
3/4 20 mm
175
Pendent
12105
VK202 8.0
11,5 2-3/16 56
A4
Approved Temperature Ratings

Approved Finishes
1 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy , White Polyester5, Black Polyester5, and Black Teflon5
A - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F (93 C), 2 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy , White Poly Finish5, Black Poly Finish 5 , and Black Teflon5
212 F (100 C), 286 F (141 C), and 360 F 3 - White Polyester, Black Polyester, Black Teflon, Wax-Coated Brass, and Wax over Polyester
(182 C)
4 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Polyester, and Black Polyester
B - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F (93 C), 5 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Poly Finish, and Black Poly Finish
286 F (141 C), and 360 F (182 C)
6 - White Poly Finish, Black Poly Finish, and Wax-Coated Brass (corrosion resistant)
C - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F (93 C), 7 - Brass and Chrome-Enloy
and 212 F (100 C)
8 - Wax-Coated Brass and Wax Over Polyester 5
D - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), and 200 F 9 - Wax-Coated Brass and Wax Over Poly Finish5
(93 C)
10 - Wax-Coated Brass (corrosion resistant)
E - 286 F (141 C)
11 - High Temperature 200 F (93 C) Wax Coating (corrosion resistant); maximum ambient
F - 500 F (260 C)7
temperature allowed at ceiling = 150 F (65 C)
1 Base part number shown. For complete part number, refer to Vikings current price schedule.
2
This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process.
3 Accepted for use, City of New York Department of Buildings, MEA Number 89-92-E, Vol. XII.
4 Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in the U.S. and Canada.
5 cULus Listed as corrosion-resistant.
6 Metric K-factor shown is for use when pressure is measured in kPa. When pressure is measured in BAR, multiply the metric K-factor shown by 10.0.
7 Sprinklers of Ultra-High temperature rating are intended for use inside ov ens, dryers, or similar enclosures with normal operating temperatures
above 300 F (149 C). Where the ambient temperature around the Ultra-High temperature rated sprinkler is significantly reduced below 300 F
(149 C), the response time of the Ultra-High temperature rated sprinkler may be severely retarded.
8 FM Approval of Viking Micromatic Standard Response Recessed Pendent Sprinklers installed with the Viking Micromatic Model E-1 or E-2
Recessed Escutcheon is limited to wet systems and preaction systems qualifying as wet systems, for hazard occupancies up to and including
Ordinary Hazard, Group II.
9 Listings and Approvals limited to Light-Hazard Occupancies with hydraulically calculated wet systems only.
10The sprinkler orifice is bushed.
11Refer to the Sprinkler Accessories section for technical data on approved escutcheons and other accessories. Escutcheons must be ordered
separately from sprinklers. Refer to Viking's current price schedule.
12Sprinklers 10173, 10189, and 10188 are available on special order.
Spacing Requirements: Maximum spacing 15 ft. (4,6 m), minimum spacing 6 ft. (1,8 m).
August 27, 2004
Sprinkler 11 c
MICROMATIC AND
RESPONSE SPRINKLERS
TECHNICAL DATA
Temperature
Finish
Approval Chart
MicromaticHP Standard Response Pendent Sprinklers
Maximum 250 PSI WWP
Standard Orifice
Thread Size
Max.
Pressure
Sprinkler Description
KEY
A1
Nominal K-Factor Overall Length
NPT
BSP
PSIG
Style
Base Part Number1
SIN
U.S.
metric5
Inch
mm cULus3 FM NYC VdS LPCB
15 mm
250
Pendent
09992
VK122
5.6
8,1
2-1/4
58
A1
4,0
2-1/4
58
A1
Small Orifice6
15 mm
250
Pendent
099947
Installed with the Viking
15 mm
15 mm
250
250
Pendent
Pendent
09992
09994
6,7
VK023
2.8
Micromatic
Model E-1 or E-2 Recessed
Escutcheon 9
VK122
5.6
8,1
2-1/4
58
B1
VK023
2.8
4,0
2-1/4
58
B1
A1
58
A1
Approved Finishes
Installed with the Viking Microfast Model F-1 Adjustable Escutcheon 8,9
15 mm
15 mm
250
250
Pendent
09992
VK122
5.6
8,1
2-1/4
Pendent
09994 6,7
VK023
2.8
4,0
2-1/4

A - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F (93 C), and 286 F (141 C)
B - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), and 200 F (93 C)
58
1 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Polyester4 , Black Polyester4,

and Black Teflon4
Footnotes
2 This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process.
5 Metric K-factor shown is for use when pressure is measured in kPa. When pressure is measured in BAR, multiply the met ric K-factor shown by 10.0.
7 The sprinkler orifice is bushed.
8 The Microfast Model F-1 Adjustable Es cutcheon is considered a surface-mounted escutcheon because it does not allow the fusible element of
the sprinkler to be recessed behind the face of the wall or ceiling.
9 Refer to the Sprinkler Accessories section for technical data on approved escutcheons and other accessories. Escutcheons must be ordered
separately from sprinklers. Refer to Viking's current price schedule.

Sprinkler Base Part No. 10139

with a standard 1/8" (3,1 mm)
surface-mounted escutcheon.
Sprinkler Base
Part No. 10139
Ceiling Opening Size: 2-5/16" (59 mm) Minimum,

2-1/2" (64 mm) Maximum.

installed with a Microfast
Model F-1 Adjustable Escutcheon.

installed with a Micromatic
Model E-1 Recessed Escutcheon.
Figure 1
ter* for sprin klers with tem perature ratings through 286 F (141 C).
* Wax Over Polyester unavailable for Sprinkler
Base Part Nos. 09992, 09993, 09994, and 09995.
ACCESSORIES
Sprinkler Wrenches:
A. Standard wrench: Part No. 10896W/B
(available since 2000) or 05000CW/B
(no longer available).
B. Wrench for coated and recessed

Micromatic and MicromaticHP Standard Response Sprinklers: Part
No. 07398W** (available since 1990), or
Part No. 12144W/B**, available since
2003. NOTE: Recessed pendent
sprinklers with protective caps must
use wrench 12144W/B.
**A " ratchet is required (not available from Vi king).
Refer to the Sprinkler Accessories sec tion of the data book.
Sprinkler 11 d
August 27, 2004
TECHNICAL DATA
Approval Chart
MICROMATIC AND
RESPONSE SPRINKLERS
Temperature
Finish
KEY
Micromatic and MicromaticHP Standard Response

A1
Upright and Conventional Sprinklers
Maximum 175 PSI WWP
Standard Orifice
Max.
Nominal
Overall
Thread Size Pressure Sprinkler Description
K-Factor
Length
Base Part
NPT BSP
PSIG
Style
SIN U.S. metric5 Inch mm
cULus 4
FM
NYC
VdS LPCB
Number1
3
15 mm
175
Upright 10138 VK100 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56 B14, E11, F13, G9 A16, D15, G16 B14, E11, F13
15 mm
175
Upright 10233 VK145 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56
A8, D7, G8
B6 B9, E3
15 mm
175
Upright 10174 VK145 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56
A8, D7, G8
B9, E3
15 mm
175
Upright 10193 VK100 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56 B1, E10, F13, G9 A8, D7, G8 B1, E10, F133
Large Orifice
15 mm
175
Upright 10220 VK200 8.0 11,5 2-3/8 60 B2, E11, F13, G9 B8, E12, G8
B2, E113
3/4 20 mm
175
Upright 10141 VK200 8.0 11,5 2-5/16 59 B2, E11, F13, G9 B8, E12, G8 B2, E11, F13 3 B6 B5, E11
15 mm
175
Upright 10190 VK200 8.0 11,5 2-3/8 60 B1, E10, F13, G9 B8, E12, G8
20 mm
175
Upright 10169 VK200 8.0 11,5 2-5/16 59
B1, E10, F13
B8, E12, G8
B9, E3
Small Orifice8
15 mm
175
Upright 102189 VK001 2.8
4,0 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
E9, E12
15 mm
175
Upright 102199 VK002 4.2
6,0 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
15 mm
175
Upright 101919 VK002 4.2
6,0 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
15 mm
175
Upright 101929 VK001 2.8
4,0 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
E9, E12
10 mm
175
Upright 10176 VK002 4.2
6,0 2-3/16 56
B17 B9, E3
Conventional
15 mm
175
Conv.
10227 VK118 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
B1, E10, F13 11 B17 B5, E10

3/4 20 mm
175
Conv.
10228 VK120 8.0 11,5 2-5/16 59
B1, E10, F13
B1, E10, F13 11 B5, E10

15 mm
175
Conv. 1017210 VK118 5.6
8,1 2-3/16 56
B1, E10, F13
B5, E10
20 mm
175
Conv. 1016810 VK120 8.0 11,5 2-5/16 59
B1, E10, F13
B5, E10
3/4 20 mm
175
Conv.
12106 VK120 8.0 11,5 2-5/16 59
B17
Maximum 250 PSI WWP

Standard Or ifice
15 mm
250
Upright 09993 VK124 5.6
8,1
2-1/4 58
C1
Small Orifice8
15 mm
250
Upright 099959 VK021 2.8
4,0
2-1/4 58
C1
Approved Finishes
5
5
5
1 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy , White Polyester , Black Polyester , and Black Teflon
2 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Poly Finish5, Black Polyester5 , and Black Teflon5
3
- White Polyester, Black Polyester, Black Teflon, Wax-Coated Brass, and Wax over Polyester
A - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F
4
White Poly Finish, Black Polyester, Black Teflon, Wax-Coated Brass, and Wax over Polyester
(93 C), 212 F (100 C), 286 F (141 C),
5
Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Polyester, and Black Polyester
and 360 F (182 C)
6
Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Poly Finish, and Black Polyester
B - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F
7
White
Poly Finish and Wax-Coated Brass (corrosion resistant)
(93 C), 286 F (141 C), and 360 F
8 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy and White Poly Finish
(182 C)
C - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F 9 - Brass and Chrome-Enloy
10
Wax-Coated
Brass
and
Wax
over Polyester 5
(93 C), and 286 F (141 C)
11
Wax-Coated
Brass
and
Wax
over Poly Finish5
D - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), 200 F
12
Wax-Coated
Brass
(cor
rosion
resistant)
(93 C), and 212 F (100 C)
E - 155 F (68 C), 175 F (79 C), and 200 13 - 200 F (93 C) High-Temperature Wax Coating (corrosion resistant); maximum ambient tem
perature al lowed at ceiling = 150 F (65 C)
F (93 C)
5
5
5
14 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy , White Poly Finish , Black Poly Finish , and Black Teflon
F - 286 F (141 C)
15 - White Poly Finish, Black Poly Finish, and Wax-Coated Brass (corrosion resistant)
G - 500 F (260 C) 7
16 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Poly Finish, and Black Poly Finish
17 - Brass, Chrome-Enloy, White Polyester, and Black Polyester
Footnotes
2 This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process.
3 Accepted for use, City of New York Department of Buildings, MEA Number 89-92-E, Vol. XII.
6 Metric K-factor shown is for use when pressure is measured in kPa. When pressure is measured in BAR, multiply the metric K-factor shown by 10.0.
7 Sprinklers of Ultra-High temperature rating are intended for use inside ovens, dryers, or similar enclosures with normal operating temperatures
above 300 F (149 C). Where the ambient temperature around the Ultra-High temperature rated sprinkler is significantly re duced below 300 F
(149 C), the response time of the Ultra-High temperature rated sprinkler may be severely retarded.
9 The sprinkler orifice is bushed.
10Sprinklers 10168 and10172 are available on special order.
11Accepted for use, City of New York Department of Buildings, MEA Number 89-92-E, Vol. III.
Replaces page 11 a-d, dated May 14, 2004 (Sprinkler 10174 is now VK145). Refer to technical data page
SR1-2 for general care, installaion, and maintenance information.
Form No. F_100397
July 30, 2004
Wet 26 a
TECHNICAL DATA
Viking 250 psi (1 724 kPa) trim is

required to maintain listings and
approvals. Order 250 psi (1 724
kPa) trim separately. Trim charts
are specific for vertical or horizontal installation. Refer to Viking
Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve
Trim Charts with the words
Maximum 250 psi water working
pressure in the title. Exception:
Viking ESFR Cold Storage
System Trim is rated for 175 psi
(1 207 kPa) maximum wwp.
1. PRODUCT NAME
Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve
Available since 1993
2. MANUFACTURER
Hastings, Michigan 49058 U.S.A.
Telephone:
(616) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(616) 945-9599
The Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check
Valve serves as a check valve by trap ping pressurized water above the clap per and preventing reverse flow from
sprinkler piping.
The valve is designed to initiate an alarm
during a sustained flow of water (such as
the flow required by an open sprinkler)
by operating an optional water motor
alarm and/or alarm pressure switch. External by-pass trim serves to prevent unwanted (false) alarms at lower flows.
The Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve may
be installed vertically or horizontally on
wet-pipe sprinkler systems with constant pressure or variable pressure water supplies. The valve is made suitable
for use on variable pressure water supplies by adding the optional retard
chamber to the standard trim.
The valve is available with a flanged inlet
and flanged outlet, with a flanged inlet
and grooved outlet, or with a grooved inlet and grooved outlet.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
See the Approval Chart on this page.
Rated to 250 psi (1 724 kPa) water working pressure.
Form No. F_062293
Systems with water working

pressures above 175 psi (1 207
kPa) may require extra-heavy pattern fittings. Model J-1 Alarm
Valve flanges are Ductile Iron
ANSI B16.42 Class 150 with a
maximum water working pressure of 250 psi. ANSI B16.42
Class 150 flanges are NOT compatible with ANSI Class 250 or
Class 300 flanges. To mate the
Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve
with ANSI Class 250 or Class 300
flanges, use the grooved-inlet/
grooved-outlet style installed with
listed grooved/flanged adapters
of the appropriate pressure rating. For piping with grooved connections, the grooved-inlet and/or
grooved-outlet Model J-1 Alarm
Check Valve may be installed
with listed grooved couplings of
the appropriate pressure rating.
FOR THE VIKING ESFR COLD
STORAGE SYSTEM:
Uses only 4, 6, or 8 size Model J-1
Alarm Check Valve.
Uses ESFR Cold Storage System
Trim - vertical trim for constant pressure water supply (refer to data page
48 a-c for trim sets used in this application).
Uses a pressure relief valve and
flow test valve in place of external
by-pass trim.
System is designed so maximum operating pressures of the system do
not exceed 175 PSI (1 207 kPa).
Refer to technical data pages 45 a-j

(system) and 48 a-c (trim).
Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi
(3 447 kPa).
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
Table 1
Inlet Outlet Friction Shipping Part
Type Type Loss* Weight No.
3"
10 ft. 35 lbs.
Flange Flange
08235
(80 mm)
(3,1 m) (16 kg)
3"
10 ft. 27 lbs.
Flange Groove
08236
(80 mm)
(3,1 m) (12 kg)
10 ft. 20 lbs.
3"
Groove Groove
08237
(80 mm)
(3,1 m) (9 kg)
4"
13 ft. 47 lbs.
Flange Flange
08238
(100 mm)
(4,0 m) (21 kg)
4"
13 ft. 37 lbs.
Flange Groove
08239
(100 mm)
(4,0 m) (17 kg)
4"
13 ft. 27 lbs. 08240
Groove Groove
(100 mm)
(4,0 m) (12 kg)
6"
20 ft. 75 lbs.
Flange Flange
08241
(150 mm)
(6,0 m) (34 kg)
6"
20 ft. 64 lbs.
Flange Groove
08242
(150 mm)
(6,0 m) (29 kg)
6"
20 ft. 51 lbs.
Groove Groove
08243
(150 mm)
(6,0 m) (23 kg)
23 ft. 135 lbs.
8"
Flange Flange
08244
(200 mm)
(7,0 m) (61 kg)
8"
23 ft. 119 lbs.
Flange Groove
08245
(200 mm)
(7,0 m) (54 kg)
8"
23 ft. 106 lbs.
Groove Groove
08246
(200 mm)
(7,0 m) (48 kg)
*Expressed in equivalent length of Schedule 40
pipe based on Hazen & Williams formula: C = 120.
Size
Valve
Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check

Valves are available outside of North
America with flanges drilled according to European PN10 specifications
or Table E specifications. Contact
the manufacturer for availability.
J-1 Alarm Check Valve
Approval Chart
UL1
FM
C-UL2
NYC3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 UL listed, Guide VPLX, Control No. 958A.
2 Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
for use in Canada.
3 Ac c e p t e d f o r u s e , C i t y o f N e w Y o r k
Department of Buildings, MEA 89-92-E
Vol. XI.
Standard flanged connections:

ANSI B16.42 Class 150
(Mates with ANSI Class 125
and Class 150 flanges).
Standard Grooved connections:
ANSI/AWWA C606
MATERIAL STANDARDS
Refer to Figure 1 on page 26 e.
5-A. FEATURES
1. Ductile iron body for less weight and
extra strength.
Replaces page 26 a-f, dated May 14, 2004 (added information for use with the ESFR
Cold Storage System and corrected dimension D on 6 valve on page 26 f).
July 30, 2004
Wet 26 b
TECHNICAL DATA
2. Rubber-faced clapper hinged to access cover for quick removal and

easy servicing. All moving parts can
be serviced without removing the
valve from the installed position.
3. With the cover/clapper assembly re moved, clapper rubber replacement
requires removal of only one screw.
4. External by-pass trim to minimize
clapper movement and false alarm.
5. Trim allows installation of optional
non-interruptible pressure switch to
activate an electric alarm panel
and/or remote alarm.
6. Can be installed on constant or variable pressure water supplies.
7. Can be installed vertically or horizontally.
8. Valve housing tapped for inlet and
outlet pressure gauges, alarm devices, and system main drain.
9. Trim includes alarm test valve for testing alarms without reducing system
pressure.
5-B. ACCESSORIES
The valve is listed and/or approved with
specific trim for use up to 250 psi (1 724
kPa). No substitutions or omissions, in
part or in full, are allowed. Additional accessories to the standard trim packages
are required for a complete system
meeting the requirements of the applicable rules and codes. See appropriate
technical data for additional information.
TRIM PACKAGES
1. 250 psi (1 724 kPa) vertical trim* for
use when the J-1 Alarm Check Valve
is installed vertically.
2. 250 psi (1 724 kPa) horizontal trim*
for use when the J-1 Alarm Check
Valve is installed horizontally.
3. 175 psi (1 207 kPa) ESFR Cold Storage
System Trim - vertical trim, constant
pressure water supply, for use when
the J-1 Alarm Check Valve is installed
with the ESFR Cold Storage System.
* For optional pre-trimmed Model J-1 Alarm
check Valves, refer to the current Viking
Price List or contact the manufacturer.
Trim packages include:

A. All necessary nipples and fittings
B. All standard trim accessories
C. Necessary gauges
ORDER SEPARATELY
A. Retard Chamber: The Viking Retard
Chamber is required when the J-1
Alarm Check Valve is installed on
systems with a variable pressure water supply to minimize unwanted
(false) alarms. NOTE: The Retard
Chamber is NOT used with the ESFR

Cold Storage System.
B. Water Motor Alarm: The J-1 Alarm
Check Valve is designed to operate a
mechanical alarm during a sustained
flow of water (such as the flow required by an open sprinkler). Refer to
the water motor alarm technical data.
C. Alarm Pressure Switch: The J-1
Alarm Check Valve trim allows installation of pressure switches to operate
local electric alarms and/ or remote
electric alarms during a sustained
flow of water (such as the flow required by an open sprinkler). Refer to
alarm pressure switch technical data.
Additional accessories are available and
may be required for operation or supervision. Refer to the system description for
complete operating trim requirements.
6. AVAILABILITY AND SERVICE

The Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check
Valve and accessories are available
through a network of domestic, Canadian, and international distributors. Refer
to The Viking Web site for the nearest
distributor or contact Viking.
Viking technical data may be found on
The Viking Corporations Web site at
http://www.vikingcorp.com.
The Web site may include a more recent
edition of this technical data page.
7. GUARANTEES
For details of warranty, refer to Vikings
current list price schedule or contact The
Viking Corporation directly.
8. OPERATION
(Refer to Figure 1 on page 26 e.)
The Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve is
manufactured with a hinged clapper (9)
equipped with a torsion spring (6) to assure proper operation when the valve is
installed in the horizontal position.
Minor flows, resulting from small surges,
travel around the clapper through external by-pass trim to minimize false
alarms. Rubber gasket (10) forms a tight
seal against brass water seat (13). This
seal, and the check valve installed in the
external by-pass trim, serve to trap
higher pressurized water in the sprinkler
piping and prevent reverse flow.
During a sustained flow of water, such
as the flow required by an open sprinkler, hinged clapper (9) moves off seat
(13) to the open position. Water flows
through orifices in grooved seat (13),
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
and enters the alarm port to activate

alarm devices connected to the system.
Operation with Retard Chamber:
When the optional retarding chamber is
used, water entering the grooved seat
alarm port is directed into the retarding
chamber. Temporary pressure surges
or fluctuations, large enough to move
the valve clapper, are automatically
drained through the restricted drain.
During a sustained flow of water, such
as the flow required by an open sprin kler, the clapper will be held off its seat.
The retarding chamber will fill faster than
water can drain through the restricted
drain of the alarm valve trim. Alarm devices will be pressurized. Refer to technical data describing the Viking Retarding Chamber and alarm devices.
9. INSTALLATION
FOR THE VIKING ESFR COLD STORAGE
SYSTEM, REFER TO DATA PAGE 45 a-j
FOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
For proper operation and approval, the

valve must be trimmed in accordance
with Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check
Valve Trim Charts for use on systems
with water working pressure up to 250
psi (1 724 kPa). Trim charts are specific
for vertical or horizontal installation, and
They include the words Maximum 250
psi water working pressure in the title.
The optional Viking Retarding Chamber
is required when used on variable pressure water supplies.
Systems with water working pressures
above 175 psi (1 207 kPa) may require
extra-heavy pattern fittings. The Model
J-1 Alarm Check Valve flanges are Ductile Iron ANSI B16.42 Class 150 with a
maximum water working pressure of 250
psi. ANSI B16.42 Class 150 flanges are
NOT compatible with ANSI Class 250 or
Class 300 flanges. To mate the Model
J-1 Alarm Check Valve with ANSI Class
250 or Class 300 flanges, use the
grooved-inlet/grooved-outlet style installed with listed grooved/flanged adapters of the appropriate pressure rating. To
mate to piping with grooved connections,
the grooved-inlet and/or grooved-outlet
Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve may be installed with listed grooved couplings of
the appropriate pressure rating.
The Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve must
be installed in an area not subject to freezing temperatures or physical damage.
When corrosive atmospheres and/or contaminated water supplies are present, it is
the owners responsibility to verify com-
July 30, 2004
Wet 26 c
TECHNICAL DATA
patibility with the Model J-1 Alarm Check

Valve, trim, and associated equipment.
Prior to installing the valve, thoroughly
flush the water supply piping to verify
that no foreign matter is present.
The Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve may
be installed in the vertical position with
direction of flow up, or in the horizontal
position with the access cover up.
1. Verify that the appropriate trim chart
and technical data for the Alarm
Check Valve and associated equip ment are available.
2. Remove all plastic thread protectors
from the openings of the Alarm
Check Valve.
3. Apply a small amount of pipe-joint
compound or tape to the external
threads of all pipe connections required. Take care not to allow any
compound, tape, or other foreign
matter inside any nipples or openings
of the valve or trim components.
4. I n s t a l l t h e M o d e l J - 1 A l a r m
Check Valve and trim according to
current Viking Trim Charts for the
valve used. Trim charts are provided
with trim package and the Viking Engineering and Design Data book.
5. Verify that all system components are
rated for the water working pressure
of the system.
Hydrostatic Test:
The Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve is
manufactured and listed for use at a
maximum water work ing pres sure of
250 psi (1 724 kPa). The valve is factory
tested at 500 psi (3 447 kPa). The valve
may be hy drostatically tested at 300
psi (2 069 kPa) and/or 50 psi (345 kPa)
above the normal water working pres sure, for limited periods of time (two
hours), for the purpose of acceptance by
the AHJ. If air testing is required, do not
exceed 40 psi (276 kPa) air pressure.
10. PLACING THE SYSTEM

IN SERVICE
FOR THE VIKING ESFR COLD
STORAGE SYSTEM, REFER TO DATA
PAGE 45 a-j FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE.
When the wet-pipe system is ready to be

placed in service, verify that all equipment
is adequately heated and protected to
prevent freezing and physical damage.
Note: For proper operation of the wet
system and to minimize unwanted
(false) alarms, it is important to remove
trapped air from the system when filling
it with water. Air trapped in the system
may also cause intermittent operation of

the water motor alarm during a sustained flow of water (such as the flow required by an open sprinkler or the sys tem test valve). Consider installation of
auxiliary vents to facilitate venting.
Caution: Opening of the water supply
main control valve will result in water
flow from any openings in the system.
1. Verify that auxiliary drains are closed
and that the system is free of leaks.
2. Open the system test valve (and any
auxiliary vents provided to facilitate
removal of air from the system) to allow air to escape from the system
while it is filling with water.
3. If desired, close the alarm shut-off
valve to prevent local alarms from operating while filling the system.
Note: Alarms and electric panels controlled by an alarm pressure switch installed in the electric alarm panel
connection provided in the trim cannot
be interrupted. (See trim chart.)
4. Slowly open the water supply main
control valve.
5. Allow the sys tem to com pletely fill
with water. Allow water to flow from
the system test valve, and any other
open vents provided, until all air is exhausted from the system.
6. After all air is exhausted from the system, close the system test valve and
all other open vents.
7. The pressure gauge on the system side
of the Alarm Check Valve Clapper
should indicate water pressure equal
to or greater than the water pressure
indicated on the gauge located on the
supply side of the clapper.
8. OPEN the Alarm Shut-Off Valve in the
Alarm Valve trim, and verify that all
other valves are in their normal operating position.
9. Secure all valves in their normal operating position.
10. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction, remote station alarm monitors,
and those in the affected area that
the system is in service.
11. INSPECTIONS and TESTS

NOTICE: The owner is responsible for
maintaining the fire-protection system and
devices in proper operating condition.
The Viking Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve
and trim must be kept free of foreign matter, freezing conditions, corrosive atmospheres, contaminated water supplies,
and any condition that could impair its operation or damage the device.
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
It is imperative that the system be inspected and tested on a regular basis.

The frequency of the inspections may
vary due to contaminated water supplies,
corrosive water supplies, and corrosive
atmospheres. For minimum maintenance and inspection requirements, re fer to the NFPA standard that describes
care and maintenance of sprinkler sys tems. In addition, the Authority Having
Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that must be followed.
WARNING: Any system maintenance
which involves placing a control valve or
detection system out of service may eliminate the fire-protection capabilities of that
system. Prior to proceeding, notify all the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. Consideration should be given to employment of a
fire patrol in the affected areas.
11-A. INSPECTION
Monthly visual external inspection of
Alarm Check Valves is recommended.
1. Verify that pressure gauges indicate
normal water supply pressures. It is
normal for the gauge on the system
side of the clapper to register a
higher pressure than the gauge on
the supply side of the clapper because pressure surges are trapped
above the clapper.
2. Check for signs of mechanical damage
and/or corrosive activity. If detected,
perform maintenance as required or, if
necessary, replace the device.
3. Verify that valve and trim are adequately heated and protected from
freezing and physical damage.
4. When equipped with variable
pressure trim, verify that there is no
unwanted leakage from the restricted
drain of the retard chamber. It is normal for drainage to occur during pressure surges that exceed the capacity
allowed through the by-pass trim.
5. Verify that the water supply main control valve is open, and that all valves
are in their normal operating po sition
and appropriately secured.
11-B. QUARTERLY TESTS

FOR THE VIKING ESFR COLD STORAGE SYSTEM, REFER TO TECHNICAL
DATA PAGE 45 a-j FOR SYSTEM
TESTING INSTRUCTIONS.
11-B.1 Water Flow Alarm Test

Quarterly testing of water flow alarms is
recommended and may be required by
July 30, 2004
Wet 26 d
TECHNICAL DATA

and those in the area affected by the
test.
Note: An alarm shut-off valve is provided to silence local alarms. No
shut-off valve is provided for the
pressure switch connection intended
to activate electric alarm panels. (Refer to J-1 Alarm Check Valve Trim
Chart.)
2. Fully open the main drain (on the
Alarm Check Valve Trim) to flush
away any accumulation of foreign
material. Consider performance of
quarterly main drain test (Refer to
paragraph 11-B.2 MAIN DRAIN
TEST).
3. Close the main drain.
4. To test electric alarms (if provided)
and/or mechanical water motor gong
(if provided), OPEN the system test
valve. If freezing weather or other
conditions prohibit use of the system
test valve, OPEN the alarm test valve
in the alarm check valve trim.
Note: Use of the alarm test valve allows testing of alarms without reducing the system pressure.
A. Electric alarm pressure switches
should activate.
B. Electric local alarms should be audible.
C. The lo cal wa ter mo tor alarm
should be audible.
Note: When using the system test
valve for the water flow alarm test,
intermittent operation of the water
motor alarm may indicate air is
trapped in the system (refer to
paragraph 10: PLACING THE
SYSTEM IN SERVICE).
D. Verify that remote station alarm
signals (if provided) were received.
5. When testing is complete, close the
test valve used.
6. Verify:
A. All local alarms stop sounding and
electric panels (if provided) reset.
B. All remote station alarms reset.
C. Retard chamber and water motor
alarm supply piping has drained
properly.
7. Verify that the alarm shut-off valve in
the Alarm Check Valve trim is OPEN,
the alarm test valve is CLOSED, and
all valves are in their normal operating position and appropriately secured.

and those in the affected area that
testing is complete.
11-B.2 Main Drain Test
Quarterly performance of the Main Drain
Test is recommended and may be required by the authority having jurisdiction to verify integrity of the water sup ply.
1. No tify the authority hav ing jurisdiction, remote station alarm monitors,
test.
2. Perform monthly visual inspection.
Refer to paragraph 11A INSPECTION.
3. Verify that adequate drainage is provided for full flow from Main Drain
outlet.
4. Record pressure reading from the water supply pressure gauge.
5. Fully OPEN the main drain located
on the Alarm Check Valve.
6. When a full flow is developed from the
main drain, record the residual pressure from the water supply pressure
gauge.
7. When the test is complete, SLOWLY
CLOSE the main drain.
8. Compare test results with previous
flow information. If deterioration of
the water supply is detected, take appropriate steps to restore adequate
water supply.
9. Verify that normal water supply pressure has been restored, and that all
alarm devices and valves are secured in normal operating position.
test that the test is complete. Record
and/or provide notification of test results as required by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
11-B.3 Five-Year Internal Inspection
Internal inspection of Alarm Check
Valves is recommended every five
years unless inspections and tests indicate more frequent internal inspections
are required.
Refer to Figure 1 on page 26 e.
and those in the area affected that
the system will be taken out of service. Consideration should be given
to employment of a fire patrol in the
affected areas.
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
2. Close the water supply Main Control

Valve, placing the system out of service.
3. Open the main drain. If necessary,
open the system test valve to vent
and completely drain the system.
4. Use appropriate wrench to loosen and
remove cover screws (15), and remove Cover/Clapper assembly
(2-12).
5. Inspect water seat (13). Wipe away
all contaminants, dirt, and mineral
deposits. Clean any orifices in the
seat that are restricted or plugged by
mineral deposits. Do not use solvents or abrasives.
6. Inspect cover/clapper assembly
(2-12) and cover gasket (14). Test
hinged clapper (9) for freedom of
movement and spring (6) for tension
retention.
A. Spring (6) tension should engage
when the top of hinged clapper (9)
is moved from perpendicular to
cover (2) toward the open (flow)
position.
Renew or replace damaged or worn
parts as required.
Caution: NEVER apply any lubricant to
seats, gaskets, or any internal operating
parts of the valve. Petroleum-based
grease or oil will damage rubber components and may prevent proper operation.
7. When internal inspection of the alarm
check valve is complete, perform
step 6 of paragraph 12: ALARM
CHECK VALVE MAINTENANCE to
re-install Cover/Clapper Assembly
(2-12).
8. Place the wet system back in service,
Refer to paragraph 10: PLACING
THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE, No.10).
12. ALARM CHECK VALVE

MAINTENANCE
( Refer to Figure 1 on page 26 e.)
1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of paragraph 11-B.3 FIVE-YEAR INTERNAL INSPECTION.
2. To remove clapper rubber (10):
A. Use the appropriate wrench to
loosen and remove the button-head socket screw (12), hex
nut (7), sealing washer (8), and
rubber retainer (11).
B. Remove the clapper rubber (10)
for inspection. If the clapper rub ber shows signs of wear such as
cracking, cuts, or excessively
deep grooves where the rubber
Wet 26 e
July 30, 2004
TECHNICAL DATA
contacts the water seat, replace

the rubber.
3. To re-install clapper rubber (10):
A. Place clapper rubber (10) over the
center hub of the rubber retainer
(11).
B. Position the retainer (11) (with rubber in place) against clapper (9) as
shown in Figure 1.
C. Replace and tighten the button-head socket screw (12), sealing washer (8), and hex nut (7), as
shown in Figure 1. Do not overtighten.
4. To remove clapper (9), spring (6),
and/or hinge pin (4):
A. Remove hinge pin retaining rings
(5), to free the hinge pin (4) for removal. After the hinge pin (4) is removed, the clapper (9) and spring
(6) can be removed.
5. To re-install clapper (9), spring (6),
and/or hinge pin (4):
A. Verify that the clapper rubber (10)
is in good condition and that it is
properly installed.
B. Position the clapper (9) with the

elongated hinge holes aligned between the holes of the hinge
bracket welded inside cover (2).
The system (top) side of the clap per (9) must face the direction indicated by the flow arrow stamped
inside the cover (2).
C. Insert the hinge pin (4) through the
holes at one end of the hinge as sembly.
Before
continuing,
re-install the spring (6), using care
to orient the spring as shown in
Figure 1. Continue to push the
hinge pin (4) through the holes at
the remaining end of the hinge assembly.
D. Re-install the hinge pin retaining
rings (5).
6. To re-install cover/clapper assembly (2-12):
A. Verify that the cover gasket (14) is
in position and that it is in good
condition.
B. Slide the cover/clapper assembly
(2-12) into the Alarm Valve so that
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
the clapper rubber (10) contacts

the grooved water seat (13).
C. Replace cover screws (15). Use
the appropriate wrench to evenly
cross-tighten all screws to the
torque values listed in Table 2 for
the valve used. Do not overtighten.
Table 2
Torque Values for Model J-1
Alarm Valve Cover Screws
Valve Size
Screw Size
3" (80 mm) 3/8" - 16 H.H.C

4" (100 mm) 3/8" - 16 H.H.C
6" (150 mm)
" - 13 H.H.C
8" (200 mm) 5/8" - 11 H.H.C
Torque
Values
19 ft. lbs.
2,63 kg m
19 ft. lbs.
2,63 kg m
45 ft. lbs.
6,23 kg m
93 ft. lbs.
12,9 kg m
7. To place the wet system back in

service, refer to paragraph 10:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE.
July 30, 2004
Wet 26 f
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
TECHNICAL DATA
Ite m
No .
1
Part Numbers
Des cription
3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm) 6" (150 mm) 8" (200 mm)
Body
09922
09923
09924
09925
Cover As se mbly
3
4
5
6
7
*
0535 5A
0544 5A
0602 1B
*
*
04900A
05445A
05939B
*
*
04991A
05445A
05940B
*
05334A
05369A
05952B
9
10
11
*
08070
08071
*
08072
07659
*
*
08073
08074
*
*
08075
08076
12
Bushing
Clappe r Hinge Pin
Hinge Pin Retaining Ring
Spring
Clappe r Hex Nut 3/8"-16 UNC
Clappe r Hex Nut "-13 UNC
Se aling Washe r 3/8" x 1" O.D.
Se aling Washe r " x 1-1/8" O.D.
Clappe r
Clappe r Rubber
Clappe r Rubber Reta iner
Sc re w, Button Hea d, Soc ke t
3/8"-24 UNF x " (1 2,7 mm) lg.
1/4"-20 UNF x 3/4 (19, 0 mm) lg.
1/4"-20 UNF x 7/8" (22,2 mm) lg .
Se at
Cover Ga ske t
H.H.C. S cre w
3/8"-16 UNC x 3/4" (19,0 mm) lg.
H.H.C. S cre w
"-13 UNC x 7/8" (22,2 mm) lg.
H.H.C. S cre w
5/8"-11 UNC x 1-1/4 " (31,8 mm) lg.
10308
12
10686
13
14
0535 4B
04649B
15
0151 7A
01517A
15
04992B
05339C
04993A
15
01922A
No. Req'd
Ma terial
Ductile Iron, ASTM A536 (65-45-12)
E-Coa ted HSLA Stee l, A715 an d
Stainles s Steel, UNS-S30400
Lubricomp 189 Ryton
EPDM and Stainle ss Steel
EPDM and Stainle ss Steel
3" 4" 6" 8 "

1 1 1 1
1
1 1
2
1
2
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0 1
0 0
Bra ss, UNS-C84400

SBR Ru bbe r
1
1
1 1
1 1
1
1
Steel, Zinc Plated
6 0
Steel, Zinc Plated
0 6
Steel, Zinc Plated
0 0
Teflon Coate d HR Ste el UNS-G10180

EPDM
-- Indic ates pa rt is not ava ila ble

* Indic ates pa rt is available in a Sub-As se mbly only--see Sub-Assembly lis t.
SUB-ASSEMB LIES AVAILABLE
2 -12
3,
7 -12
7 ,8
10 -12
7 , 8,
12
09918
09919
09920
09921
Cover/Clappe r Assembly
08518
08519
08520
08521
Clappe r Ass embly
08522
08523
08524
08525
Clappe r Rubber Kit
08735
08735
08736
10309
Clappe r Screw, Sea ling Washer, Nut Assembly
Replaces page 26 a-f, dated May 14, 2004 (added information for use with the ESFR
Cold Storage System and corrected dimension D on 6 valve on page 26 f).
Form No. F_062293
Trim 27 a
December 6, 1999
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
VERTICAL TRIM
TECHNICAL DATA
Maximum 250 PSI WWP
This Trim Chart is for use with the

following Viking Trim Sets
Valve
Size
Standard*
Trim P/N
Foam
System**
Trim P/N
3"
08633
08637
4"
08634
08638
6"
08635
08639
8"
08636
08640
* Standard Trim Sets for Model J-1 Alarm

Check Valves include galvanized nipples
and fittings. (See Trim Chart Notes).
** Trim sets for Model J-1 Alarm Check Valves
used on pre-mixed foam systems consist of
black steel nipples and cast iron or ductile
iron fittings. (See Trim Chart Notes.)
Order Alarm Valve separately.
For detailed trim chart,

open to page 27 b.
NOTES: For use with Trim Chart on page 27 b.

(open fold-out)
General Notes:
Valve must be trimmed as shown. Any deviation from trim size or arrangement may affect the proper operation of the valve.
All pipe, 3/4" (20 mm) and smaller, shall be galvanized steel except when other materials are specified in the technical data for the
system used. All trim components must be listed for up to 250 PSI (1 724 kPa) Water Working Pressure.
When the Model J-1 Alarm Check Valve is used on pre-mixed foam systems, trim piping must be of black steel pipe with cast iron or malleable iron fittings unless other materials are specified in the Technical data for the system used.
Dimensions in parentheses are millimeter.
Note 1: When using a water motor alarm, a strainer is required. Circuit closer vent trim may be required when an alarm pressure switch is used.
(See technical data for the retard chamber.)
Note 2: This location may be used for optional pressure relief valve (not available from Viking). Install 3/4" (20 mm) tee and listed pressure relief
valve.
Note 3: To supply an optional excess pressure pump (not available from Viking and not a listed assembly), replace " ell marked A with a tee. Replace 3/4" ell marked B with a tee to connect outlet from excess pressure pump. Do not exceed listed water working pressure rating of
system components. Perform hydrostatic tests in accordance with recognized Installation Standards.
Note 4: Location for non-interruptible pressure switch. When waterflow through the alarm valve occurs, supply to this location cannot be shut off
until water flow through the alarm valve stops.
Note 5: Component specified is included in Viking trim sets; do not substitute. Use of components other than specified will void any listings and approvals and may affect operation of the valve.
Note 6: 300 PSI (7 620 kPa) water pressure gauges are provided with trim. 600 PSI (15 240 kPa) water pressure gauges are available. Order separately when needed*. Refer to current Viking Price Book.
* NFPA 13 requires gauges to have a minimum limit not less than twice the normal water working pressure at the point where the gauges are installed.
When normal water working pressure exceeds 150 PSI (3 810 kPa), order 600 PSI (15 240 kPa) wa ter pressure gauges separately.
Form No. F_102993
Replaces page 27 a-c, dated July 1, 1999. (Revised trim

pipe lengths for 4 valve and changed part number for in-line
check valve on drawing on page 27 b).
December 6, 1999
Trim 27 b
TECHNICAL DATA
MODEL J-1
ALARM CHECK VALVE
VERTICAL TRIM
Maximum 250 PSI WWP
Available since 1997.
Order Alarm Valve separately.

Refer to page 27 a
for General Notes
and Notes 1 through 6.
711 a
October 28, 2004
TECHNICAL DATA
1. PRODUCT NAME
VIKING WATER MOTOR ALARMS

Model F-2, Viking Part No. 07862
Model G-2, Viking Part No. 07868
2. MANUFACTURER
THE VIKING CORPORATION

Telephone:
(269) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(269) 945-9599
The Viking water motor alarms are mechanical devices actuated by a flow of
water. They are designed to sound a
continuous alarm while a sprinkler system operates. An alarm is a required
component of every sprinkler system
having more than 20 sprinklers.
4. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Model F-2:
UL Listed, Guide No. VPLX, Control
No. 958A
C-UL (Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Canada)
FM Approved
L.P.C. Approved
CE Approval - Certificate 1116
Approved by the New York City
Board of Standards and Appeals,
Calendar No. 219-76-SA
Model G-2:
Verband der Sachversicherer
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Shipping Weight:
Model F-2: 11 lbs. (5,0 kg)
Model G-2: 13 lbs. (5,9 kg)
Water working pressure:
Rated to 175 PSI (1 207 kPa) water
working pressure
Materials: (See parts list)
Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400
Brass, UNS C36000
Form No. F_082789
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Aluminum, UNS-A91100
Cast Iron, ASTM A126, Class B
Galvanized Steel, UNS-G10080
Plastic - Celcon
Viking E-coat Spec SPF02 W01
6. FEATURES & ACCESSORIES
A. The water motor alarms are tapped

3/4" NPT on the inlet and 1" NPT
on the drain outlet.
B. The water motor alarm package includes a drive shaft 16-3/4" (425
mm) long for walls 14" (356 mm)
thick or less. A special extension
shaft is available for walls up to
30-1/4" (768 mm) thick.
C. The package also includes the required 3/4" (20 mm) NPT strainer
for installation on the alarm line.
D. Rated water working pressure of
Model F-2 is 250 PSI (1 724 kPa).
Accessories: (order separately)
1. Extension Mounting Cup: Viking Part

Number 05957B.
Material: 14-Gauge Cold Rolled
Steel, UNS-G10080, coated with
black E-coat.
The extension mounting cup is required when the wall thickness is less
than 3" (76,2 mm). Refer to INSTALLATION instructions. See Figure 3
on page 711 d.
2. Closure Plate: For use with Model F-2
only, Viking Part Number 05820B.
Material: 16-Gauge Galvanized
Steel, UNS-G10080.
The closure plate is required when
the Model F-2 Water Motor Alarm
gong is mounted on an irregularly
surfaced wall. It serves to prevent
birds from entering the inside of the
gong. The closure plate also serves
as a mounting plate for sheet metal
walls. Refer to INSTALLATION instructions. See Figure 3, page 711d.
3. Special Extension Shaft: Viking Part
Number 03312B
Material: Stainless Steel, UNSS30400
The extension shaft is required when
the F-2 or G-2 Water Motor Alarm is
installed on walls from 14" (356 mm)
to 30-1/4" (768 mm) thick.
7. OPERATION
(See Figure 1 on page 711 b.)
which restricts the flow into a pressurized stream directed onto the impeller
(7). Force from the water stream turns
the impeller and drive shaft (10), causing
the striker arm (20) to rotate. The striker
(25) impacts against the gong (16), producing a continuous alarm. A minimum
of 5 PSI (34,47 kPa) is required at the
nozzle to cause a continuous alarm.
When properly installed, the Model F-2
Water Motor Alarm produces the required 90 decibel output and the Model
G-2 produces 100 decibels. After passing through the water motor, the water is
discharged through a 1" (25 mm) drain
outlet in the bottom of the impeller housing. The discharged water must be piped
through the wall to atmosphere or to a
suitable open drain.
8. AVAILABILITY & SERVICE
Viking products are available through a

network of domestic, Canadian, and
international distributors. See the Viking
Corp. Web site for your closest distributor or contact The Viking Corporation.
Viking Technical Data may be found on
edition of this Technical Data page.
When a sprinkler system is activated,

9. GUARANTEE
water flows from the alarm outlet of the
valve, through the 3/4" (20 mm) strainer
current list price schedule or contact Viand alarm line piping, into the inlet of the
king directly.
water motor. From the 1/8 inlet orifice,
the water flows through a nozzle (4),
Replaces page 711a-d dated March 10, 2004. (Water
Motor Alarms are now coated with black E-coat.)
October 28, 2004
711 b
TECHNICAL DATA
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Figure 1
Water Motor Alarm Assembly
ITEM
NO.
PART NUMBER
MODEL F-2
DESCRIPTION
MODEL G-2
MATERIAL
QTY.
REQ'D.
Round-Head Self-Tap 10-24 x 3/8"
Zinc-Plated Steel
07867
07870
Cover (Black E-coat)
Cold Rolled Steel, UNS-G10080
Housing (Black E-coat)
Cast Iron: ASTM A-126, Class B
Nozzle
Brass: UNS-C36000
12MIPLUG-G
12MIPLUG-G
" (15 mm) Pipe Plug
M.I. Galv.
1
1
02550B
02550B
Cover Gasket
Cellulose/Chloroprene
02547C
02547C
Impeller
Delrin
Bearing
Brass: Sintered Bronze
1
1
05603A
05603A
Wall Plate
Galvanized Steel: UNS-G10080
10
05604B
05604B
Drive Shaft
Stainless Steel: UNS-S30400
11
3/4" Pipe (C.O.J.) not furnished
Galvanized Steel
12
Coupling
Brass: UNS-C36000
13
02556B
02556B
Striker Arm Shaft
Celcon Glass Filled
14
Bearing
Brass: UNS-C36000
15
Gong Support
16
05821C
06508C
Gong
Aluminum: 1100-0
17
02766A
02766A
Flat Washer, 11/321 ID x 11/16" OD x 1/16"
18
05768A
06505C
Gong Label
Aluminum (F-2), Vinyl (G-2)
19
Button-Head Slotted, 5/16-18 x "
20
Striker Arm
21
Flat Washer, 11/32 ID x 11/16 OD x 1/16
22
Hex-Head Self-Tap, 5/16-18 x
Zinc-Plated Steel
23
Striker Pin
24
Striker Arm Washer
25
Striker
Canvas Phenolic
*SUB-ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE
--INDICATES REPLACEMENT PART NOT AVAILABLE.
1-8
07863
07869
Motor Assembly
Various
20,
23-25
02558B
02558B
Striker Arm Assembly
Various
Table 1
October 28, 2004
711 c
TECHNICAL DATA
10. LOCATION
Locate the water motor on an exterior

wall as close as practical to the valve being monitored for water flow. A 3/4" (20
mm) strainer (included) is required on
the alarm line as close as possible to the
alarm outlet of the valve being monitored
for water flow (or outlet of the retard
chamber, if used). The location must be
easily accessible for cleaning.
11. INSTALLATION
A. Cut a 1-7/16" (36.5 mm) minimum to

1-5/8" (41,3 mm) maximum diameter
hole in the building wall to accommodate the 3/4" (20 mm) galvanized
spacer pipe. (Note: Spacer pipe is
NOT included in Water Motor Alarm
Package). The hole through the wall
must be level or pitched slightly
downward toward the Water Motor.
B. Measure the wall thickness.
C. Cut and thread the spacer pipe to a
length equal to: The wall thickness
minus 1" (25,4 mm). If the extension
mounting cup is used, add an additional 3" (76 mm) to the spacer pipe.
D. Cut the drive shaft (10) to a length
equal to: The total wall thickness plus
2-3/4" (70 mm). If extension mounting cup is used, add an additional 3"
(76 mm).
E. File the drive shaft to provide a 3/32"
(2,4 mm) x 450 chamfer on both corners of both ends. File off all burrs
and insert the drive shaft into the hole
of the striker arm shaft.
F. Slide the spacer pipe over the shaft
and thread the end of the spacer pipe
into the gong support assembly coupling (12).
G. Slide the closure plate (if used) over
the free end of the spacer pipe, up to
the back of the gong. If desired, the
closure plate may be fastened to the
gong support by using the 9/32"
(7,14 mm) diameter hole in the gong
support. Use only a flat or round
headed fastener that will not interfere
with striker arm movement.
H. Position the support assembly on the
exterior wall surface by sliding the
free threaded end of the spacer pipe
into the hole from outside the building.
I. On the inside surface of the wall: Slide
the wall plate provided ( 9), over the
free threaded end of the spacer pipe.
(If an extension mounting cup is
used, place it over the end of the
spacer pipe with the flared end to-
ward the wall before sliding the wall

plate into position).
J. Remove the plastic thread protectors
from the threaded openings in the
body of the water motor.
K. Attach the water motor assembly by
threading the body (3) onto the free
threaded end of the spacer pipe. The
chamfered ends of the drive shaft allow it to slide into position as the water motor body is threaded onto the
spacer pipe. When the assembly is
properly tightened, the water motor
should be positioned with the 1" (25
mm) NPT drain outlet facing downward and the 3/4" (20 mm) NPT
alarm line inlet horizontal. See Figures 1 and 2.
L. Attach the gong, the flat washer, and
the gong label, (16, 17, and 18) to the
gong support installed on the exterior
surface of the wall, with the 5/16-18 x
12" (13 mm) screw (19). Note: The
flat washer must be installed between the gong and the gong support
(see 17 Figure 1).
M. With galvanized, brass, or other approved corrosion-resistant piping,
not less than 3/4" (20 mm) diameter,
connect the water motor inlet to the
alarm outlet of the waterflow detecting device. A 3/4" (20 mm) strainer
(included) is required on the alarm
line as close as possible to the alarm
outlet of the waterflow detecting device (or outlet of the retard chamber if
used). The location must be easily
accessible for cleaning.
n. The drain outlet of the impeller housing must discharge to an open drain.
Care shall be taken to keep the drain
line clean at all times.
Note: A water motor drain line that:
a. Has too many fittings, and/or
b. Has a very short length of pipe
between the 1" (25 mm) outlet
and the first elbow in the water
motor drain pipe, and/or
c. Is very long
may result in slow drainage and reduced
water motor speed. This condition can
be remedied by increasing the drain pipe
diameter, increasing the length of pipe to
the first elbow, and/or pitching the pipe
toward the discharge location.
12. MAINTENANCE
Weather-resistant materials are used in

the construction of the water motor
alarm. At regular intervals, examine and
test the water motor to ensure that the
nozzle and drain line are clean and free
of obstruction, and that the alarm func-
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
tions properly. Also, at regular intervals

and before disassembly of the water motor, clean and inspect the alarm line
strainer located at the alarm outlet of the
waterflow detecting device, or the outlet
of the retard chamber, if used. (Note:
Some retard chambers may be
equipped with a strainer built in). For
minimum maintenance and inspection
requirements, refer to the National Fire
Protection Association's pamphlet that
describes care and maintenance of
sprinkler systems. In addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that must be followed. Before proceeding with disassembly of the water motor alarm, notify
the Authority Having Jurisdiction and occupants of the area covered by the system affected. Take all appropriate precautions. The water motor alarm will be
disabled during disassembly.
A. Water Motor Disassembly
(See Figure 1.)
1. Isolate the water motor alarm by

closing the alarm line valve in the
trim of the waterflow detecting device. (Refer to appropriate technical data for the system used).
2. Remove pipe plug (No. 5).
3. Remove all round head machine
screws (No. 1) from the water motor cover.
4. Separate the cover (No. 2) and the
gasket (No. 6) from the housing
(No. 3).
5. Remove the impeller (No. 7).
6. Inspect and, if necessary, carefully clean the nozzle (No. 4) with
a wire or pipe cleaner brush.
7. Flush the nozzle way and drain
line with water or compressed air.
B. Water Motor Re-Assembly
1. Re-install the pipe plug (No. 5).
2. Re-install the impeller (No. 7).
3. Replace cover gasket (No. 6) and
attach cover (No. 2) by using
round head machine screws (No.
1).
4. Open the alarm line valve.
5. Test the water motor alarm.
6. When test is complete and water
motor alarm operation is satisfactory, place the alarm line valve in
the proper alarm position. Reset
and return the affected systems
to service.
October 28, 2004
711 d
TECHNICAL DATA
Figure 2
Viking Model F-2 and G-2 Water Motor Alarm Assembly

WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Figure 3
Water Motor Accessories

Form No. F_082789
October 28, 2004
38 a
MODEL C-1
RETARD CHAMBER
TECHNICAL DATA
Capacity Approximate:
1 Gallon (4 Liters).
Shipping Weight 22 Lbs. (10 kg.)
Materials:
Body: Ductile Iron 65-45-12.
Bushings: Cast Iron UNS-F12102
Viking black E-coat Spec SPF02 W01
1. PRODUCT NAME
Viking Model C-1 Retard Chamber
Part Number 05904B
Available since 1986.
2. MANUFACTURER
Telephone:
(616) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(616) 945-9599
The Viking Model C-1 Retard Chamber
is a surge tank used with Viking Alarm
Check Valves to reduce the possibility of
false alarms due to changes in the water
supply pressure.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
UL Listed Guide VPLX
C-UL (Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in Canada)
FM Approved
Approved by LPC
Approved by Verband der Sachversicherer
Approved by the New York City Board of
Standards and Appeals under Calendar Number 219-76-SA
Water Working Pressure:
UL: Rated to 250 PSI (1 724 kPa)
CUL: Rated to 250 PSI (1 724 kPa)
LPC: Rated to 175 PSI (1 207 kPa)
FM: Rated to 175 PSI (1 207 kPa)
Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 PSI
(3 447 kPa).
" (15mm) NPT inlet and 3/4" (20mm)
NPT outlet.
a. Ductile iron body

b. Self draining
Required Accessories:
1. 1/8 inch (3,2 mm) Drain Restriction
Part Number 01611A (included in Viking Alarm Check Valve Trim Sets
designed for use with variable pressure water supplies).
Optional Accessories:
1. Circuit closer vent assembly
(Required when an electric Alarm
Pressure Switch is installed without a Water Motor Alarm.)
P/N 01973A is for use with standard*
water based systems
P/N 08220 for use on pre-mixed
Foam Systems**
* Standard Trim sets consist of galvanized nipples and fittings.
** Trim sets for use on pre-mixed Foam Systems
consist of black steel nipples and cast iron or
ductile iron fittings.
2. Alarm Devices: A Water Motor

Alarm and/or electric Alarm Pressure Switch, with approved connected alarms, are required for a
complete system.
6. OPERATION
When the clapper of the Alarm Check
Valve opens, water flows through the restricted alarm supply piping into the inlet
of the Retard Chamber. The Retard
Chamber begins to fill while simultaneously draining through the 1/8 inch
(3,2mm) Drain Restriction.
During a sustained flow of water, the Retard Chamber fills faster than water can
drain through the Drain Restriction.
Pressurized water fills the Retard Chamber and pressurizes the Water Motor
Alarm and/or Alarm Pressure Switch.
Pressure surges insufficient to overcome the volume and drain capacity of
the Retard Chamber will not activate an
alarm. Two Retard Chambers may be installed in series to combat false alarms
from systems subject to excessive pressure surges.
Note: Units of measure in parentheses may be approximations.

Form No. F_092188

8. GUARANTEES
current list price schedule or contact Viking directly.
9. INSTALLATION
1. The Retard Chamber and associated
trim must be installed as shown on
the Viking Alarm Check Valve Trim
Sheets. The trim size and arrangement shown on Viking Trim Charts is
required for proper operation.
2. When used on pre-mixed Foam Systems, trim piping must be of black
steel pipe with cast iron or ductile iron
fittings only.
3. The 1/8 inch Drain Restriction must
be installed in the Retard Chamber
drain piping.
The alarm supply trim piping must be
restricted as shown on Viking Alarm
Check Valve Trim Charts. Model J-1
Alarm Check Valve trim requires a
7/32" Restricted Orifice (Part No.
06980A). The restriction for previous
H-2 Alarm Check Valve Trim is included in the Three Way Alarm Test
Shut-off Valve.
4. The Retard Chamber must drain automatically to a non-pressurized
drain.
5. Verify that all system components are
rated for the water working pressure
of the system.
10. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

maintaining the fire protection system
and devices in proper operating condition. The Viking Model C-1 Retard
Chamber and associated piping must
be kept free of foreign matter, freezing
conditions, and physical damage that
could impair its operation. The frequency of inspections may vary due to
contaminated or corrosive water supplies, corrosive atmospheres, or activity
around the device. Alarm devices and
Replaces page 38 a-b, dated October 10, 1996

(Product is now coated with black E-coat.).
38 b
October 28, 2004
TECHNICAL DATA
other connected equipment may require

more frequent inspections. Refer to applicable codes, system description, and
Technical Data for the equipment used.
For minimum maintenance and inspection requirements, refer to the National
Fire Protection Association's pamphlet
that describes care and maintenance of
sprinkler systems. In addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that must be followed.
involving placing a control valve or alarm
system out of service may eliminate the
fire protection capabilities of that system. Prior to proceeding, notify all Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Consideration should be given to employment of
a fire patrol in the affected areas.
PERIODIC INSPECTION:
After installation and prior to each
Waterflow Alarm Test:
1. Verify that the Alarm Check Valve and
Retard Chamber are trimmed exactly
as shown on Viking Trim Sheets with
no deviations. The trim size and arrangement is required for proper operation. When used on pre-mixed
Foam Systems, trim piping must be
of black steel pipe with cast iron or
ductile iron fittings.
2. The Retard Chamber must drain automatically to a non-pressurized drain.
Inspect and clean the 1/8 inch (3,2
mm) Drain Restriction at least annually.
3. For the Retard Chamber to properly
drain, it must be vented. This is normally accomplished through the Water Motor Alarm connection. However, when the line to the Water Motor is trapped or an electric Alarm
Pressure Switch is used without the
Water Motor Alarm, Circuit Closer
Vent Trim must be installed and kept
clean to allow the Retard Chamber to
drain.
After each operation and Waterflow
Alarm Test:
1. Verify that the Retard Chamber and
alarm line piping has drained completely and associated alarm equipment has properly reset.
2. Refer to Technical Data for the Water
Motor Alarm, Alarm Pressure Switch,
and other associated equipment for
additional testing and maintenance
requirements.
MODEL C-1
RETARD CHAMBER
NOTES
1. The Viking Model C-1 Retard Chamber is required for Variable Pressure trim. Install the Retard
Chamber as shown on appropriate Viking Trim Charts for the system used.
2. Circuit Closer Vent Trim must be galvanized steel unless other materials are specified in the
Technical Data for the system used.
When used on foam systems, trim piping must be of black steel pipe with cast iron or ductile
iron fittings unless other materials are specified in the Technical Data for the system used.
3. Connect alarm line piping to the 3/4" (20 mm) outlet of the Retard Chamber. When using a Water Motor Alarm, a strainer is required. When using an electric Alarm Pressure Switch only, or
when the alarm line piping is trapped, Circuit Closer Vent Trim is required--see Figure B.
4. Items marked with * are included in the Viking Circuit Closer Vent Trim sets.
5. Dimensions in parentheses are millimeter.
Figure A.
Model C-1 Retard Chamber
Section View
Replaces page 38 a-b, dated October 10, 1996

(Product is now coated with black E-coat.).
Figure B.
Circuit Closer Vent Trim
Form No. F_092188
Deluge Water Fire

Protection System
Deluge 220 a
October 18, 2000
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
TECHNICAL DATA
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)

Maximum 250 PSI Water Working Pressure
1. PRODUCT NAME
Viking Model E-1 Deluge Valve
3" (80 mm) Available since 1985
Table 1
Size
Valve
Inlet
Type
Outlet Type Friction Loss**
Cv
Factor
Shipping
Weight
Part
No.
3" (80 mm)
Flange*
Groove
29 ft. (8,8m)
187
66 lbs (30 kg)
05835C
3" (80 mm)
Flange*
Flange*
29 ft. (8,8m)
187
73 lbs (33 kg)
05912C
2. MANUFACTURER
4" (100 mm)
Flange*
Groove
35 ft. (10,7m)
470
112 lbs (51 kg)
05839C

Telephone:
(616) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax Number:
(616) 945-9599
4" (100 mm)
Flange*
Flange*
35 ft. (10,7m)
470
123 lbs (56 kg)
05909C
6" (150 mm)
Flange*
Groove
33 ft. (10,1m)
1088
236 lbs (107 kg)
05456C
6" (150 mm)

Flange*
Flange*
33 ft. (10,1m)
1088
251 lbs (114 kg)
05906C
*Viking Model E-1 Deluge Valves are available for use outside North America with flanges drilled according to
European PN10 specifications or Table 3 specifications. Contact manufacturer for availability.
**Expressed in equivalent length of schedule 40 pipe based on Hazen & Williams formula. C = 120.
Connections: Flanged inlet with flanged

outlet or flanged inlet with grooved
outlet--See Table 1
Factory tested to 500 psi (3 447 kPa)
Valve differential over 2:1 (priming
chamber to inlet chamber)
Priming chamber supply restriction (required): 0.0625" (1,6 mm)
Color of Valve: Painted red for identification purposes
Friction loss: Refer to Table 1
The Viking Model E-1 Deluge Valve is a
quick-opening, differential diaphragm,
flood valve with one moving part.
The deluge valve is used to control water flow in deluge and preaction sprinkler
systems. The valve is held closed by
system water pressure trapped in the
priming chamber, keeping the outlet
chamber and system piping dry. In fire
conditions, when the releasing system
operates, pressure is released from the
priming chamber. The deluge valve
clapper opens to allow water to flow into
the system piping.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Approvals:
90 Degree Pattern (inlet to outlet)
For 250 PSI (1 724 kPa) WWP
U.L. Listed
Guide No. VLFT
C-UL Listed
FM Approved
Consult current FM Approval Guide
For 175 PSI (1 207 kPa) WWP
Approved by the New York City Board
of Standards and Appeals
Calendar Number 219-76-SA
ABS, American Bureau of Shipping
LPCB
Systems with water working pressures above 175 PSI (1 207 kPa)
may require extra-heavy pattern
fittings. Viking Model E-1 Deluge
Valve flanges are Ductile Iron
ANSI B16.42 Class 150 with a maximum water working pressure of
250 PSI. ANSI B16.42 Class 150
flanges are NOT compatible with
ANSI Class 250 or Class 300
flanges. To mate the Model E-1 Deluge Valve with ANSI Class 250 or
Class 300 flanges, use the
grooved-outlet style valve, installed with listed groove/flange
adapters of the appropriate pressure rating. For piping with
grooved
connections,
the
grooved-outlet style valve may be
installed with listed grooved couplings of the appropriate pressure
rating.
Material Standards:
Refer to Materials Chart (page 220 f)
Ordering Information:
Part Numbers: Refer to Table 1
Shipping Weight: Refer to Table 1
5. FEATURES
a. Field replaceable Diaphragm and
Seat Rubbers.
b. Designed for installation in any position.
c. Designed to be reset without opening
the valve.
Note: Units of measure in parentheses may be approximations.
Form No. F_053096
d. Compatible with hydraulic, pneumatic, and/or electric release systems.
5a. Accessories:
1. A Conventional or Easy Trim package for use with the Model E-1 Deluge Valve. The trim package includes the VALVE ACCESSORY
PACKAGE and the fittings and nipples shown on the Viking Deluge
Valve Conventional or Easy Trim
Chart for the valve used.
Trim Charts are provided in trim
packages and the Viking Engineering and Design Data book.
For optional factory assembled
modular trim packages, refer to the
Viking list price schedule or contact
the manufacturer.
2. A Deluge VALVE ACCESSORY
PACKAGE includes required trim
components. This package is
needed when Viking Trim Packages
are not used.
3. Auxiliary components are required for
specific valve functions. For complete operating trim requirements refer to system data for the system
used. System data is provided in the
Viking Engineering and Design Data
book.
Note: For part numbers of accessories,
refer to Viking list price schedule.
6. OPERATION (Refer to Figure 2)
The Viking Model E-1 Deluge Valve has
an inlet chamber, an outlet chamber,
and a priming chamber. The inlet chamber and outlet chamber are separated
from the priming chamber by the clapper
(6) and diaphragm (2).
In the set condition:
System pressure is supplied to the priming chamber through a restricted priming line (trim) equipped with a check
valve. System water supply pressure
trapped in the priming chamber holds
the clapper (6) on seat (9) due to area
differential design. Clapper (6) sepa-
Replaces page 220 a-g, dated April 24, 2000. (Corrected dimensions on trim drawings on page 220g.)
October 18, 2000
Deluge 220 b
TECHNICAL DATA
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)
rates the inlet chamber from the outlet

chamber, keeping the outlet chamber
and system piping dry.
In fire conditions:
When the release system operates,
pressure is released from the priming
chamber faster than it is supplied
through the restricted priming line. Water supply pressure in the inlet chamber,
forces the clapper (6) off from seat (9),
allowing water to flow through the outlet
and into the system and alarm devices.
For Deluge Valves equipped with
Conventional Trim:
When the Deluge Valve operates, the
sensing end of the PORV is pressurized, causing the PORV to operate.
When the PORV operates, it continually
vents the priming chamber to prevent
the deluge valve from resetting even if
the open releasing devices close. The
Deluge Valve can only be reset after the
system is taken out of service, and the
outlet chamber of the deluge valve and
associated trim piping is depressurized
and drained.
For Deluge Valves equipped with
Easy Trim:
When the Deluge Valve operates, the
sensing end of the PSOV is pressurized,
causing the PSOV to close. When the
PSOV closes, it shuts off the flow of
priming water pressure to the priming
chamber, preventing the Deluge Valve
from resetting even if the open releasing
devices close. The Deluge Valve can
only be reset after the system is taken
out of service, and the outlet chamber of
the Deluge Valve and associated trim
piping is depressurized and drained.

The Viking deluge valve and accessories are available through a network of
domestic, Canadian, and international
distributors.
For proper operation and approval, the
valve must be trimmed in accordance
with the current Viking Trim Chart for the
valve used. Where difficulty in performance is experienced, verify that the
valve is trimmed properly. Contact Viking or Vikings authorized representative before any field adjustments are
made.
See the Yellow Pages of the telephone
directory for a local distributor (listed under Sprinklers-Automatic- Fire) or contact The Viking Corporation.
For electric, pneumatic, electric/pneumatic, pneumatic/pneumatic and

electric/pneu-lectric release, see the proper release module trim.
8. GUARANTEES
9. INSTALLATION
(Refer to Figure 1 for identification of
trim components).
9-A. General Instruction
1. Viking 3" (80 mm), 4" (100 m), and 6"
(150 mm) Deluge Valves may be installed in any position.
a. Minor modification to trim may be
required to facilitate drainage from
the outlet chamber of the deluge
valve (consult manufacturer).
b. Certain trim devices may require
the valve to be installed vertically.
(Refer to system data for the system used.)

2. The valve must be installed in an area
not subject to freezing temperatures
or physical damage.
When Valve Trim is used, to

maintain listings and approvals,
trim must be installed according
to Viking Model E Deluge Valve
Conventional or Easy Trim
Charts specifically labeled Maximum 250 PSI Water Working
Pressure. Refer to appropriate
technical data page in the Viking
Engineering and Design Data
Book.
Deluge 220 c
October 18, 2000
TECHNICAL DATA
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)
3. The valve must be trimmed according

to current Viking Trim Charts and appropriate instructions for the system
used. Trim Charts are printed in the
book, and are provided with trim
packages.
a. Remove all plastic thread protectors from the openings of the deluge valve.
b. Apply a small amount of pipe-joint
compound or tape to the external
threads of all pipe connections required. Take care not to allow any
compound, tape, or other foreign
matter inside any of the nipples or
openings of the valve or trim components.
c. Viking Model E Deluge Valve conventional or Easy Trim Charts are
provided with Trim Packages and
in the Viking Engineering and Design Data book.
d. Verify that all system components
are rated for the water working
pressure of the system.
Hydrostatic Test:
The Model E-1 Deluge Valve is manufactured and listed for use at a maximum Water Working Pressure of
250 PSI (1 724 kPa). The valve is factory tested at 500 PSI (3 447 kPa).
Model E-1 Deluge Valves may be hydrostatically tested at 300 PSI (2 069
kPa) and/or 50 PSI (345 kPa) above
the normal Water Working Pressure,
for limited periods of time (two hours)
for the purpose of acceptance by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. If air
testing is required, do not exceed 40
PSI (276 kPa) air pressure.
Note: Never conduct the Hydrostatic
Test against the Pressure Operated
Relief Valve. (P.O.R.V.) Temporarily
remove the P.O.R.V. from the trim
and plug trim openings while conducting the Hydrostatic Test.
Trim Note: (Refer also to System Data
and/or Trim Chart)
Discharge piping from the auxiliary drain

valve, the flow test valve, and all system
drains should be kept separate.
DO NOT connect the outlet of the drip
check to any other drain.
Exception: Viking TotalPac Systems
are manufactured with a specific arrangement of interconnected drain
piping tested at the factory.
4. The priming line must be connected
upstream of the system water supply
main control valve or to a constant
source of water at a pressure equal to
the system water supply.
5. After the deluge valve is set, operation of the deluge valve requires the
release of priming water from the
priming chamber. This may be by automatic or manual operation of the release system. Viking deluge valves
are compatible with hydraulic, pneumatic, and electric release systems.
For specific trim arrangements, refer
to Trim Charts and System Data describing the system being in stalled.
Trim Charts are printed in the Viking
Engineering and Design Data book
and are provided with trim packages.
System Data sheets are printed in the
book.
a. Hydraulic Release Systems:
See Graphs A through C (pages
220 h-i) for the maximum allowable elevation of hydraulic release piping above the deluge
Valve. If the maximum height of
hydraulic release piping exceeds
the limit shown in Graph A, B, or C
for the valve used, use a
pneumatic or electric release system.
b. Pneumatic Release Systems:
A Viking Pneumatic Actuator is required between the release system connection provided on deluge valve trim and pneumatic release system piping.
c. Electric Release:
Solenoid Valves, System Control
Panels, and Electrical Detectors
must be compatible. Consult appropriate listing and/or approval
guides.
Note: For operation at water
pressures in excess of 175 PSI,
a 250 PSI Rated Solenoid Valve
must be used. Refer to appropriate Viking Technical Data
Page for type of system used.
Caution: Operation of Viking Deluge
Valves by pressurizing the priming
chamber with air pressure or any
other pressurized gas is not recommended or approved.
9-B. Placing the Valve in Service
(Refer to Figure 1 and/or appropriate
Trim Charts and System Data for the
system used.)
For deluge valves equipped with Conventional Deluge Valve Trim follow
steps 1 through 10 (and 11 & 12 if applicable) below.
1. Verify:
a. The system Main Water Supply
Control Valve (D.1) is closed and
the Deluge Valve is trimmed ac-
cording to current Viking Trim

Charts and schematic drawings
for the system used.
b. The system has been properly
drained.
c. Auxiliary Drain (B.6) is open.
d. The Emergency Release (B.11) is
closed.
e. The system water supply piping is
pressurized up to the closed Main
Water Supply Control Valve (D.1)
and the priming line is pressurized
up to the closed Priming Valve
(B.1).
2. For Systems equipped with:
a. Hydraulic Release Systems:
a-1. Verify that all releasing devices are set and that any Inspectors Test Valve and/or
auxiliary drain valves are
closed.
a-2. Open Priming Valve (B.1).
Allow the hydraulic release
system to fill. When priming
pressure gauge (B.12) indicates that the release piping
and priming chamber pressure is equal to system supply pressure, proceed to Step
3.
a-3. Proceed to step 3.
b. Pneumatic Release Systems:
b-1. Set the release system.
b-2. Open Priming Valve (B.1).
b-3. Proceed to step 3.
c. Electric Release Systems:
c-1. Open Priming Valve (B.1).
c-2. Set the electric release system.
c-3. Proceed to step 3.
3. Open Flow Test Valve (B.15).
4. Partially open Main Water Supply
Control Valve (D.1).
5. When full flow develops from the Flow
Test Valve (B.15), close the Flow
Test Valve.
a. Verify that there is no flow from the
open Auxiliary Drain (B.6).
6. Close Auxiliary Drain (B.6).
7. Fully open and secure the Main Water
Supply Control Valve (D.1).
8. Verify that the Alarm Shut-off Valve
(B.9) is open and that all other valves
are in their normal** operating position.
9. Depress the plunger of Drip Check
(B.7). No water should flow from the
Drip Check when the plunger is
pushed.
10. Check for and repair all leaks.
11. On new installations, those systems
that have been placed out of service
or where new equipment has been
installed, trip test the system to verify
October 18, 2000
Deluge 220 d
TECHNICAL DATA
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)
that all equipment functions properly.

Refer to MAINTENANCE paragraph
10-B-3: ANNUAL maintenance instructions.
Caution! Performing a trip test results in
operation of the Deluge Valve. Water will
flow into the sprinkler piping. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage.
12. After completing a trip test, perform

SEMI-ANNUAL maintenance.
** For normal operating position, refer to Figure 2
(page 220 b) and/or Trim Charts and System
Data for the system used.
9-C. Valve Removed From Service

Note: When a valve has been removed
from service and is subject to freezing
or will be out of service for an extended period of time, all water must
be removed from the priming chamber, trim piping, water supply piping,
and other trapped areas.
10. INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

(Refer to Figure 2, page 220 b, for identification of trim components).
10-A. Inspection
It is imperative that the system be inspected and tested on a regular basis.
The frequency of the inspections may
vary due to contaminated water supplies, corrosive water supplies, or corrosive atmospheres. Also, the alarm devices, detection systems, or other connected trim may require a more frequent
schedule. For minimum maintenance
and inspection requirements, refer to
the National Fire Protection Association's pamphlet that describes care and
maintenance of sprinkler systems. In
addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance,
testing, and inspection requirements
that must be followed. The following recommendations are minimum requirements. (For additional information, refer
to Viking Trim Charts and System Data
describing systems with the release system used.)
Weekly:
Weekly visual inspection of the Viking
Deluge Valve is recommended.
1. Verify that the Main Water Supply
Control Valve (D.1) is open and that
all other valves are in their normal**
operating position and appropriately
secured.
2. Check for signs of mechanical damage, leakage, and/or corrosive activity. If detected, perform maintenance
as required. If necessary, replace the
device.
3. Verify that the valve and trim are adequately heated and protected from
freezing and physical damage.
10-B. Tests
Quarterly:
Quarterly testing of water flow alarms
and performance of a Main Drain Test is
recommended and may be required by
10-B-1: Water Flow Alarm Test
1. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction and those in the area affected by
the test.
2. To test the local electric alarm (if provided) and/or mechanical water motor alarm (if provided), OPEN the
alarm test valve (B.5) in the Deluge
Valve trim.
a. Electric alarm pressure switches
(if provided) should activate.
b. Electric local alarms should be audible.
c. The local water motor gong should
be audible.
d. If equipped with remote station
alarm signaling devices, verify
that alarm signals were received.
3. When testing is complete, CLOSE the
alarm test valve (B.5).
Verify:
a. All local alarms stop sounding and
alarm panels (if provided) reset.
b. All remote station alarms reset.
c. Supply piping to water motor alarm
properly drains.
4. Verify that the alarm shut-off valve
(B.9) is OPEN, and the alarm test
valve (B.5) is CLOSED.
5. Verify that the outlet chamber is free
of water. No water should flow from
the drip check when the plunger is
pushed.
6. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction and those in the affected area
that testing is complete.
10-B-2: Main Drain Test
the test.
2. Record pressure reading from the water supply pressure gauge (B.13).
3. Verify that the outlet chamber of the
deluge valve is free of water. No water should flow from the drip check
(B.7) when the plunger is pushed.
4. Fully OPEN the Flow Test Valve
(B.15).
5. When a full flow is developed from the
Flow Test Valve (B.15), record the residual pressure from the water supply
pressure gauge (B.13).
6. When the test is complete, SLOWLY

CLOSE the Flow Test Valve.
7. Compare test results with previous
flow information. If deterioration of
the water supply is detected, take appropriate steps to restore adequate
water supply.
8. Verify:
a. Normal water supply pressure has
been restored to the inlet chamber, the priming chamber, and the
release system. The pressure on
the priming chamber water pressure gauge should equal the system water supply pressure.
b. All alarm devices and valves are
secured in normal** operating position.
9. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction that the test is complete. Record
10-B-3: Annual
Annual Trip Tests are recommended.
Caution! Performing this test results in
operation of the deluge valve. Water will
flow into the sprinkler piping and from any
open sprinklers and/or nozzles. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage.
the test.
2. Fully open the Flow Test Valve (B.15)
to flush away any accumulation of foreign material.
3. Close the Flow Test Valve (B.15).
4. Trip the system by operating the release system. Allow a full flow to pass
through the deluge valve.
a. Water flow alarms should operate.
5. When test is complete:
a. Close the Main Water Supply Control Valve (D.1).
b. Close the Priming Valve (B.1).
c. Open the Auxiliary Drain Valve
(B.6).
d. Open all system main drains and
auxiliary drains. Allow the system
to drain completely.
6. Perform SEMI-ANNUAL maintenance. Refer to paragraph 11-B
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
7. Place the system in service. Refer to
Item 9-B, INSTALLATION: PLACING
THE VALVE IN SERVICE.
a. Note: Deluge valves supplied by
brackish water, salt water, foam,
foam/water solution, or any other
corrosive water supply should be
Deluge 220 e
October 18, 2000
TECHNICAL DATA
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)
flushed with good quality fresh water before being returned to service.
8. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction that the test is complete. Record
11. MAINTENANCE
(Refer to Figure 2 on page 220 b for
identification of trim components).
and devices in proper operating condition. The deluge valve must be kept from
freezing conditions and physical damage that could impair its operation.
Where difficulty in performance is experienced, the valve manufacturer or his
authorized representative shall be contacted if any field adjustment is to be
made.
that involves placing a control valve or
detection system out of service may
eliminate the fire protection capabilities
of that system. Prior to proceeding, notify all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
Consideration should be given to employment of a fire patrol in the affected
areas.
11-A. After Each Operation:
1. Sprinkler systems that have been
subjected to a fire must be returned to
service as soon as possible. The entire system must be inspected for
damage, and repaired or replaced as
necessary.
2. Deluge valves and trim that have
been subjected to brackish water,
salt water, foam, foam/water solution,
or any other corrosive water supply
should be flushed with good quality
fresh water before being returned to
service.
3. Perform SEMI-ANNUAL maintenance after every operation.

11-B. Semi-Annual Maintenance:
1. Remove the system from service.
(Refer to Deluge or Preaction System
Data that describes systems with the
release system used for additional information.)
a. Close the Main Water Supply Control Valve (D.1) and Priming Valve
(B.1).
b. Open the Auxiliary Drain Valve
(B.6).
c. Relieve pressure in the priming
chamber by opening the Emergency Release Valve (B.11).
2. Inspect all trim for signs of corrosion
and/or blockage. Clean and/or replace as required.
3. Clean and/or replace all strainer
screens (including B.2).
4. Refer to Item 9-B, INSTALLATION:
PLACING THE VALVE IN SERVICE.
11-C. Every Fifth Year
1. Internal inspection of deluge valves is
recommended every five years unless inspections and tests indicate
more frequent internal inspections
are required. Refer to DISASSEMBLY instructions provided below.
2. Internal inspection of strainers and restricted orifices is recommended every five years unless inspections and
tests indicate more frequent internal
inspections are required.
3. Record and provide notification of inspection results as required by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
11-D. Valve Disassembly
1. Remove the valve from service.
a. Close the Main Water Supply Control Valve (D.1) and Priming Valve
(B.1).
b. Open the Auxiliary Drain Valve
(B.6).
c. Release the pressure in the priming chamber by opening the

Emergency
Release
Valve
(B.11).
For 3", 4", or 6"
Deluge Valve Disassembly
(Refer to Figure 2 on page 220 f)
1. Remove the valve from service (see
the release system description and
Technical Data for additional information). Close the main control
valve, open the main drain valve. Release the pressure in the priming
chamber by opening the Emergency
Release Valve.
2. Remove trim as required to allow removal of cover (3).
3. Remove screws (7).
4. Lift cover (3) from body (1).
5. Remove clapper assembly (Nos. 2, 4,
5, 6, 8, and 10) by lifting it from the
body (1).
6. Inspect seat (9). If replacement is
necessary, do not attempt to separate seat from body (1). It is not removable.
7. To replace the diaphragm rubber (2),
remove the circle of screws (5). Remove the clamp ring (4) and remove
the diaphragm rubber (2).
8. To replace the seat rubber assembly
(8), clapper assembly (2, 4, 5, 6, 8,
and 10) must be removed from the
valve. Remove the circle of screws
(10). Seat rubber assembly (8) can
be removed.
NOTE: Prior to installing a new clapper
rubber (2) or seat rubber assembly (8),
make certain that all surfaces are clean
and free of foreign matter. The plated
seat (9) must be smooth and free of
nicks, burrs, or indentations.
C. Valve Reassembly
1. Prior to reassembly flush the valve of
all foreign matter.
2. To reassemble, reverse disassembly
procedure.
October 18, 2000
Deluge 220 f
MODEL E-1
DELUGE VALVE
TECHNICAL DATA
3" (80 mm), 4" (100 mm), 6" (150 mm)

Figure 2
3", 4", AND 6" MODEL E-1 DELUGE VALVE MATERIALS CHART AND REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
NO.
3" PART 4" PART 6" PART

NO.
NO.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL
Body
Ductile Iron 60-40-18
2
02492C 02377B
01974C Diaphragm Rubber
EPDM
3
07983
07984
07985 Cover
Ductile Iron 60-40-18
4
*
*
*
Clamp Ring
Bronze UNS-C84400
1
4
6
Screw
Stainless Steel
5
*
*
Clapper
6
*
Ductile Iron 65-45-12 Teflon Coated
2
5
7
Screw
Steel
7
8
02497B 02382B
02176B Seat Rubber Assembly EPDM/Stainless Steel UNS-S30400
9
Seat
Bronze UNS-C84400
1
4
8
Screw
Stainless Steel
10
11
Plug, " NPT

Steel
Note: -- Indicates replacement part not available.
* Indicates part is available in Sub-Assembly only--see Sub-Assembly list.
SUB-ASSEMBLY LIST
2, 4, 5, 6,
02491B 02376B
05703B Clapper Assembly
8, and 10
1
2
3
4
Phillips Drive Round Head Screw , No. 10-24 x " (12,7 mm) Lg.
Hex Head Cap Screw , "-13 x 1-1/4" (31,8 mm) Lg.
Phillips Drive Round Head Screw , No. 10-24 x 3/8" (9,5 mm) Lg.
Hex Head Cap Screw , 5/16"-18 x " (12,7 mm) Lg.
6
7
8
Table 3
NUMBER
REQUIRED
3"
4"
6"
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
8
12
1
1
1
10
12
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
8
12
1
1
1
Hex Head Cap Screw , "-13 x 1-1/2" (38,1 mm) Lg.

Hex Head Cap Screw , 3/8"-16 x 5/8" (15,9 mm) Lg.
Hex Head Cap Screw , 5/8"-11 x 1-3/4" (44,5 mm) Lg.
Hex Head Cap Screw , 3/8"-16 x " (12,7 mm) Lg.
Trim 225 a
February 20, 1998
3", 4" & 6" (80, 100, & 150 mm)

MODEL E DELUGE VALVE
CONVENTIONAL TRIM CHART
TECHNICAL DATA
Maximum 250 PSI Water Working

This Trim Chart
is for use with
the following Viking Trim Sets
Size Standard*
Valve Trim P/N
3"
4"
6"
*
Order Deluge Valve

separately
10204
10205
10206
Foam System**
Trim P/N
Brass***
Trim P/N
10242
10243
10244
10252
10253
10254
Standard Trim sets for Model E Deluge Valves

consist of galvanized nipples and fittings.
**
Trim sets for Model E Deluge Valves used on premixed Foam Systems consist of black steel nipples
and cast iron or malleable iron fittings.
See Trim Chart Notes.
***
Refer to Technical Data describing the Halar Coated

Deluge Valve and the Viking Foam System Engineering Design Data book for applications where brass
trim is recommended.
Note:
Nipple lengths for brass trim may vary from those
shown on this Trim Chart. For nipple lengths provided
with brass trim, refer to charts packed with brass trim.
For Detailed Trim Chart

Open to
Page 225 b
NOTES: For Use with Trim Chart on Page 225 b

(open fold-out)
General Notes:
Valve must be trimmed as shown. Any deviation from trim size or arrangement may affect the proper operation of the valve.
All pipe, 3/4" (20 mm) and smaller, shall be galvanized steel except when other materials are specified in the Technical Data for the
Halar Coated Deluge Valve or when other materials are specified in the Viking Foam System Engineering and Design Data book.
When Model E Deluge Valves are used on pre-mixed Foam Systems, trim piping must be of black steel pipe with cast iron or malleable
iron fittings unless otherwise specified in the Technical Data for the Halar Coated Deluge Valve or the Viking Foam System Engineering
and Design Data book.
Dimensions in parentheses are millimeter.
Note 1: Do not plug the 1/4" (8 mm) outlet from the P.O.R.V. Pipe the 1/4" (8 mm) outlet to open drain. When piped as shown, the outlet
discharges to drain cup. Do not use soft tubing.
Note 2: 1/2" (15 mm) NPT plugged outlet provided for connecting certain optional components and associated trim.
Note 3: Release System connection. Viking Deluge and Flow Control Valves are compatible with hydraulic, pneumatic, and electric release
systems. A Pneumatic Actuator is required on all Viking Deluge Valves and Flow Control Valves equipped with Pneumatic Release
Systems.
Note 4: Alarm Connections: Connect alarm line piping to 3/4" (20 mm) NPT outlet. When using a Water Motor Alarm, a strainer is required.
1/2" (15 mm) NPT outlet is for electric Alarm Pressure Switch.
Note 5: Optional non-interuptable connection for Alarm Pressure Switch to activate electric alarm panel. Note: After the Deluge Valve trips, this
location cannot be shut off. Alarms may operate until the outlet chamber of the deluge valve is de-pressurized below the set point of
the Alarm Pressure Switch.
Note 6: Viking Drain Check Valve is manufactured with a 0.067 " (1,7 mm) orifice to allow alarm line to drain. Do not substitute. Check label for
proper orientation.
Form No. 012194
Replaces Page 225 a-c dated June 27, 1996

(Revised trim for 250 PSI WWP)
Trim 225 b
February 20, 1998
TECHNICAL DATA
3", 4" & 6" (80, 100, & 150 mm)

MODEL E DELUGE VALVE
CONVENTIONAL TRIM CHART
Maximum 250 PSI Water Working
Refer to page 225 a

for General Notes
and
Notes 1 through 6
Order Deluge Valve

separately
Form No. 012194
Replaces Page 225 a-c dated June 27, 1996

(Revised trim for 250 PSI WWP)
711 a
October 28, 2004
TECHNICAL DATA
1. PRODUCT NAME
VIKING WATER MOTOR ALARMS

Model F-2, Viking Part No. 07862
Model G-2, Viking Part No. 07868
2. MANUFACTURER

Telephone:
(269) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(269) 945-9599
The Viking water motor alarms are mechanical devices actuated by a flow of
water. They are designed to sound a
continuous alarm while a sprinkler system operates. An alarm is a required
component of every sprinkler system
having more than 20 sprinklers.
4. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Model F-2:
UL Listed, Guide No. VPLX, Control
No. 958A
C-UL (Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Canada)
FM Approved
L.P.C. Approved
Approved by the New York City
Board of Standards and Appeals,
Calendar No. 219-76-SA
Model G-2:
Verband der Sachversicherer
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Shipping Weight:
Model F-2: 11 lbs. (5,0 kg)
Model G-2: 13 lbs. (5,9 kg)
Water working pressure:
Rated to 175 PSI (1 207 kPa) water
working pressure
Materials: (See parts list)
Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400
Brass, UNS C36000
Form No. F_082789
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Aluminum, UNS-A91100
Cast Iron, ASTM A126, Class B
Galvanized Steel, UNS-G10080
Plastic - Celcon
Viking E-coat Spec SPF02 W01
A. The water motor alarms are tapped

3/4" NPT on the inlet and 1" NPT
on the drain outlet.
B. The water motor alarm package includes a drive shaft 16-3/4" (425
mm) long for walls 14" (356 mm)
thick or less. A special extension
shaft is available for walls up to
30-1/4" (768 mm) thick.
C. The package also includes the required 3/4" (20 mm) NPT strainer
for installation on the alarm line.
D. Rated water working pressure of
Model F-2 is 250 PSI (1 724 kPa).
Accessories: (order separately)
1. Extension Mounting Cup: Viking Part

Number 05957B.
Material: 14-Gauge Cold Rolled
Steel, UNS-G10080, coated with
black E-coat.
The extension mounting cup is required when the wall thickness is less
than 3" (76,2 mm). Refer to INSTALLATION instructions. See Figure 3
on page 711 d.
2. Closure Plate: For use with Model F-2
only, Viking Part Number 05820B.
Material: 16-Gauge Galvanized
Steel, UNS-G10080.
The closure plate is required when
the Model F-2 Water Motor Alarm
gong is mounted on an irregularly
surfaced wall. It serves to prevent
birds from entering the inside of the
gong. The closure plate also serves
as a mounting plate for sheet metal
walls. Refer to INSTALLATION instructions. See Figure 3, page 711d.
3. Special Extension Shaft: Viking Part
Number 03312B
Material: Stainless Steel, UNSS30400
The extension shaft is required when
the F-2 or G-2 Water Motor Alarm is
installed on walls from 14" (356 mm)
to 30-1/4" (768 mm) thick.
7. OPERATION
which restricts the flow into a pressurized stream directed onto the impeller
(7). Force from the water stream turns
the impeller and drive shaft (10), causing
the striker arm (20) to rotate. The striker
(25) impacts against the gong (16), producing a continuous alarm. A minimum
of 5 PSI (34,47 kPa) is required at the
nozzle to cause a continuous alarm.
When properly installed, the Model F-2
Water Motor Alarm produces the required 90 decibel output and the Model
G-2 produces 100 decibels. After passing through the water motor, the water is
discharged through a 1" (25 mm) drain
outlet in the bottom of the impeller housing. The discharged water must be piped
through the wall to atmosphere or to a
suitable open drain.

When a sprinkler system is activated,

9. GUARANTEE
water flows from the alarm outlet of the
valve, through the 3/4" (20 mm) strainer
current list price schedule or contact Viand alarm line piping, into the inlet of the
king directly.
water motor. From the 1/8 inlet orifice,
the water flows through a nozzle (4),
October 28, 2004
711 b
TECHNICAL DATA
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Figure 1
Water Motor Alarm Assembly
ITEM
NO.
PART NUMBER
MODEL F-2
DESCRIPTION
MODEL G-2
MATERIAL
QTY.
REQ'D.
Round-Head Self-Tap 10-24 x 3/8"
Zinc-Plated Steel
07867
07870
Cover (Black E-coat)
Cold Rolled Steel, UNS-G10080
Housing (Black E-coat)
Cast Iron: ASTM A-126, Class B
Nozzle
Brass: UNS-C36000
12MIPLUG-G
12MIPLUG-G
" (15 mm) Pipe Plug
M.I. Galv.
1
1
02550B
02550B
Cover Gasket
Cellulose/Chloroprene
02547C
02547C
Impeller
Delrin
Bearing
Brass: Sintered Bronze
1
1
05603A
05603A
Wall Plate
Galvanized Steel: UNS-G10080
10
05604B
05604B
Drive Shaft
11
3/4" Pipe (C.O.J.) not furnished
Galvanized Steel
12
Coupling
Brass: UNS-C36000
13
02556B
02556B
Striker Arm Shaft
Celcon Glass Filled
14
Bearing
Brass: UNS-C36000
15
Gong Support
16
05821C
06508C
Gong
Aluminum: 1100-0
17
02766A
02766A
Flat Washer, 11/321 ID x 11/16" OD x 1/16"
18
05768A
06505C
Gong Label
Aluminum (F-2), Vinyl (G-2)
19
Button-Head Slotted, 5/16-18 x "
20
Striker Arm
21
Flat Washer, 11/32 ID x 11/16 OD x 1/16
22
Hex-Head Self-Tap, 5/16-18 x
Zinc-Plated Steel
23
Striker Pin
24
Striker Arm Washer
25
Striker
Canvas Phenolic
*SUB-ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE
--INDICATES REPLACEMENT PART NOT AVAILABLE.
1-8
07863
07869
Motor Assembly
Various
20,
23-25
02558B
02558B
Striker Arm Assembly
Various
Table 1
October 28, 2004
711 c
TECHNICAL DATA
10. LOCATION
Locate the water motor on an exterior

wall as close as practical to the valve being monitored for water flow. A 3/4" (20
mm) strainer (included) is required on
the alarm line as close as possible to the
alarm outlet of the valve being monitored
for water flow (or outlet of the retard
chamber, if used). The location must be
easily accessible for cleaning.
11. INSTALLATION
A. Cut a 1-7/16" (36.5 mm) minimum to

1-5/8" (41,3 mm) maximum diameter
hole in the building wall to accommodate the 3/4" (20 mm) galvanized
spacer pipe. (Note: Spacer pipe is
NOT included in Water Motor Alarm
Package). The hole through the wall
must be level or pitched slightly
downward toward the Water Motor.
B. Measure the wall thickness.
C. Cut and thread the spacer pipe to a
length equal to: The wall thickness
minus 1" (25,4 mm). If the extension
mounting cup is used, add an additional 3" (76 mm) to the spacer pipe.
D. Cut the drive shaft (10) to a length
equal to: The total wall thickness plus
2-3/4" (70 mm). If extension mounting cup is used, add an additional 3"
(76 mm).
E. File the drive shaft to provide a 3/32"
(2,4 mm) x 450 chamfer on both corners of both ends. File off all burrs
and insert the drive shaft into the hole
of the striker arm shaft.
F. Slide the spacer pipe over the shaft
and thread the end of the spacer pipe
into the gong support assembly coupling (12).
G. Slide the closure plate (if used) over
the free end of the spacer pipe, up to
the back of the gong. If desired, the
closure plate may be fastened to the
gong support by using the 9/32"
(7,14 mm) diameter hole in the gong
support. Use only a flat or round
headed fastener that will not interfere
with striker arm movement.
H. Position the support assembly on the
exterior wall surface by sliding the
free threaded end of the spacer pipe
into the hole from outside the building.
I. On the inside surface of the wall: Slide
the wall plate provided ( 9), over the
free threaded end of the spacer pipe.
(If an extension mounting cup is
used, place it over the end of the
spacer pipe with the flared end to-
ward the wall before sliding the wall

plate into position).
J. Remove the plastic thread protectors
from the threaded openings in the
body of the water motor.
K. Attach the water motor assembly by
threading the body (3) onto the free
threaded end of the spacer pipe. The
chamfered ends of the drive shaft allow it to slide into position as the water motor body is threaded onto the
spacer pipe. When the assembly is
properly tightened, the water motor
should be positioned with the 1" (25
mm) NPT drain outlet facing downward and the 3/4" (20 mm) NPT
alarm line inlet horizontal. See Figures 1 and 2.
L. Attach the gong, the flat washer, and
the gong label, (16, 17, and 18) to the
gong support installed on the exterior
surface of the wall, with the 5/16-18 x
12" (13 mm) screw (19). Note: The
flat washer must be installed between the gong and the gong support
(see 17 Figure 1).
M. With galvanized, brass, or other approved corrosion-resistant piping,
not less than 3/4" (20 mm) diameter,
connect the water motor inlet to the
alarm outlet of the waterflow detecting device. A 3/4" (20 mm) strainer
(included) is required on the alarm
line as close as possible to the alarm
outlet of the waterflow detecting device (or outlet of the retard chamber if
used). The location must be easily
accessible for cleaning.
n. The drain outlet of the impeller housing must discharge to an open drain.
Care shall be taken to keep the drain
line clean at all times.
Note: A water motor drain line that:
a. Has too many fittings, and/or
b. Has a very short length of pipe
between the 1" (25 mm) outlet
and the first elbow in the water
motor drain pipe, and/or
c. Is very long
may result in slow drainage and reduced
water motor speed. This condition can
be remedied by increasing the drain pipe
diameter, increasing the length of pipe to
the first elbow, and/or pitching the pipe
toward the discharge location.
12. MAINTENANCE
Weather-resistant materials are used in

the construction of the water motor
alarm. At regular intervals, examine and
test the water motor to ensure that the
nozzle and drain line are clean and free
of obstruction, and that the alarm func-
WATER MOTOR ALARMS
tions properly. Also, at regular intervals

and before disassembly of the water motor, clean and inspect the alarm line
strainer located at the alarm outlet of the
waterflow detecting device, or the outlet
of the retard chamber, if used. (Note:
Some retard chambers may be
equipped with a strainer built in). For
minimum maintenance and inspection
requirements, refer to the National Fire
Protection Association's pamphlet that
describes care and maintenance of
sprinkler systems. In addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that must be followed. Before proceeding with disassembly of the water motor alarm, notify
the Authority Having Jurisdiction and occupants of the area covered by the system affected. Take all appropriate precautions. The water motor alarm will be
disabled during disassembly.
A. Water Motor Disassembly
(See Figure 1.)
1. Isolate the water motor alarm by

closing the alarm line valve in the
trim of the waterflow detecting device. (Refer to appropriate technical data for the system used).
2. Remove pipe plug (No. 5).
3. Remove all round head machine
screws (No. 1) from the water motor cover.
4. Separate the cover (No. 2) and the
gasket (No. 6) from the housing
(No. 3).
5. Remove the impeller (No. 7).
6. Inspect and, if necessary, carefully clean the nozzle (No. 4) with
a wire or pipe cleaner brush.
7. Flush the nozzle way and drain
line with water or compressed air.
B. Water Motor Re-Assembly
1. Re-install the pipe plug (No. 5).
2. Re-install the impeller (No. 7).
3. Replace cover gasket (No. 6) and
attach cover (No. 2) by using
round head machine screws (No.
1).
4. Open the alarm line valve.
5. Test the water motor alarm.
6. When test is complete and water
motor alarm operation is satisfactory, place the alarm line valve in
the proper alarm position. Reset
and return the affected systems
to service.
October 28, 2004
711 d
TECHNICAL DATA
Figure 2
Viking Model F-2 and G-2 Water Motor Alarm Assembly

WATER MOTOR ALARMS
Figure 3
Water Motor Accessories

Form No. F_082789
February 1, 2001
217 c
SOLENOID VALVE
(Maximum 175 PSI (1 207 kPa)
Water Working Pressure
TECHNICAL DATA
Not for use with 250 PSI (1 724 kPa) Trim
1. PRODUCT NAME
Replacement Solenoid Valves
For Maximum 175 psi (1 207 kPa)
2. MANUFACTURED FOR:
Telephone: (616) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(616) 945-9599
The solenoid valves are two-way
type with one inlet and one outlet.
They are packless, internal pilot
operated valves suitable for use in
releasing water pressure from the
priming chamber of Viking Model E-1
and Model E-2 Deluge Valves and
Model H-1 and Model H-2 Flow
Control Valves. They have either
floating diaphragm or piston type
construction, which requires a
minimum pressure drop across the
valve to operate properly. Both
normally closed and normally open
valves are available. Although these
valves are available in several
voltages, 24 volt DC and 120 VAC
models are normally stocked. These
valves are to be used with system
control units that are listed/approved
for releasing service for water-based
fire protection systems.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
MATERIALS
Body: Brass with " (15 mm) NPT
connections
Seals and Discs: Buna-A or Ethylene
Propylene
Core Tube: 305 Stainless Steel
Core and Plugnut: 430F Stainless
Steel
Springs: 302 Stainless Steel
Form F_020101
Coil: Class F or H, Continuous Duty

Maximum Operating Pressure: 175
psi (1 207 kPa)
See Table 2 for enclosure descriptions
and
recommended
ambient
temperatures.
Manufacturer: Automatic Switch
Company (ASCO)
Straight Body Styles are ASCO
Bulletin 8210 Diaphragm Type
Valves (Red-Hat or Red-Hat II
Models)
Angle Body Styles are ASCO
Bulletin 8223 Piston Type Valves
(Red-Hat Model)
5. FEATURES AND
ACCESSORIES
A.
Available normally open or

normally closed.
B. Available in several voltages.
C. Easy to clean.
D. Required Accessories: A 50 mesh
strainer must be installed at the
priming line connection on the
inlet side of the valve. This
strainer is included as part of the
Model E-1 Deluge Valve Trim and
Model H Flow Control Valve Trim.
E. NEMA 1 through 9. (See Table 2
on page 217d.)
6. OPERATION
The solenoid valves are internal pilot
operated valves with pilot and bleed
orifices utilizing line pressure for
operation.
Normally
closed,
de-energized valves open when
energized. Power is applied to the
solenoid coil, causing the solenoid
core to lift, and opening the pilot
orifice to the outlet side of the valve.
This relieves pressure on the top
side of the diaphragm or piston and
allows the line pressure to open the
valve. When de-energized, the
solenoid core reseals the pilot orifice,
allowing the line pressure to build

above the diaphragm or piston, and
closing the valve.
Normally-open, de-energized valves
close when energized. When power
is applied to the solenoid coil, the
solenoid core seals the pilot orifice,
allowing the line pressure to build
above the diaphragm or piston,
causing the valve to close. When
de-energized, the solenoid core
opens the pilot orifice to the outlet
side of the valve. This relieves
pressure on the top side of the
diaphragm or piston and allows the
line pressure to open the valve.
Normally closed solenoid valves are
commonly used as releases for
Viking deluge and flow control
valves. Opening the solenoid valve
allows the deluge or flow control
valve to open.
NOTE: When using a normally
closed solenoid valve as a release, a
system will not operate automatically
on total loss of power. For this
reason, it is recommended and
normally required that an emergency
back-up, supervised power supply
be provided to maintain fire
protection during interruptions of the
main power system and to meet the
requirements
of
appropriate
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
When normally open solenoid valves
are used as releases for deluge or
flow control valves, they must be
energized constantly to maintain
systems in the set condition; any loss
or interruption of power to the
solenoid valve will allow the system
to trip. Normally open solenoids are
used as releases in special
applications requiring a fail-safe,
system tripped condition on total loss
of power. An example of the principal
would be Vikings Firecycle II
system. Care must be taken in
selecting the appropriate normally
open or normally closed solenoid
valve to ensure desired protection
from fire or accidental system
operation.

The solenoid valve is available
through a network of domestic and
international distributors. See the
Replaces page 217a-d dated January 17, 2000.

(Revised Form Number and updated text).
217 d
February 1, 2001
SOLENOID VALVE
TECHNICAL DATA
(Maximum 175 PSI (1 207 kPa)

Not for use with 250 PSI (1 724 kPa) Trim
Yellow Pages of the telephone

directory for a local distributor (listed
under Sprinklers-Automatic- Fire)
or contact The Viking Corporation
directly.
8. GUARANTEES
For details of warranty, refer to
Vikings current list price schedule or
contact The Viking Corporation
directly.
9. MAINTENANCE
WARNING:
The
owner
is
responsible for maintaining his fire
protection
system
in
proper
operating condition. Any system
maintenance or testing that involves
placing a control valve or detection
system out of service may eliminate
the fire protection of that system.
Prior to proceeding, notify all
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
Consideration should be given to
employment of a fire patrol in the
affected area.
WARNING: Prior to operating the
solenoid valve, be sure to close the
system control valve to avoid
unintentional operation of the deluge
valve.
A. Inspections: It is imperative that
the system be inspected and
tested on a regular basis. The
frequency of the inspections may
vary due to contaminated water
supplies, corrosive water supplies,
or corrosive atmospheres. In
addition, the alarm devices,
detection systems, or other
connected trim may require a
more frequent schedule. Refer to
the system description and
applicable codes for minimum
requirements.
B. The valve must be operated at
least monthly. The valve must
open and close freely. When

open, the water flow must be
clear and clean at the proper flow
rate. When closed, a total water
shut-off must be observed. After
the test, the strainer must be
cleaned. Prior to cleaning the
strainer, the priming line valve
must be closed and the priming
line depressurized.
After the
strainer is cleaned, the priming
line valve must be reopened.
C. The valve must be inspected at
least
monthly
for
cracks,
corrosion, leakage, etc., and
cleaned, repaired, or replaced as
necessary.
D. At least annually, the valve
diaphragms and seats must be
inspected and, if necessary,
repaired or replaced.
WARNING: Close system control
valve, turn off power supply, and
depressurize
valve
before
disassembling valve. It is not
necessary to remove the valve
from the pipe line to make
inspections.
E. When lubricating valve components,
use a high-grade silicone grease
(Dow Corning 111 Compound
Lubricant or equal).
F. When reassembling, tighten parts
to torque values indicated in
ASCOs maintenance instructions
(packed with valve).
G. After maintenance is completed,
operate the valve a few times to
be sure of proper operation. A
metallic click signifies the
solenoid is operating.
H. It is recommended that the valve
be replaced at seven-year
intervals. Shorter intervals may
be required if the valve is subject
to corrosive water supplies or
atmospheres.
I. All service must be performed by
qualified
personnel.
Upon
completion of inspections or
replacement of the valve, the

entire system must be checked
for proper operation. See
appropriate system description
and testing instructions for
additional information.
10. INSTALLATION
A. Check nameplate for correct unit,
including voltage and mode of
operation. Follow all installation
and maintenance instructions
enclosed with the valve.
B.
Standard solenoids may be
mounted
in
any
position.
However, for optimum life and
performance, solenoids should
be mounted vertically and upright
with
the
coil
upright.
Explosion-proof solenoids must
have the coil upright.
C. A 50 mesh strainer is required at
the priming line connection on the
inlet side of the valve. This
strainer is included as part of the
Model E-1 Deluge Valve Trim.
Install the strainer as indicated on
Vikings trim drawing. Install the
solenoid according to markings
on the valve body. Apply
pipe-joint compound sparingly to
male pipe threads only. If applied
to valve threads, it may enter the
valve and cause operation
difficulty or leakage. Also, avoid
putting pipe compound on first
two male threads.
D. The unit must be wired in
accordance with local and
national electrical codes. For
valves
equipped
with
explosion-proof and water tight
enclosures, the electrical fittings
must be approved for use in the
hazardous location.
E. Upon completing the installation,
the entire system must be tested
for proper operation. See system
description
and
testing
instructions
for
additional
information.
Spray Nozzle 21
November 1, 2000
TECHNICAL DATA
(9 mm) for Part Nos. 05135AAJ

through 05135AJN; 3/8" (10 mm) for
Part
Nos.
05136AAJ
through
05136AJN; and 7/16" (11 mm) for Part
Nos. 05137AAJ through 05137AJN.
All bodies are permanently marked with
the model number.
All inserts are permanently marked with
the angle of discharge and model
number.
Inserts may be stamped with more than
one model, which indicates the insert
may be interchanged with either type
of nozzle body.
Inserts are available in spray angles of
30, 60, 90, 120, and 140, and
are interchangeable in a given body
model.
Nominal K-Factors: Refer to Table 1
AVAILABLE FINISHES: Brass and Nickel
MATERIALS
Body: Cast Bronze
ASTM B145 Alloy 5A
Insert: Brass CDA 360
1. PRODUCT NAME
Viking Model A-2, A-2X, B-2, C-2, and
D-2 Spray Nozzles
2. MANUFACTURER
Telephone:
(616) 945-9501
(877) 384-5464
Fax:
(616) 945-9599
Viking spray nozzles are "non-automatic" pattern, open, directional discharge spray nozzles. The spray nozzle
units feature two-piece construction
consisting of a cast bronze body and
threaded insert. The insert determines
the included angle of discharge and the
body construction provides a uniform
distribution throughout the discharge
pattern. When spraying, the nozzle discharge forms a solid, cone-shaped
spray pattern meeting the requirements
for medium- and high-velocity water
spray systems.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
See Table 1 on this page. The nozzles are approved for use in mediumand high-velocity water spray systems.
SPRAY NOZZLES
1/2" (15 mm) NPT male thread is standard.

The water inlet is at a 90 angle to the
nozzle outlet. The smallest nozzle passage is 1/4" (6 mm) for Part Nos.
05133AAJ through 05134AJN; 11/32
Nozzle
Nozzle Listings and Approvals
Part No. I.D. No.1 UL ULC FM NYCLPC
05136AAN VK774 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05136AJJ VK775 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05136AJK VK776 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05136AJL VK777 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05136AJM VK778 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05136AJN VK779 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AAJ VK780 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AAK VK781 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AAL VK782 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AAM VK783 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AAN VK784 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AJJ VK785 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AJK VK786 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AJL VK787 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AJM VK788 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
05137AJN VK789 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
---- -- -- --Nominal K-Factors
30 or 60 Insert
90 Insert
120 or 140 Insert
Nozzle Body Identification No. 1
U.S.
metric
U.S.
metric
U.S.
metric
VK740, VK741, VK742, VK743, VK744, VK745, VK746, VK747, VK748, VK749
1.2
1,7
1.2
1,7
1.4
2,0
2.0
2,9
2.0
2,9
2.2
3,2
2.8
4,0
2.8
4,0
3.3
4,8
3.4
4,9
3.8
5,5
3.9
5,6
4.7
6,8
5.0
7,2
5.2
7,5
1 Identification numbers provided in accordance with the 1999 edition of NFPA 13, Section 3-2.2.
Nozzle
Part No.
05133AAJ
05133AAK
05133AAL
05133AAM
05133AAN
05133AJJ
05133AJK
05133AJL
05133AJM
05133AJN
05134AAJ
05134AAK
05134AAL
05134AAM
05134AAN
05134AJJ
05134AJK
Nozzle
I.D. No.1
VK740
VK741
VK742
VK743
VK744
VK745
VK746
VK747
VK748
VK749
VK750
VK751
VK752
VK753
VK754
VK755
VK756
Listings and Approvals Nozzle

Nozzle
UL ULC FM NYC LPC Part No. I.D. No.1
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05134AJL VK757
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05134AJM VK758
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05134AJN VK759
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AAJ VK760
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AAK VK761
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AAL VK762
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AAM VK763
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05315AAN VK764
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AJJ VK765
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05135AJK VK766
Yes Yes Yes Yes -- 05135AJL VK767
Yes Yes Yes Yes -- 05135AJM VK768
Yes Yes Yes Yes -- 05135AJN VK769
Yes Yes Yes Yes - 05136AAJ VK770
Yes Yes Yes Yes -- 05136AAK VK771
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05136AAL VK772
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 05136AAM VK773

international distributors. See the Yellow Pages of the telephone directory
(listed under Sprinklers-AutomaticFire) or contact The Viking Corporation.
Listings and Approvals

UL ULC FM NYC LPC
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 1
Form No. F_030789
Replaces Spray Nozzle page 21-22, dated November 4, 1999

(added Spray Nozzle Identification Numbers).
Spray Nozzle 22
November 1, 2000
SPRAY NOZZLES
TECHNICAL DATA
6. GUARANTEES
Spray Nozzle Dimensions

Nozzle
Identification No.1
WARNING: Viking spray nozzles are

manufactured and tested to meet the
rigid requirements of the approving
agency. The nozzles are designed to be
installed in accordance with recognized
installation standards. Deviation from
the standards or any alteration to the
nozzle after it leaves the factory including, but not limited to: painting, plating,
coating, or modification, may render the
nozzle inoperative and will automatically
nullify the approval and any guarantee
made by The Viking Corporation.
A. Spray nozzles are to be installed in
accordance with the latest published
standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory Mutual,
Loss Prevention Council, Assemblee
Pleniere, Verband der Sachversicherer or other similar organizations, and also with the provisions of
governmental codes, ordinances,
and standards whenever applicable.
B. Spray nozzles are installed on fixed
fire protection systems, such as deluge systems, where total flooding is
required.
C. Corrosion-resistant nozzles must be installed when subject to corrosive atmospheres. When installing corrosion resistant nozzles, take care not to damage the corrosion resistant coating.
water supplies, and activity around

the device.
B. Nozzles that have been painted or mechanically damaged must be replaced
immediately. Nozzles showing signs
of corrosion shall be tested and/or replaced immediately as required.
C. T h e s p r a y n o z zle dis charge
pattern is critical for proper fire protection, therefore, nothing should be
hung from, attached to, or otherwise
obstruct the discharge pattern. All
obstructions must be immediately removed or, if necessary, additional
nozzles installed.
D. When replacing existing nozzles, the
system must be removed from service. Refer to the appropriate system
description and/or valve instructions.
Prior to removing the system from
service, notify all authorities having
jurisdiction. Consideration should be
given to employment of a fire patrol in
the affected area.
1. Remove the system from service,
drain all water, and relieve all
pressure on the piping.
2. Remove the old nozzle and install
the new unit. Care must be taken
to replace the nozzle with a new
one that is the proper model, with
the correct orifice size and insert.
3. Place the system back in service
and secure all valves.
8. MAINTENANCE
9. SPRAY NOZZLE DUST COVER
7. INSTALLATION

and devices in proper operating condition. For minimum maintenance and inspection requirements, refer to the National Fire Protection Association's
pamphlet that describes care and maintenance of sprinkler systems. In addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction
may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that
must be followed.
A. Spray nozzles must be inspected on a
regular basis for corrosion, mechanical damage, obstructions, paint, etc.
The frequency of inspections may
vary due to corrosive atmospheres,
1-7/8
7/8"
1/2"
1-5/8" 13/16" 5/16" 1-17/64" 1-11/16"
VK740--VK769
(48 mm) (22 mm) (13 mm) (41 mm) (21 mm) (8 mm) (32 mm) (43 mm)
2-1/16"
1"
5/8" 2-3/16"
1"
3/8" 1-17/32"
2"
VK770--VK789
(52 mm) (25 mm) (16 mm) (56 mm) (25 mm) (10 mm) (39 mm) (51 mm)
1 Identification numbers provided in accordance with the 1999 edition of NFPA 13, Section
3-2.2.
Table 2
B. INSTALLATION
After installing the spray nozzle unit,
press the dust cover over the end of the
nozzle insert.
The dust cover is used to prevent foreign

material from entering the open end of
the spray nozzle. It is designed to blow off
when the system piping is pressurized.
A. TECHNICAL DATA
Part Number 02409A for use with
Spray
Nozzle
Part
Nos.
05133AAJ through 05135AJN
Part Number 02410A for use with
Spray
Nozzle
Part
Nos.
05136AAJ through 05137AJN
Red Polyethylene Cap: 1" (25 mm)
deep
Rated for a continuous temperature
of 220 F (104 C).
Replaces Spray Nozzle page 21-22, dated November 4, 1999

(added Spray Nozzle Identification Numbers).
Form No. F_030789
Deluge Foam/Water Fire

Protection System
3% AFFF
Foam Concentrate
C303
Chemguard 3% AFFF is a specially formulated,
synthetic, aqueous film forming foam concentrate.
A vapor suppressing aqueous film is formed by the
foam solution draining from the expanded foam
blanket. It is intended for use at a proportioning
rate of 3% (3 parts AFFF concentrate to 97 parts
water) on Class B hydrocarbon type fuels such as
gasoline, kerosene, diesel, etc. Chemguard 3%
AFFF is not intended for use on fuels, which are
polar solvent/water miscible such as alcohols,
ketones, esters, etc.
Bladder tank balanced pressure proportioning

systems
Around the pump proportioners
Handline, air-aspirating
eductor pickup tube
nozzles
with
DISCHARGE DEVICES
Foam Chambers
Air-aspirating and non air-aspirating sprinkler

heads or spray nozzles
Standard water fog nozzles for handlines and

monitors
Air-aspirating foam nozzles
Foam makers for use with either Floating Roof

storage tanks or Dike/Bund protection systems
High back pressure foam makers for subsurface base injection system (hydrocarbon
type fuels only)
FEATURES
U.L. Listed, Foam Liquid Concentrates
U.L. recommended application rate

hydrocarbon type fuels is .10/gpm ft.
U.L. Canada Listed
Suitable for use with fresh or salt water
Excellent wetting characteristics when used in

combating Class A fuel fires
Suitable for use with both aspirating foam and

standard water fog nozzles
APPLICATIONS
Crash Fire Rescue
Suitable for use with deluge or closed head

foam water sprinkler systems
Storage Tanks(non-polar solvent type fuels only)
If inadvertently frozen, thawing will render

product completely serviceable again
Truck/Rail Loading or Unloading Facilities
Processing/Storage Facilities
Docks/Marine Tankers
Flammable Liquid Containment Areas
Mobile Equipment
on
Suitable for use with carbon steel, fiberglass,

polyethylene or stainless steel. Chemguard 3%
AFFF is not compatible with galvanized pipe or
fittings in an undiluted form.
Suitable for use with siliconized dry chemical
extinguishing agents
PROPORTIONING
Fixed or portable in-line eductors
In-line balanced pressure and pump pressure

proportioning skid
FOAMING PROPERTIES
Aspirating type discharge devices typically generate
expansion ratios between 6-10 to 1 when 3% AFFF
is mixed with water at the correct ratio. Nonaspirating type devices will typically generate
expansion ratios of between 2-4 to 1. Expansion
ratios are dictated by the type of discharge devices,
flow rate and discharge pressure.
CHEMGUARD
204 S. 6th Ave Mansfield, Tx 76063 (817) 473-9964 FAX (817) 473-0606
www.chemguard.com
DATA SHEET #D10D03015
REVISION: 09/2005
fixed
TYPICAL PROPERTIES AT 77F (25C)

Appearance.....Clear Slightly Yellow
Specific Gravity..1.020
pH.7.7
Viscosity......1.5 cps
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Chemguard 3% AFFF is biodegradable, low in
toxicity and can be treated in sewage treatment
plants. Please refer to Chemguard Technical
Bulletin regarding foam products and the
environment.
STORAGE
If kept in the original unopened and airtight
Chemguard supplied container and stored within
the temperature range of 35F - 120F (2C - 49C)
a shelf life of between 20-25 years can be
expected. When stored in other than the
manufacturers supplied container, please check
with Chemguard for storage guidelines.
ORDERING INFORMATION & WEIGHT

Part No:
C303P
C303D
C303BD
Container
5-Gallon Pail / 19 Liters
55-Gallon Drum / 208 Liters
330-Gallon Tote / 1249 Liters
Weight
45 lbs.
495 lbs.
3000 lbs.
CHEMGUARD
204 S. 6th Ave Mansfield, Tx 76063 (817) 473-9964 FAX (817) 473-0606
www.chemguard.com
REVISION: 09/2005
Vertical and Horizontal

Bladder Tanks
The Chemguard Bladder Tank is one component in
a balanced pressure foam proportioning system. It
requires no external power, other than the water
pressure to ensure correct operation. The vertical
and horizontal bladder tanks are designed and
constructed in accordance with the latest revisions
to ASME code, Section VIII for unfired pressure
vessels with a working pressure of 175 psi and
tested to 1.3 times this pressure.
All valves are labeled showing normal working

position and function.
SPECIFICATIONS
All tanks are approximately 10% oversized to

allow for any thermal expansion of the foam
concentrate.
The tank shell is constructed of steel, complying

with ASME specifications, possessing a tensile
strength of not less than 70,000 psi.
The
circumferential, as well as the longitudinal body
seam, are machine welded. The tank interior welds
and edges are ground smooth.
The tank shell water inlet and tank shell water drain
is screened to prevent bladder blow out or the
entrapment of debris between the tank shell and the
bladder.
The vertical tank assembly is supported by four legs
with access to the bladder drain/fill valve and the
tank shell drain/fill valve. Four feet are provided for
anchoring the tank. The horizontal assembly is
supported on two saddles welded to the tank and
fitted with anchoring holes.
Lifting lugs are permanently welded to the tank

with eyes of approximately 2 diameter.
Both the vertical and horizontal tanks contain a
perforated PVC center tube that assures
maximum agent discharge.
All tanks are supplied with a label, which

identifies the type of foam concentrate the system
is designed for, the percentage ratio and the tank
size.
Tanks are painted red enamel
OPTIONS
Coal tar epoxy for coating the interior shell of the
tank (for use in salt-water environment)
Sight Glass
Proportioner prepiped onto tank assembly
FEATURES
Red epoxy finish
UL Listed
Custom fabrication of specialty

dimensions and capacities
Bladder is manufactured of a vinyl based

polymer, or a polyester reinforced copolymer.
The bladder material shall have an ASTM D-412
Tensile Strength of at least 3000 psi and an
ASTM D-624 Graves Tear Strength of at least
420 lbs./in.
Actuated valves for water/concentrate

Stainless steel or brass trim
Insulation and heat tracing packages
Tanks are supplied with permanently mounted

brass trim valves with Teflon seats.
CHEMGUARD
th
204 S. 6 Ave Mansfield, Tx 76063 (817) 473-9964 FAX (817) 473-0606
www.chemguard.com
REVISION: 09/2005
materials,
Please specify the following:
Type of tank required, Horizontal or Vertical
Size of tank
Exterior finish of tank
Whether required for salt water environment
Any other options required
Example:
CV BT 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Model
CVBT
CHBT
Size
0 to 4500 gallon
Exterior Coating
00 - No exterior coating
01 - Primed finish
02 - Red enamel finish
03 - Red epoxy finish
04 - Custom finish
Interior Coating
00 - No interior coating
01 - Coal tar epoxy coating
Foam Discharge Piping
01 - Carbon steel piping/ brass valves (standard)
02 - All brass/bronze piping and valves
03 - All stainless steel piping and valves (welded/flanged)
Sight Glass
00 - No sight glass
01 - Brass/PVC for AFFF
02 - Stainless steel/PVC for AFFF
03 - Brass/PVC for AR-AFFF
04 - Stainless steel/PVC for AR-AFFF
Relief Valve
00 - No relief valve
01 - Thermal relief valve
02 - ASME approved relief valve
FOAM PROPORTIONERS
Ratio Flow Controllers
DESCRIPTION
The Chemguard ratio flow controller is a device
designed to meter the correct amount of Chemguard
foam concentrate into the water stream over a wide
range of flows and pressures with minimum pressure
loss. These devices are used in conjunction with either
a bladder tank or a foam pump proportioning system.
Chemguard ratio flow controllers are UL Listed and FM
Approved with certain Chemguard foam concentrates.
Typical applications include flammable liquid storage
tanks, loading racks, aircraft hangars, heliports or
anywhere flammable liquids are used, stored,
processed or transported.
The operating principle of the controller is based upon
the use of a modified venturi. As water passes through
the inlet nozzle, pressure is reduced in the annular
area of the nozzle. This reduction allows the metering
of foam concentrate into the water stream through a
foam concentrate-metering orifice.
SPECIFICATIONS
Each Chemguard ratio flow controller consists of a
body, inlet nozzle and metering orifice, which are all
corrosion resistant brass.
The inlet nozzle is secured by two stainless steel

set screws. This allows the nozzle to be
removed from the controller for cleaning and/or
repair.
Metering orifices are sized appropriately for
each specified type and percentage foam
concentrate. A stainless steel retaining ring
secures the metering orifice in place.
FLOW RANGE
The following table lists the nominal flow range
for each size ratio controller. The flow rates may
vary when using other foam concentrates.
Please consult the Chemguard Engineering
Department for specific applications.
Size
AR-AFFF
AFFF
gpm (lpm)
gpm (lpm)
2
130-400 (492-1514)
40-400 (151-1514)
3
245-700 (927-2649)
70-750 (264-2839)
4
400-1500 (1514-5678)
200-1600 (757-6056)
6
960-3000 (3633-11356) 300-3400 (1135-12870)
8 1510-4500 (5715-17034) 500-5500(1892-20819)
DESIGN INFORMATION
Chemguard offers the ratio flow controller body in five

models. The 2-1/2 ratio flow controller is a threaded
controller designed with a 2-1/2 female NPT threaded
inlet and 2-1/2 male NPT threaded outlet. The 3, 4,
6 and 8 ratio flow controllers are between flange units
designed to fit between two ANSI 150 lb. pipe flanges.
Only the recovery section protrudes into the system
water piping. To ensure a complete gasket seal when
installing between flanges, each face of the controller
is machined with 20 grooves per inch.
1. To ensure correct operation of a ratio flow

controller when used with a bladder tank,
the pressure of the foam concentrate at the
controller must be within 2 psi of the
incoming water pressure.
The controller body is clearly marked with a flow

direction arrow and label to identify the type of foam
concentrate and injection percentage ratio.
3. Please review the controller dimension table

for
information
on
the
minimum
recommended length of straight pipe
required upstream and downstream from the
controller.
The ratio flow controller body is cast from ASTM 85-55-5 brass. The inlet nozzle and metering orifice are
machined from SAE #72 Brass. The inlet nozzle set
screws and metering orifice retaining ring are of
stainless steel.
2. To ensure accurate proportioning over the

flow range of the controller, minimum water
inlet pressure of 30 psi must be available
during operation of the system.
th
CHEMGUARD INC. 204 S. 6 Avenue Mansfield, Texas, USA 76063 (817) 473-9964 FAX (817) 473-0606
Rev: 09/2003
Page VIII - 3
Foam Concentrate
Type
2-1/2
1% AFFF
EF10236
3% AFFF
**EF10237
3% AR-AFFF
**EF10238
6% AFFF
EF10239
3%/6% AR-AFFF @ 3%
*EF10240
3%/6% AR-AFFF @ 6%
*EF10241
2% High Expansion
EF10242
2% C2 (VEEFOAM)
EF10322
3% FP
EF10518
Ratio Flow Controller Part No.

3
4
6
*EF10243
*EF10250
EF10257
**EF10244
**EF10251
**EF10258
**EF10245
**EF10252
**EF10259
EF10246
EF10253
EF10260
*EF10247
*EF10254
*EF10261
*EF10248
*EF10255
*EF10262
EF10249
EF10256
EF10263
*EF10323
EF10324
EF10325
EF10519
EF10520
EF10521
8
EF10264
**EF10265
**EF10266
EF10267
EF10268
EF10269
EF10270
EF10326
EF10522
*UL Listed
**UL Listed and FM Approved (Note: For FM Approved unit, complete approved system purchase required,
i.e. ratio flow controller, bladder tank, foam concentrate and discharge device.)
Ratio Flow
Controller Size
(Model)
2-1/2 (CPC2.5)
3 (CPC3.0)
4 (CPC4.0)
6 (CPC6.0)
8 (CPC8.0)
A
in.
4.3
5.3
6.8
8.5
10.9
(cm.)
10.9
13.5
17.3
21.6
27.7
RATIO FLOW CONTROLLER DIMENSION TABLE

Dimensions
B
C
D
in.
(cm.)
in.
(cm.)
in.
2.40
6.10
6.9
17.5
1 NPT
2.50
6.35
6.3
16.0
1-1/4 NPT
2.75
6.99
8.0
20.3
1-1/2 NPT
3.25
8.26
12.4
31.5
2 NPT
3.55
9.02
12.4
31.5
2-1/2 NPT
in.
12
15
20
30
40
***E
(cm.)
31
39
51
77
102
F
lb.
8
12
22
38
73
(kg)
3.6
5.4
10.0
17.2
33.1
***Straight pipe length required upstream and downstream.
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page VIII - 4
Hydraulic Concentrate
Control Valve
system actuation, allow water to flow into the
actuator body and open the valve.
DESCRIPTION
The standard hydraulic actuated valve assembly
consists of a factory assembled and tested
quarter turn regular port ball valve to which a
hydraulic actuator has been attached. The ball
valve has a bronze body with 316 stainless steel
ball and stem. Valve seats are glass-reinforced
bronze. Inlet and outlet threads are female NPT.
All valves are rated 600 psi WOG. Stainless
steel flanged valves are rated in excess of 1,000
psi WOG.
The hydraulic actuator is mounted directly to the
ball valve using a mounting bracket. The
housing of the actuator has a corrosion resistant
exterior with a two-part epoxy coating providing
extra
protection
against
aggressive
environments. The interior components have
Ceramiguard, a unique finish of Di-Aluminum
Tri-Oxide; a hard ceramic like surface, protecting
all body parts against wear and corrosion. The
actuator has two way rotational travel stops,
providing a minimum of 96 and positive,
adjustable rotation stopping (10 at each end).
This combination assures positive sealing,
correct port alignment for long valve life and
maximum foam concentrate flow through the ball
valve. The hydraulic actuator is equipped with a
visual valve position indicator and has the
capability for manual override using a free
handle, secured to the valve body with a length
of chain. Water to drive the valve open is fed to
the hydraulic actuator through 1/4 inch or 3/8inch pipe or copper tubing. A connection from
the sprinkler system is usually made from a
normally unpressurized port, such as the water
motor alarm line on the alarm or deluge valve to
power the hydraulic actuator. The water inlet to
the hydraulic actuator will be provided with a Y
strainer
and
shut-off
valve
to
allow
depressurizing and resetting of the valve after
use. In the event electric operation is required or
preferred, a solenoid release is installed in the
water supply line to the actuator which will, on
APPLICATION
The Chemguard hydraulic concentrate control
valve is designed for use with either a bladder
tank or an in-line balanced pressure
proportioning system. The valve is used to
automatically open the line supplying foam
concentrate to a ratio controller. It does not
require electrical power to operate, only water
pressure from the system that has been
activated.
FEATURES
Six different size assemblies available
Minimum operating pressure 40 psi with a

recommended maximum pressure of 120
psi
Maximum overload pressure 150 psi
Durable corrosion resistant finish
Actuator has easy stop adjustments at each

end of stroke for accurate seating of the ball
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page VIII - 33
Part No.
Valve Size
2005
1" Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
2006
1 Hydraulic actuated ball valve, stainless steel flanged valve
3004
1 Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
4004
1 " Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
4005
5004
2" Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
5005
6004
2 " Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
6005
7004
3 Hydraulic actuated ball valve, bronze threaded valve
7005
OPTIONS
For solenoid direct mounted on actuator assembly add the following to part number:
S24 for 24V DC solenoid
S120 for 120V AC solenoid
For solenoid sold separately use part number:
7000 for 24V DC solenoid
7002 for 120V AC solenoid
For water regulator sold separately use part number:
7001
Note: If supply pressure to hydraulic actuated valve is above 120 psi, a water regulator is required to
reduce pressure below 120 psi.
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page VIII - 34
HYDRAULIC CONCENTRATE CONTROL VALVE

Part No.
2005
2006
3004
4004
4005
5004
5005
6004
6005
7004
7005
Valve Size
1"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
3"
3"
End Connection
Threaded, NPT
Flanged, (ANSI, 150#)
Threaded, NPT
Threaded, NPT
Threaded, NPT
Threaded, NPT
Threaded, NPT
Actuator
XL71DA
XL131DA
XL71DA
XL131DA
XL131DA
XL131DA
XL131DA
XL221DA
XL186DA
XL221DA
XL221DA
A, in. (mm)
3.37
85.60
5.00
127.00
4.00
101.60
4.37
111.00
6.50
165.10
4.68
118.87
7.00
177.80
6.50
165.10
7.50
190.50
6.75
171.45
8.00
203.20
B, in. (mm)
8.73
221.74
11.54
293.12
8.73
221.74
11.54
293.12
11.54
293.12
11.54
293.12
11.54
293.12
13.77
349.76
13.06
331.72
13.77
349.76
13.77
349.76
Note: Dimensions subject to change without notice.
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page VIII - 35
Foam Chambers
DESCRIPTION
The Chemguard Foam Chamber consists of a
foam expansion chamber and an integral foam
maker. The foam chamber is installed on a
flammable liquid storage tank just below the roof
joint. The foam solution is piped to the Chamber
from outside the hazard area. Upon entering the
chamber, the foam solution is expanded and
then discharged against a deflector inside the
storage tank. The deflector directs the foam
against the inside wall of the storage tank. This
reduces the submergence of the foam and
agitation of the fuel surface. (N.F.P.A. Type II
Application).
A stainless steel inlet orifice is supplied.

Chemguard sizes the orifice based on the
foam solution flow requirements and the
foam solution inlet pressure available at the
base of the foam chamber.
When ordering a Chemguard Foam Chamber
specify the following:
1. Minimum inlet pressure at base of foam
chamber and foam solution flow rate
required (It is recommended a minimum of
40 PSI inlet pressure be available)
FEATURES
2. Type of deflector required - solid or split
U. L. Listed
Choice of four models to cover all flow

requirements
3. Mounting pad if required
Top of chamber has handle, which simplifies

inspection access to the vapor seal.
Frangible glass vapor seal is provided. The

glass is scored on one side and designed to
break at a minimum 10 psi but not greater
than 20 psi.
Chamber manufactured in ASTM A36

carbon steel with a 304 stainless steel
screen covering the foam maker air inlets
All foam chamber inlets and outlets are flat

faced and drilled to ANSI 150 lb. Standard.
Flange gaskets are provided.
A choice of two styles of deflector are

available (split or solid).
Foam chambers are finished with a durable

red epoxy paint.
MODELS
FLOW
FC 2.5
FC 3
FC 4
FC 6
50 - 150 gpm
100 - 300 gpm
180 - 625 gpm
395 - 1050 gpm
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page IX - 1
P/N
Description
Approx. Shipping Wt. Lb. (Kg.)
FC 2.50
FC 2.51
FC 2.52
FC 2.53
FC 2.54
2 foam chamber
Solid deflector, 2
Split deflector, 2
Mounting pad, 2
Spare Vapor Seal Assembly
60
5
5
15
1
(27.2)
(2.3)
(2.3)
(6.8)
(0.5)
FC 3.00
FC 3.01
FC 3.02
FC 3.03
FC 3.04
3 foam chamber
Solid deflector, 3
Split deflector, 3
Mounting pad, 3
100
10
10
20
1
(45.4)
(4.5)
(4.5)
(9.1)
(0.5)
FC 4.00
FC 4.01
FC 4.02
FC 4.03
FC 4.04
4 foam chamber
Solid deflector, 4
Split deflector, 4
Mounting pad, 4
145
20
20
35
1
(65.8)
(9.1)
(9.1)
(15.9)
(0.5)
FC 6.00
FC 6.01
FC 6.02
FC 6.03
FC 6.04
6 foam chamber
Solid deflector, 6
Split deflector, 6
Mounting pad, 6
270
30
30
50
2
(122.5)
(13.6)
(13.6)
(22.7)
(0.9)
Note:
Each foam chamber comes complete with the following:
(1) Vapor seal
(1) Orifice - sized per customer requirements
(2) Vapor seal gaskets
(1) Inspection cover gasket
(2) Inlet gaskets
(2) Outlet gaskets
Various nuts, bolts, etc. to make complete assembly
Deflectors and mounting pads sold separately.
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page IX - 2
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page IX - 3
th
Rev: 09/2003
Page IX - 4
Fire Fighting Equipment
Brochures
Intelligent Detection and Controls

for Your Most Important Applications
ARIES Control Unit
The ARIES Fire Alarm/Suppression Control Unit
is a compact, multiplexed control unit suitable
for either stand-alone or peer-to-peer networked
applications. The ARIES advanced features
handle the demanding operational requirements
of waterless fire extinguishing systems, and provide
complex command and control capability for
multiple suppression systems at the lowest
total-installed cost.
Superior in performance than anything else in it's class,
the ARIES was designed to satisfy the market demand
for a fully-featured control unit in a more cost-effective
package. In addition, the ARIES is backward compatible
Kidde ARIES
with the installed base of SmartOne initiating and control
devices, preserving your investment in the Kidde fire
suppression system products that you have acquired over the years.
Kidde ARIES features:
5.4A Power Supply
1 Signaling Line Circuit (255 SmartOne devices)
2 Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs)
2 Releasing Circuits (2 Solenoids)
2 Combination NACs/Releasing Circuits (1 Solenoid)
4 Form-C Relays (3 Programmable/1 Trouble)
80-Character LCD Display
RS-485 Communications Circuit
USB Device Port
Optional Web Accessible Component
Five-year Warranty
First Suppression Control Unit

to Achieve
UL864, 9th Edition Listing
Applications for Kidde ARIES
Manufacturing Plants
Gas Turbines
Railway Traffic Controls
Packaging Plants
Universities
Medical Facilities
Control Rooms
Libraries
Archive Rooms
Computer Operations
Electronic Equipment
Art Galleries
Airport Signal Traffic Controls
For more information on Kidde ARIES,

call 1-800-872-6527, or visit the Kidde website at

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Tel.: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

ARIES is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
SS K-002
May 2005
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Superior by Design
The Kidde ADSTM FM-200: System
Engineered to Provide Exceptional Performance
The Kidde ADS FM-200 System is an innovative
system developed by Kidde engineers to provide
economic protection for larger enclosures requiring
longer agent flow distances, and as a drop-in
replacement for Halon.
With the patented-technology of piston flow,
the Kidde ADS FM-200 System is capable of
delivering greater mass flow rates (2.5 to 3 times
faster) than those achievable with a standard
FM-200 system. This innovation allows networking
of longer pipe runs in complex configurations
with smaller pipe sizes for protection of larger
hazard areas.
These characteristics allow the ADS System to be
a virtual drop-in replacement for existing Halon
systems. Most installations will require only new
nozzles and agent storage cylinders and can use
most of the existing pipeworkwhich provides
substantial savings when retrofitting existing systems.
Kidde ADS System Features:

Virtual drop-in replacement for existing Halon
installations. Uses existing piping, changes
limited to replacement of agent storage
cylinders and nozzles
Increased agent flow rates and distances provide

better coverage for larger hazard areas
Smaller piping diameter results in installation

cost savings
Ultimate design flexibility provides the most

economical protection for many applications
Kidde Fire SystemsWe Are the Right Protection...

Every Time, Everywhere, Every Application.
UL Listed, EPA Listed

FM Approved
and USCG Approved
Why Choose a Kidde ADS Series FM-200 System?

Rapid-Response. In secondsnot minutes, the ADS System discharges FM-200 suppressant into the hazard area
providing the fastest fire protection available. This results in less damage, fewer repair costs and reduced downtime.
Damage-Free. Removed from the hazard area by ventilation, FM-200 allows virtually immediate return to business as
usual without the interruption of a costly clean-up and the expense of damage to assets from suppressant residue.
People-Safe. The most comprehensive toxicology data of any clean agent available affirms FM-200 is non-toxic when
used in compliance with NFPA Standard 2001. FM-200 does not impair breathing or obscure vision in an emergency
situationproviding an added measure of safety for personnel.
Evironmentally-Conscientious. With a zero Ozone Depletion Potential, a low atmospheric lifetime, and its speedy
suppression performanceFM-200 not only offers low environmental impact but reduces the potentially devastating
atmospheric pollutants of an uncontrolled fire.
Laboratory-Tested. FM-200 has been tested and found to be effective on the widest possible range of Class A (wood,
paper and cloth), Class B (flammable liquids) and Class C (electrical) fuels.
Globally-Accepted. Used in more than 70 countries around the world, FM-200 meets the standards of Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual, the National Fire Protection Association (2001 Standard), the U.S. EPA SNAP program and
most global approval authorities.
Kidde-Approved. That means Kidde, a world leader in clean agent protection, stands behind FM-200 fire suppression
performance and reliability.
Typical Applications
ADS Series FM-200 System
The Kidde ADS Series FM-200 System is an advanced

system innovation developed by Kidde engineers to
provide economic protection for larger enclosures
requiring longer agent flow distances.
Replacement of Existing Halon 1301 Systems

Telecommunications Facilities
Internet Hosting Sites
Health Care Facilities
Recording Studios
Multi-Level Sites
Larger Manufacturing Complexes

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Tel.: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
Kidde and ADS are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

FM-200 is a registered trademark of Great Lakes Chemical Corp.
SS K-007
January 2007
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Proven... Effective... Reliable...

The Kidde ECS Series FM-200: System
Clean, People-Safe Fire Protection for Vital Facilities
Equipment and processes are vital to the success of all
commercial endeavors. Consider the ramifications of a fire in
these critical areas. Smoke or soot contamination, water
damage, destroyed equipment and idle process lines could
force your business offline and out of competition.
With more than 90 years in the industry, Kidde Fire Systems
is the leader in the clean agent special hazards market.
Kidde quality products and services can be found globally
with distributors located in major cities around the world
and a network, of more than 300, throughout the United
States and Canada. Kidde provides its distributors with
periodic technical training and certification on its diverse
offering of integrated detection, alarm and suppression
products to ensure the highest quality standards from system
design to routine maintenance.
Kiddes ECS Series FM-200 System detects and extinguishes a
fire in seconds, safeguarding your people, property and
bottomlineby maintaining your business continuity.
Kidde ECS System Features:

Active on Fire, Inert on PeopleKidde FM-200 systems combine
the benefits of clean agent systems and active fire protection
with people-safe, environmentally-friendly performance
The Right Clean AgentClean FM-200 discharges as a gas,

leaving no residue to damage sensitive equipment or require
costly clean-up
The Right Fire Suppression SystemDesigned to fully discharge

the clean fire suppression agent into a protected area within 10
seconds, the system catches a fire in its incipient stage before
it has an opportunity to grow or cause significant damage
The Right Fire Protection CompanyIntegrated systems

approach, Kidde offers a complete fire protection system
that is designed, manufactured, installed and serviced
by one company
Kidde Fire SystemsInnovation in Fire Protection.
UL Listed,
FM Approved, USCG Approved
and EPA Listed
Why Choose a Kidde ECS System using FM-200?

Rapid-Response. In secondsnot minutes, the ECS System discharges FM-200 suppressant into the hazard area
providing the fastest fire protection available. This results in less damage, fewer repair costs and reduced downtime.
Damage-Free. Removed from the hazard area by ventilation, FM-200 allows virtually immediate return to business as
usual without the interruption of a costly clean-up and the expense of damage to assets from suppressant residue.
People-Safe. The most comprehensive toxicology data of any clean agent available affirms FM-200 is non-toxic when
used in compliance with NFPA Standard 2001. FM-200 does not impair breathing or obscure vision in an emergency
situationproviding an added measure of safety for personnel.
Evironmentally-Conscientious. With a zero Ozone Depletion Potential, a low atmospheric lifetime, and its speedy
suppression performanceFM-200 not only offers low environmental impact but reduces the potentially devastating
atmospheric pollutants of an uncontrolled fire.
Laboratory-Tested. FM-200 has been tested and found to be effective on the widest possible range of Class A (wood,
paper and cloth), Class B (flammable liquids) and Class C (electrical) fuels.
Globally-Accepted. Used in more than 70 countries around the world, FM-200 meets the standards of Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual, the National Fire Protection Association (2001 Standard), the U.S. EPA SNAP program and
most global appoval authorities.
Kidde-Approved. That means Kidde, a world leader in clean agent protection, stands behind FM-200 fire suppression
performance and reliability.
ECS System using FM-200
Data Processing Centers

Process Control Rooms
Clean Manufacturing Facilities
Bank Vaults
Simulators
Battery Backup Rooms
Document Storage

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Tel.: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

FM-200 is a registered trademark of Great Lakes Chemical Corp.
SS K-006
July 2007
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Clean, Dependable Suppression:

The Kidde Carbon Dioxide System
Fast Fire Protection for Challenging Hazards
Flammable materials and vapors present a significant risk of
fire for many industrial processes and environments. The
Kidde Carbon Dioxide Suppression System was designed to
provide complete fire protection for a wide range of
challenging applications from printing presses and
generator enclosures to dip tanks and commercial fryers.
Carbon Dioxide delivers clean, dependable suppression in
seconds, greatly reducing the loss of assets, productivity and
revenue associated with a fire-related business interruptions.
The Kidde Carbon Dioxide System utilizes highly sophisticated
electric and/or pneumatic detection units which sense fire at
its inceptionimmediately alerting the control system. The
Control Panel initiates the release of Carbon Dioxide from
the system cylinders. The suppressant is delivered through a
fixed piping network with specially designed nozzles
providing rapid, automatic fire protection around the clock.
Kidde Carbon Dioxide System Features:

Damage-Free Fire Suppression Reduces Loss
Design Versatility with Three System Configurations:
- Total Flooding
- Local Application
- Local Hose Line
Rapid ResponseDischarges in Seconds
No Residue Clean-Up Minimizes Downtime
Surface or Deep-Seated Fires
Kidde Fire Systems

Setting the Standard in Fire Protection.
UL Listed, FM Approved
and USCG Approved
Why Choose a Kidde Carbon Dioxide System?

Superior Suppression. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) is a colorless, odorless, electrically-nonconductive gas whose density is
approximately 50% greater than air. A Kidde Carbon Dioxide System suppresses fire by providing a blanket of heavy
gas that absorbs heat from the fire and reduces the oxygen content of the atmosphere to a point where combustion
becomes impossible.
Damage-Free. A naturally-occurring atmospheric element, Carbon Dioxide dissipates into the air allowing an almost
immediate return to business as usual without the interruption of a costly clean-up and the expense of damage to
assets from suppressant residue. This results in fewer repair costs and reduced downtime.
Design Versatility. Because Carbon Dioxide is an ideal suppressant for a wide variety of industrial applications, Kidde
offers three system configurations to efficiently protect different hazard types: Total Floodingideal for enclosed
hazard areas, Local Applicationused to protect a specified hazard area in an open floor plan, or a Local Hose Line
cost effective protection for fighting smaller fires throughout a hazard.
Kidde Quality. At Kidde, we know a fire-related business interruption can keep your company from being competitive
in a global market. We are committed to researching, developing and providing the most advanced fire protection
technology and best customer service in the industry. We understand the marketplace demands an up and running
business world around the clock. We are dedicated to keeping industry in business by keeping fires out.
The Kidde Carbon Dioxide System is ideal for industrial
processes where flammable materials and vapors present
a potential hazard. For this reason, it is essential to have
sufficient fire protection on site:
Flammable Liquid Storage Areas
Marine Applications
Quench and Dip Tanks
Large Commercial Fryers
Engine and Electrical Rooms
Spray Booths and Paint Lockers
Turbine Generators
Printing Presses
Rolling Mills
Dust Collectors
Industrial Ovens
Mixing Operations
Total Flooding CO2 System
A Kidde Carbon Dioxide System designed specifically for

the hazard and operated automatically, assures immediate
detection and rapid suppression.
Local Application CO2 System

SS K-011 September 2007
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Automatic, 24-Hour Protection

for Industrial Applications
Kidde IND Dry Chemical System
Could you afford to have your production line shut down due
to a fire? Is there room in your operating budget to replace
machinery and facilities damaged by fire? If your company is
typical of todays high-productivity, cost-conscious facilities, the
answer is, No. The Kidde IND Dry Chemical System is your best
choice for protection of any industrial process or machinery
where hazardous liquids or hazardous materials are involved.
The Kidde IND System is available in two basic configurations: as
a local application system or a total flood system. A local
application system is designed to protect a specific piece of
equipment, a total flood system is recommended for protection
of enclosed rooms or spaces. In addition to the configurations,
the Kidde IND System also offers options for detection and
control to create a system that will be ideal for your application.
Your Kidde Distributor can help you design the right system,
and the right approach, for your application.
Kidde INDTM System
The Kidde IND System Features:

Economicalthe pre-engineered concept reduces
hardware and installation expenses providing
cost-effective fire protection
Design flexibilityspecify the system configuration
and components to meet the requirements of
your facility and industrial application
Regulatory compliancethe installation of a Kidde
IND System guarantees your facility is compliant
with insurance, local and federal code standards
Reliable, proven protectionresearched, designed
manufactured and installed by Kidde, the world
leader in system solutions, IND Systems can be
found globally throughout the industrial world
Portable reinforcementalways within reach, the
full line of Kidde portable fire extinguishers are
your first line of defense against fire
UL Listed, ULC Listed

and FM Approved
How the System Works

1. Fire detectors sense fire heat in work
area, plenum or ducta signal is sent
to the Control Panel.
1
4
2. The Control Panel electrically activates

the Cylinder Control Head, which
opens the cylinder valve and actuates
the system.
4
2
3
3. The Control Panel sounds an alarm,

notifies the fire authorities and shuts
down airflow in the hazard area.
4. The fire is suppressed as dry chemical
is propelled by stored pressure
through the discharge pipes and
nozzles into the protected area.
Typical IND System

Applications:
Single Nozzle Total-Flooding Coverage Module
Quench/Dip Tanks
Industrial/Automotive
Paint Spray Booths
Coating Operations
Electrical/Mechanical
Rooms
Boiler/Furnace Rooms
Switchgear Rooms
20 ft.
16 ft.
12 ft.
8 ft.
5 ft.
15 ft.
4 ft.
15 ft.
5 5/8 ft.

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Tel.: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920
15 ft.
7 ft.
15 ft.
7 ft.
15 ft.
7 ft.
Generator Rooms
Flammable Liquid
Storage Areas
Paint Mixing Areas
Spill Containment Dikes
Bulk Storage
Modular HazMat
Storage Facilities
Exhaust Ducts
Machinery Spaces
Environmental
Storage Facilities

IND is a trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
SS K-009 October 2006
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Protecting Your Assets Today;

Protecting Our Environment Tomorrow...
Kidde Engineered Fire Suppression System
Kidde Fire Systems is constantly striving to make

our product offering as comprehensive as possible
to ensure that we will have the right system available
for your application.
With that in mind, Kidde Fire Systems, together
with 3M, have designed an engineered-system
that is both environmentally responsible and ideal
for special hazards.
Novec 1230 fluid features:

Zero Ozone Depleting Potential
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of just one
Atmospheric Lifetime of just five days
Safe for Use in Occupied Spaces
Whatever the special hazard,

Kidde Fire Systems protects your assets from fire.
KiddeThe Right Answer.
Applications for Novec 1230 fluid...
Petrochemical Installations
Gas Turbines
Steam Turbine Generators
Marine Applications
Railway Traffic Controls
Power Generation
Electrical Equipment
Printing Facilities
Electric Furnaces
Food Processing Facilities
Packaging Plants
For more information on Kidde Systems, call

1-800-872-6527, or visit the Kidde website at
400 Main Street

Ashland, MA 01721
Ph: (508) 881-2000
Fax: (508) 881-8920

SS K-001
March 2005
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Kidde WHDR Wet Chemical Systems:

24 Hour Protection for Commercial Kitchens
The heart and soul of every eating establishment is the
kitchen. Equipped with ranges, broilers, fryers and a
myriad of other high-temperature cooking appliancesno
other environment demands proper fire protection more
than todays commercial kitchen.
The Kidde WHDR System is designed specifically for
commercial kitchen applications. By offering the most
flexible system configurations in the industry, Kidde
provides the most efficient protection for all cooking
applications and facilities. You can specify the type of
detection, control and cylinder size to fit your application.
Investing in a Kidde WHDR System guarantees more than
compliance with UL Standard 300, NFPA 96, NFPA 17A
and insurance codesit provides protection from the
devastating consequences of a fire.
Kidde WHDR System
The Kidde WHDR System:

Economicalcost-effective, code-compliant
fire suppression
Fast and easy maintenancesemi-annual system
inspections and routine maintenance per NFPA
regulations are performed quickly and efficiently
Reliable, proven protectionthe WHDR System
is the choice of commercial kitchens, with
thousands of installations worldwide
Global networkdesigned, manufactured and
installed by factory-trained Kidde Distributors
found around the world
UL Listed and ULC Listed
How the System Works

1. Fire is detected activating the XV TM
Control System (or the manual pull
station is actuated)... causing the
cylinder valve to open.
2. Pressure stored in the cylinder propels
the wet chemical agent through the
system piping and out of strategically
located nozzles. The Kidde WHDR
System automatically shuts down the
power source to appliances removing
the heat.
1
2
1
3
2
2
3
2
3. The wet chemical agent knocks down

flames quickly and forms a protective
layer that suppresses fire and prevents
fire re-ignition.
How the Agent Works

The Kidde WHDR system uses Kidde APC
wet chemical agent, which extinguishes
fire by:
Secondary Defense
Typical Appliances
Protected:
Saponifying the surface grease

(converting it into
combustion-resistant soap)
The cooling effects of
water vaporization
Ventilation
Fryers
Char-Broilers
Ranges
Woks
Griddles
Interrupting the chemical chain

reaction of combustion
Kidde APC wet chemical agent is proven
to be the best suppressant for quick
knock-down and prevention of
re-ignition of flame.
Class K Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers
play an important role in
early defense against fire.
Class K-type suppressant
is used to combat the
especially difficult fuel
hazard presented by
extremely hot grease in
cooking environments.

400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Tel.: 508.881.2000
Fax: 508.881.8920

WHDR and XV are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
SS K-008 September 2006
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

Estación Manual A Prueba de Explosión B-9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Estación Manual A Prueba de Explosión B-9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Company Profile

Fire Protection Systems

Company Profile for Fire

Clean Agent (FM-200) Fire Protection System

SPARE PARTS FOR PUMPS / ALL TYPE VALVES / SPARE FOR

Our Address is As Follows:

Door Holders in Trenches

FM-200 fire Protection

FTH Computer Room

Emergency Warning Siren

FM-200 Fire Protection

Water Sprinkler System

Fire Alarm System / Fire

Deluge Foam Spray System

Fire Alarm System & Gas

Fire Alarm System

Fire Alarm System

Gas Detection System

Gas Detection System

Fire Alarm System & Fire

Fire Alarm System

Fire Alarm System- Govt

CO2 Fire Protection System

Fire Extinguishing System

Deluge Water Spray System

Fire Alarm SystemFire Protection System

Fire Fighting Pump Set UL

Water Sprinkler System,

Conduiting work for Royal

Fire Hose Cabinets & Fire

FM-200 Fire Protection

Fire Alarm System

Fire Alarm System

Fire Alarm System & Siren

FM-200 Fire Protection

Fire Alarm System Black

FM-200 Fire Protection

Deluge Water Spray System

Fire Protection System

Zamil Steel Dammam KSA

Water Sprinkler System

Utility Control Room

Fire Alarm Building # 23

Modification of Fire Alarm

North Control Room

South Control Room

Wet Chemical Kitchen Fire

Wet Chemical Kitchen Fire

Eastern Water Tower Al

Saudi Aramco Khafji

Communication Room Sea

Generator Room & Boiler

Faras Power Plant

ABHA East Sub Stn

CATV & RADIO Room R.C.

Amal field Libya

Saudi Aramco Hawtah

Saudi Kayan Jubail

Video Library Saudi

Muhayel Sub Stn

Namerah Sub Stn

Majardah Sub Stn

Fire Alarm System